JP2020078658A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine for allowing a player to have expectations and enhancing interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes first variable ball entry means and second variable ball entry means. The game machine includes: first distribution means for at least distributing game balls to the first variable ball entry means, and a downstream side of the first variable ball entry means; and second distribution means for at least distributing the game balls distributed to the downstream side of the first variable ball entry means by the first distribution means to the second variable ball entry means, and a downstream side of the second variable ball entry means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, a special symbol hit lottery is conducted, and if the result of the lottery is a big hit, the game is played. There is one in which a game is executed in which a game ball is inserted into a special winning opening provided on the board surface. In such a structure, a game machine has been proposed in which two big winning holes are provided on the game board surface.

JP, 2003-265765, A

  However, with the above-mentioned gaming machines, there has been a demand for further improvement in the enjoyment of the game.

  It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved in the above gaming machine.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is a game ball based on a condition determining means for determining whether a specific condition is satisfied, and that the specific condition is determined by the condition determining means. First variable ball entering means for changing from a closed state where it is difficult to enter a ball to an open state where a game ball can enter, and a second variable ball entering means arranged downstream of the first variable ball entering means, Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first variable ball entrance means or the second variable ball entrance means, it is determined whether or not the privilege granting means for granting an advantageous privilege to the player and the establishment of the specific condition. Based on this, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game in which the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means are varied in a predetermined order until the predetermined condition is satisfied in the open state, respectively. And a first variable ball entering means and a first distributing means for distributing at least a game ball to the downstream side of the first variable ball entering means, and a downstream side of the first variable ball entering means by the first distributing means. The game balls are distributed to at least the second variable ball entering means and a second distributing means for distributing at least the downstream side of the second variable ball entering means.

  A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, wherein the first sorting means and the second sorting means are in a first direction and a second direction opposite to the first direction. It has at least a rotatable rotation part and a regulation means for regulating the rotation range of the rotation part at a predetermined angle.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the first sorting means and the second sorting means alternate in the first direction and the second direction by a flowing down game ball. It is configured to be rotated.

  The gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein when the first variable ball entering means is in a closed state, the gaming ball is guided to the second variable ball entering means. If the second variable ball entering means is in a closed state when the game ball is guided to the second variable ball entering means by the guiding means and the guiding means, the guided game ball is secondly distributed. It has a guide way for guiding to a means.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the condition determining means for determining the satisfaction of the specific condition, and the closing of the game ball that makes it difficult to enter the game ball based on the determination of the satisfaction of the specific condition by the condition determining means. First variable ball entering means that is changed from the state to an open state in which a game ball can enter, second variable ball entering means arranged on the downstream side of the first variable ball entering means, and the first variable ball entering Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball means or the second variable ball entering means, the privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player, and the establishment of the specific condition are determined. A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game in which the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means are varied in a predetermined order until the predetermined condition is satisfied in the open state, and the first variable ball entering means. A variable distribution ball means and a first distribution means for distributing at least game balls to the downstream side of the first variable ball distribution means, and a game distributed to the downstream side of the first variable ball distribution means by the first distribution means. It has at least the second variable ball entering means and a second distributing means for at least distributing the ball to the downstream side of the second variable ball entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of claim 1, the following effect is achieved. That is, the privilege game executing means is capable of executing a third privilege game different from the first privilege game and the second privilege game, and the state setting means causes the first advantageous state and the second advantage game to be executed. It is possible to set a specific state that is more disadvantageous to the player than any of the advantageous states, and when the third privilege game is executed in the state where the second advantageous state is set, the 3 The specific state is set after the execution of the privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine described in claim 3, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine recited in claim 2, the following effect is exhibited. That is, the first distribution means and the second distribution means are configured to be alternately rotated in the first direction and the second direction by the flowing down game ball. Therefore, there is an effect that a more appropriate distribution operation can be executed.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of claim 1 or 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first variable ball entering means is in the closed state, the guiding means for guiding the game ball to the second variable ball entering means, and the game ball by the guiding means are the second variable ball entering means. When the second variable ball entering means is in a closed state when being guided to, it has a guiding path for guiding the guided game ball to the second distributing means. Characterize. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view of a variable winning device. (A) is sectional drawing of the variable winning a prize device of La-La section, (b) is a Lb-Lb sectional view, (c) is a top view of a variable winning device. (A)-(b) is a rear view of some variable winning a prize devices. (A) is a flow chart showing the transition of the gaming state in the first embodiment, (b) is a jackpot type selected in each gaming state in the first embodiment, and when the jackpot type is selected It is a schematic diagram showing a game state that shifts to. (A) is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display device in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the display mode displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example. (A)-(b) is an example of the display mode in the probability variation game state displayed with the 3rd symbol display device in 1st Embodiment. (A)-(b) is an example of the display mode in the probability variation game state displayed with the 3rd symbol display device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a figure showing a frame button in a 1st embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing a selection switch in a 1st embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counters in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the content of ROM of the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the 1st random number table in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed the small hit random number table in 1st Embodiment typically, FIG. 7C is a diagram schematically showing a second random number table in the first embodiment. (A)-(c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller 110 in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table set in a ROM of main controller 110 in the first embodiment. (A)-(b) is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main controller 110 in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the universal figure fluctuation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main controller 110 in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of RAM of the main control apparatus 110 in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of RAM223 typically. It is a flow chart which shows the timer interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit judging processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 deviation|variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change pattern selection processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation stop processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 disengagement stop process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol big hit judging processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 deviation change process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol change pattern selection processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 disengagement stop process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st pre-reading processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd pre-reading processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a through gate passage processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a startup process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the big hit operation setting processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing an ending process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the information processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the abnormal processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device in 1st execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device in 1st execution form. 7 is a flowchart showing a stop type command reception process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the winning command processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control device in 1st execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the notification lottery process performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing a state command reception process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. (A)-(b) is an example of the display mode in the normal play state or the latent probability change play state displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (A)-(b) is an example of the display mode in a latent probability change play state or a probability change play state displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. It is the enlarged view which expanded a part of front surface of the game board of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow diagram showing a game state transition in the second embodiment. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the big hit game in the second embodiment. (A)-(b) is an example of the display mode displayed with the 3rd symbol display device in 2nd Embodiment. It is an example of the display mode displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in a 2nd embodiment. (A)-(b) is an example of the display mode displayed with the 3rd symbol display device in 2nd Embodiment. It is an example of the display mode displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in a 2nd embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the content of ROM of the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment, (b) showed the content of the RAM of the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment typically. It is a figure. (A) is the figure which showed typically the 1st random number table in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed the small hit random number table in 2nd Embodiment typically, FIG. 7C is a diagram schematically showing a second random number table in the second embodiment. (A)-(b) is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the jackpot classification selection table set in ROM of the main controller 110 in 2nd Embodiment. (A)-(b) is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the jackpot classification selection table set in ROM of the main controller 110 in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main controller 110 in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table set in a ROM of main controller 110 in the second embodiment. (A)-(b) is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main controller 110 in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the universal figure fluctuation pattern table set to ROM of the main controller 110 in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a small hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the special electric auditors product operation table set to ROM. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of RAM typically. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the transfer of the game state in the 1st modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the transfer of the game state in the 2nd modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is an enlarged view which expanded a part of game board of the pachinko machine in the 3rd modification of a 2nd embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 58. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape substantially the same as the outer frame 11 with respect to the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinge 18 serves as an opening/closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and starting ports 630, 631, 640, 67 and the like is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by the ball flowing down on the front surface of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1 ), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided serves as an opening/closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the rear surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with its front surface protruding and the upper surface opened, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to descend to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 (FIG. 11A) and a selection switch 600 (see FIG. 11B) are provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the effect, background, or the like displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) described later.

  As shown in FIG. 11B, the selection switch 600 is a decision switch (a) for deciding selection of effects, etc., a left switch 600b for instructing left selection, and an up selection. The upper switch 600c and the right switch 600d for instructing the rightward selection include a lower switch 600e for instructing the downward selection.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, electric decoration portions 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and when the jackpot or the reach production is performed, the illumination parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach before the jackpot is in progress. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is provided and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying during payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs is provided.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the illumination section 32 on the right side by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more glitter.

  A ball rental operating unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state where banknotes, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount as a number as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not necessary in a so-called cash machine, which is a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to share a pachinko machine using a card unit with a cash machine.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central portion of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is provided, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a for pressing, a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 by the change of the electric resistance. (Not shown) and are built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes as a result, and thus the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described configuration is used, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the main control device 110 and other control devices detect a game ball launched by the ball launch unit 112a, and a solenoid of the ball launch unit 112a. May be configured to detect that a game ball has been launched. Further, the number of detected game balls may be counted and stored until a process such as RAM clear is executed.

  At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball-pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, and The sphere spontaneously falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "dollar box") placed below the lower plate 50 for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50. The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails for guiding balls, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a first starting opening 63a, and a first starting opening 63a. The 2 starting port 63b, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The first start opening 630, the right first start opening 631, the second start opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the game board. It is fixed from the front side of 13 with wood screws or the like. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and inside the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area formed by partitioning the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 on the front surface of the game board 13 (where a starting opening or the like is provided, and a shot ball is It is the area that flows down. In addition, the game area includes all areas where the game balls that have passed through the return ball prevention member 68 flow down before they pass through the outlet 66 and the winning port.

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (the upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a momentum higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the center. In addition, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 formed by forming an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  On the right side of the game board 13, a first normal symbol starting port 67a and a second normal symbol starting port 67b are provided below the first normal symbol starting port 67b. The first normal symbol starting port 67a and the second normal symbol starting port 67b are configured in the same shape, and are configured with a gate-type starting port having a sensor capable of detecting passage of a game ball. There is. When the game ball passes through the first normal symbol starting opening 67a or the second normal symbol starting opening 67b, the lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the lottery performed for the game sphere passing to the first normal symbol starting opening 67a or the second normal symbol starting opening 67b, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is hit.

  When the normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn, the variable symbol of the normal symbol is started to be displayed on the second symbol display device 83 provided in the variable display device unit 80, which will be described later, and "○" and "x" are displayed. After the symbols are alternately lighted for a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds), a normal symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol "○" or "x") indicating the lottery result is stopped (lighted). When the ball passes through the first normal symbol starting port 67 or the second normal symbol starting port 67b while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is the first normal symbol starting port 67a. It is reserved up to a maximum of four times in total with the second ordinary symbol starting port 67b. The number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37. When the variable display ends in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal symbol starting port 67 (the first normal symbol starting port 67b or the second normal symbol starting port 67b) remains, the next A lottery for ordinary symbols is performed, and variable display according to the lottery is started.

  When it is determined that the winning symbol is a normal symbol, the symbol “◯”, which is a symbol indicating that the lottery of the ordinary symbol was a winning symbol, is lit and displayed on the second symbol display device 83. When the winning symbol is displayed, the first ordinary electric accessory 632 operates. The first ordinary electric accessory 632 has a left guiding member 632a and a right guiding member 632b, and a space is left between the left guiding member 632a and the right guiding member 632b so that one game ball can pass therethrough. Normally, it is maintained in an upright position. A predetermined angle (in the present embodiment, the left guiding member 632a is 40 degrees counterclockwise and the right guiding member 632b is 40 degrees clockwise) from the state where the left guiding member 632a and the right guiding member 632b are erected substantially vertically. It moves (that is, is changed to an open state), and the game ball enters the second starting port 640 by guiding the game ball to the second starting port 640 by the left guiding member 632a and the right guiding member. It becomes an easy state (special state). On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is off, the symbol "x", which is a symbol indicating that the lottery for the normal symbol is out, is lit and displayed on the second symbol display device 83. At this time, the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is not operated, and the next variation of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed.

  A first symbol display provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side in the front view of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 2) A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 is a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a, the first starting opening 630, the right starting opening 631, the second starting opening 640, the first normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67a, the second normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67b ball winning Among them, the number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls) for which variable display has not been executed, is indicated by a lighting state. In addition, the number of rounds in a big hit and an error display are also indicated by a corresponding lighting state.

  The 7-segment display 37b is composed of two 7-segment LEDs on the left and right. The 7-segment LED on the left side has a variable display of the first special symbol indicating the result of the determination (lottery) of the lottery (hereinafter, referred to as the first lottery game) based on the winning of the first start opening 630 or the right start opening 631 (dynamic). Is displayed. Specifically, the variable display (in the present embodiment, 7 segments is displayed until the variable time (dynamic display time) determined based on the winning of the first start opening 630 or the right first start opening 631 has elapsed. After the central segment blinks), it is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the determination result. If the determination result is out, a symbol "-" indicating that the one segment in the center is illuminated is displayed. On the other hand, when the determination result is a hit, a symbol different from the symbol indicating the deviation such as the symbols “3” and “7” corresponding to the hit is displayed.

  The 7-segment LED on the right side has a second special symbol (dynamic display) indicating the result of determination (lottery) of the lottery (second lottery game) based on winning in the second starting opening 640. Specifically, it is displayed until the variable time determined based on the winning of the second start opening 640 elapses, and is configured similarly to the first lottery game. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the respective LEDs emit different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and the combination of the emitted colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

  In addition, the first special symbol indicating the determination (lottery) result of the first lottery game and the second special symbol indicating the determination (lottery) result of the second lottery game are the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) described later. See also). As a result, since the third symbol display device 81 can perform various variable displays as compared with the 7-segment display device 37b, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Further, the variation pattern (variation mode or dynamic display mode) in the pachinko machine 10, which will be described later, has a variation time set for each variation mode and corresponds to a dynamic display mode regarding time information. Furthermore, the variation pattern can be divided into a variation pattern with reach and a variation pattern with non-reach, a long-term variation pattern having a relatively long variation time and a short-term variation pattern having a relatively short variation time. In this way, even when sorting is performed based on a fixed time standard (here, reach, non-reach, or a reference time (for example, whether it is longer than 10 seconds or not)), dynamic information regarding time information is obtained. It corresponds to the display mode.

  Further, as will be described later, the time information until the fluctuation start time also corresponds to the time when the accurate fluctuation starts, and the time information of the rough fluctuation pattern described above (for example, whether it is a long time fluctuation pattern or not) Information about time information (for example, the number of long-time fluctuation patterns performed before the start of fluctuation) determined based on whether or not) is also applicable.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in the lottery (first lottery game, second lottery game) performed for winning the first start opening 630, the right first start opening 631, and the second start opening 640, it is a big hit. Whether or not the jackpot is determined (big hit lottery) and the jackpot type is also determined. As the jackpot type determined here, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), jackpot A (15R jackpot probability variation jackpot), jackpot B (15R regular jackpot), jackpot E (15R regular jackpot (electric support Yes)) is set (see FIGS. 16A to 16C). Here, the presence of the electric jackpot for the big hit E means that the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is easily set to the special state (open state). In jackpot E, after 15 rounds of jackpot games, the electric support state is set until the total number of times of the first lottery game and the second lottery game reaches 100 times.

  As the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), two types of jackpot C (15R probability variation jackpot (with electric support)) and jackpot D (15R probability variation jackpot (without power support)) are set (FIG. 16). (See (a) to (c)).

  Here, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the variable winning devices 65 are arranged as the winning devices that are operated in the open state during the big hit game. The variable winning device 65 is operated such that the jackpots A to E are opened until the first specific winning opening 65a is played 15 times for a predetermined period or a predetermined number (10 balls in this embodiment) of game balls. ..

  The configuration of the variable winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 6. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 4, the variable winning a prize device 65 is combined with the opening forming member 65b projectingly arranged on the front side of the game board 13 and the back side of the opening forming member 65b to form the variable winning device 65. A base member 65c for screwing to the game board 13 and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 65c to turn on the LEDs from the back side of the base member 65c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 are provided. It has an LED board 65d arranged, a back cover body 65e for sandwiching the LED board 65d with a base member 65c, and an opening/closing door 65f1 for opening and closing a specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65d. The opening/closing unit 65f, the flow path cover body 65g that is combined with the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, and protrudes into the flow path formed by the back cover body 65e and the flow path cover body 65g to play the game. A switching member 65h for switching the flow path of the sphere, a link member 65i engaged with the switching member 65h, a back cover body 65j arranged on the back side of the flow path cover body 65g, and a back surface of the back cover body 65j. And a fixing cover body 65m for fixing the side passage solenoid 65k from the rear side to fix the rear side cover body 65j with a screw. There is.

  FIG. 5 is a sectional view of the variable winning device 65. 5C is a top view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 5B is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 taken along the line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 5B, the variable winning device 65 is provided with a specific winning opening 65a which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening 65a is formed with a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and the game ball that has passed through the opening is inclined downward to the left so as to be guided leftward in FIG. 5B. The bottom surface is formed. At the left end portion of the bottom surface, a detection opening 65a1 constituted by a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting the winning of a game ball is arranged. The game sphere that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to the distribution channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG. 6B.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 5B, the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is an open state in which a game ball can be entered by the opening/closing door 65f1 configured by a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 and a non-entering state. It is changed to a closed state where it is possible (difficult to enter). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening/closing door 65f1, and the game ball can be rolled on the upper part of the opening/closing door. Further, in the open state, the opening/closing door 65f1 is configured to be retracted from the inside of the specific winning port 65a by being retracted inside the base member 65c (inside the game board 13).

  With this configuration, when the opening of the variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the variable winning device 65 and is guided to the right first starting opening 631 side. Is configured. Therefore, even during the time saving game (including the probability variation game), it is possible to enter the game ball into the second starting opening 640 while keeping the right hit state, and immediately after the jackpot game, the left hit method is used. The time and effort to change can be reduced. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.

  Further, in the open state, the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the variable winning device 65, so that more game balls can be efficiently won in the specific winning port 65a. Therefore, the time required for the big hit game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 5A is a La-La sectional view shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5A, the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is inclined toward the distribution flow path side of the back cover body 65e.

  With reference to FIG. 6, a configuration in which the game balls guided to the distribution flow paths of the back cover body 65e are distributed to a normal discharge flow path 65e1 and a special discharge flow path 65e2 described later will be described.

  FIG. 6A is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that the game balls are distributed to the special discharge port 65e2. As shown in FIG. 6A, the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted and a guide piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 65g. Is rotatably supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h is rotated from the back side of the flow path cover body 65g into the distribution flow path. It is configured so that it can be arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 6(a), the game ball guided from the detection port 65a1 into the distribution channel is guided to the upper surface of the guiding piece 65h2 arranged diagonally leftward and to the special discharge port 65e2. . The game ball that has passed through the special discharge port 65e2 is detected by the probability change switch 65e3 that is provided with the special discharge port 65e2 and that is composed of a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball, and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. .

  Here, as will be described in detail later, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the gaming ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 described above during the jackpot game, so that the gaming state after the jackpot game is a high probability gaming state (probability variation). The game state) is set. That is, the probability variation switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for giving a probability variation gaming state. In addition, the switching member 65h is configured to sort the gaming state after the big hit into the low-probability gaming state (normal gaming state ST1) or the probability variation gaming state.

  In this way, since the gaming state set after the jackpot game can be changed by the flow route of the game balls that have won the first specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot game, it is possible to improve the interest of the player even during the jackpot game. You can The time required to pass from the opening of the first variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge port 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is configured to be at least 1 second. .. Regarding the operation of the switching member 65h, the operation timing and the operation time are set depending on the type of jackpot. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A, the jackpot C and the jackpot D are won, the switching member 65h is operated for 5 seconds in synchronization with the opening timing of the first variable winning device 65 at the start of the 14th round. Has been done. In addition, when the big hit B and the big hit E are won, the switching member 65h is configured to be actuated for 0.5 seconds in synchronization with the opening timing of the first variable winning device 65 at the start of the 14th round.

  Therefore, in the jackpot A, the game ball that has won the first variable winning device 65 is configured to be able to pass the probability variation switch 65e3, but in the jackpot B, it is impossible to pass the probability variation switch 65e3. Has been done. Therefore, it is possible to control the probability variation imparting ratio depending on the type of jackpot, and it is possible to prevent excessive disadvantage from occurring.

  A case where the game ball is guided to the normal outlet 65e2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6B is a diagram showing a state in which the flow path solenoid 65k is inactive and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h closes the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge port 65e2.

  The game ball guided from the detection port 65a1 to the distribution channel is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and is normally guided to the discharge port 65e1. A discharge confirmation switch 65e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting passage of a game ball is provided at the end of the normal discharge port 65e1. As a result, it is possible to determine whether all the game balls entered in the first variable winning device 65 have been discharged by the total of the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 and the probability variation switch 65e3. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem that the winning ball is won in the probability variation switch 65e3 even if the jackpot B is won in the 14th round in a state where the game balls won before the 14th round are not discharged.

  In this way, the game ball that has won the first specific winning port 65a in the first variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on this, a prize ball as a privilege for the player (in this embodiment, one ball winning) You can pay out 15 prize balls for each. Further, by using the game ball after being detected, it is possible to sort whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 passes, so that it is possible to execute a lottery as to whether or not the probability variation game state is given. .. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning opening for providing the probability variation gaming state separately from the first variable winning a prize device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 7, various game states in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 7A is a diagram showing a flow in which various game states are set. FIG. 7(b) is a diagram showing a jackpot type generated for each special symbol in various game states, and a game state shifted after the jackpot.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7A, the following four game states are set as the game states. The first is a normal gaming state ST1 in which the jackpot probability of a special symbol is a low probability (normal) and there is no electric support (the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is unlikely to be in a special state (open state)). The second is that the jackpot probability of the special symbol is a low probability (normal) as in the normal gaming state ST1, but there is an electric power support (the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is likely to be in a special state (open state)). Time saving game state ST1h. Third, the probability of jackpot of the special symbol is high probability, there is no electric support (it is difficult for the first ordinary electric accessory 632 to be in a special state (open state)), and the probability variation electric support non-playing state (so-called, Latent probability variation game state) ST2. The fourth is a high probability that the jackpot of the special symbol is high, and yet with electric power support (the first ordinary electric auditor product 632 is likely to be in a special state (open state)) Certain probability variation power support support gaming state (so-called probability variation game state) ST3.

  In this embodiment, the variation of the first special symbol and the variation of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time. However, in each gaming state, the variation of either one of the special symbols is substantially performed (also referred to as a substantial variation target). Specifically, compared to the variation time of the special symbol that is the subject of the actual variation, the variation time of the special symbol that is not the subject of the actual variation is configured to be longer. In addition, the game ball is difficult to enter the starting opening for the special symbol lottery that is not subject to substantial variation, or the gaming ball is entering the starting aperture for performing the special symbol lottery that is subject to actual variation. It is configured so that the game state is easy to play. As a result, the jackpot of the special symbol that is not the subject of substantial change is not substantially generated (it is difficult to occur), and the jackpot of the special symbol that is the subject of substantial change is substantially generated (can be easily generated).

  In addition, the method of subjecting one of the special symbols to the substantial variation is not limited to the method described above. For example, a normal electric auditors product is provided in each of the starting opening which becomes the lottery trigger of the first special symbol and the starting opening which becomes the lottery trigger of the second special symbol. Then, in each gaming state, it is conceivable that only the normal electric accessory of the starting opening corresponding to the special symbol to be substantially changed is movable (or easy). As a result, the game ball enters the starting opening corresponding to the special symbol that is the actual variation target, and the game ball does not enter the starting opening corresponding to the special symbol that is not the actual variation target (it is difficult to enter) You can In this case, the lottery for moving the ordinary electric accessory provided at each starting port may be separately performed. For example, a lottery for moving one of the normal electric symbols is performed based on the ball entering (passing) the first ordinary symbol starting port (called a lottery of the first ordinary symbol), and the other ordinary electric symbols are movable. The lottery for doing may be performed by entering (passing) into the second normal symbol starting opening (referred to as a lottery of the second normal symbol). Furthermore, the lottery for the first ordinary symbol and the lottery for the second ordinary symbol may be executed at the same time, and like the lottery for the special symbol in the present embodiment, when the lottery for one ordinary symbol is a big hit. The lottery for the other ordinary symbol may be missed. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the game state and improve the interest of the player.

  In the present embodiment, the big hit based on the first special symbol and the big hit based on the second special symbol have different probabilities that a big hit that allows the game ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 is selected. That is, the probability of being able to shift (loop) to the high-probability game state (latent probability variation game state ST2 or probability variation game state ST3) is different. Although it will be specifically described later with reference to FIG. 16, the jackpot based on the first special symbol has a low probability of being able to move (loop) to a high-probability game state (latent probability variation game state ST2 or probability variation game state ST3) ( 34%), that is, there is a high probability (66%) of shifting (falling) to a low probability state (normal game state ST1 or time saving game state ST1h). On the other hand, the big hit based on the second special symbol has a high probability (100%) of being able to shift (loop) to a high-probability gaming state (hidden probability variation gaming state ST2 or probability variation gaming state ST3). In the following, in explaining the flow of setting various game states, a jackpot that allows transition to a high probability game state (a game ball can pass through the probability variation switch 65e3) is selected (generated) for convenience. In the case, it is assumed that the high probability game state is entered (the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3).

  In each gaming state, it is possible to adjust (set) whether it is easy to shift to a high-probability gaming state (loop) or to shift to a low-probability state (fall) by setting a special symbol that is a subject of substantial variation. As a result, in each gaming state, in addition to two types (high probability and low probability) of the probability that the lottery result will be a big hit, two types (probability) of transition (loop) to the high probability gaming state after the big hit ( It is possible to set a state with a high probability of transition to a high-probability game state and a low probability. Therefore, variations in the game state can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  Specifically, in the probability variation game state ST3, which is a high-probability game state, the actual variation target is set in the special figure 1 so that the game state can easily transition (fall) to the low-probability state, and is also the high-probability game state. By setting the actual variation target in the special figure 2 in the latent probability variation game state ST2, it becomes possible to make the game state easy to shift (loop) to the high probability game state. In other words, even if the same high-probability game state (or low-probability state), by changing the special symbol that is the subject of substantial variation, it is possible to change the distribution of the game state to be transferred after the jackpot game is over, It is possible to increase the variations in which the game state shifts, and improve the interest of the player.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description will be continued. First, in the state where the pachinko machine 10 is initialized (the state where the RAM clear switch is pressed and the power is turned on), the normal game state ST1 is set. In the normal gaming state ST1, the first special symbol is substantially subject to change. In other words, it is a gaming state in which the probability (probability change rate) of a jackpot that shifts to the high-probability gaming state is low (34%). Specifically, a variation time of 8000 ms (8 seconds) to 30,000 ms (30 seconds) is selected as the variation time of the first special symbol (special figure 1) (see FIG. 17). And, in the jackpot of the first special symbol, as a jackpot type, jackpot A (15R probability variation jackpot) that shifts to the high probability game state is selected with a probability of 34%, and jackpot B (15R regular jackpot) that remains in the low probability state Is selected with a probability of 66% (see FIG. 7B and FIG. 16 ).

  On the other hand, in the normal gaming state ST1, the variation time of the second special symbol (special feature 2) that is not a substantial variation target is set to be long. Specifically, if the result of the win/no determination (lottery) is out of alignment, the variation time of Toku-zu 2 is 64800000 ms (18 hours) (see FIG. 17). Therefore, while the deviation change of the second special symbol is performed once, it is possible to execute the lottery 2160 to 8200 times in the first special symbol. The jackpot probability in the normal game state ST1 (low probability state) is 1/400, so if it is a normal game, the jackpot with the first special symbol will end before the second special symbol, which is off, changes once. Is configured to occur. In addition, since the business hours of the amusement store are mainly about 15 hours from 9 am to 11 pm, it is set to be longer than that. Therefore, in the normal game state ST1, even if the second lottery game is executed, the deviation variation of the special figure 2 does not end within the business hours. With such a configuration, in the normal gaming state ST1, a big hit of the first special symbol (special figure 1) which is a substantial variation target is generated (easy to perform).

  If the second lottery game is executed and the result of the win/fail judgment does not come off, and if there is a win, 600,000 ms (10 minutes) is selected as the variation time of Toku-zu 2 (see FIG. 17). Although this will be specifically described later, when a variation based on the jackpot is started in one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation based on the other special symbol is removed. This is because it is controlled so that When 64800000 ms (18 hours) is selected as the variation time when the hit determination result of Toku-zu 2 is a hit, the variation based on the jackpot of Toku-zu 2 does not end within business hours. Therefore, there arises a problem that all the fluctuations (first lottery game) based on Toku-zu 1 executed during business hours are controlled so as to be missed (not to be a big hit). Therefore, the fluctuation based on the jackpot in Special Figure 2 is set to a time (10 minutes) that can be completed within business hours. Thereby, the above-mentioned problem can be solved.

  However, when the variation based on the jackpot of the special figure 2 is short (for example, 500 ms (0.5 seconds)), the player can determine the result of the decision of the special figure 2 in a short time. Actions may be performed. For example, a game ball is thrown into the second starting opening 640, and it is determined that the winning/failing judgment result of Toku-zu 2 based on the entering is wrong (the fluctuation display of Toku-zu 2 is executed for more than 0.5 seconds. In such a case, there is a possibility that a fraudulent act of resetting (initializing) the pachinko machine 10 (so-called reset goto) is executed. As described above, when the RAM clear switch of the pachinko machine 10 is pressed and the power is turned on (reset), the normal gaming state ST1 is set, and the fluctuation of each special symbol is also initialized (that is, fluctuation stop). Be done). Therefore, by repeating the above-mentioned fraudulent act (reset goto), it is possible to generate a big hit based on Toku-zu 2 which is not a target of actual fluctuation. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the variation based on the jackpot in the special figure 2 is set to 10 minutes, so that the player cannot determine the result of the determination (lottery) of the special figure 2 in a short time. As a result, since a period of at least 10 minutes is required to execute the fraudulent act (reset goto), it is possible to reduce the frequency of execution of the fraudulent act (reset goto). As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally generate the big hit of the special figure 2 by the above-mentioned wrongdoing (reset goto).

  In addition, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is not limited to the above-mentioned thing, and may be changed suitably. For example, in a gaming machine that cannot execute the second lottery game unless the player intentionally shoots a game ball (for example, right-handed game), performs a right-handed game in the normal game state ST1 (performs a second lottery game) As a penalty, the variation time based on the jackpot of special figure 2 may be set to a time longer than 600,000 ms (10 minutes) (for example, 1 hour). Further, in this case, it may be notified that the cheating (the right-handed game in the normal gaming state ST1) is being executed (or has been executed).

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the second starting port 640 is provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80. Therefore, in order to enter the game ball into the second starting opening 640 (to perform the second lottery game), it is necessary to perform a game (right-handed game) of passing the right side of the variable display unit 80. In the normal gaming state ST1, the electric accessory 632 provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 is configured to be difficult to be set to the special state (open state) (that is, it is difficult to enter the right first starting opening 631). Therefore, when the right-handed game is played in the normal game state ST1, it is difficult to execute the first lottery game according to Toku-zu 1 which is the subject of substantial change, and the second lottery game according to Toku-zu 2 which is not subject to the actual change is likely to be performed. become. That is, the right-handed game in the normal game state ST1 is set to be more disadvantageous to the player than playing the game (left-handed game) by passing the game ball through the left side of the variable display unit 80. Therefore, in the normal game state ST1, the player plays the left-handed game. When the left-handed game is played in the normal game state ST1, the game ball does not enter the second starting port 640, but the game ball enters the first starting port 630. As a result, the big hit of the second special symbol does not occur (difficult to do), and the big hit of the first special symbol occurs (easy to do) in a gaming state (that is, a gaming state in which it is difficult to shift to a high-probability gaming state) You can

  In the normal game state ST1, a big hit B occurs, and after the big hit B big hit game is executed, the normal game state ST1 is set (shifted to). On the other hand, after the big hit A occurs and the big hit game is executed, the latent probability variation game state ST2 is set (shifted to) (see FIG. 7(b)). However, after the big hit game based on the big hit A is executed, if the game ball does not pass the probability change switch 65e3, the normal game state ST1 is set (shifted to).

  The latent probability variation gaming state ST2 is a gaming state in which the jackpot probability is 10 times higher than the normal gaming state ST1 (in a high-probability gaming state), and the second special symbol is a gaming state in which it is substantially subject to change. That is, this is a gaming state in which the probability (probability change rate) of a jackpot that can continue the high-probability gaming state is high. Specifically, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to 500 ms (0.5 seconds). As a result, in the latent probability variation game state ST2, by performing the right-handed game, the second lottery game can be efficiently performed. Then, as a jackpot type in the jackpot of the second special symbol, the jackpot C (15R probability variation jackpot) in which the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 is continued (loop) is selected with a probability of 66%, and the jackpot is shifted to the probability variation gaming state ST3. D (15R probability variation jackpot) is selected with a probability of 34%.

  On the other hand, in the latent probability variation game state ST2, the variation time of the first special symbol which is not a substantial variation target is set to be long. Specifically, when the result of the determination (lottery) of the first special symbol is off, the variation time is selected as 1800000 ms (30 minutes) (see FIG. 18(a)). Therefore, while the deviation variation of the first special symbol is performed once, it is possible to execute the lottery a maximum of 3,600 times with the second special symbol. During the probability change (high probability game state), the jackpot probability is 1/40, so if it is a normal game, it will be a jackpot with the second special symbol by the end of the variation of the first special symbol once. Is configured to be able to. On the other hand, when the result of the determination whether or not the first special symbol is winning is 500 ms (0.5 seconds), the variation time is selected (see FIG. 18(a)). In the latent probability variation game state ST2, if the pachinko machine 10 is reset (initialized), the game state shifts to the normal game state ST1, so that the above-mentioned injustice (reset goto) cannot be executed. Therefore, in the case of a big hit in the first special symbol, the variation time is set as short as 500 ms (0.5 seconds). As a result, even when a big hit occurs in the first special symbol in the latent probability variation game state ST2, it is possible to make the game machine capable of continuing the game without lowering the efficiency (rotation rate) of the game.

  Also, as will be described later in detail, in the latent probability variation game state ST2, the winning result of the second special symbol is configured to be a small hit with a probability of 8/400. In the small hit in the latent probability variation game state ST2, about 3 game balls can be entered into the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65. Since the number of prize balls to be paid out on the basis of entering the specific winning opening 65a is 15, about 45 balls are paid out to the player for each small winning game. As a result, in the latent probability variation game state ST2, the right-handed game can be executed in a more advantageous state (state in which consumption of holding balls is suppressed) than in the normal game state ST1.

  In the latent probability variation gaming state ST2, the jackpot of the second special symbol, and when the jackpot D (15R probability variation jackpot) is selected, then the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 is set again (loop). On the other hand, when jackpot C (15R probability variation jackpot) is selected, after that, a gaming state with probability variation power support (probability variation gaming state ST3) is set.

  The probability variation gaming state ST3 is a gaming state in which the special symbol lottery probability is set to be 10 times higher (set to a high-probability gaming state), and the first special symbol is a gaming state in which it is substantially subject to change. Further, the lottery probability of the ordinary symbol is set to 40 times higher, and the variation time of the ordinary symbol is also easily selected with a short variation time (see FIG. 19). Further, the time (open time) in which the electric accessory 632 is maintained in the special state (open state) is also set to be longer than in the normal game state ST1 and the latent probability variation game state ST2. Therefore, when the player hits the ball to the right, the right first starting opening 631 can be easily won. In the present embodiment, 95% of the game balls hit to the right are configured to win the right first starting opening 631. Therefore, 85% of the remaining 5% of the game balls is won in the second starting opening 640, and the remaining 5% is consumed as an out ball. Therefore, in the probability variation gaming state, about 99% of the right-handed game balls will enter the right first start opening 631 or the second start opening 640, and 99% of the right-handed game balls will be used as prize balls. Be paid out to the person. Therefore, the player can play the game while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls the player has.

  In the probability variation gaming state ST3, it is configured to be a small hit with a probability of 5/400 as the lottery result of the second special symbol. In the small hit in the probability variation gaming state ST3, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65. As a result, in the probability variation gaming state ST3, it can be prevented (suppressed) from becoming too advantageous to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball may be allowed to enter the specific winning opening 65a (for example, one ball). Thereby, it is possible to increase the privilege for the player and improve the interest of the player.

  In the probability variation gaming state ST3, the variation time of the second special symbol that is not a substantial variation target is set to be long, and the variation time of the first special symbol that is a substantial variation target is set to be short. Specifically, as the variation time of the second special symbol, 500 ms (0.5 seconds) is selected irrespective of the result of the determination (lottery) (see FIG. 18(b)). On the other hand, as for the variation time of the first special symbol, if the result of the judgment (lottery) is out of the range, the variation time is selected as 1800000 ms (30 minutes) (see FIG. 18(b)). Therefore, while the deviation change of the second special symbol is performed once, it is possible to execute the lottery a maximum of 3600 times with the first special symbol. During the probability change (high probability game state), the jackpot probability is 1/40, so if it is a normal game, it will be a jackpot with the first special symbol by the end of the variation of the second special symbol which is out once. Is configured to be able to. On the other hand, when the result of the determination (lottery) of the first special symbol is a hit, the variation time is selected to be 5000 ms (5 seconds) (see FIG. 18(b)). As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 is reset (initialized), the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the normal gaming state ST1, and thus the above-described illegal act (reset goto) cannot be executed. Therefore, in the probability variation gaming state ST3, when a big hit with the second special symbol, the variation time is set to be as short as 5000 ms (5 seconds). As a result, even when a big hit occurs in the second special symbol in the probability variation game state ST3, it is possible to make the game machine capable of continuing the game without lowering the efficiency (rotation rate) of the game.

  Further, as described above, in the probability variation gaming state ST3, 95% of the game balls that have been shot win the right first starting opening 631. Therefore, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting opening 640, and the second lottery game is difficult to be executed, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a jackpot of the second special symbol that is not substantially a target of change.

  When the first special symbol jackpot in the probability variation gaming state ST3, the jackpot A is selected at a rate of 34%. After the big hit game based on the big hit A, the latent probability variation game state ST2 is set (shifted to). Therefore, the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 is selected (shifted to) with a probability of 34%, and it is possible to play the game with a high probability until the jackpot is won at least twice again. On the other hand, when the jackpot B is selected with a probability of 66%, the normal gaming state ST1 is set (so-called falling) after the jackpot game.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when the latent probability variation game state ST2 is set, with the consumption of holding balls suppressed, until the jackpot is executed twice, with a high probability advantageous to the player. Two lottery games (or first lottery games) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the player can execute the big hit game twice in a short period of time as compared with the normal game state, and it is possible to provide the player with a sense of superiority.

  Further, until the jackpot is executed twice, the player is displayed with a high probability that the lottery game is executed with a high probability, so that at least two jackpots can be given to the player. There is an effect that it can be made to feel assured and a sense of security can be provided.

  In the present embodiment, in the latent probability variation game state ST2, when the jackpot B of the first special symbol is reached, the normal game state ST1 will be set (shift to). That is, you cannot get the big hit twice. In the latent probability variation game state ST2, as described above, the right lottery game in which the first lottery game is difficult to be executed is performed, and the second lottery is held during the fluctuation of the deviation of the first special symbol which is a long time fluctuation. The game is executed a plurality of times, and the big hit of the second special symbol is generated (easy to do) (substantially not the big hit of the first special symbol). However, due to the holding ball of the first special symbol stored in the latent probability variation game state ST2, the first special symbol may be a big hit. For example, when the latent probability variation game state ST2 is a big hit in the first lottery game for the first time (probability of 1/40). Therefore, in this case, in the latent probability variation gaming state ST2, the jackpot A is selected with a probability of 34% as the jackpot of the first special symbol, and the jackpot E is selected with a probability of 66% ( 7(b) and 16(b)). If the jackpot A is selected, then the latent probability variation game state ST2, which is a high-probability game state, is entered, so that it is possible to obtain two jackpots. On the other hand, when the big hit E is selected, the big hit cannot be obtained twice, and the low probability state is entered. In this case, 100 time saving games are provided after the jackpot game is over. As a result, a state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state ST1 is provided. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player is discouraged and the motivation for the game is significantly lowered.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. In the game area, there are arranged a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the first starting opening 630, the right first starting opening 631, and the winning (starting winning) to the second starting opening 640 are used as triggers while synchronizing with the variable display in the first symbol display device 37. A third symbol display device 81 including a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display of the third symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is provided.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114, so that the first display is performed as shown in FIG. Shows the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2) which is one of the third symbols in the area Dm, left (left display area Dm1), middle (middle display area Dm2) and right Three symbol rows in the (right side display area Dm3) are displayed. The type of the third symbol displayed in the first display area (Dm) (whether the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2) is determined and displayed according to the game state.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal game state ST1 (low-probability game state) and the game state with probability variation electric power support (probability variation game state), the first special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm, and the probability variation electric power support. When there is no game state (probability of latent change game state ST2), the second special symbol is set to be displayed in the first display area Dm.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the type of the special symbol displayed in the first display area Dm is set to be switched as described above, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the same special symbol may be always displayed. Good.

  Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol (first special symbol) is variably displayed on the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. (Dynamic display).

  The third symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm is composed of 10 kinds of special symbols with numbers "0" to "9". . Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbol is aligned (for example, "777"), the variable display is performed, and the variable display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot occurs after the end of.

  Specifically, in the first display area Dm, three symbol columns Z1, Z2, Z3 are displayed for each of the left, the center and the right. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of numbers, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from the top to the bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

  Further, in the first display area Dm, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line L1. If the third symbol is stopped in line on the activated line with a combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols), a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  A second display area Dn and a second sub display area Dt below the second display area Dn are formed on the upper right of the first display area Dm. In the second display area Dn, a symbol row indicating the first special symbol or the second special symbol (depending on the game state) is displayed. Further, in the second sub-display area Dt, a symbol showing the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (depending on the game state) displayed in the second display region Dn is displayed. Although details will be described later, in the probability variation gaming state ST3, as shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, as the third symbol showing the second special symbol, the symbol of the treasure box is the second display area. It is displayed in Dn. Then, when the variation of the second special symbol is started, the blinking display for alternately repeating and displaying the state of FIG. 9A and the state of FIG. . Then, in the case where the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of alignment, when the variable time elapses, it is stopped and displayed in the state shown in FIG. 9(a). On the other hand, when the result of the lottery is a win, the display is stopped and displayed in the state shown in FIG.

  A third display area Du is formed at the upper left of the first display area Dm. In this third display area Du, two kinds of symbol rows of “◯” and “×” as shown in FIG. 8B are displayed in parallel, and two rows are displayed in parallel, and the symbol on the left side is the lottery for the first special symbol. The result is shown, and the symbol on the right side is configured to show the lottery result of the second special symbol. In addition, you may make it show a lottery result of a 1st special symbol or a 2nd special symbol by another aspect, without being limited to this. For example, two types of "○" and "x" symbol strings are displayed in parallel, and when two "○" symbols are displayed in the left and right columns, the first special symbol or the second special symbol (game) It may be configured to notify that the winning (depending on the state) has been successful. Further, the third display area Du and the second display area Dn may be shared. For example, in the normal gaming state ST1, two kinds of symbol rows of "○" and "x" are displayed in parallel in the second display area, and two rows are displayed in parallel, and in the probability variation gaming state ST3, FIG. ), as the third symbol indicating the second special symbol, the symbol of the treasure box may be displayed in the second display area Dn. In this case, the display area may be switched based on the switching of the gaming state after the big hit game. As a result, the display area of the first display area Dm can be widened, so that the effect of the effect displayed in the first display area Dm can be enhanced. Moreover, when the variation based on the second special symbol is not executed (when there is no suspension of the special symbol 2), the second display area Dn and the second sub display area Dt may not be displayed. As a result, the display area of the first display area Dm can be widened.

  Furthermore, although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, it is possible to simultaneously execute the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing at the same time, if one is stopped and displayed in a mode showing a big hit (or a small hit), the change of the other special symbol being changed is also forced. It is configured to be stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a disconnection.

  Here, in the big hit, the opening/closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning a prize device 65 is executed 15 times (called 15 rounds), while in the small hit, the opening/closing operation of the specific winning a prize opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is performed. It is executed twice (for example, two rounds). In addition, one round of the big hit game is executed until 30 seconds elapse or 10 game balls enter the variable winning device 65. On the other hand, one round of the small hit game in the latent probability variation game state ST2 is set until 1.8 seconds elapses or 10 game balls are won in the variable winning device 65. Therefore, in the small hitting game in the latent probability variation game state ST2, about 3 game balls can be entered. In addition, one round of the small hit game in the probability variation game state ST3 is set until 0.5 seconds elapses or 10 game balls are won in the variable winning device 65. Therefore, in the small hitting game in the probability variation gaming state ST3, it is almost impossible to enter the game ball into the variable winning device 65, and it is difficult to obtain the prize ball.

  Even in the probability variation game state ST3, as described above, when the stop display is performed in the lottery result indicating the small hit in the first special symbol, the changing second special symbol is forcedly removed (FIG. 9). It is stopped and displayed in (a). In this case, the deviation variation of the second special symbol that is not a subject of substantial variation that is a variation for a long time (10 minutes) is stopped, and after the small hit game of special figure 1 is finished, with new variation of special figure 1. At the same time, the second lottery game is executed based on the new hold (next hold) ball of the second special symbol. That is, a big hit based on the second special symbol may occur. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot in the second lottery game with the second special symbol is a jackpot, the jackpot C (15R probability variation jackpot) that can shift to the high-probability game state is always (100%) selected. It is configured (see FIG. 16C), which is advantageous for the player. Therefore, when the variation is started based on a new hold (next hold) of the second special symbol, as shown in FIGS. 10A to 10B, the first special in the second display area Dn. The variation of the symbol is displayed, and the variation of the second special symbol is changed to be displayed in the first display area Dm. Similarly, a symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed in the second sub display area Dt, and a symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is changed to be displayed in the sub display region Ds. . Note that the variable mode is not limited to this, and the display area of the second display area Dn in which the variation of the second special symbol is displayed is enlarged, and the first display in which the variation of the first special symbol is displayed. The area Dm may be reduced.

  When the variation of the second special symbol is changed so as to be displayed in the first display area Dm, the display mode in which the treasure box opens is executed, and as shown in FIG. The word "sorry" is displayed in the treasure box, and the player is informed that the lottery result has been missed. On the other hand, if the result of the hit/miss determination is a win, the word "Congratulations" is displayed in the treasure box as shown in FIG. It

  In this way, in the probability variation gaming state ST3, when the first special symbol is won as a small hit, the variation of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed, and the variation of the new second special symbol is started. 2 It is possible to increase the chance that the lottery game is executed. Further, in that case, the variation based on the second special symbol is emphasized and displayed as shown in FIGS. 10(a) to 10(b), and the player is expected to win the jackpot with the second special symbol. Can be made

  In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main controller 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, while the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, a sub display area Ds is formed below the first display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, as shown in FIG. 8B, a reserved symbol “black circle” corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed. On the other hand, a second sub display area Dt is formed below the second display area Dn. In the second sub display area Dt, as shown in FIG. 9A, a reserved symbol “black triangle mark” corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed. In the present embodiment, the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to four, respectively, so that the sub-table display area Ds displays a maximum of four reserved symbols "black circles". Then, a maximum of four reserved symbols “black triangle marks” are displayed in the second sub display area Dt.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the reserved symbols of the first special symbol are displayed by being distinguished by "black circles" and the reserved symbols of the second special symbol are distinguished by "black triangles". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reserved symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be the same. By using the same reserved symbol for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the capacity of the symbol data can be reduced. Furthermore, the reserved symbol of the first special symbol and the reserved symbol of the second special symbol may be displayed in the sub display area Ds. For example, the reserved symbol of the first special symbol may be displayed in the left side region of the sub display region Ds, and the reserved symbol of the second special symbol may be displayed in the right side region, or the fluctuation starts from the left side of the display region. The reserved symbols may be displayed in order.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 constituted by the first lottery game and the second lottery game has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and three or four or more lottery games and the corresponding start. Of course, each mouth may be provided so that each lottery result can be displayed in a variable manner at the same time.

  When a game ball wins the first starting opening 630, the right first starting opening 631, and the second starting opening 640, a first starting opening switch or a second starting opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 Turns on. The first starting port 630 and the right first starting port 631 form a common guide path on the back side of the game board 13 for guiding the entered game ball to the first starting port switch. Due to the turning on of the first starting opening switch and the second starting opening switch, the main control device 110 makes a big hit lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first starting opening 630, the right first starting opening 631, and the second starting opening 640 are also one of the winning openings through which one ball is paid out as a prize ball.

  When either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol indicating a big hit, the variable display based on the other special symbol is forcibly ended. In the present embodiment, in the case where the variation in which one of the special symbols is the winning/decision result is a big hit is started, the special symbol which is started to be changed after the other is forcibly changed as the result of the lottery. Is configured to start. As a result, it is possible to suppress the problem that the jackpot game is continuously started and the jackpot game is simultaneously started.

  In the present embodiment, when the special lottery game is executed with one special symbol, the other lottery game is forcibly executed on the other, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the other is also possible. The lottery game may be executed according to the lottery result, and the jackpot game may be continuously started. In addition, when it becomes a big hit in one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the measurement of the variation time in the other special symbol is interrupted, and the remaining variation display is continued after the big hit. Good. In this case, during the interruption, the first special symbol or the second special symbol may be displayed in a blinking manner in a state of being stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode "for example, the letter h" in a predetermined cycle. By thus configuring, it is possible to notify the player that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (interrupted).

  Further, in each gaming state, a special symbol to be preferentially displayed in a variable display may be defined, and a variable display of the special symbol may be preferentially executed. For example, in the normal gaming state ST1, the first special symbol variation is preferentially executed. In this case, the variation of the second special symbol may be provisionally stopped (or forced stop) based on the execution start of the variation of the first special symbol. Thereby, the variation of the second special symbol can be executed if the first special symbol has not changed, but when the variation of the first special symbol is started, the variation of the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (or Will be forced to stop). Therefore, it is possible to preferentially execute the variation of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state ST1.

  Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering a certificate or an identification label are provided in the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate or the like affixed to the adhesive space K1 is provided on the front frame 14 It can be seen through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. Balls that have not won any of the winning openings are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the outlet 66. On the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93 as a unit. Also, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

  The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

  Further, in the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), a box base and a box cover are connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to extend over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and when the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or when the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. To be cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing sticker, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls is paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<About the configuration>
Details of the characteristic configuration of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In this embodiment, a left flow path PA1 through which the game ball flows down the left side of the variable display unit 80 and a right flow path PA2 through which the right side of the variable display unit 80 flows down are formed. A first starting port 630 is arranged below the center of the variable display unit 80. As described above, the game ball flowing down the right flow path PA2 is configured such that 85% of the game ball flowing down enters the second starting opening 640 by the nail groups T2 and T3. Therefore, the first starting port 630 is configured so that the game ball flowing down the left flow path PA1 is easier to enter than the game ball flowing down the right flow path PA2.

  In the right flow path PA2, the first normal symbol starting port 67a is arranged, the variable winning device 65 is arranged below it, the right first starting port 631 is arranged below it, and the second ordinary pattern is on its right side. The symbol starting port 67b is arranged. The second starting port 640 is arranged below the right first starting port 631. A plurality of nails T for changing the rolling direction of the game ball are arranged on the game board 13.

  In the game ball shot to the right flow path, the electric accessory 632 is in a normal state (a state where the left guiding member 632a and the right guiding member 632b are erected) by the nail group T4 (consisting of three nails). It is configured so that the game ball does not enter the 1 starting opening 631. When the electric accessory 632 is in a normal state, 85% of the game balls flowing down the right flow path is configured to flow down the left side of the right first start opening 631. The ratio of the game balls flowing down the left side and the right side of the right first starting opening 631 can be changed by adjusting the angle (tilt) of the nail T1. By inclining the angle of the nail T1 toward the variable winning device 65 side (the side opposite to the nail group T4), the width of the nail T1 and the nail group T4 becomes wider, and the nail T1 flows down between the nail group T1 and the nail group T4. That is, the percentage of the game ball flowing down the right side of the right first starting opening 631 increases. On the other hand, by inclining the nail T1 to the right first starting port 631 side (nail group T4 side), the width between the nail T1 and the nail group T4 becomes narrower, and the game ball flows down on the right side of the right first starting port 631. By decreasing the ratio of playing, it is possible to increase the ratio of gaming balls flowing down the left side of the right first starting opening 631.

  The game ball flowing down the left side of the right first starting port 631 is configured to be guided to the second starting port 640 by the nail group T3 (constituted by five nails). The nail group T3 is arranged such that the width of each nail is narrower than that of one game ball, and the game ball cannot pass through (width) between them. The game ball guided to the nail group T3 is prevented from flowing down below the second starting port 640 by the nail group T2 (consisting of three nails), so that all the balls enter the second starting port 640. It is configured. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is of course possible that some of the game balls flow downward from the nail group T3 side (or the nail group T2 side, or both).

  Here, in the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting opening 640, one prize ball is set to be paid out to the player. Eighty-five percent of the game balls shot to the right channel PA2 are configured to win the second starting opening 640 (when the electric accessory 632 is in the normal state), so the game balls shot by the player Of these, 85% is configured to be refunded as prize balls. Therefore, the player can suppress the consumption (reduction) of the game ball as a holding ball by launching the game ball in the right flow path PA2 rather than launching the game ball in the left flow path. In addition, in the present embodiment, the game ball flowing down the right side of the right first starting opening 631 is configured not to win the second starting opening 640 by the nail group T2. Accordingly, by adjusting the nail T1, it is possible to adjust the ratio of the game balls that enter the second starting opening 640, that is, the ratio that is paid back as a prize ball in the right-handed game.

  Next, in a special state (state in which the left guiding member 632a and the right guiding member 632b are rotated until the left guiding member 632a and the right guiding member 632b are substantially horizontal, open state), the left guiding member 632a causes the left side of the right first starting opening 631 to move. Is configured so that the flow path that flows down is closed. Accordingly, when the electric accessory 632 is in the special state (open state), it is configured to prevent the game ball flowing down the right flow path from winning the second starting opening 640. Therefore, in the time saving game state ST1h and the probability variation game state ST3, the winning to the right first starting opening 631 increases, the winning to the second starting opening 640 decreases, and the first lottery game with the first special symbol The number of executions (execution frequency) is increased. Furthermore, in the time saving game state ST1h and the probability variation game state ST3, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to be long, so that the number of executions (execution frequency) of the second lottery game can be reduced (lower).

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the latent probability variation game state ST2, the variation time of the second special symbol that is advantageous to the player is set to be short, so the game is performed so as to shoot the game ball in the right flow path. As described above, the ratio of the game balls that win the second starting opening 640 is set to 85% of the game balls that flow down the right flow path, so the player's balls decrease. However, in the present embodiment, when the latent probability variation game state ST2 is reached, the probability of winning the small hit with the second special symbol is set to be high. Furthermore, the small hit game executed during the latent probability variation game state ST2 is set until the open time of one round of the one variable winning device 65 is 1.8 seconds or until 10 balls are won, and the open time per round is other. Since it is extended compared to the small hit in the gaming state, a prize ball can be obtained by the small hit. In the present embodiment, the probability of a small hit during the latent probability change is set to be 15% that is consumed by flowing down the right flow path, and is configured to compensate for the decrease in the number of balls the player has. Has been done. Therefore, even in the latent probability variation game state ST2, the player can play the game while suppressing the decrease of the number of balls he holds.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state ST1, it is prohibited to play the game in a right-handed game (a game ball is shot in the right flow path PA2), and the second starting opening is set in the normal gaming state ST1. When the game ball wins in 640, the abnormal process is executed, and the alarm display "please play by left-handing" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the same warning is issued by voice. In addition, in the normal game state ST1, when a game ball is won in the second starting opening 640, the jackpot may be controlled to be invalid, or an abnormal signal is output to a hall computer or the like. You may.

  In this embodiment, the game method (left-handed game or right-handed game) is changed in each game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Either left-handed game or right-handed game may be performed in all game states, or left-handed game or right-handed game may be performed in a particular game state You may. For example, the starting opening of the first special symbol and the starting opening of the second special symbol are provided at the lower center of the game board 13. Then, by performing a left-handed game, a game ball flowing down the left channel PA1 and by performing a right-handed game, a game ball flowing down the right channel PA2 is a start opening of the first special symbol, and a second It may be configured so that it can enter the starting port of the special pattern. This eliminates the need to separate the left-handed game and the right-handed game in all game states or in a specific game state, so that the game load on the player can be reduced.

<Electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  In the main control device 110, main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 13) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 13, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters, in order to carry out jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of the display result of the second symbol display device 83, etc., the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Used in.

  To set the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a first random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a first hit type counter C2 used for the selection of the jackpot symbol. , A fluctuation type counter C3 used for selecting a fluctuation pattern, and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first random number counter C1. Moreover, the second per random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for the initial value setting of the second per random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and some counters are not included in the main process (S1600) (see FIG. 45). It is updated periodically, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, the RAM 203 has a first special symbol reserve ball storage area 203a in which respective counter values are stored for winning with respect to the first starting opening 630 and the right first starting opening 631, and winning with respect to the second starting opening 640. The second special symbol reservation ball storage 203b for storing each counter value is provided. In the present embodiment, the first starting opening 630 and the right first starting opening 631 have a maximum of four holding balls in total, and the second starting opening 640 has a maximum of four holding balls. A maximum of eight reserved balls can be stored. Therefore, when the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, or when the special symbol jackpot is not being played, the game ball is in the first starting opening 630 or the right first starting opening 631 during a period in which the special symbol can be drawn. When a prize is won, each counter value is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and when a game ball is won in the second starting opening 640, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. . After that, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is moved to the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), and the first special symbol is variably displayed (dynamic display). Various settings and control processing for execution are executed. Similarly, each counter value stored in the second special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203b is moved to the second special symbol reservation sphere execution area (not shown), various for displaying the second special symbol variably Settings and control processes are executed.

  On the other hand, during the period during which the special symbols cannot be selected by lottery such as during the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the game ball has the first starting opening 630 or In the case where the right first starting opening 631 and the second starting opening 640 are won, if the number of holdings for the winning starting opening is less than the upper limit value (four in this embodiment), acquisition of each counter value It is stored in the first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203b corresponding to the winning opening. Further, when the number of holdings for the winning start opening is equal to or more than the upper limit value (four in this embodiment), each counter value or the like is not acquired and one prize ball (one game ball in this embodiment). ) Is treated as an invalid ball that is only paid out to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls is four in total for the first starting port 630 and the right first starting port 631 and four for the second starting port 640, but is not limited thereto. Alternatively, the number may be four, respectively, or the upper limit may not be provided.

  Each counter shown in FIG. 9 will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It is configured to return to. Particularly, when the first per random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the per first random number counter C1. The first random number counter C1 is commonly obtained for each ball entering the first starting port 630 or the right first starting port 631 and the second starting port 640.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (S1600) (see FIG. 45).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, regularly (once in each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the balls are the first starting opening 630, the right first starting opening 631, and the second starting opening. At the timing of winning the prize in 640 (starting prize), it is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning opening of the RAM 203. The value of the random number to be a big hit is set by the first per random number table 202a (see FIG. 14) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first per random number counter C1 is equal to the first per random number table. When the value of the random number that is a big hit set by 202a (in the present embodiment, "7" when the probability is low and "0-9" when the probability is high) is determined as a big hit.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In the first random number counter C1, the number of random number values (hit values) to be a big hit is 1 when the probability is low, the value "7" is 10 when the probability is high, and the value "0-9" is It is stored in the first random number table 202a.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines a big hit type in the case of a big hit, and is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) to obtain a maximum value (99 in the present embodiment). ) Is reached and then returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated regularly (once in each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the ball is the first start opening 630, the right first start opening 631, and the second start. At the timing of winning the prize in the mouth 640 (starting prize), it is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 corresponding to the winning starting mouth. The timing at which the value of the first random number counter C1 is acquired is actually the timing at which the game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch (not shown) or the second starting opening switch (not shown). That is.

  Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, a random number that is out. If there is, the variation pattern in the variation display effect and the type of the stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as “stop type”) are those at the time of disconnection. On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding sphere execution area 203b is a random number, it is a variation pattern in the variation display effect or The type of stop will be that of a big hit. In this case, the variation pattern and the stop type at the time of the big hit are determined corresponding to the big hit type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16) stored in the ROM 202.

  As the jackpot type, as described above, jackpot A, jackpot B and jackpot E are set as jackpot types dedicated to the first special symbol, and jackpot C and jackpot D are set as jackpot types only for the second special symbol. Has been done. The jackpots A to E are each composed of 15 rounds of jackpot games. Furthermore, in the big hit A, big hit C, and big hit D, the switching member 65h of the variable winning device 65 is rotated for 5 seconds at the start of the 14th round, and the gaming ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3. By detecting the game ball in the probability variation switch 65e3, the gaming state after the big hit game is set to the probability variation gaming state ST3 or the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 which is the high probability gaming state.

  The method for making the game ball passable to the probability variation switch 65e3 is not limited to the method described above. For example, the entered game ball can pass the probability change switch 65e3 (provided with the probability change switch 65e3) V variable winning a prize device 651, the game ball entered can not pass the probability change switch 65e3 (probability change switch 65e3 The non-V variable winning device 652 is provided. Then, in the jackpot that allows the gaming state after the jackpot game to shift to the high-probability gaming state, the V variable winning device 651 is controlled to be opened and closed, and the gaming state after the jackpot game cannot shift to the high-probability gaming state. In the jackpot, the V variable winning device 651 is not opened and closed, and the non-V variable winning device 652 is opened and closed. Further, the V variable winning device 651 may be provided with a switching member 65h as in the present embodiment. Then, the switching member 65h is moved at a specific timing (for example, at the start of the 14th round) so that the game ball can pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. And, in the big hit which can shift the game state after the big hit game to the high probability game state, the V variable winning a prize device 651 is controlled to be opened and closed in the 14th round, and the game state after the big hit game is set to the high probability game state. In the case of a jackpot that cannot be moved to, the non-V variable winning device 652 is controlled to be opened and closed in the 14th round. As a result, it is not necessary to change the control of the probability variation switch 65e3 for each jackpot type, so that the design cost and the program capacity can be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the case of the big hit B and the big hit E, the switching member 65h is rotated only for 0.5 seconds at the start of the 14th round. It takes 0.5 seconds or more before the game ball that has won the variable winning device 65 reaches the probability variation switch 65e3. Therefore, in the case of the jackpot B and the jackpot E, the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3. It is configured so that it is impossible to do, and the game state after the big hit is not set to the high-probability game state. In addition, in the case of the big hit B and the big hit E which are not shifted to the high probability game state after the big hit game, the switching member 65h may not be rotated. Thereby, in the big hit B and the big hit E, it is possible to reliably prevent the game ball from passing to the probability variation switch 65e3, and it is not necessary to rotate the switching member 65h, so that the power consumption can be reduced.

  Therefore, even if the jackpot game is started, it is determined for the player whether or not the probability variation is given during the subsequent jackpot game, so that the expectation for the probability variation can be continued for a long time. Furthermore, since the probability that the probability variation is given is different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the player can play the game by changing the degree of expectation that the probability variation is imparted due to the difference in the special symbol.

  As shown in FIGS. 16A to 16C, the jackpot type selection table 202d is composed of three types of tables, a jackpot type selection table A to C. FIG. 16A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table A. This jackpot type selection table A is for determining the jackpot type based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 when a jackpot is hit in the normal game state ST1 (including the time saving game state ST1h). It is a selection table. As shown in FIG. 16A, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), jackpot A (15R probability variation jackpot) and jackpot B (15R normal jackpot) are set. For the jackpot A, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is set as a determination value of "0 to 33", and for the jackpot B, the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "34 to 99" is set as the determination value. Is set as. As the big hit type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), one kind of big hit C is set, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "0 to 99" is set as the determination value. That is, in the normal game state ST1, the big hit A is selected with a 34% probability and the big hit B is selected with a 66% probability when a big hit occurs in Toku-zu 1. On the other hand, the jackpot C is selected with a probability of 100% when the jackpot in the special figure 2 is hit.

  As shown in FIG. 16(a), the big hit A is a state in which the probability of hitting a normal symbol is increased, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, and the operating time of the electric accessory 632 is set to be long (electricity). This is a jackpot in which a V winning open pattern is set in which the probability change switch 65e3 of the variable winning device 65 is provided with an open pattern in which a game ball can win. On the other hand, the jackpot B is a jackpot to which the electric power support state is not given and the V winning opening pattern is not set. The jackpot C is set as the jackpot to which the electric power support state is given and the V winning opening pattern is set.

  In this way, in the normal game state ST1, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol that should not normally be played (varied), only the jackpot C is set, and as a result, a jackpot occurs in the second special symbol due to fraud, etc. Also, it is configured so as not to give the latent probability variation game state ST2, and to prevent the problem that at least two big jackpots are illegally given in the high probability game state.

  Next, FIG. 16B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table B. This jackpot type selection table B is a table for determining the jackpot type when the jackpot is established in the latent probability variation game state ST2. In this jackpot type selection table B, jackpot A and jackpot E are set as jackpot types of special figure 1, and jackpot C and jackpot D are set as jackpot types of toku figure 2, respectively.

  The jackpot E is a 15-round short-time jackpot, and the electric support state is given until the first special symbol or the second special symbol starts to change 100 times after the jackpot game is over. The jackpot probability in this case is set to a low probability state. Incidentally, when the latent probability variation gaming state ST2, the variation time of the special figure 1 is set to be long, so it is a big hit that the variation of the first special symbol that transits to the latent probability variation gaming state ST2. Is generally considered. In that case, the jackpot E, which is not selected in the normal game state ST1, is set to be selected instead of the jackpot B in order to rescue the player. Therefore, the player's discouragement can be suppressed, and the problem that the player's motivation for the game is significantly reduced can be suppressed.

  In the case of a big hit in the special figure 2, a big hit C and a big hit D are set respectively. The jackpot D is a jackpot in which the latent probability variation of 15 rounds is set. Here, in the present embodiment, when the latent probability variation game state ST2 is set, the probability that the special symbol lottery probability is set to the high-probability game state is set high until at least two jackpot games are executed. ing. Therefore, for the player, the jackpot type is set to be more advantageous than the jackpot C for which the probability variation game state ST3 is set.

  In the jackpot type selection table B, the jackpot C has a determination value of "0 to 65", and the jackpot D has a determination value of "66 to 99". Therefore, the jackpot C is selected with a probability of 66% when the second special symbol is a hit, and the jackpot D is set with a probability of 34%. Therefore, the player performs the game in the expectation that the jackpot D is selected when the jackpot is hit with the second special symbol during the latent probability variation game state ST2.

  FIG. 16C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table C. The jackpot type selection table C is a selection table used to determine the jackpot type when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state ST3. In the jackpot type selection table C, jackpot A and jackpot B are set as jackpot types of the first special symbol, and only jackpot D is selected as the jackpot type of the second special symbol. Note that the jackpot A is selected at a rate of 34% (determination value “0 to 33”), and the jackpot B is selected at a rate of 66% (determination value “34 to 99”). ).

  In this way, when the probability variation gaming state ST3 is set, the jackpot D is always selected when a big hit occurs in the second special symbol, so that the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 is set, and the player has at least 2 The high-probability game state is configured to be easily set continuously until the jackpot is executed. Here, in the present embodiment, in the probability variation game state ST3, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to be long, and further, the electric accessory 632 is set to be in a special state (open state) easily (electric support). ), the number of balls entering the second starting port 640 is suppressed. As will be described later, when the probability variation game state ST3 is reached, 3000 ms is selected at a rate of 191/199 for the normal symbol and 30,000 ms is selected by a lottery at a rate of 8/199 (see FIG. 19). Therefore, the variation time of 30000 ms, which has a long variation time, is selected with a low probability.

  Until the variation time of 30,000 ms elapses, the electric accessory 632 is not operated in the special state (open state), and during that time, the game ball easily wins in the second starting opening 640 (right-handed). Since 85% of the game balls enter), it is possible to increase the reserved balls of the second special symbol. On the other hand, during the probability variation gaming state ST3, in the case of deviation as shown in FIG. 18(b), the variation time of 1800000 ms is set as the variation time of the second special symbol, so normally the second special symbol. It is configured so that a new lottery is not efficiently executed even in the state where the reserved ball of is stored. However, during the probability variation gaming state ST3, the small hit probability of the first special symbol is set to 1/80 (see FIG. 15(b)), so each time a small hit is won in the first special symbol, The variation being executed with the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed, and the variation of the reserved ball stored next is started. That is, by winning the small prize in the first special symbol, the lottery opportunity in the second special symbol is increased, and the lottery advantageous to the player is set to be easily executed. Therefore, the player can play the game with the expectation that the first special symbol wins the small hit, and the expectation of the player can be increased in addition to the big hit. The small lottery probability may be set to an appropriate value as appropriate.

  Returning to FIG. 9, description of various counters will be continued. The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, reaches a maximum value (that is, 198), and then returns to 0.

  The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the ball is moved to the first start port 630, the right first start port 631 or the second start port 640. At the timing of winning (starting winning), it is stored in the first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired at the timing of the start winning, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the value may be acquired at the timing of the variation start. Naturally, the first random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2 may be configured to be selected at the start of fluctuation.

  As shown in FIG. 17 and FIGS. 18A and 18B, the variation pattern selection table 202e is a variation pattern selection table A (see FIG. 17) for selecting a variation pattern in the low probability game state, a latent latency variation game. A variation pattern selection table B for selecting a variation pattern in the state ST2 (see FIG. 18A), a variation pattern selection table C for selecting a variation pattern in the probability variation game state ST3 or the time saving game state ST1h (see FIG. 18( b)) are set respectively.

  In each variation pattern selection table, the variation pattern type is set corresponding to the number of holding balls when the variation starts, the value of the variation type selection counter CS1, and the result of the judgment. The type of the fluctuation pattern determined by the main controller 110 is a rough content of the fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation time and the rough fluctuation type (non-reach, reach various) are mainly determined. Then, the voice lamp control device 114 is configured to determine the details of the more detailed variation pattern. With this configuration, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 17, in the normal game state ST1, the winning/disapproval determination result is deviated as the variation time of the second special symbol, and an extremely long variation time (dynamic display time) is determined regardless of the hit. Has been done. Specifically, 64800000 ms is selected and 18 hours are set. Business hours of the amusement arcade are generally long from 9:00 am to 11:00 pm, so the business hours are 15 hours, which is longer than that. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a big hit by playing a game with the second special symbol in the normal game state ST1. In addition, in the present embodiment, a long fluctuation time is used even in the case of a big hit. In this case, by outputting to the hall computer or the like that the game is being played with the second special symbol, the game store side can monitor illegal games and provide guidance on the correct game method.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the second special symbol also has a long variation time in the case of a hit, but may have a short variation time such as 500 ms in the case of a hit. With such a configuration, the extremely long hit variation is executed in the second special symbol, so that the problem that the hit variation is not executed in the first special symbol can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 18(a), in the latent probability variation game state ST2, the variation time of the first special symbol in the case of being off is constituted by 180,000 ms, which is set extremely long. On the other hand, the variation time of the first special symbol, which is a hit, is configured to be 500 ms and is set to be short. By configuring in this way, even when the latent variation probability gaming state ST2 is shifted to and the first special symbol of the first variation is a jackpot E, it is difficult to understand that the latency variation variation game state ST2 has been entered. it can. Further, the jackpot game can be continuously executed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 18(b), in the probability variation game state ST3, the variation time of the deviation of the second special symbol is constituted by 180,000 ms, which is set extremely long. On the other hand, the variation time per hit is set to 5000 ms, which is set according to the period in which the treasure box effect described later is executed.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the variable display that is a big hit with the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured not to change at the same time, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and it is possible to display a variable display that is a big hit at the same time. When configured, the variable display time that is a jackpot of the second special symbol is shorter than the first special symbol (for example, 5 seconds) or extremely short variation time (for example, 0.5 seconds), the first special The variation time to be a big hit of the symbol may be configured such that a variation time longer than the second special symbol (for example, 60 seconds) or an extremely long variation time (for example, 5 minutes) is selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to postpone the jackpot with the second special symbol which may determine the jackpot B, which is a type of jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player, during which the second special It is possible to make a big hit with a symbol and give a big hit C to the player. In this case, when the jackpot is started with one special symbol, a configuration is conceivable in which the lottery game being changed with the other special symbol is invalidated. With this configuration, the jackpot C, which is an unfavorable jackpot type, is given to the player and is immediately determined after the probability variation gaming state ST3 is set, and the probability variation gaming state ST3 ends in a short period of time. It is possible to suppress defects.

  Further, in the configuration described above, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed in a variable display at the same time that the win/loss determination result is a big hit, and the win/loss determination result in the first special symbol is a variation By setting the display time long (for example, 100 seconds), and setting the change time per hit determination result in the second special symbol to be short (for example, 1 second), the first special symbol during the time saving game The number of times the lottery result is displayed can be reduced (the number of times the first special symbol is variably displayed) can be reduced, and the number of lottery with the second special symbol advantageous to the player can be increased. In addition, when the number of time saving is set to be displayed until the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed 100 times, the variation time of the first special symbol is 100 times in succession due to the deviation of the second special symbol. It is possible to effectively reduce the number of times the second special symbol is variably displayed during the time saving game by configuring the time longer than the time when the variable display is performed.

  Returning to FIG. 13, description of various counters will be continued. The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). The ball is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball passes through the first normal symbol starting port 67a or the second normal symbol starting port 67b. Then, the value of the random number that is a jackpot of the normal symbol is set by the second per random number table 202c (FIG. 15(c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the second per random number counter C4. However, when it matches with the value of the random number which is the hit set by the second hit random number table 202c (FIG. 15(c)), it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol.

  When the second per random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second per random number counter C4. The value of the second random number counter C4 is updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) in the present embodiment, and the sphere is the first normal symbol starting port 67a (through gate) or the second normal symbol starting port 67b ( It is acquired when passing through the through gate) is detected. The number of random number values to be won is 5 in the normal gaming state ST1, and the range is “5 to 9”. Also, in the high-probability game state, it is 200, and the range is "5-204". That is, in the normal gaming state ST1, it is determined that the winning is achieved when the value of the acquired second per-random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 9", and in the high probability gaming state, the acquired per-second random number counter. When the value of C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the winning is achieved, and the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol) on the second symbol display device 83, and the electric accessory The left guide member 632a and the right guide member 632b of 632 are opened once for a predetermined time (1.2 s in the present embodiment) in the normal game state ST1, and for a predetermined time (this execution in the high probability game state). In the form, the opening operation of 1 s) is performed twice. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value=0 to 239), and is set once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). While being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (S1600) (see FIG. 41).

  When the game ball passes through the first normal symbol starting port 67a or the second normal symbol starting port 67b, the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being displayed in a variable state, and each counter is based on the reserved ball in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c If the value is not stored, a random value is obtained from the second random number counter C4 in the normal symbol holding sphere execution area (not shown), and is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c. Further, when the normal symbol (second symbol) is displayed in a variable manner or when the random number value corresponding to the reserved sphere stored in the ordinary symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c is less than the upper limit value (four in this embodiment) Is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c of the number of holdings (normal symbol holding 1 to 4) corresponding to the random number value acquired from the second random number counter C4. In addition, when a random number value is stored in each area, a normal symbol flag (not shown) is set to ON, and the variable display of the normal symbol is stopped based on the random number value, or due to the completion of the hold. When the data is shifted to the previous holding area, it is set to OFF. Here, when the data is shifted, the normal symbol flag of the reserved area newly shifted and stored is set to ON. Whether or not data is stored in the holding area, or whether or not the normal symbol is being variably displayed is determined depending on which holding area or the normal symbol flag of the execution area is turned on.

  In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed according to the value of this counter or the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  In addition, in this embodiment, about the lottery of the first lottery game and the second lottery game, it is configured to select various common counter values, but the first lottery game (first special symbol) and the second lottery With the game (the second special symbol), by setting various dedicated counters respectively, the first lottery game and the second lottery game are updated with different values by changing the update timing and initial values of the various counters. Of course, it may be configured with the counter value.

  By configuring in this way, in the lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, even if the counter value is acquired at the same trigger, it is possible to acquire the counter value of a different value. It is possible to suppress a variation pattern selected by the 1 special symbol and the second special symbol, and a problem in which the determination result of the win or failure is synchronized.

  Further, even if the variation pattern is selected from the common variation pattern table for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation pattern to be selected is prevented from being synchronized, and various effects are produced. It can be performed. Further, it is possible to suppress the storage data of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and to have an inexpensive configuration (use a RAM or the like having a small storage area).

  Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 13, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, and I/O. And a work area (work area) in which values such as It should be noted that the RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power shutdown (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies to the following) and the value of each register. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on by eliminating power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before power-off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by the main processing (S1600) (see FIG. 45), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the startup processing when the power is turned on (see FIG. 44). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 43) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

  RAM203, 1st special design reservation sphere storage area 203a, 2nd special design reservation sphere storage area 203b, normal design reservation sphere storage area 203c, 1st special design reservation sphere number counter 203d, 2nd special design reservation sphere number counter 203e , Normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, probability variation setting flag 203h, probability variation passage counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, notification counter 203m, remaining ball timer flag 203n, remaining ball timer 203o, probability variation valid flag 203p, discharge number counter 203s, time saving medium counter 203t, big hit flag 203u, special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w, prefetch reserved sphere storage area 203x, small hit flag 203y, time saving flag 203a2, other memory It has at least the area 203z.

  The first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired based on winning the first starting opening 630 up to the upper limit number (four in the present embodiment). is there. In addition, the second special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203b stores various counter values obtained based on the fact that the game sphere has won the second starting opening 640 up to the upper limit number (four in the present embodiment). This is a storage area for

  The first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area for storing various counter values for starting the variable display of the first special symbol, and when the first special symbol stops variable display, When various counter values are stored in the first special symbol storage sphere storage area 203a, the various counter values are shifted and stored. The second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area for storing various counter values for starting the variable display of the second special symbol, and for details, the first special symbol holding ball execution area ( (Not shown).

  The first special symbol reserve ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol reserve ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol reserve ball execution area (not shown), the second special symbol reserve ball execution area (not shown), start The respective values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 13) upon the detection of the winning are respectively stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won the first starting opening 630 or the right first starting opening 631 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22 ), the MPU 201 detects each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 from the counter buffer. The value is acquired and stored in the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has won the second starting opening 640, the values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 are acquired from the counter buffer, and the corresponding values are obtained, as in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. It is similarly stored in each area (not shown).

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuating effect, it performs the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81, and the like in order to execute the above-mentioned first. Of the data (each value of the counters C1 to C2, CS1) corresponding to each starting winning stored in the special symbol holding sphere storing area 203a and the second special symbol holding sphere storing area 203b, it corresponds to one starting winning. Data is shifted to this special symbol holding ball execution area 203c. The shift in this embodiment means moving the data stored in one area to another area.

  In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, the second per random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 13) with the detection of the starting winning of the first normal symbol starting opening 67a or the second normal symbol starting opening 67b. This is a storage area to be stored. When the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 detects that the ball has passed the first normal symbol starting port 67a or the second normal symbol starting port 67b (start winning) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), The value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired from the counter buffer, and is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c. The normal symbol flag (not shown) is set to ON and stored (stored). The normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c has four holding areas so that data (a value of the counter C4, a normal symbol flag (not shown)) corresponding to one starting prize can be stored (held) up to four times. have. In the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c, the data of the holding spheres in the order of passing through the first ordinary symbol starting opening 67a or the second ordinary symbol starting opening 67b (starting winning), in the holding area in which the data is empty, is consumed. The holding areas are stored in order from the earliest reserved area.

  Further, the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), based on the start winning, when it is detected that it is the execution start timing of the variable display effect of the normal symbol, each counter value is stored, the normal symbol hit lottery Alternatively, it is a memory for storing data (value of the counter C4) to be referred to in processing such as setting of display (variation pattern) on the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, when the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variable display effect of the normal symbol, the winning lottery, the setting of the display of the second symbol display device 83 or the second symbol display device 88, etc. are executed. In the data (value of the second random number counter C4) corresponding to each starting winning stored in the above-mentioned ordinary symbol holding sphere storage area 203c, the data corresponding to one starting winning is held in this ordinary symbol holding Shift to a ball execution area (not shown). The shift in this embodiment means moving the data stored in one area to another area.

  The first special symbol holding sphere number counter 203d, the second special symbol holding sphere number counter 203e, the first start detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) that is regularly executed every 2 milliseconds. Based on the winning in the mouth 630 or the second starting opening 640, the number of balls to hold (the number of waiting times) of the variable display effect performed on the first symbol display device 37 (the variable display effect performed on the third symbol display device 81) Each is a counter that counts up to four times. The first special symbol holding sphere number counter 203d and the second special symbol holding sphere number counter 203e are set to zero as initial values by the initial setting process (FIG. 44, S1514) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, each time the start winning is detected and the number of balls held in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203a, the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203b is decremented by 1 each time the variable display effect is executed.

  In addition, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d (that is, the number of holding balls) is based on the game ball winning the first starting opening 630 or the right first starting opening 631, the first special symbol holding When the counter value is stored in the ball storage area 203a, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the first special symbol holding ball number command output from the main control device 110. The first special symbol holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1. Is.

  In addition, the value of the second special symbol reservation ball number counter 203e (that is, the number of reserve balls) is a counter value in the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting opening 640. When is stored, the voice lamp controller 113 is notified by the second special symbol holding ball number command output from the main controller 110. The second special symbol holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1. Is.

  MPU201, the respective values of the counters C1 to C2, CS1 obtained from the counter buffer in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), respectively. If stored, the data stored in the first special symbol reservation ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol reservation ball execution area (not shown), the first special symbol variation start process (Figure 23, S203) or the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 23, S206), and performs jackpot lottery based on the reference data, and determines the variation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result. In the first symbol display device 37, by the control of the main control device 110, a variable display effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

  The fluctuation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or special figure 2 change pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, in the third symbol display device 81, the variable display effect is performed based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  The normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is the first normal symbol starting port 67a or the second normal symbol starting port 67b that is detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) that is regularly executed every 2 milliseconds. Based on that the game ball has passed (hereinafter referred to as "start prize"), the variable display effect (the second symbol display device 83 of the third symbol display device 81, the second symbol) performed on the first symbol display device 37. It is a counter that counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display effect performed on the display device 88 up to a maximum of 4, respectively. This normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is a counter that stores the total number of holding balls stored based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first normal symbol starting port 67a or the second normal symbol starting port 67b. Zero is set as an initial value by the initial setting process (S1514 in FIG. 44) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, every time the start winning is detected and the number of balls held in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value 4. On the other hand, the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display effect is executed (see FIG. 41, S1205).

  The normal symbol flag (not shown) is a flag indicating that the data of the second random number counter C4 is stored and is held, and is also a flag indicating that the normal symbol is being variably displayed. is there. It is set to ON when the value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere execution area (not shown) or the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c. Further, when the value of the second hit counter C4 is shifted to the next holding area (holding area corresponding to the number of holdings in which holdings are exhausted and the number of holdings is reduced by one), the holding area before shifting The normal symbol flag (not shown) is set to OFF, while the normal symbol flag (not shown) in the reserved area shifted and stored is set to ON. Further, when the variable display of the normal symbol is subjected to the fluctuation stop process, the normal symbol flag (not shown) is set to OFF.

  The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the current game state is a high-probability game state (latent probability variation game state ST2 or probability variation game state ST3). If the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON, it indicates that the game state is a high-probability game state (latent probability variation game state ST2 or probability variation game state ST3), and if it is OFF, the low-probability game state (including the time saving game state ST1h) ) Is shown. In the present embodiment, the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON when the probability variation setting flag 203h described later is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game (see S11682 in FIG. 50). On the other hand, when the jackpot game is started, it is set to off. It should be noted that, in the initialized state, it is set to off, and when a normal power cutoff occurs, the state immediately before the power cutoff is backed up.

  The probability variation setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the high-probability game state (latent probability variation game state ST2 or probability variation game state ST3) after the jackpot game. In this pachinko machine 10, whether the gaming state is set to the high probability gaming state (hidden probability variation gaming state ST2 or probability variation gaming state ST3) is determined by the probability variation switch 65e3 (see FIG. 6(a)) during the jackpot game. It is determined by whether or not the game ball has passed. Here, when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1682 in FIG. 50). On the other hand, the probability variation flag 203g is set to OFF based on the ON setting. The probability variation setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Further, it is set to OFF in the initialized state.

  If the probability variation setting flag is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before the power was turned off. If it can be determined that it has passed, the probability variation setting flag 203h May be configured to be officially turned on and returned. In this case, the determination as to whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before the power is cut off can be determined by whether or not the probability variation passage counter 203i described later has a value greater than zero. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce damage to the amusement store side by discriminating an illegality in which only the probability variation setting flag 203h is rewritten to be on and the power is turned on again while the power is off. it can.

  The probability variation passage counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the probability variation switch 65e3 in one round during the jackpot game (13 rounds in the jackpot A in this embodiment). In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have won the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 have been discharged from the total of the probability variation passage counter 203i and the discharge number counter 203s described later. The probability variation passage counter 203i is incremented by 1 and updated when the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed (S1681 in FIG. 50). In addition, after performing a process for determining whether the number of gaming balls won in the variable winning device 65 and the number of ejected balls match, the initial value is reset to “0” (S1711 in FIG. 51). The probability variation passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is cut off. Further, it is set to 0 in the initialized state.

  The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the detection opening 65a1 (see FIG. 4) provided in the variable winning a prize device 65, it is incremented by 1 and updated (S1673 in FIG. 50). .. On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes (the value of the prize count counter 203j) and the number of discharged prizes (the total value of the discharge count counter 203s and the probability variation passage counter 203i) become one. After it is discriminated whether it is done, it is reset to the initial value "0". The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. Further, it is set to 0 in the initialized state.

  The operation counter 203k is a counter for measuring (counting) the time during which the flow path solenoid (probability variation solenoid) 65k is set to ON (excitation). In the present pachinko machine 10, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to on for 5 seconds based on the start of 14 rounds in the jackpot A, and the flow path solenoids 65k are set to 0.5 based on the start of 14 rounds in the jackpot B and the jackpot E. Set to on for seconds. In the operation counter 203k, the jackpot A is set with a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds as start data for 14 rounds, and the jackpot B is set with a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds (S1642 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, in the process of S1679 of the winning process (FIG. 50, S1632) executed by the MPU 2011 of the main controller 110, the value is decremented by 1 and updated. Further, based on the fact that the value of the operation counter 203k is determined to be 0, the flow passage solenoid 65k is set to OFF. The operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and in the initialized state, the initial value 0 is set. In this way, by setting the operation counter 203k and controlling the passage solenoid 65k, the winning of the probability variation switch 65e3 can be controlled according to the jackpot type.

  The notification counter 203m is a counter for determining the timing of outputting a notification effect (in the present embodiment, a sound "Look at the liquid crystal") for attracting the player's attention. In the present embodiment, the notification counter 203m corresponding to one second is set at the end timing of the twelfth round (10 winnings in the variable winning device 65 or 30 seconds have passed). The notification counter 203m is updated by being decremented by 1 by the processing of S1664 of the notification processing (FIG. 49, S1631) of the main control device 110. Based on the notification counter 203m becoming 0, the notification command output to the voice lamp control device 113 is set. Upon receipt of this command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the above-described processing for outputting the voice.

  With this configuration, the voice "Look at the liquid crystal" is output before the start of the 14th round when the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, so that the player can display the third symbol display device corresponding to the liquid crystal. Look at 81. Here, in the 13th round of the jackpot game, the character of "girl" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the character "attention", which is a notification prompting the player to see the third symbol display device 81, is displayed. It is displayed. In the 14th round, the passage solenoid 65k operates, so if the player pays close attention to the operation, the jackpot type being executed is determined. In order to keep the player expecting that the probability variation game state ST3 is given until the end of the jackpot game, the movement of the switching member 65h (see FIG. 6A) is made invisible to the player. Notification performance is being performed. However, when the 13th round is finished, the player may see the switching member 65h during the interval display, so during the interval period, a notification is given to watch the third symbol display device 81 by voice. The notification effect is executed. As a result, after the interval effect is executed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the displayed contents, and it is possible to divert the player's attention from the operation of the switching member 65h.

  In the present embodiment, by notifying the third symbol display device 81 to be shown, the switching member 65h is configured to divert the player's attention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and variable winning is performed before the 14th round is started. The device 65 may be informed to hold the player's hand so that the movement of the switching member 65h is hidden by the player's hand. Further, the present invention is not limited to the third symbol display device 81, but may be configured to divert the player's attention by notifying the player of the decorative lamp 34 or the like so that the player can see. Furthermore, the player may be distracted by displaying a three-dimensional code or the like during 13 rounds and giving a notification prompting the user to read it with a mobile phone. In the present embodiment, the distraction is set to the longest time (5 seconds from the start of 14 rounds) until the operation of the switching member 65h ends. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem in which it is determined whether the jackpot A, the jackpot C, the jackpot D, the jackpot B, or the jackpot E is determined by the notification time.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203n is a flag indicating that the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, it means that the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning a prize device 65 is set from the open state to the closed state in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203o described later is incremented by 1 and updated (see S1632 in FIG. 50). The remaining ball timer 203o is a counter for determining the time after the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed, and for determining whether or not the time required for discharging the game ball in the variable winning a prize device 65 has elapsed. Is the counter.

  The remaining ball timer 203o is a time required for discharging the game ball won in the variable winning device 65 when the preset round 1 is finished and the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed. Is a counter for determining whether or not has elapsed. In the present embodiment, the time required until the gaming balls won in the variable winning device 65 are discharged is 2 seconds, and in the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds in advance is the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203o. Is set as. Based on the upper limit value (3 seconds in this embodiment) of the remaining ball timer 203o, it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the variable winning device 65 and the number of dischargings thereof match ( 51 S1707). If they do not match, an error command is set and the fact is notified. Therefore, the fact that the game ball is clogged in the variable winning device 65 can be notified at an early stage. Therefore, illegally leave the game ball in the variable winning device 65, give a shock or the like at the start timing of the 14th round, and make the game ball reach the switching member 65h earlier than it actually is, and hit the jackpot B and jackpot E. Even in this case, it is possible to suppress the fraud of passing the game ball through the probability variation switch 65e3.

  If the winning number and the discharging number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set even if the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3. The configuration may not be set to ON. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the probability variation gaming state ST3 from being illegally given.

  The probability variation valid flag 203p is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 after the passage solenoid 65k is set to off. When the probability variation valid flag 203p is set to ON, the game ball that has flown into the special discharge port 65e2 (see FIG. 6A) is based on that the flow path solenoid 65k is ON, and the probability variation switch 65e3. It is less than the time required to pass through. That is, it indicates that it is a normal period that the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3.

  The probability variation valid timer 203r is a counter for counting the time after the above-mentioned probability variation validity flag 203p is set to ON. After the passage solenoid 65k is turned off by the probability variation valid timer 203r, it is possible to determine the period required for normally passing through the probability variation switch 65e3. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball that has entered the special discharge port 65e2 to pass the probability change switch 65e3 is 1 second. The upper limit value of the probability variation valid timer 203r is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even if the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed thereafter, it is determined to be invalid and not to be passed.

  As a result, in a state where the switching member 65h is not guided to the special discharge port 65e2 illegally, the player can enter the special discharge port 65e2 to pass the game ball to the probability variation switch 65h, or play the piano wire from below the probability variation switch 65h. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud that pushes up a sphere and allows it to pass, or causes a magnetic sensor to be erroneously detected as passing by a radio wave.

  The discharge number counter 203s is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (see FIG. 6A) in one round. The discharge number counter 203s is reset to 0 which is an initial value after the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 65 and the discharge number are determined (S1711 in FIG. 51).

  The time saving counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time saving game state ST1h. The time saving medium counter 203t is set to 100 when the probability variation setting flag is off at the end of the jackpot game. That is, in the present embodiment, when the probability variation game state ST3 is not set after the big hit game, the time shift game state ST1h is repeated 100 times.

  The jackpot flag 203u indicates that the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired based on winning in the first starting opening 630, the right first starting opening 631 or the second starting opening 640 is a hit at the start of fluctuation. It is a flag that is set to ON when it is determined. Also, when the jackpot game is over, it is set to off. In addition, it is configured with a flag that can identify which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is a big hit corresponding to the symbol. Specifically, it is composed of 2 bits, the big hit flag 203u is turned on for the first special symbol by "10", and the big hit flag 203u is set as on for the second special symbol by "01", When "00", the big hit flag 203u is set as OFF.

  Here, the jackpot flag 203u is commonly used by the first special symbol and the second special symbol, so at the start of fluctuation, one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to ON first. When it is, the big hit flag 203u is not overwritten even if the other lottery result is a big hit, and the other lottery result is processed in the same manner as the miss. Thereby, with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is possible to perform processing so that the variable display which is a big hit is not executed at the same time.

  That is, when the variation display that is a big hit is started with one of the special symbols, the variation display that is a big hit is not started with the other special symbol, and only the deviation mode is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are common to the big hit flag 203u, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol each have an independent big hit flag. Then, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be simultaneously configured to perform a variable display that is a big hit. With such a configuration, during the probability variation gaming state ST3, the first special symbol, even if the fluctuation display of the big hit B, big hit E is started, the fluctuation time is set to be long, and the second special By configuring the symbols to be easily drawn in a short variation time, it is possible to configure the second special symbol to easily win the jackpots before the jackpot B is started. Therefore, by executing an effect that informs the player of the time until the jackpot B is started (that is, the period until the probability variation gaming state ST3 is ended), the player is rushed to win the jackpot with the second special symbol. It is possible to execute an effect in which a game is performed in an attempt to win the prize. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a fresh effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v is a flag indicating that the jackpot game of the second special symbol is started to be executed while the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. In S1004 of the second special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 36, S207) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later, it is set to ON. Further, in the processing of S611 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 29, S204), it is set to OFF.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is a flag indicating that the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed while the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In S605 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 29, S204) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later, it is set to ON. Further, in the process of S1011 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 36, S207), it is set to OFF.

  The look-ahead pending storage area 203x stores the judgment information such as the hit/miss judgment result for the holding balls stored in the first special symbol holding sphere storing area 203a and the second special symbol holding sphere storing area 203b, the jackpot type, and the variation type. It is a storage area that is stored.

  The small hit flag 203y is a flag indicating that the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a small hit. This small hit flag is configured to be able to identify which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the small hit. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not small hits at the same time (if one is a small hit, the other is out). Therefore, this small hit flag 203y does not become a value indicating that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are small hits.

  The time saving flag 203a2 is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state of a special symbol (electric power support state, high probability game state of normal symbol). If the value of the time saving flag 203a2 is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol time saving state (electric power support state), and if the value of the time saving flag 203a2 is off, the pachinko machine 10 is a special symbol normally. Indicates that it is in a state (ordinary symbol low probability state). The time saving flag 203a2 has an initial value set to OFF, and is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game of the jackpot type with electric support in the ending process (see FIG. 48) executed at the end of the jackpot game. (See S1655 in FIG. 48). Then, in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 41), the game state is referred to for determining whether it is a time saving (electric support) state (see S1208 and S1214 in FIG. 41), and the next jackpot game is started. 29 (S607 in FIG. 29, S1007 in FIG. 36), or when the number of lottery for special symbols in the time saving (electricity support) state reaches a predetermined number (see S628 in FIG. 30), it is set to OFF.

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

  Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the large opening solenoid for driving to open and close the specific winning opening 65a and the electric accessory. A solenoid 209 such as a solenoid for driving the MPU 201 is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to them via the input/output port 205.

  The I/O port 205 is connected with various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasing switch (122 in FIG. 3) circuit 253, which will be described later, provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is Various processes are executed based on the signal output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O and the like are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input/output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

  The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch handle 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated) on condition that the operation handle is not operated. The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variable display ( This is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as (variable display). The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory.

  An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the vibration sensor 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input/output port 225.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, it is displayed in the winning order displayed in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. The voice output device 226 is controlled so that the displayed pending symbol display is rearranged and displayed in the variable display start order, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

  A vibration sensor (not shown) is attached to the back surface of the game board 213. In the pachinko machine 10, since the winning in the starting opening is an important factor that determines the game state, it is necessary to prevent the winning from intentionally entering the winning opening by changing the flow of the ball by vibration. Therefore, when it is determined from the output of the vibration sensor 228 that the pachinko machine 10 is vibrated by the player or the like, an error command for notifying the vibration error is transmitted to the display control device 114. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 determines an error in accordance with the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and issues an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113>
Next, details of the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 21A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. At least a variation pattern selection table 222a is set in the ROM 222.

  The fluctuation pattern selection table 222a is a selection table for determining the detailed contents of the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110. This fluctuation pattern selection table 222a corresponds to the fluctuation time and the rough fluctuation pattern (reach, non-reach, etc.) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110, and a plurality of kinds of fluctuation contents (for example, fluctuations). One variation content is determined from the reach variation patterns of different display content of the reach A to D configured with the same time and the same determination result.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 has a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol holding sphere number counter 223c, a second special symbol holding sphere number counter 223d, a special figure 2 variation start flag 223e, and a special figure 2 variation start flag 223f. The special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i, the effect counter 223j, the subordinate state setting area 223k, and the other memory area 223z are provided at least.

  The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until a process for the command is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 46) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination processing is executed. , The command is analyzed, and the process according to the command is performed.

  The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area) for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, and in each of these areas. Stores winning information, respectively. Based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result or the like of the reserved balls before the fluctuation starts.

  The 1st special symbol reservation sphere number counter 223c is the same as the special symbol 1 reservation sphere counter 203d of the main controller 110, the variation effect (variation) performed on the 1st symbol display device 37 (and the 3rd symbol display device 81). It is a display), and is a counter for counting the maximum number of times (4) the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable effect held in the main controller 110. That is, the number of holding balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the holding ball number command output from the main controller 110.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b manages the holding ball number. It has become.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of balls to be held in the variable display is added by entering the first starting opening 630 or the right first starting opening 631, or in the special symbol in the main controlling device 110. When the variable display is executed and the number of holding balls is subtracted, a holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d of the main control device 110 is acquired from the holding ball number command. The special symbol 1 is stored in the reserved ball number counter 223b. Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, according to the reservation ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, since the value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 223c is updated, the first special symbol of the main control device 110. The value can be updated in synchronization with the number of reserved balls counter 203d.

  The value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 223c is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and also holds the first special symbol after storing. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the sphere number counter 223b, a display reserved sphere number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  In the display control device 114, when receiving this display holding sphere number command, the value of the holding sphere number indicated by the command, that is, the holding sphere for the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that several symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 223b is changed in value in synchronization with the special symbol holding sphere counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere numbers displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved sphere counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of holding balls whose variable display is held.

  The second special symbol holding ball number counter 223d, based on the holding ball number command output from the main control unit 110, the number of holding balls corresponding to the second special symbol, to the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c However, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. Is set to. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. Is set to. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON when the first stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the first special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to ON when the second stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the second special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The effect counter 223j is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, selecting an addition time from the addition time selection table 222b, and the like. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198. Each time the main process is executed, it is incremented by 1 and updated.

  Data corresponding to the status command output from the main control device 110 is set in the slave status setting area 223k. Based on the data set in the sub-state setting area 223h, the current gaming state can also be determined by the voice lamp control device 113. The state setting command is output from the main control unit 110 even when the power is turned on, and the backup game state can be discriminated by the voice lamp control unit 113.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3 and 122) (see FIG. 3). The RAM erasing switch (122 in FIG. 3) circuit 253 is provided. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout controller 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. From the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

  The RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 has the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) (see FIG. 3) pressed when the power is turned on (the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122)). In this case, it is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

  The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes control processing such as detection of winning of special symbols and normal symbols, and various lottery such as selection of winning and variation patterns for the winning. Therefore, the control load of the MPU 201 is large, and in order to stably execute the control of the pachinko machine 10, as in the present embodiment, a lottery on whether or not to set the game operation suggestion setting is performed as a sub-control. The control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced by making the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 corresponding to the device perform the control.

  The control boards for the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113 are covered with a box (box) which is called a board box and is composed of a transparent plastic base member and a lid member. The substrate box is crimped by a member for preventing fraud called a "sealing member" so that the base member and the lid member cannot be easily separated from each other. Generally, when the base member and the lid member are fitted to each other, the sealing member inserts a pin-shaped sealing member into a through hole provided through a part of the base member and the lid member (or Therefore, it is difficult to separate the base member and the lid member from each other unless there is a method of leaving an opening mark such as breaking the member forming the through hole or breaking the sealing member. There is.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 has an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a ROM 234, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp controller 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. An output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via the bus line 241. Further, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a model having a completely same specification as the symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if it is a different model having a different winning probability for the jackpot or the number of prize balls paid out in one jackpot. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the ROM 234, and the image controller 237 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described. First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, various processes are executed according to the control program stored in the ROM 234.

  As described above, the ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the data of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the ROM 234 after releasing the system reset via the bus line 240, and executes the control program stored in the ROM 234. The ROM 234 is connected to the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the ROM 234 to the work RAM 233. The MPU 231 outputs the image data transferred to the work RAM 233 to the third symbol display device 81 at any time, and controls the display of the third symbol display device 81.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are configured such that the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be simultaneously varied. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37, of the two 7-segment LEDs of the 7-segment display 37b, the left 7-segment LED, the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol is executed, the right 7 In the segment LED, the variable display corresponding to the second special symbol is executed.

<Regarding control processing executed by main controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 22 to 51. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, a main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started regularly (in this embodiment, at an interval of 2 msec). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of description, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process. The main processing will be described.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a regular process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first random type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, each of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 is incremented by 1, and the counter values thereof are maximum values (in the present embodiment, When each reaches 299, 99, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, as a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 and the like is executed (S104), and thereafter. A start winning process associated with winning (start winning) of the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, and the second starting port 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process (S104) and the starting winning process (S105) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After performing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S106), and the first normal symbol starting port 67a or the second normal symbol starting port 67b. Through-gate passage processing is executed in association with the passage of the sphere in (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process (S106) and the through gate passage process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42. After the through gate passage process is executed, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a, and that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated, and the ball is fired. Is a process for determining whether to turn on or off. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23, a special symbol variation process (S104) which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). Special symbol variation process (FIG. 23, S104), the first special symbol and the second special symbol, based on each counter value acquired, various determinations and determinations are made, and the determined variation display by predetermined control. In the mode, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are controlled to enable variable display at the same time, or control to stop and display in the display mode showing the determination result is executed. Hereinafter, the special symbol variation process (FIG. 23, S104) will be described.

  In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 23, S104), first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot game is in progress (S201). If it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S201: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the first special symbol is being displayed in variation (S202). When it is determined that the variation display of the first special symbol is being performed (S202: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process is executed (S204). In the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S204), when the prescribed fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the variable display has elapsed, the process of stopping the variable display with the symbol showing the determination result of the first lottery game is executed. To be done. Further, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S204), the second special symbol is variably stopped by a symbol indicating a big hit (or a small hit), and a big hit game (or a small hit game) of the second lottery game is executed. In this case, a process of forcibly stopping the first special symbol that is being variably displayed is executed. In addition, when the second special symbol is variably stopped in a symbol indicating a big hit (or a small hit), the variation of the first special symbol that is being variably displayed may be interrupted (temporarily stopped). The details of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S204) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not being variably displayed (S202: No), the first special symbol variation start process is executed (S203). In the first special symbol variation start process (S203), if the hold data (various counter values) is stored in the first special symbol holding sphere number storage area 203a, the jackpot determination and the variation pattern selection based on the hold data The process is executed. Further, in the first special symbol variation start process (S203), when the lottery result is a big hit (or a small hit), the big hit flag 203u (or a small hit flag 203y) is set to ON. As a result, during execution of the variable display based on the big hit (or the small hit) of the first special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled so as to be a variable display. The first special symbol variation start process (S203) will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. 24 to 28. When the second special symbol is variably stopped with a symbol indicating a big hit (or a small hit), if it is configured to suspend (temporarily stop) the variation of the first special symbol that is being displayed in a variability, the interruption ( It may be configured to perform the process of resuming the variable display of the first special symbol that is (temporarily stopped).

  After the first special symbol variation start process (S203) is executed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is being variably displayed (S205). When it is determined that the second special symbol is being variably displayed (S205: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop process (S207) is executed. The second special symbol variation stop process (S207) will be described in detail later, but like the first special symbol variation stop process (S204), when the prescribed variation time of the second special symbol that is being varied has elapsed. , The process of stopping the variable display with the symbol showing the determination result of the second lottery game is executed. In addition, the first special symbol is variably stopped in the symbol showing the big hit (or the small hit), when the big hit game (or the small hit game) of the first lottery game is executed, the second special symbol in the variable display is displayed. The process of forcibly stopping is executed. In addition, when the first special symbol is variably stopped by a symbol indicating a big hit (or a small hit), the variation of the second special symbol being variably displayed may be interrupted (temporarily stopped). Details of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S207) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the second special symbol is not being variably displayed (S205: No), the second special symbol variation start process is executed (S206). In the second special symbol fluctuation start process (S206), if the holding data (various counter values) is stored in the second special symbol holding number storage area 203b, the jackpot determination and the variation pattern selection based on the holding data. The process is executed. In the second special symbol variation start process (S206), when the lottery result is a big hit (or a small hit), the big hit flag 203u (or a small hit flag 203y) is set to ON. Thereby, during the execution of the variable display based on the big hit (or small hit) of the second special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol is controlled so as to be a variable display. The second special symbol variation start process (S206) will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 35. In addition, when the first special symbol is changed and stopped with a symbol showing a big hit (or a small hit), if it is configured to suspend the fluctuation of the second special symbol that is being displayed (temporarily stopped), it is interrupted ( It may be configured to perform the process of resuming the variable display of the second special symbol that is (temporarily stopped).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the first special symbol variation start process (S203) which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 22, S104) will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S203).

  In the first special symbol fluctuation start process (FIG. 24, S203), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding counter 203d is acquired (S301). It is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S302). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S303). .. The data stored in the holding areas 1 to 4 of the first special symbol holding number storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side (S304). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of holding area 1→execution area, holding area 2→holding area 1, holding area 3→holding area 2, holding area 4→holding area 3.

  Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S305). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 24, S305) will be described in detail later, but based on the value of the first per random number counter C1 shifted to the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), Based on the game state that has been set, the jackpot determination of whether or not it is a jackpot is executed.

  Next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S306). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306) will be described later in detail, but the result of the hit/miss judgment based on the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). Is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on each counter value based on the.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S305) which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 23, S203) will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S305).

  In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 25, S305), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S401). It is determined whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state ST3 (during probability variation) (S402). Whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state ST3 is determined by whether or not the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON. If it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is on (that is, the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state ST3 (during probability variation)) (S402: Yes), the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 15A) is displayed. Based on the result, it is determined whether or not the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the jackpot determination value for high probability, and the lottery result is acquired (S403). On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is off (that is, the game state is the low-probability game state (not in probability variation)) (S402: No), the first random number table 202a (FIG. 15(a)). Based on the reference), it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the big probability determination value for low probability, and the lottery result is acquired (S404).

  When the process of S403 or S404 is finished, it is determined whether the big hit flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y is ON (S405). Here, when the big hit flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y is set to ON, it indicates that the change to be the big hit or the small hit has been started in the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, the big hit flag 203u (and the small hit flag 203y) is commonly used by the first special symbol and the second special symbol, so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously a big hit. It is configured so that the following fluctuations are not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a problem that a big hit (or a small hit) is continuously generated in a short time and the loss on the gaming shop side becomes excessively large. In addition, when the variation to be a big hit or a small hit in the second special symbol is started, the lottery of the first special symbol is not performed (skipping the processing of S402 to S404), and the first special symbol The variable display based on the deviation (special figure 1 deviation change process (S410)) may be executed. As a result, the lottery process (the processes of S402 to S404) can be skipped, and the processing load can be reduced.

  In S405, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203u and the small hit flag 203y are off, that is, when it is determined that the change to be the big hit or the small hit in the second special symbol is not started (S405: No). ), it is determined whether the lottery result executed in the process of S403 or S404 is a big hit (S406). When it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S406: Yes), the big hit flag 203u is set to ON for the first special symbol (S407). After that, the lottery result of the first special symbol (special diagram 1 lottery result) is set as a jackpot (S408), and the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set as the value of the jackpot type counter C1. It is set based on the game state (S409). Then, this process is completed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S405, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y for the second special symbol is ON (S405: Yes), or the lottery result is determined to be missed in the process of S406. In that case (S406: No), the special figure 1 deviation process is executed (S410). Note that this special figure 1 deviation variation process (S410) will be described with reference to FIG. 26, but when the lottery result of the first special symbol is out, setting of the deviation symbol or the like is executed.

  In this way, even if the lottery result based on the value of the first winning random number C1 actually acquired is a big hit, the big hit flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y has already been set to ON, that is, the By the two special symbols, when the variation to be a big hit or a small hit is started, the setting to be forced out is executed with the first special symbol. As a result, in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a change that is a big hit (or a small hit) is not executed at the same time, and a big hit (or a small hit) is continuously made in a short period of time. It is possible to suppress a problem that the fluctuation starts and the damage on the side of the game shop becomes excessively large. In addition, a big hit (or a small hit) is executed simultaneously or successively, so that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player is puzzled.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured such that the variation that is a big hit is not executed at the same time, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be configured to be executed simultaneously. In this case, the special jackpot flag may be set for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, when the jackpot game is executed with the other special symbol, in the variation of the one special symbol, the measurement of the variation time is temporarily stopped, and the special symbol is fluctuated in a pseudo manner. It is conceivable to make a temporary stop.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special figure 1 deviation variation process (S410) which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 24, S203) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 deviation process (S410). In the special figure 1 deviation process (FIG. 26, S410), first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y is on for the second special symbol (S412). When it is determined that the big hit flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y is turned on (S412: Yes), the first special symbol display device 37 is set to the off symbol of the first special symbol (S416). Then, this process is completed. In this way, when the big hit or the small hit is set in the second special symbol, the first special symbol is forcibly set to the off symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously changed to a big hit or a small hit.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S411, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203u and the small hit flag 203y are off for the second special symbol (S411: No), whether the lottery result is a small hit, the present (S412) based on the gaming state and the small hitting random number table 202b (see FIG. 15B). In the process of S412, if it is determined that it is not a small hit (S412: No), it means that the lottery result is out of order, so the process of S416 is executed and this process is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S412, when it is determined that the small hit (S412: Yes), the small hit flag 203y is set to ON for the first special symbol (S413). The lottery result of the first special symbol is set to small hit (S414), and the small hit symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S415). Then, this process is completed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306) which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 24, S203) will be described. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S306).

  In the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (FIG. 27, S306), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 25, S305), whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot, that is, It is determined whether or not the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S501). Here, whether or not it is a big hit is determined by whether or not the big hit flag 203u is on for the first special symbol. This big hit flag 203u is set to ON in the process of S407 in the first special symbol big hit determination process (see FIG. 25) described above.

  In the processing of S501, if it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S501: Yes), the current gaming state (normal gaming state ST1, latent probability variation gaming state ST2, probability variation gaming state ST3, A variation pattern selection table 202e corresponding to the time saving game state ST1h) is set (S502). The jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIGS. 16A to 16C) corresponding to the set gaming state and the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2. (S503). A variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern selection table 203e set in the process of S502 and the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S504). The special figure 1 variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern selected in the processing of S504 (S505). Then, the process of S507 is executed.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S501, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out (that is, the jackpot flag 203u for the first special symbol is off) (S501: No), the special symbol 1 is out. A variation pattern selection process is executed (S506).

  Here, the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection processing (S506) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection processing (S506). In the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection processing (FIG. 28, S506), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit (S511). Here, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203y is set to ON for the first special symbol (S511). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203y is ON (S511: Yes), a small hit variation pattern is set (S512). In the case of a small hit, one type of variation pattern is set in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Specifically, a variation pattern with a variation time of 3000 ms (3 seconds) is set. When the process of S512 is finished, the special figure 1 variation pattern command indicating the small hit is set (S513). Then, this process is completed.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S511, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a small hit (that is, it is out) (S511: No), the variation pattern selection table (figure corresponding to the current game state) 17 and FIG. 18) are set (S514). From the set fluctuation pattern selection table, the deviation fluctuation pattern is selected based on the judgment result (miss) and the value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 (S515). The special figure 1 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern (S516). Then, this process is completed.

  27, the description will be continued. After the processing of S505 or the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection processing (FIG. 28, S506) is executed, the processing of S507 is executed. In the process of S507, a state command indicating the current game state is set (S507). Then, this process is completed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the first special symbol variation stop process (S204) which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 22, S104) will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S204).

  In the first special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 29, S204), first, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the variation based on the first special symbol that is being executed (S601). In the processing of S601, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the variation based on the first special symbol that is being executed (S601: Yes), the big hit flag 203u is turned on for the first special symbol (special symbol 1). It is determined whether or not is set (S602). When it is determined that the big hit flag 203u is set to ON for the first special symbol (S602: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to ON (S603). Although illustration is omitted, when the processing of S603 is executed, a special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is turned on is set.

  When the process of S603 is completed, the special figure 1 stop type command indicating the set stop type is set (S604). Then, the start of the jackpot game based on the selected jackpot type is set (S605). After that, the time saving medium counter 203t is reset to 0 which is the initial value (S606), and the time saving flag 203a2 is set to OFF (S607). Next, the special figure 1 decision command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to stop the first special symbol is set (S608). A process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is being variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 37 is executed (S609), and this process is ended.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S601, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variation based on the first special symbol that is being executed (S601: No), then whether the special figure 1 variation stop flag 203v is on or not. It is determined (S610). When it is determined that the special figure 1 variation stop flag 203y is off in the process of S610 (S610: No), the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v is turned on in the process of S610 (S610 of FIG. 29), it is the case where the second special symbol is stopped by the big hit or the small hit, so that it is being executed. In order to stop the variation based on the first special symbol, the processing of S611 and S612 is executed. In the process of S611, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v is set to OFF, and the process proceeds to S612.

  In S612, special figure 1 disengagement stop processing for stopping and displaying the first special symbol in a disengagement mode is executed. In the process of S602 described above, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is off for special figure 1 (S602: No), similarly, the special figure for stopping and displaying the first special symbol in a disengaged manner 1 disengagement stop processing is executed (S612). When the process of S612 ends, this process ends.

  In this way, in the first special symbol stop process (S204), when the prescribed fluctuation time of the first special symbol that is being variably displayed has passed (S601: Yes), a symbol showing the determination result of the first lottery game The process of stopping the variable display (S603 to S609 or S612) is executed. Further, when the second special symbol is stopped by a symbol showing a big hit (or a small hit) and the big hit game (or the small hit game) of the second lottery game is executed (S610: Yes), the variable display is being performed. A process (S612) of forcibly stopping the first special symbol is executed. In addition, when the first special symbol is variably stopped with a symbol indicating a big hit (or a small hit) (S610: Yes), the variation of the second special symbol that is being variably displayed is suspended (temporarily stopped). You may.

  Here, the special figure 1 disengagement stop processing (S612) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 disengagement stop processing (S612). In the special figure 1 disengagement stop processing (S612), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203y is set to ON for the first special symbol (S621). The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to ON (S622). Then, the special 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to ON (indicating that the special figure 2 is compulsorily stopped by fluctuation) is set (S623). The start of the small hit game is set (S624). Then, the process of S625 is executed.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S621, when it is determined that the small hit flag 203y is off for the first special symbol (S621: No), since the lottery result of the first special symbol is out, S622. To S624, the process of S624 is skipped and the process proceeds to S625. In the processing of S625, it is determined whether or not the time saving/medium counter 203t is greater than 0 (S625). In the processing of S625, when it is determined that the time saving medium counter 203t is larger than 0 (S625: Yes), the time saving medium counter 203t is updated by subtracting 1 (S626), and the time saving medium counter 203t after the subtraction is set to 0. It is determined whether or not (S627). In the processing of S627, when it is determined that the time saving medium counter 203t is 0 (S627: Yes), this is the case where the time saving gaming state ST1h ends, so the time saving flag 203a2 is set to OFF (S628), The process shifts to S629.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S627, when it is determined that the time saving intermediate counter 203t after subtraction is not 0 (greater than 0) (S627; No), it is the case where the time saving gaming state ST1h continues, so the processing of S628 is executed. The process is skipped and the process proceeds to S629.

  In the process of S629, the special figure 1 confirmation command is set (S629). A process of variably stopping the first special symbol that is variably displayed (dynamically displayed) on the first special symbol display device 37 is executed (S630). Then, this process is executed. Here, returning to FIG. 29, after the special figure 1 disconnection stopping process (S608) is executed, this process is ended.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time, but if the first special symbol is stopped by the lottery result of the big hit or the small hit, the second special symbol is displayed. The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to ON so as to execute the process of forcibly changing the special symbol. On the other hand, as will be described later, when the second special symbol is to stop fluctuating due to the lottery result of the big hit or the small hit, the special symbol 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v is set to ON, and the fluctuation stop of the first special symbol Forced to run. As a result, the simultaneous variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be efficiently executed.

  In addition, in one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, if the variation to be a big hit or a small hit has already been started, in the other special symbol, as a result of the winning/disapproval judgment of being forced out. The variable display is started. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the big hit and the small hit from being continuously and forcibly executed, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the gambling performance becomes too high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the second special symbol variation start process (S206) which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 22, S104) will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation start process (S206).

  In the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 31, S206), the above-described first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 24, S203), the first special symbol holding ball number of each process from S301 to S306 Counter 203d, the value of the first special symbol holding sphere number counter (N1), the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S305), the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (S306) In each processing of S701 to S706, the second special symbol reservation ball number counter 203e, the value of the second special symbol reservation ball number counter (N2), the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S705), the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S706) is the same except that it is changed, so the description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S705) which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 23, S206) will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S705).

  In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 32, S705), the following points differ from the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 25, S305). In the process of S801 corresponding to the process of S401, the point that the first special symbol reservation ball execution area (not shown) is changed to the second special symbol reservation ball execution area (not shown), and the process of S408 In the corresponding process of S808, the special figure 1 (first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 (second special symbol), and in the processes of S809 and S810 corresponding to the processes of S409 and S410, the first They differ in that the special symbol is changed to the second special symbol. Since other points are the same, description thereof will be omitted. In addition, the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation processing (S810 in FIG. 32, FIG. 33) executed in the second special symbol jackpot determination processing (refer to FIG. 32) is also the same as the above-mentioned special figure 1 deviation fluctuation processing (refer to FIG. 26). Since the same processing as is executed for the second special symbol, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S706) which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 23, S206) will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S706).

  The second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 34, S706) differs from the above-mentioned first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 27, S306) in the following points. In the process of S901 corresponding to the process of S501, the special figure 1 lottery result (lottery result of the first special symbol) is changed to the special map 2 lottery result (lottery result of the second special symbol), and S506 to S507. In each process of S906 to S907 corresponding to each process up to, the difference is that the special figure 1 variation pattern command (variation pattern command of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 variation pattern command. Since other points are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the second special symbol variation stop process (S207) which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 22, S104) will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S207). The second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S207) differs from the above-described first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 29, S204) in the following points. In the process of S1002 corresponding to the process of S602, "for special figure 1" is changed to "for special figure 2" and the process of S1003 corresponding to the process of S603 The change stop flag is changed to the special figure 1 change stop flag, and the point that the special figure 1 stop type command is changed to the special figure 2 stop type command in the process of S1004 corresponding to the process of S604. In the processes of S1009 and S1010 corresponding to the process of S610, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag is changed to the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag, and the special figure 1 disengagement stop process is special in the process of S1011 corresponding to S611. The difference is that it is changed to the disengagement stop processing in FIG. Since other points are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

  Further, the special figure 2 disengagement stop processing (S1011 of FIG. 36, FIG. 37) executed in the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 36) is similarly performed, and the special figure 1 disengagement stop processing described above (see FIG. 30). Since the same processing as is executed for the second special symbol, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In this way, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed at the same time. Can be made Therefore, the lottery game with more special symbols can be executed within the predetermined time, and the probability that the jackpot is awarded to the player within the predetermined time can be increased. Therefore, the player can efficiently play the game.

  Even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time and the lottery game is executed, if the jackpot game occurs on one of the first or second special symbols, the other Since the variable display of the special symbols is temporarily stopped, the player can concentrate on the big hit game and play the game.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when it is a big hit or a small hit stop display in either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be variably displayed while being temporarily stopped or the measurement of the variation time is interrupted. In such a case, the special symbols that have been temporarily stopped are stopped in a display mode or a notification mode that allows the player to know that they are temporarily stopped, so the player loses the lottery game that was in the middle of variable display. It is possible to grasp that it is not and play the jackpot game with peace of mind.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, a start winning process (S105) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 22) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (FIG. 38, S105) determines whether the game ball has won in any of the first starting opening 630, the right first starting opening 631, and the second starting opening 640. Up to the upper limit number (up to four in each of the first starting opening 630 and the right first starting opening 631 and the second starting opening 640), the acquired respective counter values, the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol This is a process of storing in the reserved ball storage area 203b. Further, each counter value acquired based on the reserved sphere is stored in the first special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203b, respectively, the first special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a Alternatively, based on each counter value stored in each of the second special symbol holding sphere storage areas 203b, a process of predicting a win/fail judgment result, a selected variation pattern, or the like is executed in advance. The start winning process (FIG. 38, S105) will be described below.

  In the starting winning process (FIG. 38, S105), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won (starting winning) the first starting port 630 which is the first starting port or the right first starting port 631 (S1101). Here, the winning of the first start opening 630 or the right first start opening 631 is detected. If it is determined that the ball has won the first starting opening 630 or the right first starting opening 631 (there is a starting winning) (S1101: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is It is acquired (S1102). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1103). It is determined whether the number is less than 4 which is the upper limit value of the reserved number for the first starting port 630 and the right first starting port 631 (that is, whether the reserved number is not stored up to the upper limit value). When it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1103: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding number counter 203d (1104). A reserve ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the reserve number is set (S1105). Various counter values, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the variable type counter CS1 each value is read (acquired) from the counter buffer, the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203a of the RAM203 Are stored (stored) in the corresponding storage areas of the number of reserved balls (S1106).

  Next, the first prefetching process is executed (S1107). The first look-ahead process (S1107) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 39, but it is determined whether or not there is a win/fail judgment result from each counter value newly stored in the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, and a fluctuation pattern that is determined. A process for determining the stop type and the like is executed.

  Next, regarding each processing of S1108 to S1114, with respect to winning of the game ball to the first starting opening (first starting opening 630 and right first starting opening 631) executed in each processing of S1101 to S1107 The detailed description is omitted because the same processing as the processing performed by the second starting opening 640 is the same as the processing performed by the second starting opening 640.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the first prefetching process (S1107) which is one process of the start winning process (FIG. 38, S105) will be described. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing this first prefetch processing (S1107).

  In the first prefetching process (FIG. 39, S1107), first, various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area 203a, that is, a first random number counter C1 and a first per type counter C2. Each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is read (S1121). The read data is stored in the area having the smallest winning order among the empty storage areas of the prefetch pending storage area 203x (S1122).

  The judgment result is judged based on the data stored in the read-ahead reserved storage area 203x. In addition, the hit/no decision result determined here is determined in the case of winning in the normal gaming state ST1. Since the variable time is set to be variable depending on the number of holdings, the timing to start the fluctuation cannot be discriminated between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and therefore the accurate gaming state at the start of the fluctuation cannot be discriminated. Therefore, it is possible to accurately determine the hit/miss determination result only when the value of the first random number counter C1 which has the same jackpot determination value in both the high-probability gaming state and the low-probability gaming state is "7". Therefore, in the processing of S1123, it is determined whether or not it is determined as a hit during the normal gaming state ST1.

  In the process of S1123, when it is determined that the hit/non-win determination result is a big hit (S1123: Yes), the first special symbol is a big hit, and the first winning command also showing the big hit type is set. Then, this process is completed. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1123 that the winning/disapproval determination result is out (S1123: No), the first winning command indicating that the prefetch lottery result of the first special symbol is out of position is set (S1125). .. Then, this process is completed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game ball is won in the first starting opening (the first starting opening 630 or the right first starting opening 631) and newly stored, the information stored in the reserved storage is changed. Based on the result, the result of the judgment is judged before the fluctuation starts and the result is notified to the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, the display mode of the holding sphere is changed (for example, the color of the holding sphere is changed to a color different from the normal color) based on the result of the hit determination stored and held, or before the fluctuation starts. It is possible to display an announcement pattern or the like and execute an effect that suggests the win/fail judgment result to the player.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, in the case of prefetching, the winning/non-winning determination is determined as the normal gaming state ST1, but the present invention is not limited to this, the gaming state at the start of fluctuation is accurately determined, and the winning/non-winning determination is made based on the gaming state. It may be configured to execute. In this case, it is possible to make a determination by arranging not to change the selection of the variation pattern according to the number of reserved balls but to select a constant variation pattern regardless of the number of reserved balls at the start of the variation. When performing prefetching, the game state at the start of the variation can be determined by determining the variation order until the retention ball starts to vary based on the information stored in the reserve.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the second prefetching process (S1114) which is one process of the start winning process (FIG. 38, S105) will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the second prefetching process (S1114).

  The second prefetching process (FIG. 40, S1114) is based on the above-described first prefetching process (FIG. 39, S1107) winning the first starting opening (first starting opening 630 or right first starting opening 631). In contrast to the process of pre-reading the hold data in advance and making various determinations, the process of pre-reading the hold data based on winning the second start opening 640 in advance and making various determinations. Since the same processing is executed only with the difference, detailed description will be omitted.

  In the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously. When a variation display that is a big hit or a small hit is executed in one special symbol, the other special symbol is configured to be forced to be displayed as a variation display. Therefore, in the above-described first prefetching process or second prefetching process, when prefetching the lottery result, it may be configured to forcibly determine whether or not the lottery result is missed. To do so, for example, when pre-reading the lottery result of the first special symbol, the period (time) during which the dynamic display of the pre-reading lottery result is executed is calculated. Then, in the period in which the dynamic display is executed, it is only necessary to determine whether or not a variation that is a big hit or a small hit of the second special symbol is executed. In addition, when the lottery result is out of alignment, it is out regardless of the execution state of the second special symbol, so it may not be determined. As a result, the processing load due to the above determination can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, a normal symbol variation process (S106) which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display unit 88, the opening time of the electric accessory 632, and the like.

  In this normal symbol variation process (FIG. 41, S106), first, now, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting. (S1201). The normal symbol (second symbol) is in the middle of hitting, from the time when the second symbol display device 83 displays the hit to the middle of when the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 632 is being performed. When it is determined that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being hit (S1201: Yes), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hitting (S1201: No), it is determined whether or not the normal symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is being variably displayed (S1202). When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner (S1202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the normal symbol that is being executed on the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed ( S1222). The variable time here is a time preset by the processes of S1220 and S1221, which will be described later, before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 88.

  In the processing of S1222, if the variation time has not elapsed (S1222: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S1222, when it is determined that the variation time of the normally displayed variable symbol has elapsed (S1222: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S1223). .. In the process of S1223, the lottery of the normal symbol is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S1213, the "○" symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as the second symbol (lighting display). ) Is set to be. On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is out of order and the display mode at the time of disengagement is set by the process of S1218, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed (lit up) as the second symbol on the second symbol display device 83. Display) is set. By the processing of S1223, when the stop display is set, the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 ends, the processing of S1213, the display mode set by the processing of S1218, the stop symbol (second symbol) is The stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the two symbol display device 83.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the regular design lottery this time is a win (S1224). When it is determined that the normal symbol lottery result this time is a win (S1224: Yes), the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 632 is set (S1225). On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the regular design lottery this time is out (S1224: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1202, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not being displayed in a variably manner (S1202: No), the value of the ordinary symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (the number M of variably displayed holdings in the ordinary symbol) is acquired. (S1203).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S1204). When it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is 0 (S1204: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is not 0 (S1204: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S1205).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is shifted (S1206). In the process of S1206, the data stored in the normal symbol reserve 1 to the normal symbol reserve 4 of the normal symbol reserve sphere storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, normal symbol hold 1 → execution area, ordinary symbol hold 2 → ordinary symbol hold 1, ordinary symbol hold 3 → ordinary symbol hold 2, ordinary symbol hold 4 → ordinary symbol hold 4, etc. in each area Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding sphere execution area (not shown) is acquired (S1207).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag 203a2 is on, that is, whether it is the time saving gaming state ST1h or the probability variation gaming state ST3 (S1208). In the process of S1208, when it is determined that the time saving flag 203a2 is off (S1208: No), based on the hit determination value of the second random number table 202c for low probability (FIG. 15(c)), The determination result is acquired (S1211). On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving flag 203a2 is on (S1208: Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit (S1209). When it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in a big hit (S1209: Yes), the process of S1211 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not in a big hit (S1209: No), the high hit probability second hit random number table 202c (FIG. 15 (c)) hit determination value Based on, the result of the judgment is obtained (S1210).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is a win (S1212). When it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is not winning (that is, it is out) (S1212: No), the display mode of "x" which is the display mode at the time of removal is set. (S1218). On the other hand, when the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is determined to be a win (that is, it is a win) (S1212: Yes), the display mode of "○" which is the display mode at the time of winning is It is set (S1213).

  It is determined whether or not the time saving flag 203a2 is on, that is, whether or not the time saving gaming state ST1h or the probability variation gaming state ST3 (S1214). When it is determined in the process of S1214 that the time saving flag 203a2 is off (S1214: No), the process of S1217 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving flag 203a2 is on (S1214: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in a big hit (S1215). When it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in a big hit, the process of S1216 is executed.

  In the process of S1216, the opening time of the guide member (the left guide member 632a and the right guide member 632b) of the electric accessory 632 is set to 1 s and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S1216). On the other hand, in the processing of S1215, when it is determined that the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in progress (that is, the low probability game state) (S1215: Yes), the electric accessory 632 The blade opening time is set to 0.2 s, and the opening frequency is set to 1 (S1217).

  It is determined whether or not the gaming state is during the time saving gaming state ST1h (including the probability variation gaming state ST3) (S1219). When it is determined that the time is shortening (S1219: Yes), the variable time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is acquired by the value of the universal symbol variation type counter CS2, and the universal symbol variation pattern selection table 202f (Fig. The variation time is determined from (see 19) (S1220). Then, this process is completed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) of the universal figure is determined from the universal figure variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 19) based on the value of the universal figure variation type counter CS2. As shown in FIG. 19, in the universal figure variation pattern selection table 202f, variation patterns of ordinary symbols are set corresponding to each gaming state. Except for the probability variation game state ST3 (probability variation: with electric support), there is only one variation pattern, and the same variation time is always determined regardless of the value of the selected universal figure variation type counter CS2. On the other hand, in the probability variation gaming state ST3, the variation time of 3000 ms is determined by the determination value “0 to 190”, and the variation time of 30000 ms is determined by the determination value “191 to 198”.

  As a result, in the probability variation game state ST3, a variation time longer than in other cases is selected with a probability of 8/199. When this long variation time is selected, the electric accessory 632 is not activated until the variation time elapses. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the second starting port 640 is arranged below the electric accessory 632, and when the electric accessory 632 operates, it is possible to enter the second starting port 640 by the left guiding member 632a. The flow path is blocked. Therefore, during that time, the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 640 is configured to be restricted.

  Here, as described above, when the long variation time (30000 ms) is selected as the variation pattern of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 632 does not operate during that time, so the game hit right during that time. About 85% of the balls will enter the second starting opening 640. Therefore, by selecting a long variation time as the variation time of the normal symbol in the probability variation game state ST3, the number of winnings to the second starting opening 640 can be increased.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 16(c), during the probability variation gaming state ST3, the big hit D is always selected when the second special symbol hits, which is more advantageous than the big hit in the first special symbol. Is selected. Therefore, in the probability variation gaming state ST3, the lottery with the second special symbol can be advantageous to the player in the case of a big hit, rather than the lottery with the first special symbol. Therefore, by increasing the number of winnings to the second starting opening 640 during the probability variation gaming state ST3, it is possible to give the player an advantageous period.

  Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 22), and it is determined whether the game ball has passed the first normal symbol starting port 67a or the second normal symbol starting port 67b. The process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 when the game ball has passed.

  In the through gate passage process (FIG. 42, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the first normal symbol starting port 67a or the second normal symbol starting port 67b (S1301). Here, it is detected that the game ball has passed the first normal symbol starting port 67a or the second normal symbol starting port 67b over three timer interrupt processes. When it is determined that the ball has passed through the first normal symbol starting opening 67a or the second normal symbol starting opening 67b (S1301: Yes), it is determined whether the game state is the normal game state (S1302). .. In the process of S1302, when it is determined that the game state is the normal game state (S1302: Yes), the right-handed game is executed despite the normal game state. The notification command shown is set, and the process proceeds to S1304. In addition, when the notification command indicating the discharge abnormality is set, the present process may be terminated without performing the normal symbol lottery.

  On the other hand, if the game state is not the normal game state (S1302: No), the process of S1303 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1304. In the process of S1304, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is acquired (S1304). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S1305).

  Whether the ball has not passed the first normal symbol starting port 67a or the second normal symbol starting port 67b (S1301: No), or the ball has passed the first normal symbol starting port 67a or the second normal symbol starting port 67b. Even if it does, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is not less than 4 (S1305: No), this process ends. On the other hand, the ball passes through the first normal symbol starting opening 67a or the second normal symbol starting opening 67b (S1301: Yes), and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S1305). : Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S1306). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S106 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first of the empty holding areas (ordinary symbol holding 1 to ordinary symbol holding 4) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203f of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area (S1307). In the process of S1307, the value of the normal symbol holding sphere counter 203g is referred to, and if the value is 0, the area of the normal symbol holding 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the area of the normal symbol reserve 2, if the value is 2, the area of the normal symbol reserve 3, if the value is 3, the area of the normal symbol reserve 4, first, respectively. Area.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1401), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

  Note that the NMI interrupt processing described above is similarly executed in the payout emission control device 111, and the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this startup processing.

  This startup processing is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 44), first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1501). For example, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Next, a wait process (1 second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable. (S1502). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1503).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch (122 in FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1504), and if it is turned on (S1504: Yes), the process proceeds to S1512. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) is not turned on (S1504: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1505), and if it is not stored. (S1505: No), there is a possibility that the previous process at the time of power shutoff did not end normally, and in this case also, the process proceeds to S1512.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1505: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1506), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1507: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is shut off, the backed up data is destroyed, and in such a case also, the process proceeds to S1512. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1512, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1512). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1513, S1514) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) is pressed at the time of executing the start-up process, the initialization process (S1513, S1514) of the RAM 203 is executed.

  In addition, the initialization processing (S1513, S1514) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner even when the information on occurrence of power failure is not set or when the abnormality of the backup is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value or the like). .. In the RAM initialization processing (S1513, S1514), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1513), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1514). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S1510.

  On the other hand, the RAM erasing switch (122 in FIG. 3) is not turned on (S1504: No), the information about the occurrence of power failure is stored (S1505: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) If normal (S1507: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S1508). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S1509), and the process proceeds to S1510. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is ready to start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  Next, the production permission command which permits execution of various productions is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S1510). After that, the interrupt is permitted (S1511). Then, the process shifts to a main process (S1600) described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the main processing (S1600) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the startup processing described above will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this main processing (S1600). In the main process (S1600), roughly, a counter updating process and a power-off process are executed.

  In the main process (FIG. 45, S1600), first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), the output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 is output to each sub side. External output processing to be transmitted to the control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1601).

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1602). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

  When the change type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1603). After the processing of S1253 is executed, the probability variation setting processing is executed (S1254). This probability variation setting process (S1254) will be described later with reference to FIG. 42, but when the big hit A or big hit C is executed, the game ball enters the second specific entrance (not shown). When it is determined whether or not the player has entered the ball, a process of setting data indicating that the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to the probability variation gaming state ST3 in the jackpot after-state setting area is executed.

  When the probability variation setting process (S1254) is executed, the jackpot control process is executed (S1255). This jackpot control process (S1255) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 43, but a process of setting the operations of the variable winning a prize device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 in the jackpot game is executed.

  After the jackpot game process (S1255) is executed, the electric accessory opening/closing process is executed (S1256). In the electric accessory opening/closing process (S1256), the opening/closing process of the electric accessory 632 is executed. Then, the display control process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1257).

  Next, the display control process of the second symbol (for example, a symbol of "O" or "x") by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1258). Briefly described, on the condition that the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes, and the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The variable display of the second symbol is carried out. And the lottery of the second symbol is carried out by the value of the second hit random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is hit, the electric accessory 632 is opened for a predetermined time.

  After that, it is determined whether or not the power cut occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1259), and if the power cut occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1259: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main processing (S1260). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1260: Yes), the process proceeds to S1251 and the above-described processes after S1251 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous main processing (S1260: No), the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing, The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1261, S1262).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1261). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 and 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffers of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1252 (S1262).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1251 to S1258 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but displayed variable. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

  In addition, in the processing of S1256, if the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1259: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 40 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S1263 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1263), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S1264). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1265), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1266), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

  The processing of S1259 is at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1251 to S1258 ends, or the end of one cycle of the processing of S1261 and S1262 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the start-up processing is completed. It is possible to start from the processing of S1251. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of S1251 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup processing. Therefore, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the process when the power is shut down, the stack pointer is not changed in the initialization process (S1301). By setting the value to the predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1251 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing malfunction or runaway of the main control device 110.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the startup process described above will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a regular process of 4 msec cycle, and the counter updating process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process (FIG. 45, S1600), first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), output data such as a command stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is output to the sub side. The external output processing to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1601). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 22) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, it corresponds to the number of balls acquired to the payout control device 111. Send the prize ball command. In addition, the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 23) and the starting winning process (see FIG. 38) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 with the reserve ball number command. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variable display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 46) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1602). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the change type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1603), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or changed. The jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1604). In the jackpot control processing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In this embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1604) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, the electric accessory opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessory 632 associated with the right first starting opening 630 is executed (S1605). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S1225 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 41), the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is started. It should be noted that the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and opening number set in the processing of S1216, the processing of S1217, and the processing of S1220 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, the first symbol display update processing for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is executed (S1606). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 24, S203) or the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 31, S206), depending on the variation pattern The variable display is started on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, until the variation time elapses after the variation is started, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED Is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. Is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the LED lighting color, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 24) or the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 31) ends. , The first symbol display device 37A, the variable display being executed in 37B is ended, and in the display mode set by the processes of S306 and S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 65), the stop symbol (the first symbol) ) Is stopped (lit) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1607). In the second symbol display update process, when the variable time of the second symbol is set by the process of S1220 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 41), the variable display is started on the second symbol display device. As a result, in the second symbol display device, variable display is performed in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S1223 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 41), the variation executed in the second symbol display device. The display is ended, and in the display mode set by the process of S1212 or the process of S1223 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 41), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lighting display). ) Do.

  After that, it is determined whether or not the power cut occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1608). If the power cut occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1608: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S1609). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1609: Yes), the process moves to S1601 and the above-described processes after S1601 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S1609: No), the first time is reached during the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1610, S1611).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1610). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are respectively stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1602 (S1611).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1601 to S1607 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

  In the process of S1608, if the RAM 203 stores the information on the occurrence of power failure (S1608: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 43 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S1612 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1612), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S1613). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1614), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1615), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

  The processing of S1608 is at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1601 to S1607 ends, or the end of one cycle of the processing of S1610 and S1611 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the start-up processing is completed. The process can be started from S1601. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of S1601 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup processing. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the power-off process, the stack pointer is not saved in the initial setting process (S1501). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1601 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing malfunction or runaway of the main control device 110.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1604) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1604). This jackpot control process (S1604) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 45), when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and a specific winning prize. This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large opening mouth) 65a.

  In the big hit control process, first, it is determined whether the big hit or the small hit of the special symbol is started (S1621). Specifically, S606 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 29) or S1006 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 36) or S624 of the special figure 1 disengagement stop process (see FIG. 30). Processing of S1024 of special figure 2 disengagement stop processing (see FIG. 37) is executed, and if the big hit or small hit of the special symbol is set, if the big hit or small hit of the special symbol is started judge. In the process of S1621, when the big hit or the small hit of the special symbol is started (S1621: Yes), the opening command is set (S1622), and this process is ended.

  The opening command may be delayed (variable) and transmitted according to the gaming state and the jackpot type. Specifically, an opening counter that is updated regularly (every 4 ms) is provided. Then, when the big hit or the small hit of the special symbol is started, the opening counter is initialized to 0, and then the opening counter is a predetermined value (for example, 2500 for the big hit A and 5000 for the big hit B). If this happens, the opening command should be sent. By doing this, for example, when a big hit in a left-handed game, the time until the big hit starts is lengthened, and when a big hit is in the right-handed game, the time until the big hit starts Can be shortened. In the present embodiment, when a big hit occurs during a left-handed game, it is necessary to switch to a right-handed game as a big hit game. According to the above configuration, when a big hit in the left-handed game, a sufficient time to switch to the right-handed game (big hit game) can be secured. This can reduce the operational burden on the player.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1621, when the big hit or the small hit of the special symbol is not started (S1621: No), it is determined whether the big hit or the small hit of the special symbol is in progress (S1623). During the big hit or small hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the big hit of the special symbol (including during the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed. Including during the predetermined time after the end of the special symbol jackpot game. In the process of S1623, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S1623: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1624). When it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1624: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process is executed (S1625). This jackpot operation setting process (S1625) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 47, but the setting of opening the variable winning a prize device 65 and the probability variation solenoid in each round corresponding to the jackpot type is executed.

  The big hit operation setting process (S1625) which is one process in the big hit control process (FIG. 46, S1604) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the contents of this jackpot operation setting process (S1625). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 47, S1625), first, an opening scenario in which an opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is set is read (S1641). The opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probably variable solenoid) 65k (see FIG. 4) is set based on the data read in S1641 (S1642). The opening operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 (see FIG. 4) of the variable winning device 65 is set by the data read in the processing of S1641. Then, this process is completed.

  In this way, since each operation of the variable winning a prize device 65 is set at the start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the big hit game, the big hit game ends in the middle. It is possible to suppress defects.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of a small hit game, the operation of the probability variation solenoid 65k is not set, but only the opening operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 is set. The small hit consists of two rounds, and the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened for 1 second in each round.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. In the process of S1624, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1624: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the opening/closing door 65f1 and the flow path solenoid (probability change solenoid) 65k (S1626). When it is determined that it is the operation timing (S1626: Yes), the opening solenoid 65f2 is set to ON (S1627). After that, the flow path solenoid (probably variable solenoid) 65k is set to ON (S1628). Then, this process is completed.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1626, when it is determined that it is not the opening operation timing (S1626: No), it is determined whether it is the ending effect start timing (S1629). The start timing of the ending effect is the start timing of the ending effect when the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed and the waiting time (3 seconds in the present embodiment), which is the ball throwing time, has elapsed after the 15th round has ended. Is determined as. When it is determined that it is the ending timing of the ending effect (S1629: Yes), the ending process is executed (S1630). Then, this process is completed.

  Here, the details of the ending process (S1630) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the contents of this ending process (FIG. 48, S1630). In the ending process (FIG. 48, S1630), first, an ending command indicating the start of ending is set in the voice lamp control device 113 (S1651). Next, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1652). In the process of S1652, when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is ON (S1652), the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S1653), and the process proceeds to S1654. Although illustration is omitted, the probability variation setting flag 203h is configured to be set to OFF based on the probability variation flag 203g being set to ON.

  In the process of S1654, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is a type with a power support (big jack C) (S1654). When it is determined in the process of S1654 that the jackpot type is the type with electric power support (S1654: Yes), the time saving flag 203a2 is set to ON (S1655), and the present process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1654 that the jackpot type is not the type with jackpot support (big jackpot C) (S1654: No), the process of S1655 is skipped and the present process ends.

  When it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is off in the process of S1652 (S1652: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is the jackpot E (S1656). When it is determined that the jackpot type is the jackpot E in the process of S1656 (S1656: Yes), 100 is set to the time saving medium counter 203t (S1657), the process of S1655 is executed, and the process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S1656, when it is determined that the jackpot type is not the jackpot E, the processes of S1657 and S1655 are skipped and the present process ends.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is on, and if it is on, the probability variation flag 203g is set to on. Therefore, at the end of the big hit game, it is possible to determine whether the game ball has passed the probability variation switch 65e3 and set the high-probability game state. Therefore, until the jackpot game is over, it is possible to keep the player expecting to shift to the high-probability game state (hidden probability variation gaming state ST2 or probability variation gaming state ST3). Furthermore, if the probability variation switch 65e3 allows the game ball to pass during the big hit game, a high-probability game state (hidden probability variation game state ST2 or probability variation game state ST3) is given after the big hit game, so even during the big hit game. A game can be played with an interest in whether or not the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. In the processing of S1629, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1629: No), the notification processing is executed (S1631). Here, the details of the notification process (S1631) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the contents of this notification process (S1631).

  In the notification process (S1631), first, it is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203m is greater than 0 (S1631). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1631: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the 13th round (S1632). The determination of the end timing of the 13th round is made based on the case of detecting that 10 balls have been won in the 13th round or when it has been determined that 30 seconds have passed. When it is determined that it is the end timing of the 13th round (S1632: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the notification counter 203m. Then, this process is completed. On the other hand, in the processing of S1632, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the thirteenth round (S1632: No), this processing is ended. Here, by setting the counter of 2 seconds in S1633, the notification counter 203m becomes 0 during 3 seconds of the interval time which is the ball throwing time after the end of 13 rounds, and the sound of looking at the liquid crystal appears. Is output. Therefore, the flow path solenoid 65k operates in the 14th round, but since the player is attracted to the liquid crystal from the interval time after the 13th round, the movement of the switching member 65h of the variable winning a prize device 65 is identified, It is possible to prevent the jackpot type from being identified by the player. Therefore, the player can play the game until the end of the jackpot game with the expectation that the probability variation gaming state ST3 is given.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the notification counter 203m is provided to perform the effect of attracting attention to the liquid crystal over the 14th round from 1 second before the end of the interval time. It may be executed continuously.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1221, when it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is greater than 0 (S1661: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203m is updated by -1 (S1664). It is determined whether the value of the updated notification counter 203m is 0 (S1665). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1665: Yes), the notification command is set (S1666). Then, this process is completed. By this notification command, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the output of the voice "Look at the liquid crystal".

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. When the notification process (FIG. 49, S1631) is executed, the winning process is executed (S1632). Here, the winning process (S1632) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing the contents of this winning process (S1632).

  In the winning process (FIG. 50, S1632), it is first determined whether the round is in the valid period (S1671). The round valid period is a period during which the round game is set, that is, a period from the opened state of the opening door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that the round is out of the valid period (S1671: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round valid period (S1671: Yes), it is determined whether the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed. When it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed (S1672: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is incremented by 1 and updated (S1673). After that, the processing of S1674 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 has not been passed (S1672: No), the process of S1674 is executed.

  In the process of S1674, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1674). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1674: Yes), the opening/closing door 65f1 of the specific winning port 65a is set to be closed (S1676). After that, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON (S1677). Then, the process of S1678 is executed. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203n to ON, it is possible to determine that the ball is being out of ball after the opening/closing door 203n is closed.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1674, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed (S1675). When it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1675: Yes), the process of S1676 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1675: No), the process of S1678 is executed.

  In the process of S1678, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1678). When it is determined that the value of the motion counter 203k is larger than 0 (S1678: Yes), the value of the motion counter 203k is updated by -1 (S1679). It is determined whether the game ball has passed the probability change switch 65e3 (S1680). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the probability variation passage switch 65e3 (S1680: Yes), the value of the probability variation passage counter 203i is incremented by 1 and updated (S1681). The probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1682). After that, the processing of S1683 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S1680, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the probability variation switch 65e3 (S1680: No), the process of S1683 is executed. In the process of S1683, it is determined whether the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1683). When it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off (S1684). The probability variation valid flag 203p is set to ON (S1685). Then, this process is completed. Here, the probability variation valid flag 203p is set to ON, and after the switching member 65h is switched, if the game ball remaining in the special flow path 65e2 has passed the probability variation switch 65e3, the probability variation game. Can be controlled to be set.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1678, when it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1678: No), it is determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203p is on (S1686). If the probability variation valid flag 203p is off (S1686: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation valid flag 203p is on (S1686: Yes), the probability variation valid timer 203r is incremented by 1 and updated (S1687). It is determined whether the value of the probability variation valid timer is the upper limit value (1.2 s in this embodiment) (S1688). When it is determined that the probability variation valid timer 203r is the upper limit value (S1688: Yes), the probability variation valid flag 203p is set to OFF (S1689). The probability variation valid timer 203r is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S1690). Then, this process is completed. On the other hand, in the processing of S1688, when it is determined that the probability variation valid timer 203r is not the upper limit value (S1688: No), the processing of S1680 is executed.

  As a result, if the probability variation valid timer 203r is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the probability variation switch 65e3, so that the probability variation game state ST3 can be set in consideration of the time of ball spitting. Further, since there is an upper limit to the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the probability variation switch 65e3 from passing a game ball illegally and being given the probability variation game state ST3.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. When the winning process (FIG. 50, S1632) is executed, the abnormal process is executed (S1633). Then, this process is completed. Here, the abnormality processing (S1633) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the contents of this abnormality processing (S1633). In the abnormality process (S1633), a process of monitoring whether the probability variation switch 65e3 is illegally passed is executed.

  In the abnormality processing (FIG. 51, S1633), first, it is determined whether it is the round valid period (S1701). If it is outside the round valid period (S1701: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round valid period (S1701: Yes), it is determined whether the game ball has passed the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1702). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1702: Yes), the value of the ball discharge number counter 203s is incremented by 1 and updated (S1703). Then, the process of S1704 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S1702: No), the process of S1704 is executed.

  In the process of S1704, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1704). When it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is off (S1704: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1704: Yes), the remaining ball timer 203o is incremented by 1 and updated because it is during the ball expelling time (S1705). The remaining ball timer 203o determines whether the upper limit value (3 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed (S1706). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit value (S1706: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S1706: Yes), the discharged number (the total value of the probability variation passage counter 203i and the discharged number counter 203s) matches the winning number (the value of the winning number counter 203j). It is determined (S1707).

  If it is determined that they match (S1707: Yes), the process of S1709 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S1707: No), an error command is set (S1708). Then, the process of S1709 is executed. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from remaining illegally in the variable winning device 65 and prevent the game ball from passing through the probability variation switch 65e3 even if the jackpot B is a big hit.

  In the process of S1709, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to OFF (S1709), and the remaining ball timer 203o is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S1710). After that, the winning number counter 203j, the discharging number counter 203s, and the probability variation passage counter 203i are reset to their initial values (S1711), and then this process is ended.

<Regarding the control processing executed by the voice lamp control device 114>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 61. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 52, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S2001). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, the power-up processing of S2116 is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous interruption”) in the current startup processing (see FIG. 53) ) Is determined during the execution of () (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 53, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives the power-off occurrence information from the main control device 110 (see S2113 in FIG. 53), the power-off process in S2116 is executed. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S2116 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in progress flag.

  If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S2002: No), the current startup processing is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure has occurred, and the power-off in S2116 is performed. It is started after completing the execution of the process, or is started (without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

  The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S2006. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not “55AAh”, it is possible to confirm the data destruction in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), the process proceeds to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to S2008.

  If the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to power shutdown). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2004. On the other hand, the startup process of this time is started after the momentary power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process of S2116 is completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2003: No), and the process proceeds to S2008.

  If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S2002: Yes), the startup processing of this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S2116, the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The MPU 221 has been reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so that the process proceeds to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S2004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, and it is confirmed whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read/write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

  If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S2006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a read/write check abnormality is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You can

  In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S2116 is executed (see S2115 in FIG. 53). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S2116 is executed. Therefore, the process of S2008 with the power-off flag turned on is that the startup process of this time is instantaneous. This is a case after the power failure has occurred and started in a state in which the execution of the power-off processing in S2116 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010), and then the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S2011), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing the commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of S2008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the current startup process is started after the power has been completely cut off, for example, and the process of S2004 to S2006 is followed to the process of S2008. This is the case where the processing has been started, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) and started due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S2009, is skipped, the process proceeds to S2010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010).

  It should be noted that skipping the clearing process in S2009 is performed when all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S2004 when the process in S2008 is performed through the processes in S2004 to S2008. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or since the processing of S2101 was executed last time (S2101), 1 millisecond. If the above has not passed (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2111 without performing the processes of S2102 to S2110. In the processing of S2101, it is the processing related to the display (effect) of S2102 to S2110 that determines whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). , It is preferable to execute the command determination processing of S2111 and the variable display setting processing of S2112 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S2111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S2111 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is executed. Based on the above, it is possible to set the variable display effect without delay.

  If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, the various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S2103 to S2112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S2102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2108 described later (S2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2104). The power-on notification processing is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that the power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S2105 without any notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S2105, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the retained quantity display updating process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting production, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is a command as a display control device. Sent to 114.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S2107). In this frame button input monitoring/rendering process, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the effect is monitored and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process of setting to produce an effect. In this processing, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button input monitoring/effect process is completed, a ramp edit process is then executed (S2108), and then a sound edit/output process is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination portions 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing of S2109, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S2110). After this, the process proceeds to S2111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp edit process of S2108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing/output processing of S2109 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  After that, a command determination process (S2111) is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main controller 110, and the process proceeds to S2112. Details of this command determination processing (S2111) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S2112, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81, and the command is displayed by the display control device 114. The variable display setting process, which is the process set to be transmitted to Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S2112 is finished, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S2113 (S2113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S2115), and the power-off process is executed (S2116). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S2117), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of the information on the occurrence of power failure is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the power interruption occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2113 (S2113: No), it is determined whether the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2114: No), the process returns to S2101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2114: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and thus can call a store clerk or the like in the hall and request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the command determination processing (S2111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S2111). This command determination process (S2111) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 53) performed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. .. Details of the command determination process (S2111) will be described below.

  In the command determination processing (FIG. 54, S2111), first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read and analyzed from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, and the main controller 110 is read. Further, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation pattern command is received (S2201). Here, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is a command for variably displaying the first special symbol. When it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command is received (S2201: Yes), the special figure 1 variation start processing is executed to variably display the first special symbol (S2202). This special figure 1 variation start process (S2202) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 55, but the settings required to variably display the special symbol corresponding to the first special symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Is executed.

  Here, the special figure 1 variation start processing (S2202) will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 variation start process (S2202). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (FIG. 55, S2202), first, the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2241), and the fluctuation pattern type is selected from the received special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command. It is extracted (S2242). The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 so as to be identifiable as the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and is displayed in a variation display setting process (FIG. 61, S2112) described later. It is used when setting the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol for notifying the control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the first special symbol and the variation pattern type of the first special symbol.

  When the process of S2242 is executed, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the latent probability variation game state ST2 (probability variation electric power support-free game state) (S2243). When it is determined that the game state is other than the latent probability variation game state ST2 (S2243: No), this process ends. When it is determined that the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 (S2243: Yes), the variation lottery result of the variation of the first special symbol that starts variation is a variation of jackpot E (15R normal jackpot: electric support 100 times). It is determined (S2244). When it is determined that the change is not the big hit E (S2244: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation is the big hit E (S2244: Yes), the characters indicating the chance zone (see FIGS. 63A and 63B) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S2245). ). Then, this process is completed.

  In the present embodiment, when the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 is reached, in the normal gaming state ST1, the variation time of the second special symbol, which has been set long and is disadvantageous to the player, is set short. On the other hand, in the normal game state ST1, the variation time of the first special symbol that is mainly executing the game is set to be long. As a result, when the player shifts to the latent probability variation game state ST2, he/she comes to the right to play the game so that the game ball wins the second special symbol. However, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed at the same time. Here, in the latent probability variation game state ST2, in the second special symbol, a high-probability game (probability variation) is always granted when it becomes a big hit, but in the first special symbol, when it becomes a big hit, a normal probability game (low-probability game) Are configured so that there is a possibility that they will be awarded by lottery. Therefore, in the normal gaming state ST1, even if the first special symbol is a big hit and the big hit A (15R probability variation big hit: no electric support) is given, the fluctuation started with the first special symbol after the big hit game is the big hit E. Then, it will be immediately shifted to the normal gaming state ST1.

  As described above, normally, after transitioning to the latent probability variation game state ST2 in which the second special symbol is mainly played, based on the variation that becomes the jackpot E in the first special symbol is started, the third symbol display The device 81 displays a chance zone (a notification mode indicating the time saving game state ST1h or the probability variation game state ST3). As shown in FIG. 62(b), the player displays the heaven zone (informing mode indicating that it is in the latent probability change gaming state ST2) on the third symbol display device 81, and thereafter, the big hit game twice. Recognize that the high-probability game state (probability change) is maintained (high possibility) until is executed. However, in the chance zone, the player may not be convinced (big expectation) whether the probability variation game state ST3 will be given after the next big hit, and it is possible that the player is in the time saving game state ST1h (low probability state). You will be playing while recognizing.

  Therefore, for example, when the latent probability variation game state ST2 is entered and the first variation of the first special symbol is a variation that is a jackpot E, the heaven zone is normally displayed, but the chance zone is displayed. The Rukoto. This can prevent the player from being discouraged in a short time.

  Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After the processing of the special figure 1 variation start processing (FIG. 55, S2202) is executed, this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the processing of S2201, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command is not received (S2201: No), it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. Yes (S2203). Here, the special figure 2 variation pattern command is a special symbol showing a variation display mode for variably displaying the second special symbol. If it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received (S2203: Yes), the special figure 2 variation start process (S2204) is executed. Details of the special figure 2 variation start processing (S2204) will be described with reference to FIG.

  Details of the special figure 2 variation start process (S2204) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 variation start process (S2204). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S2204), first, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2301), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command ( S2302). The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 so as to be identifiable as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and is displayed in a variation display setting process (FIG. 61, S2112) described later. It is used when setting the variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol that notifies the control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the second special symbol and the variation pattern type of the second special symbol.

  When the processing of S2302 is executed, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the probability variation game state ST3 (the game state with the probability variation power distribution support) (S2203). If the gaming state is other than the probability variation gaming state ST3 (S2303: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state ST3 (S2303: Yes), it is determined whether or not the win/loss determination result of the second special symbol that starts changing is a big hit (S2304). Here, the determination is performed by determining whether or not the variation pattern is a jackpot variation from the received special figure 2 variation pattern command.

  In the process of S2304, when it is determined that the winning/discarding determination result of the second special symbol that starts to change is a big hit (S2304: Yes), the notice effect command per treasure box is set to the display control device 114 (S2305). .. On the other hand, if the result of the hit/miss determination is a miss, a treasure box removal notice effect command is set to the display control device 114 (S2306).

  Here, the treasure box winning announcement effect command is a command for instructing the third symbol display device 81 to display the display mode shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, when the probability variation game state ST3 is entered, as shown in FIGS. 9A to 9B, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm, and the third symbol is displayed. In the 2 display area Dn, the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed. Here, the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol displayed in the second display area Dn becomes the symbol of the treasure box, and the display mode shown in FIG. 9A and the display mode shown in FIG. 9B. By repeatedly displaying and in a short period (for example, every 0.5 seconds), it is possible to display as if they are blinking.

  Here, when the probability variation game state ST3 is set, the long deviation pattern C (1800000 ms) is selected if the result of the determination of whether or not the second special symbol is incorrect. Therefore, the frequency at which the variation of the second special symbol is started becomes extremely small. However, if you win the small hit in the first special symbol, based on the stop of the fluctuation, the fluctuation of the changing second special symbol is also forcibly displayed as a stop, and is newly stored after the small hit game. The variation with respect to the reserved ball of the second special symbol that is being started. In this case, the player expects that the variation that becomes a jackpot is started in the second special symbol in which the jackpot that is more advantageous than the first special symbol is easily selected.

  When the second special symbol starts changing, as shown in FIGS. 10A to 10B, the treasure box representing the change of the second special symbol is enlarged and displayed large in the first display area Dm. .. On the other hand, the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed in the second display area Dn. After that, after the treasure box is displayed in a display mode that vibrates for about 2 seconds, the treasure box opens, and when the result of the judgment is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 10B, “Congratulations” from the treasure box. Is displayed to inform that the second special symbol has been a big hit. Then, a notification mode indicating that the probability variation game state ST3 of "continuation of chance!" is continuously executed is displayed.

  In the probability variation gaming state ST3, when the jackpot D of the special figure 2 is configured to be selected, the jackpot D is selected (that is, when the latency probability variation variation game state ST2 is configured to be configured), the latent probability variation It suffices to display a notification mode (for example, the characters “Heaven zone plunge!”) indicating the transition to the gaming state ST2. In this case, it should be configured to also display a notification mode of "stop firing!" for instructing to stop the firing of the game ball. Here, to instruct the stop of the firing, in the probability variation game state ST3, the game is mainly executed in the first special symbol, but in the latent probability variation game state ST2, the game is mainly executed in the second special symbol. Is set to do. Therefore, the game ball enters the right first starting opening 631 and the storing of the reserved ball of the first special symbol is a trigger for executing the lottery, which is disadvantageous to the player, and therefore the firing is stopped. By instructing, the problem can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, when the win/fail judgment result is out, as shown in FIG. 10(a), the treasure box opening display is executed as in the case where the win/no judgment result is a big hit, and then the win/fail judgment is made from the treasure box. The word "sorry" is displayed to indicate that the judgment result is incorrect. After that, when 5 seconds have elapsed after the start of fluctuation, the display mode is switched to the display mode shown in FIGS. 9A to 9B, and the blinking display is executed until the fluctuation time set in the second special symbol elapses. To be done.

  Thereby, the player pays attention to the second special symbol only for a certain period at the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed at the same time. Can pay attention to the fluctuation of the first special symbol. Therefore, the game becomes easy to understand, and the player can play the game with a good feeling.

  Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S2204) is executed, this process ends. When it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command is not received (S2203: No), it is determined whether the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command is received from the main control device 110 (S2205). If it is determined that the special type 1 or special type 2 stop type command is received (S2205: Yes), the stop type command reception process is executed (S2206). This stop type command reception process (S2206) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the contents of this stop type command reception process (S2206). In the stop type command reception process (S2206), first, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received according to the received command, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON. When the special figure 2 stop type command is received, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to ON. (S2311). The stop type (big hit A to big hit E, out, reach out, etc.) is extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command (S2312). The extracted stop type is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. The stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is the second special symbol. Each of the stop types is stored so that it can be identified.

  It is determined whether the current game state is the normal game state ST1 (S2313). When the gaming state is a gaming state other than the normal gaming state ST1, this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming state is the normal gaming state ST1 (S2313: Yes), it is determined whether or not the stop type is a jackpot A (15R probability variation jackpot: no electric support) (S2314). When it is determined that the stop type is other than the jackpot A (S2314: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type is the jackpot A (S2314: Yes), the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is reserved 1 (the first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a in the earliest digestion order area). It is determined whether or not the hold determination result of the reserved ball stored in) is a jackpot E (15 round normal jackpot: 100 electric support) (S2315). Here, the jackpot random number value of the corresponding holding ball notified by the winning command is read from the winning information storage area 223b to be determined. Although not shown, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp controller 113 has a first random number table 202a (FIG. 15(a)) and a jackpot type selection table 202d (FIG. 15) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. 16(a) to (c)) are stored, and based on the value of the first random number counter C1 and the value of the first hit type counter C2 given to the winning command output from the main controller 110, The sound lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to determine the hit/no hit determination result in the probability variation state.

  In the process of S2315, when it is determined that the holding 1 of the first special symbol is a determination result other than the jackpot E (S2315: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hold 1 of the first special symbol is the jackpot E (S2315: Yes), the character "chance zone entry" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the ending of the jackpot game. The display command to be instructed is set to the display control device 114 (S2316). On the other hand, when it is determined that the hold 1 of the first special symbol is not the jackpot E (S2315: No), as shown in FIG. 62(a), in the heaven zone (hidden probability variation gaming state ST2) at the ending of the jackpot game. A display command for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the characters "Enter the heaven zone!", which indicates the shift, is output to the display control device 114 (S2317). Then, this process is completed.

  Here, in the present embodiment, when the latent probability variation game state ST2 is transitioned, the probability variation game is likely to be continuously set until the jackpot game is executed at least twice. Therefore, the player can recognize that at least two big hits have been promised when the characters of the heaven zone are displayed. Further, since it is configured to be displayed at the end of the jackpot game, the player can play until the end of the jackpot game in anticipation of a transition to the latent probability variation gaming state ST2, which improves the enjoyment of the game. it can.

  Further, even if the jackpot A is won in the normal gaming state ST1, if it is determined that the jackpot E is won in the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 for the holding 1 of the first special symbol, in the ending of the jackpot A, the time saving gaming state ST1h or Since the character "Chance zone plunge!!" which indicates the probability variation gaming state ST3 is displayed, the player does not recognize that the jackpot game has been confirmed to occur at least twice, and the time saving gaming state ST1h. It is possible to play a game by recognizing that it is in the probability variation game state ST3. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize the transition to the latent probability variation game state ST2, and it is possible to suppress the discouragement of the transition to the time saving game state ST1h in a short time.

  Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After the stop type command reception processing (FIG. 57, S2206) is executed, this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S2205, when it is determined that the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command is not received (S2305: No), it is determined whether the hold ball number command is received from the main control device 110. (S2207). When it is determined that the reserved ball number command is received (S2207: Yes), the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d or the second special symbol reserved ball of the main control device 110 included in the received reserved ball number command. The value of the number counter e (that is, the number of holding balls of the variable display effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol held in the main controller 110) is extracted, and the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is a voice lamp. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c of the control device 113, the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223d (S2208).

  Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the balls win the first starting opening 630, the right first starting opening 631 or the second starting opening 640 (start winning). , Each time there is a start winning, by the process of S2207, the first special symbol of the main controller 110 the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c and the second special symbol holding ball counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 It can be set to the values of the reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e, respectively. Therefore, due to the influence of noise and the like, the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 223c or the second special symbol holding ball counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 is the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d of the main control device 110. Or even if it deviates from the value of the second special symbol holding ball counter 203e, at the time of starting winning detection, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c or the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected. However, the value can be adjusted to the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d or the second special symbol holding ball counter 203e of the main controller 110.

  When it is determined that the number of reserved balls command has not been received (S2207: No), it is determined whether a winning command has been received (S2209). When it is determined that the winning command is received (S2209: Yes), the winning command process is executed (S2210). Details of the winning command process (S2210) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the winning command process (S2210). In the winning command processing (S2210), first, the information of the received winning command is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b (S2401). Here, the winning information command is configured to be able to identify the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the holding order (number of holding balls) and the result of winning/deciding in the normal gaming state ST1 can be determined. ing. Further, the values of various counters acquired at the time of winning the start prize are also configured by commands that can be discriminated.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the low-probability gaming state (S2402). In the processing of S2402, when it is determined that the gaming state is not the low-probability gaming state (S2402: No), the process proceeds to S2405. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game state is the low-probability game state (that is, the probability change is not in progress) (S2402: Yes), whether or not there is probability change jackpot information in the winning information storage area 223b provided in the RAM 223. It is determined (S2403). In the process of S2403, if it is determined that there is no probability variation jackpot information in the winning information storage area 223b (S2403: No), the processes of S2403 and S2404 are not executed, and the process directly proceeds to S2405. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is probability variation jackpot information in the winning information storage area 223b (S2403: Yes), the notification lottery process (S2404) is executed, and the process proceeds to S2405. The notification lottery process of S2404 will be described with reference to FIG. In the processing of S2405, other processing is executed (S2405), and the winning command processing is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the notification lottery process (S2404) will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this notification lottery process (S2404). In the notification lottery process (S2405), first, the value of the effect counter 223j provided in the RAM 223 is acquired (S2501). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the effect counter 223j is the determination value (S2502). In the process of S2502, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223j is not the determination value (S2502: No), this process is directly terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223j (counter in the range of 0 to 198) is the determination value (any of “0 to 50” in this embodiment) (S2502: Yes), the third A stop display mode command for displaying the characters "Stop firing!!" that informs the symbol display device 81 to stop firing the game ball is set to the display control device 114 (S2503), and this processing is performed. To finish.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the normal game state ST1, when the probability variation jackpot, that is, the jackpot information of the jackpot A, is received, a lottery is executed as to whether or not to notify the player of stopping the firing. Here, when shifting from the normal game state ST1 to the latent probability variation game state ST2, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to be short, and the game method with the second special symbol is the main game method (the second special symbol is the actual variation target). ). However, when the jackpot A is won in the normal game state ST1, if the reserved ball for the first special symbol is stored, the lottery disadvantageous to the player is executed with the first special symbol even during the latent probability change game state ST2. Will be done. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, when the suspension to win the jackpot A in the normal game state ST1 is stored, the notification for stopping the firing of the game ball is executed by the lottery, so that the player can play the game ball at an early timing. Can be stopped, and winning of the winning in the first starting opening 630 can be suppressed. In addition, the player can recognize that the jackpot A will be achieved at an early stage by being informed that the launch has been stopped, and thus can provide various effects of the game.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the game ball launch stop notification is performed by lottery, but it may be configured to notify when the jackpot A holding ball is stored.

  Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After executing the winning command process (FIG. 58, S2210), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S2209: No), it is determined whether the state command has been received (S2211). When it is determined that the status command is received (S2211: Yes), the status command reception process (S2212) is executed. Details of this status command reception processing (S2212) will be described with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, a state command reception process (S2212) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the state command reception process (S2212).

  In the state command reception process (S2212), first, it is determined whether or not the game state is changed based on the state command received from the main control device 110 (S2601). The determination as to whether the game state has been changed is performed by comparing the information on the game state set in the sub-state setting area 223k with the received game state. When it is determined that the gaming state has changed (S2601: Yes), the process proceeds to S2602. In the process of S2602, it is determined whether or not to change the game state to the normal game state ST1 (that is, the time saving game state ST1h) (S2602). When it is determined to change the game state to the normal game state ST1 (that is, the time saving game state ST1h) (S2602: Yes), the main display area setting command corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is set (S2603). Here, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol in the first display area Dm, the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol in the second display area Dn (“○×” in the present embodiment) are displayed. As described above, a display command for instructing the display control device 114 is set. A display command for displaying the characters of "lower bound zone" indicating that it is in the normal gaming state ST1 on the third symbol display device 81 is set to the display control device 114 (S2604). Then, the process of S2612 is executed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2602, when it is determined that the game state has been changed to a state other than the normal game state ST1 (S2602: No), the game state is changed to the latent probability variation game state ST2 (probability variation electric support-free game state). Whether or not it is determined (S2605). In the processing of S2605, when it is determined that the gaming state has been changed to the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 (S2605: Yes), the main display area setting command corresponding to the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 is set (S2606). Here, the display control device 114 is instructed to display the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol in the first display area Dm and the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol in the second display area Dn. The display command to be set is set. Further, a holding symbol indicating the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is displayed in the sub display area Ds, and a holding symbol indicating the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is set to be displayed in the second sub display area Dt. It

  Next, in the hold 1 of the first special symbol, it is determined from the winning information storage area 223b whether or not the hold information in which the jackpot E is confirmed is stored (S2607). When the holding information that the holding 1 of the special figure 1 is other than the jackpot E is stored (S2607: No), the characters indicating the heaven zone (see FIG. 62(b)) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display command to be set is set (S2608). Then, the process of S2612 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hold 1 of the first special symbol is the big hit E (S2607: Yes), the display command for displaying the character indicating the chance zone on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S2609). .. Then, the process of S2612 is executed. By the processing of S2607 and S2609, the jackpot E occurs immediately after the transition to the latent probability change state ST2, and when the game shifts to the time saving game state ST1h, it is possible to prevent the display of the heaven zone from being displayed. It can prevent (suppress) excessive discouragement.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2605, when it is determined that the game state has transitioned to a game state other than the latent probability variation game state ST2 (that is, the probability variation game state ST3) (S2605: No), the probability variation game state ST3 (game with probability variation power support). The main display area setting command corresponding to (state) is set to the display control device 114 (S2610). Here, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol in the first display area Dm, the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol in the second display area Dn (the symbol of the treasure box in the present embodiment (FIG. 9A)). (See (b))) is set, a display command is set to instruct the display control device 114 to display.

  Then, a display command for displaying the characters of the chance zone on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S2611). Then, the process of S2612 is executed. In the process of S2612, the state of the gaming state indicated by the received state command is set in the secondary state setting area 223k (S2612). Then, this process is completed.

  Meanwhile, returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After executing the status command reception process (S2212), it is determined whether or not a notification command is received (S2213). In the process of S2213, when it is determined that the notification command is received (S2213: Yes), the voice/lamp notification mode indicated by the received command is set (S2214), and the display corresponding to the notification mode indicated by the received command is set. A command is set (S2215), and this processing ends. By the processing of S2214, for example, based on the notification command indicating the emission abnormality set and transmitted in the above-described through-gate passage processing (see FIG. 42), the notification sound indicating the emission abnormality (“Please hit left!”). Is output). Further, by the processing of S2215, for example, based on the notification command indicating the emission abnormality set and transmitted in the above-described through-gate passage processing (see FIG. 42), the display indicating the emission abnormality (“Please hit left! The character “” is output to the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S2213, when it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S2213: No), the process according to the other command is executed (S2219), and the process is finished.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S2112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S2112). The variable display setting process (FIG. 61, S2112) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variable display setting process (FIG. 61, S2112) is performed on the first or special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Based on this, a variable pattern command for display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is generated, and a process of transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop type (big hit A to big hit E), a process of setting a special display type for display 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (FIG. 59, S2112), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2701). If it is determined that the special figure 1 variation start flag 223e is off (S2701: No), it means that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, so the process of S2705 is executed. Move to. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S2701: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off (S2702).

  Next, in the process of S2703, the variation pattern in the variable display effect of the first special symbol extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command in the process of S2203 of the command determination process (FIG. 54, S2111) is stored in the other memory area of the RAM 223. Obtained from 223z, the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol is generated (S2703). The variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is configured to be distinguishable from the variation pattern command for display corresponding to the first special symbol or the variation pattern command of the second special symbol. Specifically, if the high-order 2 bits of the high-order byte of the display variation pattern command having a 2-byte structure is "10", it indicates that it corresponds to the first special symbol, and if "01", the second special symbol. Is configured to indicate that

  The variable pattern command for display of the first special symbol set in the process of S2703 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed by the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 53). Is transmitted to the control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the special pattern corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbols is performed.

  With the setting of the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set variation pattern command for display is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the reserved ball of the first special symbol). In accordance with the display setting), the value of the first special symbol holding sphere number counter 223c is decremented by 1 (S2704).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation start flag 223f provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2705). When it is determined that the special figure 2 variation start flag 223f is not on (that is, it is off) (S2705: No), the state where the special figure 2 variation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110. Therefore, the processing of S2709 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is on (S2705: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set to off (S2706). In the processing of S2302 of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (FIG. 55, S2205), the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display effect of the second special symbol extracted from the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is acquired from the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223. Then, the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol is generated (S2707).

  The variable pattern command for display of the second special symbol set in the process of S2707 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed by the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 53). Is transmitted to the control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol, the special pattern corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the second special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbols is performed.

  With the setting of the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set variation pattern command for display is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the reserved ball of the second special symbol). In accordance with the display setting), the value of the second special symbol holding sphere number counter 223d is decremented by 1 (S2708).

  Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to ON (S2709). When it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i are not set to ON (that is, OFF) (S2709: No), this process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is on (S2709: Yes), the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is on. In addition, when the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to OFF and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to ON, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to OFF (S2710). ).

  In the processing of S2206 of the command determination processing (FIG. 54, S2111), the stop type extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command is set (S2711). If the set stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, based on the stop type, the stop type (whether it is 15R probability variation big hit, 15R normal big hit) to the display control device 114. A special display 1 stop type command for display for notification is generated. Moreover, when the set stop type is the stop type of the second special symbol, based on the stop type, the display control device 114 has a stop type (whether it is a 15R certainty jackpot or a 15R normal jackpot). ) A special display 2 stop type command for display is generated to notify () (S2712). It should be noted that the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command notified from the main control device 110 notifies the big hit type when a big hit occurs, and notifies even if the determination result is out of order. To be done. If the determination result is out, the stop type is not referred, and the out symbol is set.

  With such a configuration, the voice lamp control device 113 controls the display control device 114 so as to variably display both the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time. You can

  Thus, in the present embodiment, based on the transition of the game state, by switching the special symbol that sets a long variation time in the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the player plays the game. It is configured to control the special symbols that are possible. Then, in the latent probability variation state ST2, since only the jackpot which becomes the high probability game state (latent probability variation game state ST2 or probability variation game state ST3) is set to be drawn by the second special symbol given at the time of the jackpot, Even after the jackpot is executed, the high-probability game state (latent probability variation game state ST2 or probability variation game state ST3) is set again. Therefore, for the player, when the latent probability variation game state ST2 is entered, the probability variation state can be set until at least two big hits are executed. Therefore, the player can recognize that if the latent probability variation game state ST2 is reached, the jackpot is guaranteed twice.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the electric accessory 632 is not operated, 85% of the right-handed game ball is configured to win the second starting opening 640. Further, in the latent probability variation game state ST2, the second special symbol is set to win the small hit, and the lottery probability is that about 15% of the game balls hit to the right are small hit games as prize balls for the player. It is set with the probability that it will be paid out. Therefore, the operation frequency of the electric accessory 632 is set low (non-electric power support state), even in the latent probability variation game, the game is performed in a state in which the decrease of the player's possession ball is suppressed when the right-handed game is performed. be able to.

  Furthermore, when the latent probability variation game state ST2 is a big hit with the second special symbol, the probability transition to the probability variation game state ST3 with a probability of 66%. Here, in the probability variation game state ST3, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to be long and the variation time of the first special symbol is set to be short. Then, when the big jackpot with the first special symbol, either the jackpot which is shifted to the probability variation gaming state ST3 again or the jackpot which is shifted to the normal gaming state ST1 is given by lottery. Therefore, the player can play the game with the expectation that he can win the jackpot twice again. Further, by providing a case where the probability variation game state ST3 is shifted to the normal game state ST1, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high. Incidentally, in the probability variation gaming state ST3, by a big hit based on the first special symbol, the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 or the normal gaming state ST1 may be shifted to. As a result, the player plays the game with the expectation of shifting from the probability variation game state ST3 to the latent probability variation game state ST2 in which the jackpot can be obtained twice again, so that the player's interest can be improved.

  Furthermore, in the normal gaming state ST1, when the jackpot is hit with the first special symbol which is mainly played, the lottery ratio of the jackpot A to which the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 is given is set lower than the jackpot percentage of the jackpot B. , It is possible to increase the difficulty level of shifting to the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 and suppress the increase in gambling.

  In the present embodiment, the gaming state is configured to be switched when the jackpot game is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming state can be switched depending on the jackpot type when the jackpot game is won. You may comprise. With this configuration, the small hits are more easily drawn than the big hits, so that the gaming state can be switched more frequently. Therefore, even if the player is in a gaming state that is unfavorable, it is possible to switch to an advantageous gaming state by winning the small hit, and it is possible to expect the player to win the small hit. In addition, even when an advantageous game state is set, it is possible to switch to a game state that is disadvantageous to the player by making a small hit, and it is possible to suppress gambling.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 86. First, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65. 64 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 65 is an enlarged view of the right side region of the game board 13.

  The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the second variable winning device 650 is provided on the upper right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, and the ball guiding path forming member 70 is the right side area when viewed from the front of the game board 13. And the point that the lower right decoration member 71 is provided on the lower right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, and the second starting port 640 is accompanied by the second ordinary electric accessory 640a. The point provided on the side, the point that the first variable winning device 65 is attached to the lower right decorative member 71, and the normal symbol starting port (through) instead of the first normal symbol starting port 67a and the second normal symbol starting port 67b. The difference is that the gate) 670 is provided on the lower side when viewed from the front of the game board 13 and the right first starting opening 631 is deleted. The same parts as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 64, in addition to the first embodiment, the game board 13 is configured by assembling a ball guide path forming member 70, a lower right decoration member 71, and the like. The first starting port 630, the second starting port 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, It is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with wood screws or the like. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The points added to the first embodiment regarding the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG. 64.

  A through gate 670 is provided on the right side of the game board 13. The through gate 670 is composed of a starting opening having a sensor that is a gate type and can detect passage of a game ball. When the game ball passes through the through gate 670, a lottery for normal symbols (second symbol) is performed. In the lottery performed for the game ball having passed through the through gate 670, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is hit.

  When the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is drawn, the variable symbol of the ordinary symbol is started to be displayed on the second symbol display device 83 provided in the variable display device unit 80 (see FIG. 2), and "○" and " After the “X” symbols are alternately turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the normal symbols (“O” or “X” symbols in the present embodiment) indicating the lottery result are stopped (lit).

  When it is determined that the winning symbol is a normal symbol, the symbol “◯”, which is a symbol indicating that the lottery of the ordinary symbol was a winning symbol, is lit and displayed on the second symbol display device 83. When the winning symbol is displayed, the second ordinary electric accessory 640a associated with the second starting opening 640 operates for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). The second ordinary electric role 640a is maintained in an upright state so as to regulate the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 640 in the normal state (non-operating state), while the second ordinary electric role By operating the object 640a, the second ordinary electric auditors product 640a rotates clockwise by a predetermined angle (40 degrees in this embodiment), and a state in which a game ball is allowed to enter the second starting opening 640 (special state ) Is configured to be. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is off, the symbol "x", which is a symbol indicating that the lottery for the normal symbol is out, is lit and displayed on the second symbol display device 83. At this time, the second ordinary electric accessory 640a is not operated, and the next variation of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in the lottery performed for the entrance to the first start opening 630 and the second start opening 640, the jackpot determination is performed (big hit lottery), and the jackpot type is determined. Also do. The jackpot type will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 74, but as the jackpot types determined here, eight types of jackpot A to jackpot H are available as jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1). It is set (see FIG. 74). These eight kinds of jackpot types are long and short interval time (1 second or 4 seconds), whether V operation is possible, and whether or not electric support is available after the jackpot game is finished (whether the second ordinary electric accessory 640a can be easily put into a special state. Or not) is set in combination.

  Here, the length of the interval time means that the game ball is transferred to the first variable winning a prize device 65 provided with a special discharge port (specific area) 65e2 (see FIG. 6) provided with a probability variation switch 65e3 at a predetermined timing (probability variation switch). It is the length of the interval time set to change whether or not (easy or difficult) it is possible to guide the vehicle at a timing when it can pass 65e3.

  Although detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG. 80, in the present embodiment, an interval time between specific rounds during the jackpot game (a round in which the second variable winning device 650 performs an opening/closing operation (in the present embodiment, 4R) and the round in which the first variable winning device 65 opens and closes (5R in the present embodiment) is changed, so that the game ball reaches the first variable winning device 65. Whether the game ball can pass to the probability change switch 65e3 provided in the first variable winning device 65 depending on the timing when the game ball reaches the first variable winning device 65 (easy or difficult Or) can be set.

  Whether the V operation is possible or not (whether the game ball that has won the first variable winning device 65 can pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 (see FIG. 6) provided in the special discharge port 65e2 (see FIG. 6) (easy or difficult) If the V operation is possible, the gaming ball that has won in the first variable winning a prize device 65 is set to be able to pass the probability variation switch 65e3, while the V operation is not possible. In this case, the gaming balls that have won the first variable winning device 65 are set so that the probability variation switch 65e3 cannot pass (difficult). The detailed content is the same as that of the first embodiment described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted. However, in the present embodiment, the operation of the switching member 65h (see FIG. 6) provided in the first variable winning a prize device 65. It is configured so that whether or not the V operation can be set by controlling the.

  In the present embodiment, whether or not the V operation is set by controlling the driving of the switching member 65h may be set as long as it is possible to set whether or not the gaming ball can pass the probability variation switch 65e3. A lid member that is always opened and closed at a constant interval is provided on the upstream side of the passage having the probability variation winning switch 65e3, and a stopper member that retains game balls is provided further upstream of the lid member. Then, only when the timing when the stopper member is released coincides with the timing when the lid member is opened, the game ball may be allowed to pass through the probability variation winning switch 65e3. By using such a configuration, it becomes possible for the player to know that the lid member is regularly opened, and the player is allowed to win the game ball into the first specific winning opening 65. If so, it is possible to think that there is a possibility that the probability variation switch 65e3 may be passed, and it is possible to increase the motivation for the game.

  In addition, by changing the opening time (opening timing) of the lower attacker (opening/closing door) 65f1 for opening the first specific winning opening 65a to make it difficult for the game ball to win in the first variable winning device 65, It may be possible to set whether or not the ball can pass the probability change switch 65e3.

  The presence/absence of electric support is to set whether or not the second ordinary electric accessory 640a is easily moved to a special state (electric support state) after the jackpot game is over.

  Further, in the present embodiment, similar to the first special symbol, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), eight types of jackpot A to jackpot H are set (see FIG. 74).

  Here, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are arranged as the variable winning devices that are operated in the open state during the jackpot game. The first variable winning a prize device 65 is provided on the lower side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 64), and in the specific round (fifth round in the present embodiment) during the jackpot game, the first specific winning port 65a is in a predetermined period ( In this embodiment, 29 seconds) or a predetermined number (10 balls in this embodiment) of game balls are operated to be opened until they enter (see FIG. 80(b)).

  On the other hand, the second variable winning device 650 is provided on the upper side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 64 ), and is a round other than the specific round during the jackpot game (1st to 4th rounds and 6th to 7th rounds in this embodiment). In, the second specific winning opening 650a is operated so as to be opened until a predetermined period (30 seconds in this embodiment) or a predetermined number (10 balls in this embodiment) of game balls are entered.

  Returning to FIG. 64, the description will be continued. On the right side of the game board 13, a ball guide path forming member 70 for guiding a game ball shot by a right-handed game is attached to the surface of the game board 13 with screws. The ball guiding path forming member 70 is an opening 70a that is an opening through which a game ball launched by a right-handed game can pass, and a plurality of guides that guide the game ball that has passed through the opening 70a in a meandering manner. Members (first guide member (first guide surface) 70b, second guide member (second guide surface) 70c, third guide member (third guide surface) 70d), and a game ball flowing down the third guide member 70d And a discharge portion 70e for discharging the are assembled as one unit.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the problem that the positional relationship between the position where the game ball passes (the positions of the opening 70a and the discharge part 70e) and the member (each guide member) that guides the game ball shifts. In addition to the above, it is possible to suppress the problem that the positional relationship between the guide members is deviated, and it is possible to increase the manufacturing efficiency in the process of manufacturing the pachinko machine 10.

  Below the ball guide path forming member 70, a lower right decoration member 71 including the first variable winning device 65 is attached to the surface of the game board 13 with screws. The lower right decoration member 71 is a fourth guide member (fourth guide surface) 71a for receiving the game ball rolling on the third guide member 70d of the ball guide path forming member 70, a first variable winning device 65, The decorative portion 71b is assembled and configured as one unit.

  A decoration lamp (light emitting means) (not shown) is provided in the decoration portion 71b, and it is possible to emphasize that the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is open during the big hit game. Has been done. Specifically, the surface of the decoration portion 71b (the surface visible to the player) is configured by a half mirror, and when the decoration lamp is in the off state, it becomes difficult to see the inside of the first variable winning a prize device, and the first identification. When the winning port 65a is opened, the decoration lamp is turned on and the inside of the first variable winning device is visible.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player easily notice that the player is in the game state aiming at the first specific winning opening 65a, and not in the game state or in the normal game state (during a big jackpot game). In a non-gaming state), it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing (difficulty) the structure inside the first variable winning a prize device 65, and thus, a fraudulent act (for example, a jig dedicated to the first specific winning hole 65a). It is possible to make it difficult to perform the operation of inserting the switch and deforming the switching member.

  Returning to FIG. 64, the description will be continued. In the right side area of the game board 13, a ball guiding path 72 is formed by the above-mentioned ball guiding area forming member 70 and the fourth guiding member 71a. The ball guide path 72 is configured so that the game ball meanders, and a specific configuration will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 65 is an enlarged front view of the right side area of the game board 13. Here, the flow of the game ball in the ball guide path 72 will be described. First, the game ball that has passed through the opening 70a is received by the first guide member 70b. The first guide member 70b is assembled so as to be inclined toward the lower right direction in the front view of the game board 13, and the game ball flows down (rolls) downward on the first guide member 70b. The lower end of the first guide member 70b is assembled so as to face the second guide member 70c, and the game ball that has flowed down the first guide member 70b falls onto the second guide member 70c.

  The second guide member 70c is assembled so as to be inclined toward the lower left direction in the front view of the game board 13, and the game ball flows down (rolls) on the second guide member 70c in the lower left direction. The lower end of the second guide member 70c is assembled so as to face the third guide member 70d, and the game ball that has flowed down the second guide member 70c falls onto the third guide member 70d.

  The third guiding member 70d is assembled so as to be inclined toward the lower right direction in the front view of the game board 13, and the game ball flows down (rolls) downward on the third guiding member 70d. The lower end of the third guiding member 70d is assembled so as to face the fourth guiding member 71a, and the game ball flowing down the third guiding member 70d passes through the discharging portion 70e and is placed on the fourth guiding member 71a. To fall.

  Then, the fourth guide member 71a is attached to the game board 13 so as to be inclined toward the lower left direction in a front view of the game board, and the game ball flows downward (rolls) on the fourth guide member 71a in the lower left direction. ) Do. The lower end of the fourth guiding member 71a is configured to communicate with the opening/closing door 65f1 (see FIG. 6) of the first variable winning device 65, and when the first specific winning port 65a is closed, the fourth guiding member 71a is closed. The game ball flowing down the member 71a flows down (rolls) on the opening/closing door 65f1 and is discharged to the lower region of the game board 13 (the region where the through gate 670 and the second starting opening 640 are arranged). Composed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the ball guiding path 72 is configured so that the game ball meanders. Therefore, the time required for the game ball to pass through the ball guiding path 72 (guide path passing time) is meandering. It becomes possible to set it longer than the case where it is not set.

  Further, each of the guiding members that form the ball guiding path 72 is configured such that the inclination angle becomes gradually smaller from the upstream side. Specifically, the first guiding member 70b and the second guiding member 70c are set to about 20 degrees, the third guiding member 70d is set to about 10 degrees, and the fourth guiding member 71a is set to about 5 degrees.

  With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the flow velocity of the game ball on the downstream side of the ball guiding path 72, and to open and close the fourth guiding member 71a and the rolling surface of the fourth guiding member 71a. A plurality of game balls can be stayed (rolled) on the door 65f1 at the same time.

  Therefore, when the first specific winning opening 65a is opened, it is possible to win a plurality of game balls in a short period of time.

  Further, in the present embodiment, between the guide members, the game ball is configured to drop on the inclined surface that is inclined in the direction opposite to the flow direction, so that the flow speed of the game ball can be efficiently reduced. It is possible.

  In this embodiment, in order to simultaneously retain (roll) a plurality of game balls on the downstream side of the ball guide path 72, the inclination angle of the guide member is made gentle, and the flow speed of the game balls is reduced. However, other configurations may be adopted. For example, a material having a high friction coefficient (urethane or the like) may be attached to the game ball rolling surface of the guide member to reduce the flow rate of the game ball. Further, the guide member (fourth guide member 71a) provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path 72 and the game ball rolling surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 meander in the depth direction (horizontal direction) when viewed from the front of the game board 13. You may. Even if such a configuration is adopted, the same effect can be obtained.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent a step from being formed between the guide surface of the fourth guide member 71a and the surface (guide surface) of the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65, the fourth guide is provided. The member 71a is provided on the lower right decoration member 71 which is formed separately from the ball guiding path forming member 70. With this configuration, for example, when the ball guiding path configuration of the pachinko machine 10 is adopted for the pachinko machine 10 in which the shape of the first variable winning device 65 is slightly changed, the fourth guiding member 71a is used. Only by changing the shape corresponding to the shape of the first variable winning device 65, the ball guiding path forming member 70 can be used. That is, there is an effect that the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  Next, the opening 70a of the above-described ball guiding path 72 is located below the second variable winning a prize device 650, and the second specific winning port 650a of the second variable award winning device 650 is open (the attacker 650b is open). In the operated state, the game ball is configured so that it cannot pass (difficult) through the opening 70a.

  In addition, although detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG. 67, in the present embodiment, a period (opening period, interval period) of closing the second specific winning port 650a of the second variable winning a prize device 650 during the jackpot game. By changing the length, the game ball that has passed through the ball guide path 72, the first variable winning device at the timing when the game ball can pass the probability change switch 65e3 by the operation of the switching member 65h of the first variable winning device 65. It is possible to control whether or not to win 65.

  In the present embodiment, the two variable winning devices are arranged vertically apart from each other, and the ball guiding path 72 is provided between them (between the paths along which the game balls flow down). The game balls that have passed through without winning the winning device 650) reach the lower variable winning device (first variable winning device 65), but the time is set to be delayed. Other configurations may be used. For example, a plurality of variable winning devices may be provided in the left-right direction, and the ball guiding path 72 may be provided between them.

  Also, a plurality of variable winning devices and the ball guiding path 72 between them may be assembled as one unit. With this configuration, there is an effect that the assembling work to the game board 13 can be facilitated and the manufacturing efficiency can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as the ball guide path 72, a configuration in which the game ball meanders in the left and right direction of the game board is used, but if the time for which the game ball passes the ball guide path 72 is set to a predetermined time or more, Other configurations may be used. For example, the path may be meandered in the depth direction (horizontal direction) of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, or the game balls may be three-dimensionally meandered using both the left-right direction and the depth direction.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the distance that the game ball flows down the time when the game ball passes through the right side area of the game board 13 (the time when the game ball flows down from the second variable winning device 650 to the first variable winning device 65). Is extended or a configuration in which the speed at which the game ball flows down is delayed is used to realize extension for a predetermined time or longer, but other methods may be used. For example, a regulation member that regulates the flow down of the game sphere is provided in the ball guiding path 72, and the regulation member is electrically driven at all times or at regular intervals to set the time for the game sphere to pass through the ball guiding path 72. You may make it the structure made to be more than predetermined time. By using the electrically driven regulation member in this manner, it is possible to more reliably make the time for passing through the ball guiding path longer than a predetermined time.

  In the second embodiment, a game ball is difficult to win in the first starting port 630 during a right-handed game, but like the first embodiment described above, the first starting port is located in the right side area of the game board 13. 631 may be provided.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, a flow of setting various game states in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a flow in which various game states are set. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a limit (100 times) to the number of electric support provided in the probability variation game state ST3 with respect to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, and a flow in which various game states are set. Are different. Since the other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the transition rate of the high-probability game state or the low-probability state after the jackpot game is finished, the type of special symbol (first special symbol, two types of second special symbol) and the gaming state (normal gaming state) It is different from the above-described first embodiment in that a total of eight types can be set by a combination of ST1, a time saving game state ST1h, a latent probability variation game state ST2, and a probability variation game state ST3). Detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG.

  First, the flow of setting various game states in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 and 66. In the normal game state ST1, first, a left-handed game is performed in which the first starting opening 630 (see FIG. 64) provided in the lower center of the game board 13 is aimed at. During the normal game state ST1, the first special symbol is the subject of substantial variation, and specifically, in the normal game state ST1, the variation time of the first special symbol game is 8000 ms (8 seconds) to 30000 ms (30 seconds). Time is selected, and 600,000 ms (10 minutes) is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol game (see FIG. 76). By configuring in this way, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol start changing at the same time in the normal gaming state ST1, by the time the second special symbol finishes changing once, the first special symbol Since the symbol can be changed a plurality of times (minimum 20 times in this embodiment), the first special symbol can be substantially changed.

  Then, during the normal gaming state ST1, when the jackpot in the first lottery game of the first special symbol (special diagram 1), jackpot B (7R normal jackpot: no electric support) and jackpot D (7R normal jackpot: electric support available) ) And jackpot E (7R probability variation jackpot: with electric support) and jackpot H (7R regular hit: without electric support) are selected.

  Here, if you win the jackpot in the first lottery game during the normal gaming state ST1, the probability of transitioning to the high-probability gaming state (hidden probability variation gaming state ST2 or probability variation gaming state ST3) after the jackpot is set to 50%. And, the probability of transitioning to the low probability state (normal game state ST1 or time saving game state ST1h) is set to 50%, and if the jackpot B, D, H is won in the first lottery game, after the jackpot game is over If the normal gaming state ST1 is set again and the jackpot E is won in the first lottery game, the probability variation gaming state ST3 is set after the jackpot game is over.

  As described above in the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which the jackpot probability does not shift to a high probability unless the gaming ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot game. Even if you win the jackpot E in the lottery game, if the gaming ball does not pass the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, the probability variation game state ST3 is not set, and the probability variation game state ST3 (high probability: with electric support) is a jackpot. When the probability becomes low, the game will be shifted to the short game state ST1h (low probability: electric support is available).

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even if the same jackpot type is won, depending on the result of the game during the jackpot game (the result of whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed during the jackpot game) The game state to be moved after the end may be different, but when explaining the flow of setting various game states, the game state that can be changed according to the jackpot type (shifts by performing the game normally) The game state) will be described as a transition destination after the jackpot game is over.

  In the normal game state ST1, if the second lottery game is played, it is set not to shift to the high-probability game state after the jackpot game, but to shift to the 100% low-probability state (see FIG. 74). ). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the second lottery game from being illegally played during the normal game state ST1.

  Next, during the normal gaming state ST1, the probability variation gaming state ST3 that shifts with a probability of 50% when the jackpot is won in the first lottery game will be described. In the probability variation game state ST3, a right-handed game is performed in which the second starting opening 640 (see FIG. 64) provided on the right side of the game board 13 is aimed at. During the probability variation game state ST3, the second special symbol is the target of the actual variation, and specifically, in the probability variation game state ST3, the variation time of 600,000 ms (10 minutes) is selected as the variation time of the first special symbol game, As a variation time of the second special symbol game, 500 ms (0.5 seconds) is configured to be selected (see FIG. 78). In this way, by lengthening the variation time of the first special symbol and making the variation time of the second special symbol shorter than the variation time of the first special symbol, it is possible to set the second special symbol as a substantial variation target. ..

  Then, during the probability variation game state ST3, when the jackpot in the second lottery game of the second special symbol (special diagram 2), it is a jackpot E (7R: high probability: with electric support) and jackpot F (7R: high probability: Either no power support or jackpot G (7R: low probability: power support is available) is selected.

  Here, if you win the jackpot in the second lottery game during the probability variation gaming state ST3, after the jackpot is over, the probability of transitioning to a high-probability gaming state (hidden probability variation gaming state ST2 or probability variation gaming state ST3) is set to 70%. And, the probability of shifting to a low probability state (normal game state ST1 or time saving game state ST1h) is set to 30%, and if the jackpot E is won in the second lottery game, after the jackpot game ends, the probability variation game state When ST3 is set again and the jackpot F is won in the second lottery game, the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 is set after the jackpot game is over. When the big hit G is won in the second lottery game, the time saving game state ST1h is set.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that when the total number of fluctuations of the first lottery game and the second lottery game in the probability variation game state ST3 reaches 100 times, the power support is finished. Therefore, when the special symbol variation exceeds 100 times in the probability variation gaming state ST3, the process shifts to the latent probability variation gaming state ST2.

  In the probability variation game state ST3, if the first lottery game is performed, the ratio of shifting to the high-probability game state after the jackpot game is set to 10%, and the ratio of shifting to the low-probability state after the jackpot game. Is set to 90% (see FIG. 74).

  Next, the latent probability variation game state ST2 that shifts by 10% when the jackpot is won in the second lottery game in the probability variation game state ST3 will be described. In the latent probability variation game state ST2, a right-handed game is performed aiming at the second starting opening 640 (see FIG. 64) provided on the right side of the game board 13. During the latent probability variation game state ST2, the second special symbol is the target of the actual variation, and specifically, in the latent probability variation game state ST2, the variation time of 600,000 ms (10 minutes) is selected as the variation time of the first special symbol game. , 500ms (0.5 seconds) is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol game (see FIG. 78). In this way, by lengthening the variation time of the first special symbol and making the variation time of the second special symbol shorter than the variation time of the first special symbol, it is possible to make the second special symbol an actual variation target. .

  Then, in the latent probability variation game state ST2, when the jackpot in the second lottery game of the second special symbol (special diagram 2), jackpot E (7R: high probability: with electric support) and jackpot F (7R: high probability) : No power support) is selected.

  Here, if you win the jackpot in the second lottery game during the probability variation gaming state ST3, after the jackpot, the probability of transitioning to a high-probability gaming state (hidden probability variation gaming state ST2 or probability variation gaming state ST3) is set to 100% It is set so as not to shift to the low probability state (normal game state ST1 or time saving game state ST1h), and if the jackpot E is won in the second lottery game, after the jackpot game, the probability variation game state When ST3 is set and the jackpot F is won in the second lottery game, the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 is set again after the jackpot game is over.

  Next, the time saving game state ST1h will be described. In the time saving game state ST1h, a left hitting game is performed in which the first starting opening 630 (see FIG. 64) provided in the center of the game board 13 is aimed at. During the time saving game state ST1h, the first special symbol is the target of the actual variation, and specifically, in the time saving game state ST1h, the variation time of 600,000 ms (10 minutes) is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol game, As a variation time of one special symbol, 1000 ms (1 second) to 30000 ms (30 seconds) is configured to be selected (see FIG. 77). In this way, by lengthening the variation time of the first special symbol and making the variation time of the second special symbol shorter than the variation time of the first special symbol, it is possible to make the second special symbol an actual variation target. ..

  Then, during the time saving game state ST1h, when the jackpot is achieved in the first lottery game of the first special symbol (special diagram 1), the jackpot A (7R: low probability: no electric support) and the jackpot C (7R: low probability: One of the big hit E (7R: high probability: with electric support) and the big hit F (7R: high probability: without electric support) is selected (see FIG. 75).

  Here, if you win the jackpot in the first lottery game during the time saving game state ST1h, after the jackpot is over, the probability of transitioning to a high probability game state (hidden probability variation gaming state ST2 or probability variation gaming state ST3) is set to 95% And, the probability of transitioning to a low probability state (normal game state ST1 or time saving game state ST1h) is set to 5%, and if the big hits A and C are won in the first lottery game, after the big hit game is over, it is usually When the gaming state ST1 is set and the jackpot E is won in the first lottery game, the probability variation gaming state ST3 is set after the jackpot game is over, and when the jackpot F is won in the first lottery game, after the jackpot game is over. , The latent probability variation game state ST2 is set.

  In addition, as will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 75, the time saving game state ST1h is provided with electric support, and the second ordinary electric auditors accessory 640a attached to the second starting opening 640 is in a special game state in a gaming state. However, as mentioned above, during the time saving game state ST1h, the first special symbol is the target of the actual change, and since the change of the second special symbol is a long change, during the time saving game state ST1h, the second starting opening A game aiming at 640 is a very inefficient game. Further, since the second starting port 640 has one prize ball of the game ball set, even if a right hitting game is performed during the time saving game state ST1h and a game ball is won in the second starting port 640. The number of payouts does not increase, therefore, in the time saving game state ST1h, the same game (left-handed game) as the substantially normal game state ST1 is performed.

  The flow of setting various game states of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has been described above. Here, the main game characteristics (transition of various game states) of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 66. To do.

  First, in the normal gaming state ST1, the jackpot E is won in the first lottery game to aim at the probability variation gaming state ST3 (sorting 50%). Next, in the probability variation game state ST3, while the second lottery game is performed, the jackpot F is won to aim for the latent game state ST2 (sorting 10%). Alternatively, the special symbol game is performed 100 times without making a big hit, and the aim is to shift to the latent game state ST2 by ending the electric support.

  In the probability variation game state ST3, the probability variation game state ST3 is set again after the jackpot game is over, and since 60% of the total jackpots account for the entire jackpot, the latent probability variation game state ST2 is obtained while winning balls by the jackpot. The goal is to make the transition.

  In addition, the probability variation game state ST3 is configured such that a small hit is won as a lottery result of the second lottery game and the small hit game is performed so that the player can play the game without reducing the number of balls he has.

  Next, in the latent probability variation gaming state ST2, after the jackpot game is over, the jackpot in which the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 is set again occupies 90% of the entire jackpot. This latent probability variation game state ST2 is a game state in which the player can expect the most payout in the pachinko machine 10. Although a detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 80, the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 is configured to be able to obtain more payouts than the probability variation gaming state ST3 by repeating the small hit game. .. That is, during the latent probability variation game state ST2, it is possible to increase the number of balls in the small hit game and the big hit game, and to repeat (loop) the same mode with a 90% probability after the big hit game is finished. It is configured.

  In addition, the probability probability change gaming state ST2 has a high probability game state transition rate of the second lottery game of 100%, and even if the remaining probability 10% is won instead of 90% which loops the probability probability variation game state ST2. It just shifts to the game state ST3. In other words, in the latent probability variation gaming state ST2, the jackpot can be won at least twice (ST2→ST3, ST3→ST1h twice) in the high probability gaming state.

  Lastly, the time saving game state ST1h is a game state set when a transition (fall) from a high-probability state to a low-probability state, and the number of times the special symbol changes is a predetermined number (100 times in this embodiment). ) Is a game state in which electric support is provided until. At this time, the short-time gaming state ST1 is set to have a higher rate of transition to the high-probability gaming state after the jackpot is over than the normal gaming state, and when the jackpot is won in the first lottery game during the short-time gaming state ST1, it is high. The ratio of shifting to the probability game state is set to 95% (probability variation game state ST3 is 70% and latent game state ST2 is 25%). Then, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol exceeds 100 times, the normal game state ST1 is entered.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) and gaming state (normal gaming state ST1, time saving gaming state ST1h, latent probability variation gaming state ST2, probability variation gaming state ST3) Since it is configured so that a plurality of ratios of transitioning to the high probability game state after the jackpot game can be set based on the special jackpot that can be changed in accordance with the game state, the special symbol that is the actual variation target, in the normal game state ST1 When the second lottery game that is not a target of substantial change is played, it is possible to extremely reduce the rate of transition to the high-probability game state (0% in this embodiment). With such a configuration, even if an improper game (illegal game) is performed, it does not shift to a state advantageous to the player (high probability gaming state), so an illegal game targeting the pachinko machine 10 can be performed. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the actual variation target of the latent probability variation gaming state ST2, which is a high-probability gaming state, is the second lottery game in which the second special symbol varies, and the lottery result of the second lottery game is a big hit only during the latent probability variation gaming state ST2. Since it is configured to shift to the high-probability game state 100% when it becomes, it is possible to make a big hit in the high-probability game state at least twice in a part of the high-probability game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with excellent game playability, and it is possible to improve the interest of the gaming machine.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, a control flow of various devices during the jackpot of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. 67 is a timing chart showing the flow of various devices executed from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. Of the operation controls of various devices, the description of the same operation controls as those of the above-described first embodiment will be omitted, and the details of other operation controls will be described later with reference to FIG.

  First, when the jackpot game is started, various devices (the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650) related to the jackpot game are operated a predetermined number of times at a predetermined timing by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 80). Then, based on various commands output from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the effect display corresponding to the big hit game on the third symbol display device 81.

  First, when the jackpot game is started, after a predetermined period t1 (opening period) has elapsed, the attacker (upper attacker) 650b is opened (turned on) to open the second specific winning port 650b of the second variable winning device 650. ). Then, the attacker (upper attacker) 650b is closed when a predetermined period (29 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses or a predetermined number of winnings (10 in the present embodiment) are satisfied. The period t2 in which the second specific winning opening 650b is in the open state is defined as one open period (round) and is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times (seven times in the present embodiment) in one jackpot game.

  In the present embodiment, the second specific winning opening 650a is always open during the opening period t2, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the second specific winning opening is closed and open during the opening period. The upper attacker 650b may be operated so as to repeat the state. Even when such a configuration is used, the opening period t2 is set when the predetermined period elapses or a predetermined number of winning conditions are satisfied after the second specific winning opening is first opened. It will end.

  Then, the next round is started after a predetermined period t3 (interval period) has elapsed since the end of one round. As shown in FIG. 80, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes a game in which the second specific winning port 650a of the second variable winning device is opened in the first round to the fourth round, and the fifth round is executed. A game is executed in which the eyes open the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65.

  Next, a flow between the fourth round and the fifth round in which the specific winning opening which is opened during the jackpot game is switched from the second specific winning opening 650a to the first specific winning opening 65a will be described. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that a predetermined period t4, which is a specific interval period between the fourth round and the fifth round, can be changed according to the gaming state (see FIG. 80). For example, the jackpots A to D have an interval period of 1 second, and the jackpots E to H have an interval period of 4 seconds.

  Here, the influence on the game by changing the specific interval period will be described. First, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game ball launched by the right-handed game aiming at the right side of the game board 13 passes through the closed second variable winning device 650, and then the ball is guided. By passing through the path 72, it is possible to win the first specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 64). The ball guide path 72 is designed so that the ball guide path transit time is 3 to 4 seconds.

  In addition, the switching member 65h of the first variable winning device 65 operates in such a manner that the game ball can pass the probability variation switch 65e3 at the same time as the first specific winning port 65a is opened (the attacker 65b is on) (V It is controlled so that the opening operation is turned on, and the mode (the state where the V opening operation is turned on) is continued for a predetermined period t5 (2 seconds in this embodiment), and after a predetermined period (V opening period) t5, a game is played. The sphere is controlled so as to operate (V opening operation is off) in a manner that the sphere cannot pass (difficult) through the probability variation switch 65e3.

  That is, during the jackpot game of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in order to pass the game ball to the probability variation switch 65e3, the specific interval period t4 and the V opening operation period (2 seconds) t5 are added to V. The effective period t6 needs to be longer than the sphere guidance route passage period (up to 4 seconds in this embodiment). Specifically, by setting the specific interval period t4 to 4 seconds, the V effective period t6, which is the sum of the specific interval period t4 (4 seconds) and the V open period t5 (2 seconds), is set to 6 seconds, and the ball guiding It is longer than the route passage period (up to 4 seconds). With this configuration, after the upper attacker 650a of the fourth round is turned off (after the game ball can pass through the ball guiding route 72), the game ball passing through the ball guiding route 72 is V effective. Within the period t6, the first specific winning opening 65a can be won and the probability variation switch 65e3 can be passed.

  On the other hand, if the V effective period t6 is set shorter than the ball guide route passage period, it becomes possible (difficult) for the game ball to win the first specific winning opening 65a within the V effective period t6. ..

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by changing the length of the specific interval period t4 according to the game state, the jackpot game in which V can be passed substantially without changing the operation control of the first variable winning device 65. And it is possible to provide a jackpot game in which V cannot pass (difficult). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the main control device 110 during the big hit game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described in the first embodiment described above, operation control of the first variable winning device 65 (switch member 65h) according to the type of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol). (Operation control that allows the game ball to pass the probability change switch 65e3 and operation control that cannot be passed (difficult)) is set, and the length of the specific interval period t4 is set according to the game state when the jackpot is won. It is configured to set.

  In the present embodiment, by changing the operation content of the switching member 65h as described in the above-described first embodiment, the game ball can pass the easy change switch 65e3 (easy) and the passage failure. It is configured to set possible (difficult) operation patterns, but by changing the opening pattern of the opening/closing door (lower attacker) 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65, the game ball can pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. It may be configured to set an (easy) operation pattern and an impassable (difficult) operation pattern.

  Specifically, first, when the round in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened (5 rounds in this embodiment) is started, the switching member 65h is turned on for 2 seconds. In other words, when the game ball wins at the timing when the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened, the switching member 65h allows the game ball to pass (easy) through the probability change switch 65e3. Drive. Then, the opening/closing door (lower attacker) 65f1 is provided to the first specific winning opening 65a (opening pattern for opening/closing the opening (for example, an opening pattern for continuously opening for 29 seconds)) in which a game ball can be won (easy), and to the first specific winning opening 65a. The opening/closing door opening pattern in which the game ball cannot be won (difficult) (for example, opening pattern in which 0.4 seconds is repeatedly opened 5 times from the start of 5 rounds and then continuously opened for 27 seconds) is configured to be changeable.

  With this configuration, the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (easy) and the passage failure without changing the operation content of the switching member 65h, only by changing the opening pattern of the opening/closing door 65f1. A possible (difficult) operation pattern can be set. Therefore, it is possible to set a plurality of jackpot games that can substantially pass the probability variation switch 65e3, provide various game characteristics to the player, and improve the interest of the game. ..

  In addition, by changing the opening pattern of the opening/closing door 65f1, the game ball can enter the first specific winning opening 65a (easy) and the game ball cannot enter the first specific winning opening 65a (difficult). In the case of using a configuration that enables setting of a different state, not only the timing at which the driving of the switching member 65 is started but also the timing at which the driving of the first variable winning device 65 is started, for example, the pachinko machine 10 The operation may be controlled so that a constant operation is repeated at the timing when the power is turned on.

  Further, by changing the opening pattern of the opening/closing door 65f1, the game ball can enter the first specific winning opening 65a (easy) and the game ball cannot enter the first specific winning opening 65a (difficult). It is possible to set the period during which the switching member 65h is turned on longer than 2 seconds by using the configuration that enables setting of the different states. Thereby, the game ball that has entered the first specific winning opening 65a can be more reliably passed through the probability variation switch 65e3.

  In this embodiment, by changing the specific interval period t4, it is possible to change whether or not the game ball can win the first variable winning device 65 within the V effective period, but other than that. You may employ the structure of. For example, the game ball may be configured to switch the ball guide route passage time, which is the time required for the game ball to pass the ball guide route 72. Further, the value of the V valid period t6 may be changed by changing the value of the V open period t5. Even if such a configuration is used, the same effect as that of the present embodiment can be obtained.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the first specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened in the fifth round of the jackpot game is shown, but for example, in the first round of the first variable winning device 65, In the case of a big hit game in which the first specific winning opening 65a is in the open state, the period changed according to the game state may be set as the opening period t1.

  With such a configuration, for example, by setting the time obtained by adding the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 to be longer than the ball guide route passage time, the right hand hit with the jackpot game start (start of the opening period t1) The hit game ball can win the first variable winning device 65 within the V effective period t6 and can pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. On the other hand, by setting the total time of the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 to be shorter than the ball guide route passage time, the gaming ball hit to the right with the start of the jackpot game is first in the V effective period t6. It is possible to make it impossible (difficult) to win the first specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65.

  As a specific configuration, an opening/closing door 65f1 (see FIG. 6) that operates to open the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is configured to operate multiple times within one round. (It is configured such that the first specific winning opening 65a repeats the open state and the closed state within one round), and the gaming ball that wins when the specific winning opening 65a first becomes the open state has the probability change switch 65e3. It may be configured to allow passage. In addition, the opening/closing door 65f1 that operates to open the first specific winning opening 65a is configured by a plurality of members that perform different predetermined movements, and the specific winning is performed only when the plurality of members perform a specific operation. The mouth may be open.

  By using the specific configuration described above, even when a big hit game (a big hit game in which the game ball cannot pass (difficult) the probability variation switch 65e3) with a short opening period t1 is set, the open state (within one round) Since the game ball wins the specific winning opening in the second open state), there is an effect that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

  Returning to FIG. 67, the description will be continued. When the opening/closing door (lower attacker) 65f1 (not shown) is turned off (end of the fifth round) and the first specific winning opening 65a is closed, the upper attacker 650b is turned on after the elapse of the interval period t3 (second). The specific winning opening 650a is open). After that, the operation of the upper attacker 650b is repeated until the final round (7 rounds) is completed, and after the second specific winning opening 650a of the final round (7 rounds) is closed, the ending period t7 elapses and the jackpot game is played. finish.

  The third symbol display device 81, while the jackpot game is being played, the effect display corresponding to the jackpot game is being executed. Specifically, at the beginning of the big hit game, an effect display (effect A) that celebrates the big hit game is executed, and after that, the special winning opening to be opened in the next round is switched and the big hit After the game is over, an effect display (effect B) for informing (suggesting) that a game for deciding whether or not to shift to the high-probability game state will be performed is executed. Then, the effect display (effect C) for driving whether or not to shift to the high-probability game state is executed, and in the final stage of the big-hit game, the game state provided after the big-hit game is finished (high-low probability of jackpot, presence or absence of electric support). The effect display (effect D) for informing (indicating) is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the timing at which the effect B and the effect C described above are switched is different (delayed) from the timing at which the upper attacker 650b is closed (the timing at which the fourth round ends). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the various processes executed by the pachinko machine 10 from being concentrated.

  Further, the timing of switching the production B and the production C is between the timing when the upper attacker 650b is closed (the timing when the fourth round ends) and the timing when the lower attacker 65f1 opens (the timing when the fifth round starts). Since it is set to the interval period (specific interval period t4), the game ball is the probability change switch 65e3 in the jackpot game of this time based on the timing at which the player switches the effect display displayed on the third symbol display device 81. There is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not it is a jackpot that can be passed, and it is possible to suppress tiredness of the game due to early grasp of the result of the jackpot game.

  It should be noted that by preparing a plurality of timings at which the effect display is switched within the specific interval period t4 and providing a means for randomly setting the timing at which the effect display is switched, the jackpot game can be played further based on the timing at which the effect display is switched. It can be difficult to get the results.

  Next, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 71. It should be noted that, with respect to the same parts as the contents of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 described in the above-described first embodiment, the description on the display screen or the description thereof will be omitted, but the same in this embodiment. It has a display.

  First, in the present embodiment, a stage in which the hero is walking outdoors is displayed on the display screen during the normal gaming state ST1 (not shown). Then, when the jackpot is won and the probability variation game state ST3 is entered, the display screen illustrated in FIG. 68(a) is displayed. FIG. 68A is a diagram exemplifying a display screen showing effects in the probability variation gaming state ST3.

  In the display screen of FIG. 68(a), the variation of the first special symbol is displayed on the upper left of the screen, and the variation of the second special symbol is displayed on the upper right of the screen. On the lower side of the screen, there is provided a game state display area in which "tower search mode (probability variation game state ST3)" which is the current game mode (game state) and "right hit" for notifying the game method are displayed. Further, on the right side of the screen, there is provided a status display area in which an object imitating the tower currently being searched by the main character is displayed. In this state display area, "1F" which is the lowest floor of the object, "100F" which is the top floor, "Rooftop" which is above the top floor, and "30F" which shows the current floor number are displayed. Has been done.

  During the probability variation gaming state ST3, every time the special symbol changes once, the tower goes up one floor, and the display is updated every time the special symbol changes 100 times without winning the jackpot to reach the rooftop. That is, the number of floors displayed with a cursor as "current floor" ("30F" in the figure) is the same as the current number of special symbol fluctuations after the jackpot is over. By the display of this status display area, the special symbol is changed 100 times without winning the jackpot during the probability variation game state ST3, and the latent character transitions to the latent probability variation game state ST2. It is configured to be displayed as an effect to reach.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 68(b), description will be given of the display contents when the jackpot is won during the probability variation gaming state ST3. FIG. 68(b) is a diagram illustrating a display screen showing that the jackpot is won during the probability variation gaming state ST3. In FIG. 68(b), the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as "555", which indicates that the result of the lottery is a big hit. Further, the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed by "246" indicating the disengagement. In the situation display area, "50F" is shown as the current number of floors (the number of special symbol fluctuations since the last jackpot end).

  In the probability variation gaming state ST3, when a big hit is won, a display body (elevator) for notifying that the big hit has been won is displayed on the display screen. During the big hit game, an effect of riding on the elevator and fueling the destination of the elevator is executed (not shown). As an elevator destination, "outdoor" when the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to the normal gaming state ST1 or the time saving gaming state ST1h, and the "tower search mode (tower when the probability variation gaming state ST3 is set 1F)”) and the latent probability variation game state ST2 when set to “roof mode” (see FIG. 69), each of which is configured so that the destination is suggested by the effect executed during the jackpot game. There is.

  In the present embodiment, the gaming state set after the jackpot is changed depending on whether or not the game ball passes the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, so the jackpot game before the jackpot game starts or at the beginning of the jackpot game. The game state set after the end is not fixed.

  Therefore, based on the jackpot type (A to H) won, it is determined whether the gaming state is changed when the gaming ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 and the gaming state when the gaming ball is not passed (for example, the jackpot type is In the case of the big hit E, the game state that shifts after the big hit game is the probability variation game state ST3 or the time saving game state ST1h), and the effect common to the determination results is used as the effect of the big hit game opening stage (for example, effect A in FIG. 67). Then, after that, it may be configured to determine whether or not the game ball has passed the probability variation switch 65e3, and set the final game effect (for example, effect D in FIG. 67) based on the determination result. With such a configuration, the effect on the display screen can be displayed without a sense of discomfort with respect to the game result during the jackpot game (result of whether or not the game ball has passed the probability variation switch 65e3).

  69 is a diagram exemplifying a display screen showing effects in the latent probability variation gaming state ST2. On the display screen of FIG. 69, it is displayed that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing, and the right-handed display and the current game mode (game state) are displayed in the game state display area. A certain "rooftop mode (probability change game state ST2)" is displayed. Further, in the situation display area, the display of "roof" is highlighted in order to notify that the hero has reached the roof.

  This "roof mode" is a mode for notifying (indicating) the latent probability variation game state ST2. In this pachinko machine 10, various values are set so that the gaming state in which the player is most likely to obtain a payout is the latent probability variation gaming state ST2. For details, the description will be given later with reference to FIGS. 78(a) to 80, but in the latent certainty variation game state ST2 in which the second special symbol is the actual variation target, the variation time of the special figure 2 is set to be short. And, the small hitting game time (of the small hitting game time, the opening period and the ending time in which the game ball does not win the specific winning opening) is also set to be short (shorter than the probability variation gaming state ST3). That is, the latent probability variation game state ST2 is set to a game state in which the first specific winning opening 65a is in the longest open time in the small hit game per unit time among all the game states. Furthermore, the jackpot probability is set to a high probability.

  To the "roof mode" that suggests the latent probability variation gaming state ST2, win the jackpot F during the probability variation gaming state ST3 (10% of the total jackpot), or without winning the jackpot during the probability variation gaming state ST3, It is designed to move by changing the special symbol 100 times.

  At that time, as the effect display performed on the third symbol display device 81, for example, a jackpot is won during the probability variation gaming state ST3 (FIG. 68(b)), and an effect (not shown) to get into the elevator is started. Then, is the elevator going up to the upper floor or going down to the lower floor during the jackpot game? After informing (indicating) which mode to shift to after the jackpot game is over to the player, an effect display for the elevator to reach the rooftop is executed.

  In addition, in the probability variation gaming state ST3, when the game shifts to the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 without winning the jackpot, the effect shown in FIG. 68(a) is continuously displayed until the special symbol changes 100 times, every time. The current number of floors displayed in the status display area increases by one floor for each change. Then, when the special symbol fluctuates 100 times and shifts to the "roof mode", the cursor displayed in the situation display area shifts from 100F to "roof" and shifts to the "roof mode".

  Next, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the "roof mode" will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70A is a diagram exemplifying a display screen showing effects in the latent probability variation game state ST2. FIG. 70(b) is a diagram illustrating a display screen showing an effect when a small hit is won with the second special symbol in the latent probability variation game state ST2.

  In the display screen of FIG. 70(a), it is displayed that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing, and the right-handed display and the current game mode (game) are displayed in the game state display area. "Rooftop mode (probability of latent change game state ST2)" which is the state) is displayed. Further, in the situation display area, the display of "roof" is highlighted in order to notify that the hero has reached the roof.

  Further, "possessed G (obtained medium display)" is displayed on the upper side of the display screen as a value corresponding to the game ball acquired by the player. A plurality of treasure boxes are displayed on the roof of the tower in the center of the display screen. This treasure box is displayed so that it is opened when the result of the special symbol game is a big hit or a small hit.

  The acquisition medium display displayed on the upper side of the display screen is a display corresponding to the game ball acquired in the sequence of the game in the pachinko machine 10 (the flow from the initial jackpot to the transition to the normal game state ST1). It is something.

  In the present embodiment, as the acquired medium display, a value corresponding to the total number of media acquired during a series of games is displayed, but for example, during a series of games, it corresponds to the media acquired in the jackpot game. The value and the value corresponding to the medium obtained in the small hit game may be displayed in a display mode in which the player can identify the value. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to easily understand how the player has obtained the medium in the series of games. Further, when such a display is executed, if the value corresponding to the medium obtained in the small hit game satisfies a predetermined condition (the value corresponding to the medium obtainable in one big hit game), another value is obtained. It is preferable to display the display mode. With this configuration, the player can easily recognize that the medium equivalent to the big hit game can be obtained as a result of the small hit game of a plurality of times.

  On the display screen of FIG. 70(b), the second special symbol is stopped and displayed at "123" indicating a small hit. Then, the first special symbol, which was changing at the same timing as the stop of the change of the second special symbol, is forcibly displayed as a stoppage at the outlier. At the center of the display screen, the selected treasure box opens, and an effect in which a treasure indicating a small hit appears from the inside is displayed.

  71 is a diagram exemplifying a display screen showing an effect when the jackpot is won with the second special symbol in the latent probability variation game state ST2. When the jackpot is won in the second special symbol, one of the treasure boxes displayed on the display screen of FIG. 70(a) is opened during the change, and the effect in which the monster appears is displayed. Then, during the jackpot, a battle with a monster starts, and according to the result of the battle, the game state after the jackpot game is informed (indicated) and displayed (not shown). For example, when a battle is won, the player reaches the roof and shifts to the "roof mode". Further, when the player escapes from the battle, the display is changed to the "tower search mode (1F)", and when the battle is lost, the display is changed to the "outdoor" stage (not shown).

  As described above, in the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment, the effect that the story progresses for each mode corresponding to the game state is displayed, and the story is selected according to the special symbol lottery result (big hit, small hit). The results are configured to change. Then, since the player can grasp whether or not the present state is advantageous for the player only by looking at the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the game property more complicated than that of the conventional pachinko machine 10 ( There is an effect that a player can play a game without being confused even if he adopts a game property that can obtain a large number of game balls other than a jackpot game.

<Electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 81. The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are changed. Since the other points are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Further, the second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed. The difference between the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 81. Since the other points are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 72A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to this embodiment. The ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the present embodiment operates the small hit type selection table 202g and the special electric auditors (the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650) in comparison with the first embodiment. The difference is that the table 202h and the jackpot scenario 202i are added, and the values of various counter values referred to in various tables are changed, and other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment. , Its detailed description is omitted.

  The first hit random number table 202a differs from the first embodiment in that the value set as the big hit determination value is different. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The small hitting random number table 202b differs from the first embodiment in that the small hitting determination condition is changed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The second hit random number table 202c is different in that the value set as the hit determination value is different. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The jackpot type selection table 202d is different from the first embodiment in that the number of jackpots is increased so that jackpots with different specific interval periods during jackpot can be selected, and jackpot type selection used in the time saving game state ST1h. The difference is that the table D is newly provided. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75.

  The variation pattern selection table 202e and the universal figure variation pattern selection table are different from the first embodiment in that the variation time set is changed. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 to 79.

  The small hit type selection table 202g is a table used when the small hit random number table 202b is stabilized as a small hit, and is a table in which the small hit type corresponding to each gaming state is selected. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The special electric auditors product operation table 202h is a table in which the operation contents of the special electric auditors product corresponding to the set big hit type or small hit type are stored. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The jackpot scenario 202i is an area for storing a scenario selected when a jackpot is hit, and stores the timing and the number of times the accessory action is performed during each jackpot. The jackpot scenario 202i is updated by the jackpot control process 2 (S1720 of FIG. 85) and reset by the ending process 2 (S1730 of FIG. 86).

  FIG. 72B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to this embodiment. The RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the small hit type selection table 202g and the special electric auditors (first variable winning device 65 and second variable winning device 650) operation table. The difference is that 202h is added and that the values of various counter values referred to in various tables are changed, and other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, so detailed description thereof is omitted. To do.

  The jackpot scenario setting area 203b2 is an area for setting (storing) the jackpot scenario updated by the jackpot control process 2 (S1720 of FIG. 85), and in the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S254 of FIG. 82). The jackpot scenario corresponding to the jackpot type is set.

  When the big hit scenario is set in the big hit scenario setting area 203b2 in the big hit control process 2 (S1720 of FIG. 87), the scenario counter 203c2 is updated by adding 1 to the ending process 2 (S1730 of FIG. 86). It will be cleared when you reset the jackpot scenario.

  The other memory area 203z includes the other memory area set in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, and at least the incoming ball number counter 203j and the operation counter 203k shown in the above-described first embodiment. The notification counter 203m, the remaining ball timer flag 203n, and the remaining ball timer 203o are included and are used in the same control as the above-described first embodiment.

  Next, the contents of the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202a. The first random number counter C1 is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 199, and in the low probability game state, when the value of the first random number counter C1 is "7", the high probability In the gaming state, when the value of the first random number counter C1 is "7 to 9", it is determined that the first random number (big hit). That is, the probability of being a jackpot in the low-probability gaming state is "1/200", and the probability of being a jackpot in the high-probability gaming state is "3/200". In addition, the first lottery game by the first special symbol and the second lottery game by the second special symbol used in the present embodiment are both hit determinations using the first hit random number table 202a.

  The contents of the small hitting random number table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hitting random number table 202b. In the present embodiment, there is no chance to win the small hit by the first lottery game of the first special symbol (special diagram 1). On the other hand, in the second lottery game of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the first random number counter C1 is “10” in the low probability game state (low probability: no electric support, low probability: electric support). If it is ~20", it is determined to be a small hit, and in the high-probability game state (high accuracy: no electric support, high accuracy: electric support), the value of the first random number counter C1 is "10-199". If there is a small hit, it is determined. That is, the small hit probability by the first lottery game is "0/200", the small hit probability by the second lottery game in the low probability game state is "11/200", and the second lottery game in the high probability game state The small hit probability due to is 190/200.

  As a result, in the high-probability game state in which the second lottery game is performed (hidden probability variation game state ST2 and probability variation game state ST3), the small hit game is frequently given. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 80(b), in the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 and the probability variation gaming state ST3, the time when the second specific winning opening 650 is in the open state as a small hit game is the same, The opening time and the ending time set as a small hit game are different, and the opening time and the ending time of the small hit game in the latent certainty variation game state ST2 are set shorter. That is, the opening time of the second specific winning opening 650 per unit time is longer in the latent probability changing game state ST2 than in the probability changing game state ST3. Therefore, the number of game balls that a player can obtain as a small hit game can be increased in the latent probability variation game state ST2 than in the probability variation game state ST3, and the player can obtain a game ball other than the jackpot game. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine with a surprising degree and improve the interest of the game.

  In the present embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the first lottery game is set to 0%, but may be set to, for example, about 10%, or the second lottery during the low probability game state. The probability of winning the small hit in the game is set to "11/200", but it may be set to the same probability as the second lottery game in the high probability game state, for example.

  The contents of the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 73(c). FIG. 73(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202c. In the present embodiment, the second random number counter C4 is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 99, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is "0 to 98" in the low probability game state. In the case of “”, in the high-probability game state, when the value of the second random number counter C4 is “0 to 99”, it is determined that the second win (per normal figure). That is, the probability of winning in the low-probability gaming state is "99/100", and the probability of winning in the high-probability gaming state is "100/100". In addition, in the case of winning per universal figure, the second ordinary electric accessory 640a operates, and the game ball easily enters the second starting opening 640 (special state). In the present embodiment, a slight difference in height is provided between the high-probability probability and the low-probability probability as the second hit, but the probability may be the same.

  Next, the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 75. 74(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the jackpot type selection table A202d referred to in the normal gaming state ST1, and FIG. 74(b) is a jackpot type referred to in the probability variation gaming state ST3. It is a schematic diagram which showed the selection table B202d typically. 75(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the jackpot type selection table C202d referred to in the latent probability variation game state ST2, and FIG. 75(b) is a jackpot referred to in the time saving game state ST1h. It is a type selection table D202d.

  This jackpot type selection table 202d is referred to when the jackpot is won as the lottery result of each special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol), and the type of the special symbol that is won the jackpot (the first symbol) 1 special symbol (special symbol 1) or second special symbol (special symbol 2)), and, based on the game state at the time of jackpot winning, jackpot type jackpot using the counter value obtained from the first hit type counter C2 It is selected from any one of A to jackpot H.

  The jackpot type selection table 202d used in the present embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the jackpot type selection table D202d referred to in the time saving game state ST1h is added, and the jackpot type selected. The difference is that it has been increased, the interval time of the jackpot game can be set according to the jackpot type, and the ratio of the first hit type counter value that is distributed to each jackpot type is changed, and other configurations Are the same. Descriptions of the same parts will be omitted, and differences will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 74(a), in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the special game 1 in the normal game state ST1, the percentage of the gaming state after the jackpot game is high probability gaming state (high probability) At 50%, the interval time (specific interval time t4 in FIG. 67) and V operation (operation of the switching member 65h) are set for each jackpot type so that the probability of being in the low probability state (low probability) is 50%. The presence or absence of electric support after the jackpot game is set. Specifically, depending on the game state, the opening pattern (V possible) that controls the operation of the switching member 65h so that the game ball can pass (enter) the probability variation switch 65e3 as a V operation, and the game ball is the probability variation switch 65e3. One of the opening patterns (V not possible) that controls the operation of the switching member 65h is set so that it cannot pass (enter) (is difficult).

  Further, depending on the gaming state as the interval time, if the V operation is V enabled, the gaming ball is placed in the first variable winning device 65 during the period in which the gaming ball can pass (enter) the probability variation switch 65e3. Even if "4 seconds (V is possible)" that can be won at the specific winning opening 65a and V operation is V is possible, the game ball is transferred to the probability variation switch 65e3 while the game ball can pass (ball). Any one of "1 second (V not possible)" that is impossible (difficult) to win is set to the first specific winning opening 65 of the 1-variable winning device 65.

  Then, it is set whether or not electric support (100 times) is given after the jackpot game is over. Note that, regarding the provision of the electric support, the game ball is provided even if the game ball passes (enters) the probability variation switch 65e3 or does not pass (enter). For example, the electric support “ If the jackpot type that is set to "Yes" is selected, when the game ball passes (enters) the probability variation switch 65e3, the probability variation game state (ST3) is entered after the jackpot game, and the game ball temporarily switches the probability variation switch 65e3. If it does not pass (enter), it will shift to the time saving game state (ST1h) after the jackpot game is over.

  In this way, the big hit type of this time is selected from the big hit types in which different contents are set, by the first hit type counter value acquired from the first hit type counter C2. For example, when the big hit is won in the special figure 1 during the normal game state ST1 and 50 is acquired as the first hit type counter value, the big hit type E is selected. During the jackpot game provided by this jackpot type E, the gaming ball passes (enters) the probability variation switch 65e3, so that the probability variation gaming state ST3 is provided after the jackpot game ends.

  In the present embodiment, jackpot B, jackpot D, and jackpot H are set as jackpot types for which the normal gaming state ST is selected after the jackpot game is over. It is possible to shift to the normal gaming state ST1 after the jackpot game is over, regardless of whether "1 second" or "4 seconds" is selected as the interval time and "V is possible" or "V is not" is selected as the V operation. It indicates that there is a property. With this configuration, it becomes impossible (difficult) to grasp the game state after the jackpot game is finished only by grasping the interval time and the contents of the V operation. Therefore, the player pays attention to the notification (indication) of the gaming state after the jackpot game, which is performed during the jackpot game (or the first special symbol change after the jackpot game is finished), and is performed by the pachinko machine 10. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the situation where the player gets tired of the game at an early stage by making the displayed effect interesting.

  Further, the distribution of V motions being “V allowed” and “V not allowed” is different only depending on the type of the special symbol, and is set so as not to be changed according to the gaming state. Specifically, in the first special symbol, the rate of V motion being “V acceptable” is set to 90% and the rate of “V not being possible” is set to 10%, and in the second special symbol, V motion is “V acceptable”. The ratio of "No V" is set to 0%. With this configuration, it is not necessary to change the V operation (the operation of the switching member 65h) depending on the game state, so that the capacity for storing the operation instruction content for the first variable winning a prize device 65 (switching member 65h) is reduced. It is possible (can be two types). There is an effect.

  Next, the selection of the jackpot type when the jackpot is won with the second special symbol will be described with reference to FIG. 74(a). In the normal game state ST1, a game aiming at the first special symbol (left-handed game) is a proper game method advantageous to the player, but when an improper game (illegal game) is performed, a normal game state A game using the second special symbol is performed during ST1. As an inappropriate game, in the normal game state ST1, by resetting the RAM of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 so as to shorten the fluctuation of the second special symbol for which long fluctuation (10 minutes) is set. By receiving the lottery a plurality of times in a shorter time than the normally required fluctuation time, the player can shift to the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 that is most advantageous for the player without going through an appropriate game flow (see FIG. 66). Possible actions. Assuming a case where such a game is performed, when a big hit is won with the second special symbol during the normal game state ST1, the big hit H is set to be selected. The big hit H is a big hit type that shifts to the normal game state ST1 after the big hit game is over.

  Therefore, it is possible to give a penalty (penalty) to a player who plays an inappropriate game during the normal game state ST1. As for the penalty (penalty) to be executed for an inappropriate player, a content other than the above may be used, and for example, a small win is won in the second special symbol which is not substantially subject to change during the normal game state ST1. If done, the variation pattern of the special symbol after the small hitting game is set to a special variation pattern, and at least the variation pattern in which the first special symbol is a long variation may be forcibly selected. With such a configuration, it is difficult to substantially continue the game, and it is possible to prevent the inappropriate game from being continuously executed.

  In addition, as a result of improper game, if you win the jackpot, the operation content of the special electric auditors during the jackpot game, the special operation content (the operation that cannot enter the game ball into the specific winning opening (difficult) The contents) may be stored in advance in the ROM of the main controller 110.

  In addition, for example, when the jackpot is won in a state where the second special symbol is held and there is a transition to the normal gaming state ST1 after the jackpot game is over, the inappropriate game described above is performed without the player's intention. Since it may be broken, it may be executed only after a predetermined number of times (the upper limit storage number of the second special symbol (four)) after the jackpot game is over, or the second starting opening 640 during the normal game state ST1. It may be executed only when winning the prize. By doing so, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the penalty (penalty) for an inappropriate game from being given to a player who is playing a normal game, and to give the player a feeling of dissatisfaction. There is an effect that can suppress.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 74(b), the jackpot type selection table B202d referred to in the probability variation gaming state ST3 will be described. As shown in FIG. 74(b), in the present embodiment, in the probability variation game state ST3, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1, the ratio of the gaming state after the jackpot game is high probability gaming state (high probability). At 10%, the ratio of the low probability state (low probability) is set to 90%. This is because the game of the special figure 1 in the probability variation game state ST3 is an improper game like the special figure 2 game in the normal game state ST1, and therefore a penalty (penalty) is given to the player. On the other hand, in the case of winning the big hit in the special map 2, 70% of the game state after the big hit game is a high probability game state (high accuracy), and 30% of a low probability state (low probability). Is set to be

  Next, with reference to FIG. 75(a), the jackpot type selection table C202d referred to in the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 will be described. As shown in FIG. 75(a), in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 in the latent probability variation gaming state ST2, the gaming state after the jackpot game is finished is a high probability gaming state (high probability). Is set to 30%, and the ratio of low probability state (low probability) is set to 70%. This is because the game of the special figure 1 in the latent probability variation game state ST2 is an improper game like the special figure 2 game in the normal game state ST1, so a penalty (penalty) is given to the player. On the other hand, in the case of winning the big hit in the special map 2, 90% of the game state after the big hit game is in the high probability game state (high accuracy), and 10% in the low probability state (low accuracy). Is set to be

  Next, the jackpot type selection table D202d referred to in the time saving game state ST1h will be described with reference to FIG. 75(b). As shown in FIG. 75(b), in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 in the time saving game state ST1h, the proportion of the gaming state after the jackpot game is high probability gaming state (high probability) At 95%, the ratio of the low probability state (low probability) is set to 5%. On the other hand, in the case of winning the big hit in the special map 2, the percentage of the gaming state after the jackpot game is high probability gaming state (high probability) is 5%, and the low probability state (low probability) is 95%. Is set to be This is because the game of the special figure 2 in the time saving game state ST1h is an improper game like the special figure 2 game in the normal game state ST1, and therefore a penalty (penalty) is given to the player.

  In this way, when the big hit in special figure 1 is won during the time saving game state ST1h, even if it is the same low probability state, there is a higher probability that the game state after the big hit game is finished with a higher probability than in the normal game state ST1. It is set so that the player can enter the gaming state. With this configuration, even if the player shifts (falls) to the low-probability state, it is possible to provide the player with a chance (return chance) to shift to the high-probability game state for a predetermined period. This has the effect of increasing the player's willingness to play the game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since it is possible to set the transition rate to the high-probability gaming state according to the gaming state and the type of special symbol, it is possible to provide a wider variety of gameplay than conventional pachinko machines. It is possible to provide the information, and it is possible to suppress the situation in which the player gets tired early. It is also possible to give a proper penalty to the player who played the inappropriate game.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 78, a variation pattern selection table for selecting a variation pattern in each gaming state will be described. The present embodiment is the same as the first embodiment except that the variation time set in each variation pattern is different. The description of the same parts will be omitted, and only the differences will be described.

  FIG. 76 is a schematic diagram showing a variation pattern selection table A referred to in the normal game state ST1. In the normal game state ST1, it differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the fluctuation time of special figure 2 is set to 600,000 ms (10 minutes). In the present embodiment, as described above, a penalty can be given to an inappropriate game, and thus the variable time is set to be short.

  FIG. 77 is a schematic diagram showing a variation pattern selection table B referred to in the time saving game state ST1h. In the time saving game state ST1h, like the normal game state ST1, the variation time of the special figure 2 is set to 600,000 ms (10 minutes), and the variation time of each out-of-range variation pattern of the special figure 1 is shortened as described above. This is different from the first embodiment.

  FIG. 78(a) is a schematic diagram showing a variation pattern selection table C referred to in the latent probability variation game state ST2. In the latent probability variation game state ST2, unlike the first embodiment, since the special figure 2 is targeted for the actual change, the change time of the special figure 1 is changed to 600,000 ms (10 minutes), and the change time of the special figure 2 is changed to 500 ms. It is different from the above-described first embodiment in that it is changed.

  FIG. 78(b) is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern selection table D referred to in the probability variation gaming state ST3. The probability variation gaming state ST3 differs from the first embodiment described above in that the variation time when the special figure 1 is out is 600,000 ms (10 minutes).

  FIG. 79 is a schematic diagram showing a general pattern variation pattern selection table for selecting a variation time of a normal symbol. This embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the type of the normal symbol is one type, and therefore is different in that the type of the normal symbol referring to this table is one type.

  FIG. 80A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the small hit type selection table 202g. FIG. 80(a) is a small hit type selection table 202g used in the case of a small hit as a result of the determination of whether or not the special symbol game is successful, and a small hit predetermined according to the game state is selected. It is set. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state ST1 or the time-saving gaming state ST1h, the small hit is selected when the small hit is won, and the probability variation is the small winning 2 when the small hit is won during the gaming state ST3, the small hit probability is selected. When the small hit is won during the game state ST2, the small hit 3 is selected. Note that the small hit 1, small hit 2, and small hit 3 each have different operation contents of the special electric accessory during the small hit game. The detailed content will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 80(b), the operation contents of the special electric auditors (the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650) that are operated during the big hit game or the small hit game will be described. FIG.80(b) is the figure which showed typically the special electric auditors product operation table 202h. This special electric auditors product operation table 202h sets the operation contents of the special electric auditors product corresponding to the big hit type.

  First, the operation content of the special electric auditors product based on each jackpot type will be described. The same operation is set from jackpot A to jackpot E of jackpot type, the opening time is 5 seconds, the number of rounds is 7, and the second variable winning device is from the first round (R) to the fourth round as the opening operation during the round. 650 (upper) opens for 29 seconds, and in the fifth round, the first variable winning device 65 (lower) opens for 29 seconds. Then, from the sixth round to the seventh round, the second variable winning device 650 (upper) is set to open again for 29 seconds. Although the opening operation time during the round is set to 29 seconds, it is set so that the specific winning opening is closed when 10 game balls are won in the specific winning opening of each variable winning device during that time. Then, the inter-round interval is set to 2 seconds, the inter-round specific interval (t4 in FIG. 67) is set to 1 second, and the ending time is set to 5 seconds.

  The jackpot types E to H are different from the above jackpots A to E in that the time of the specific interval between rounds is increased from 1 second to 4 seconds, and the same values are set for the other items. .. In this way, by making the specific intervals between rounds different, as described with reference to FIG. 67, it becomes possible to set whether the gaming ball can pass to the probability variation switch 65e3 (easy or difficult). There is. In this way, during a specific round (a round in which a game ball is won in the second specific winning port 650a of the second variable winning device 650 and a round in which a game ball is won in the first specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65). By simply changing the interval time of (between) and, it is possible to set a plurality of jackpot game ratios that can substantially pass the probability variation switch 65e3, provide various playability to the player, and The effect is that the interest can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, by changing the specific interval period t4, it is possible to change whether or not the game ball can win the first variable winning device 65 within the V effective period t6 (see FIG. 67). However, other configurations may be adopted. For example, the game ball may be configured to switch the ball guide route passage time, which is the time required for the game ball to pass the ball guide route 72. Further, the value of the V valid period t6 may be changed by changing the value of the V open period t5. Even if such a configuration is used, the same effect as that of the present embodiment can be obtained.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the first specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning a prize device is opened in the fifth round of the jackpot game is shown. However, for example, the first variable winning a prize device 65 of the first variable winning device 65 is opened in the first round. In the case of the jackpot game in which the 1 specific winning opening 65a is in the open state, the period changed according to the game state may be set as the opening period t1. With such a configuration, for example, by setting the time obtained by adding the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 to be longer than the ball guide route passage time, the right hand hit with the jackpot game start (start of the opening period t1) The hit game ball can win the first variable winning device 65 within the V effective period t6 and can pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. On the other hand, by setting the total time of the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 to be shorter than the ball guide route passage time, the gaming ball hit to the right with the start of the jackpot game is first in the V effective period t6. It is possible to make it impossible (difficult) to win the first specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65.

  In the present embodiment, the operation contents of the special electric auditors product set by the special electric auditors product operation table 202h and the operation contents of the switching member 65h corresponding to each jackpot type are set as a jackpot scenario. Other configurations may be adopted. For example, the special electric auditors product operation table 202h may be configured so that the operation contents of the switching member 65h can be set.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 having the probability change switch 65e3 is configured to be opened only once in the fifth round in one big hit game, but in the one big hit game, the first The variable winning a prize device 65 may be configured to be opened a plurality of times. Specifically, for example, the first variable winning device 65 may be configured to be opened in the third round, the fifth round, and the seventh round.

  With such a configuration, the round before the round in which the first variable winning device 65 is in the open state can be changed to the round in which the second variable winning device 650 is in the open state, and during one jackpot game. It is possible to have a plurality (three) of specific interval periods. Therefore, for each specific interval period, it becomes possible to set whether or not the gaming ball can reach the first specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning a prize device 65 at a timing at which the gaming ball can pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. There is an effect that it is possible to make a player expect a plurality of times during one big hit game.

  When the above-described configuration is adopted, if the V motion is V-allowable (FIG. 74), that is, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened, and the switching member 65h is turned on for 2 seconds. In this case, it is determined whether the game ball is fired at a timing that can pass the probability variation switch 65e3. If the game ball is not fired at a timing that can pass the probability variation switch 65e3, a proper game method is selected by the player. You should inform us.

  Specifically, a detection means for detecting the passage of the game ball is provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path 72, it is determined that the passage of the game ball is detected within the specific interval period, and the third is determined based on the determination result. As the display for informing the game method on the symbol display device 81, it is preferable to display the contents for explaining the game method such as "Don't stop right-handing!" and "Probability change chance if you keep firing!". By performing such display, when the first variable winning device 65 is next opened (fifth round or seventh round), it is possible to support the game so that the player can play an appropriate game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused about playability.

  Note that the method of determining whether or not a proper game is being played during the jackpot game is not limited to the contents described above, and other methods may be used. For example, a method of determining that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the game ball during the big hit game is operated, or a method of detecting the rotation amount of the handle and determining that the right-handed game is not being used, is used. You may.

  Further, regarding the display content of the display for notifying (guidance) the game method, the display content may be changed based on the content of the jackpot won. For example, if a proper game is played, if the game ball is a big hit that passes through the probability variation switch 65e3, the display may be emphasized.

  Further, it may be possible to set a jackpot scenario in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened in successive rounds. By using such a configuration, even if the interval time is short, the game ball can pass through the probability variation switch 65e3, the number of variations can be further increased, and the interest of the game can be improved. It will be possible.

  Next, the operation content of the special electric accessory based on the small hit type will be described. The small hit types include small hits 1 to small hits 3, and the small hits 1 are small hits selected when the game state is the normal game state ST1 or the time saving game state ST1h, and the small hit 2 changes the game state with certainty. It is a small hit selected in the gaming state ST3. Then, the small hit 3 is a small hit selected when the game state is the latent probability variation game state ST2 (see FIG. 80(a)).

  Each small hit is set so that the opening time, the opening operation during the round, and the ending time are different. Specifically, the small hit 1 is set such that the opening time and the ending time are set to 7.5 seconds, and the opening operation of 0.3 seconds is repeated 6 times as the opening operation during the round. That is, the small hit 1 is set as a small hit in which high speed opening is repeated, and there is almost no (difficulty) that a game ball wins a specific winning opening during a small hit game.

  Next, for the small hit 2, the opening time and ending time are set to 7.5 seconds like the small hit 1, but the opening operation of 1.8 seconds is performed once as the opening operation during the round. It is set. That is, in the small hit 2, the operation of the special electric accessory is set so that the game ball can win the specific winning opening.

  Specifically, in the probability variation game state ST3 (see FIG. 80(a)) in which the small hit 2 is selected, the variation time of the special figure 2 is set to 0.5 seconds, and the small hit game of the small hit 2 is set. The time is set to 16.8 seconds (about 17 seconds) by adding the opening time (7.5 seconds), the opening time (1.8 seconds) and the ending time (7.5 seconds). If the number of game balls to be won in the specific winning opening during the small hitting game is two and the number of prize balls in the specific winning opening is 10, it is possible to obtain about 60 to 70 prize balls in one minute. Becomes

  Finally, the small hit 3 has the same opening operation during the round as the small hit 2, but the opening time and ending time are set to 0.3 seconds. That is, the period for which the specific winning opening is closed is set to be 10 times or more shorter than the small hit.

  Specifically, in the latent probability variation game state ST2 (see FIG. 80(a)) in which the small hit 3 is selected, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is set to 0.5 seconds, and the small hit 3 small hits are set. The game time is set to 2.4 seconds (about 2.5 seconds) by adding the opening time (0.3 seconds), the opening time (1.8 seconds) and the ending time (0.3 seconds). If the number of game balls to be won in the specific winning opening during the small hitting game is 2 and the number of prize balls in the specific winning opening is 10, it is possible to obtain about 480 prize balls in 1 minute. .

  That is, in the small hit 3, the operation of the special electric auditors is set so that the game ball can win the specific winning opening, and further, the specific winning opening is not opened in the small hitting game. By shortening the opening time and the ending time, it is possible to make the open state of the specific winning opening by the small hit game appear more frequently than the small hit 2. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to obtain a lot of game balls, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game. Also, by adding another game property (a game property waiting for the game state to shift to the latent probability changing game state ST2) to the game property such as waiting for the jackpot game to be executed as in the conventional case, A variety of effects can be provided, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 81, a detailed electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 81A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. Further, FIG. 81( b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

  The ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this embodiment is the same as that in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. Further, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that an advantageous period flag 223m and an advantageous information storage area 223n are added, and other configurations Are the same as those in the first embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The advantageous period flag 223m is a flag that is set to ON while the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the high-probability gaming state, and is set to ON when the gaming state becomes the high-probability gaming state, and the gaming state is It is set to OFF when the low probability game state is entered.

  The advantageous information storage area 223n is an area for storing game information while the advantageous period flag 223m is set to ON (in the advantageous state). As the game information, the number of game balls acquired during the advantageous period, the number of big hits and the number of small wins won during the advantageous period are stored. The information stored in the advantageous information storage area 223n is cleared when the advantageous period flag 223m is set to OFF.

  By using the advantage period flag 223m and the advantage information storage area 223n described above to temporarily store the number of game balls obtained by the player during the continuation of the high probability game, the obtained medium is displayed on the display screen during the latent probability change gaming state ST2. (See FIG. 70) can be displayed.

<Regarding Control Processing Executed by Main Controller 110 in Second Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 82 to FIG. 86, the control processing executed by the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. It should be noted that the same processing as that of the first embodiment will not be illustrated and described, and only different control processing will be illustrated and described.

  With reference to FIG. 82, the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S254) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S254). The first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (FIG. 82, S254) is different from the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 29, S204) in the first embodiment in that the process of S651 is added. .. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the processing of S609, after the fluctuation stop of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is executed, the processing of S651 is executed. In the process of S651, the jackpot scenario 202i (determined by the special electric auditors operation table) specified for the jackpot game operation corresponding to the jackpot type that has been decided is selected from the ROM 202 and set in the jackpot scenario setting area 203b2. (S651).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257). The second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (FIG. 83, S257) is different from the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 36, S207) in the first embodiment in that the process of S1051 is added. .. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the processing of S1009, after the fluctuation stop of the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is executed, the processing of S1051 is executed. In the process of S1051, the jackpot scenario 202i defined for the jackpot game operation corresponding to the determined jackpot type is selected from the ROM 202 and set in the jackpot scenario setting area 203b2 (S651).

  Here, in the jackpot scenario, the operation for each time in the jackpot game is set. When the start of the jackpot game is set, the specific winning opening set in the jackpot scenario is set and opened after the opening period set in the jackpot scenario has elapsed. After that, when the closing condition (for example, until 10 balls are won or until the opening time of 30 seconds elapses), the specific winning opening is closed, and after that, after the interval period set in the jackpot scenario has passed, The jackpot round is started and the opening of specific winning openings is set.

  In the second embodiment, the jackpot scenarios are respectively stored in the ROM 202 corresponding to the gaming state and the jackpot type when the jackpot is hit, and the corresponding jackpot scenario is selected. Here, even if the jackpot type is set in the open pattern that allows the game ball to enter the probability change switch 65e3, the opening change period or the interval period is set to be variable, so that the game ball is set to the probability change switch 65e3. It is possible to set a jackpot that can enter and a jackpot that makes it impossible to enter. Thereby, depending on the jackpot gaming state, the jackpot type that can enter the probability variation switch 65e3 is regulated by the opening time or the interval time, so that the probability variation ratio for each gaming state can be variably set.

  In the normal game state ST1 in which the normal game method is set to let the game ball flow down into the left flow path PA1 and enter the game ball into the first starting opening 630, in the right flow path PA2. When the game is played by letting the game ball flow down, the second ordinary electric auditors object 640a is easily opened. Therefore, when the game ball is allowed to flow into the left channel PA1, the first starting opening 630 is provided. It is possible to easily enter the game ball into the second starting opening 640 rather than entering the game ball. For the player, it is advantageous to let the game ball flow down to the right flow path PA2 even in the normal gaming state to play the game because it is possible to obtain more lottery opportunities in the second special symbol. However, in the second embodiment, when a big hit in the normal game state with the second special symbol, even if it is a big hit type that is opened in the opening pattern that allows the probability variation switch 65e3 to enter, it is set in the big hit scenario. Due to the interval period, the opening period of the specific winning port 65a is completed before the game ball reaches the first variable winning device 65, so that the probability variation switch 65e3 can pass the game ball. Not possible, probability variation is not given to the player, that is, the probability variation rate of the second special symbol is set to 0%. Therefore, even if an illegal game is performed in which the game ball is caused to flow down to the right flow path PA2 in the normal game state ST1, the disadvantage on the game shop side can be suppressed.

  Similarly, in each gaming state, even if the flow paths (the left flow path PA1 and the right flow path PA2) in which the game is played are set by design, it is disadvantageous to the player about the probability change rate in the winning opening that enters the different flow paths. It can be set according to the jackpot scenario.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the normal symbol variation process 2 (S156) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the contents of this normal symbol variation process 2 (S156). This normal symbol variation process 2 (S156) differs from the normal symbol variation process (FIG. 41, S106) in the first embodiment in that the processes of S1214 to S1215 are deleted. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, since the processing of S1214 to S1215 in the first embodiment is deleted, in the present embodiment, regardless of the game state, the opening time of the second ordinary electric auditors product 640a and the number of times per second are two times. The opening pattern is set. Therefore, the opening pattern is always in a support state in which it is easy to win the second starting opening 640, and the second starting opening 640 can be set so that the winning can be easily done when the opening is opened.

  As a result, when the gaming state is such that the gaming ball flows down to the right flow path PA2 to play the game (time saving game state ST1h, latent probability variation gaming state ST2, probability variation gaming state ST3), the gaming ball is further extended to the second starting opening 640. You can win many prizes. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the game ball flows down into the right flow path PA2, it is more difficult to win the prize than when the game ball flows down into the left flow path PA1 into the first starting opening 630. Therefore, it is possible to preferentially change the second special symbol to play the game, and the jackpot can be easily set to the player with the second special symbol.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the jackpot control process 2 (S1720) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the contents of this jackpot control process 2 (S1720). The big hit control process 2 (S1720) is different from the big hit control process (FIG. 46, S1604) of the first embodiment in that the processes of S1621 to S1623 are changed to the processes of S1721 to S1724. For other processing, the same processing as that of the first embodiment is executed.

  In the process of S1721, it is determined whether or not the big hit scenario is set in the big hit scenario setting area 203b2 (S1721). When it is determined that the jackpot scenario is set (S1721: Yes), the scenario counter d2 is incremented by 1 and updated (S1722). Then, the process of S1723 is executed. On the other hand, in the processing of S1721, when it is determined that the jackpot scenario is not set (S1721: No), this processing ends. The jackpot scenario is set with data corresponding to the scenario counter, and the operation data corresponding to the current scenario counter is read and controlled.

  In the process of S1723, it is determined whether the data corresponding to the current scenario counter is the data indicating the start of the opening (S1723). If the data indicates the start of the opening (S1723: Yes), the opening command is set (S1724). Then, this process is completed. On the other hand, in the process of S1723, when it is determined that the opening has not started (S1723: No), the process of S1624 is executed.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, since the start of the opening and the start timing of the new round can be determined by the jackpot scenario, the opening time and the interval time can be easily changed for each jackpot type. You can control it.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 86, an ending process 2 (S1730) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the contents of this ending process 2 (S1730). The ending process 2 (FIG. 86, S1730) is different from the ending process (FIG. 48, S1630) in the first embodiment in that the processes of S1656 to S1657 are changed to the processes of S1731 to S1733. In the present second embodiment, even if it is a jackpot to which the probability variation game state is given, a jackpot type is set in which the upper limit of the number of times that a normal symbol is a time saving state is set, so the processing of S1731 (time saving counter 203t The process of setting 100 to 100) is changed and set. Further, in the final process of ending process 2 (S1730) for setting the process of ending the jackpot, the jackpot scenario set in the jackpot scenario setting area 203b2 is cleared to 0 and reset. As a result, whether or not the jackpot game is being played can be determined by the jackpot scenario setting area 203b2.

  As described above, according to the second embodiment, according to the special symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol) and gaming state (normal gaming state ST1, time-saving gaming state ST1h, latent latency variation gaming state) In the case where the second lottery game which is not substantially subject to change in the normal game state ST1 is performed, since it is possible to set a plurality of rates to shift to the high-probability game state after the jackpot game is over based on ST2 and the probability variation game state ST3 It is possible to extremely reduce the rate of transition to the high-probability game state (0% in this embodiment). With such a configuration, even if an improper game (illegal game) is performed, it does not shift to a state advantageous to the player (high probability gaming state), so an illegal game targeting the pachinko machine 10 can be performed. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

  In the second embodiment, the jackpot type selection table 202d is used to select the jackpot type based on the type of special symbol and the gaming state. However, for example, selection of the jackpot type based on the type of special symbol Alternatively, the selection of the interval time based on the game state may be performed using another table. Specifically, in the jackpot type selection table 202d, the jackpot type is selected based on the type of the special symbol, and a different table (for example, an interval time type selection table) is used, and the interval time corresponding to the gaming state. Select. Then, the jackpot control may be performed using the selected jackpot type and the interval time. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the types of jackpot types, and it is possible to reduce the capacity of main controller 110.

  Further, in the above-mentioned interval time type selection table, the game state and the interval time are associated with each other (in the case of a certain game state, a specific interval time is always selected), but a predetermined counter (for example, interval A plurality of interval times may be selected based on the counter value of the time type counter). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the game more complicated and improve the interest of the game.

  Further, the second embodiment has been described by using a pachinko machine (simultaneous variation type) in which the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed at the same time, but it is adopted for other types of gaming machines. May be. As other types of gaming machines, for example, a gaming machine of the type that executes a variation in the order in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol win the starting mouth, and the variation of one special symbol is the other special symbol. There is a type of gaming machine or the like that is executed with priority over the fluctuation of.

  Furthermore, by winning a game ball in the first starting opening, a winning lottery is carried out, and when the result of the drawing is the first result, the first winning opening is operated so that it can be won. 1 privilege game, when the result of the lottery is the second result, the second privilege game that activates the second winning opening to a state in which it can win, and the second privilege game during the second privilege game, Used in a gaming machine (1 type 2 type mixing machine) provided with a third privilege game in which a game ball passes through a specific area provided in a winning opening to operate the first winning opening to a winning state. May be.

  The second embodiment has a configuration in which the game ball passes through the ball guiding path 72 only when the second variable winning device 650 is in the closed state, but when the second variable winning device 650 is in the open state, Alternatively, the game ball that has passed a specific route may be configured to pass the ball guiding route 72. With such a configuration, it is possible to complicate the flow of the game balls on the game board 13 and entertain the player.

  Further, the game balls that have passed a specific route other than the ball guide route 72 may be configured to win the first specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65. With such a configuration, it is possible to complicate the flow of the game balls on the game board 13 and entertain the player.

  According to the second embodiment, two specific winning openings are provided in the flow path of the gaming ball, and the gaming ball that has passed through the upper (upstream) specific winning opening in the closed state is specified on the lower side (downstream side). A game that is configured to be able to reach the winning opening, and further has a delay guiding path for delaying the flowing time of the game ball between the specific winning opening on the upper side (upstream side) and the specific winning opening on the lower side (downstream side) In the machine, by changing the length of the specific interval period t4 (see FIG. 67) according to the game state (normal, probability change, latency, time reduction), the timing at which the game ball reaches the specific winning opening on the downstream side is changed. Configure as possible.

  With this configuration, it is changed whether or not the game ball that has won the specific winning opening on the downstream side passes through the specific area (probability change switch 65e3) provided in the specific winning opening. The mode of the game state to be transferred (set) after the end of the big hit game is configured to be changeable. It is possible to provide a jackpot game that can substantially pass V and a jackpot game that cannot pass V (difficult) without changing the operation control of the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the main control device 110 during the big hit game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described in the first embodiment described above, operation control of the first variable winning device 65 (switch member 65h) according to the type of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol). (Operation control that allows the game ball to pass the probability change switch 65e3 and operation control that cannot be passed (difficult)) is set, and the length of the specific interval period t4 is set according to the game state when the jackpot is won. Since it is configured as described above, it is possible to set a plurality of jackpot game ratios that can substantially pass the probability variation switch 65e3, provide various playability to the player, and improve the enjoyment of the game. There is an effect that can be.

  In this embodiment, by changing the specific interval period t4, it is possible to change whether or not the game ball can win the first variable winning device 65 within the V effective period, but other than that. You may employ the structure of. For example, the game ball may be configured to switch the ball guide route passage time, which is the time required for the game ball to pass the ball guide route 72. Further, the value of the V valid period t6 may be changed by changing the value of the V open period t5. Even if such a configuration is used, the same effect as that of the present embodiment can be obtained.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the first specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning a prize device is opened in the fifth round of the jackpot game is shown. However, for example, the first variable winning a prize device 65 of the first variable winning device 65 is opened in the first round. In the case of the jackpot game in which the 1 specific winning opening 65a is in the open state, the period changed according to the game state may be set as the opening period t1. With such a configuration, for example, by setting the time obtained by adding the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 to be longer than the ball guide route passage time, the right hand hit with the jackpot game start (start of the opening period t1) The hit game ball can win the first variable winning device 65 within the V effective period t6 and can pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. On the other hand, by setting the total time of the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 to be shorter than the ball guide route passage time, the gaming ball hit to the right with the start of the jackpot game is first in the V effective period t6. It is possible to make it impossible (difficult) to win the first specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65.

  Furthermore, when different time can be set as the specific interval time, it is a big hit game, and the time of a predetermined interval period after the specific interval period is set so as to cancel the difference of the specific interval time, and the big hit game It is preferable that the sum of the interval times in 1 is matched. With such a configuration, for example, during the big hit game, it is possible to unify the time used for each process performed using an interval period with a small amount of information processing, and it is possible to execute a stable process. There is an effect of becoming.

  In this embodiment, the ball guide path 72 (delay guide path) is provided so that the ball guide path transit time becomes a predetermined time (delay). ), a detection means (sensor) for detecting passage of the game ball may be provided, and a means for determining (monitoring) that the game ball is passing within a predetermined time may be provided. By using such a configuration, it is possible to easily find a ball clogging that has occurred in the ball guiding path 72, or a fraudulent act of intentionally staying the game ball in the guiding path using a magnet or a ball with a thread. The effect is that it becomes possible.

  The first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the ball guiding path 72 (see FIG. 65) used in the second embodiment may be used in the following gaming machine. . That is, there is a first round number (for example, 12 rounds) and a second round number (for example, 15 rounds) as the number of rounds of the jackpot game, and a variable winning award provided on the upper side of the game board 13 from the first round to the 12th round. The device (the second variable winning device 650) is opened, and from the 13th round to the 15th round, the jackpot game in which the variable winning device (first variable winning device 65) provided under the game board 13 is opened is executed. It may be used for a game machine.

  By using the first variable winning device 65 used in the second embodiment, the second variable winning device 650, and the ball guiding path 72 in such a gaming machine, the game balls that have been shot are wasted. Without, and using a specific interval time between specific rounds (between the 12th and 13th rounds), it is possible to entertain the effect during the jackpot game.

  Specifically, at the end of the 12th round, the second variable winning device 650 is closed and the game ball flows down to the ball guiding path 72. Since the time required for the game ball to pass through the ball guide path 72 is set to 3 to 4 seconds (see FIG. 65), the game ball that has passed through the opening 70a of the ball guide path 72 is the first variable winning device. It takes at least 3 seconds to reach 65.

  Using this time (arrival time) required for the game ball to reach the first variable winning device 65, an effect between rounds (an effect that fuels whether the current jackpot game is a 12-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot) By doing, there is an effect that it is possible to eliminate (reduce) a useless game ball (a game ball that does not win a specific winning opening of a variable winning device even if it is a big hit) even if the right-handed game is continued. is there.

  That is, if the above-described effect during the jackpot game is executed on a gaming machine having one variable winning device, the variable winning device is passed during a specific interval time (the specific winning opening of the variable winning device is closed). The game ball cannot be won at the specific winning opening even during the big hit game, resulting in a useless game ball. In addition, if the specific interval time is shortened in order to reduce the useless game balls, the effect executed between the specific rounds (the effect that fuels whether this jackpot game is a 12-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot) There is a problem that the effect is weakened.

  On the other hand, when the above-described effect during the big hit game is executed by the gaming machine using the configuration of the present embodiment, the ball guiding path 72 through which the game balls can flow when the second variable winning device 650 is in the closed state. Since the effect during the specific interval time using the time (3 to 4 seconds) during which the game ball flows down is performed, it is possible to suppress the wasted ball that occurs during the big hit, and the effect that is executed between the specific rounds (this big hit) There is an effect that it is possible to strengthen the effect of the effect of inspiring whether the game is a 12-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot.

  If the interval time between specific rounds is set to be shorter than the time during which the game ball flows down the ball guiding path 72, before the game ball that has passed through the second variable winning device 650 reaches the first variable winning device 65. Since the first variable winning device 65 is in the open state, it is possible to eliminate the generation of useless game balls.

  In addition, as the effect in this case, it is conceivable that the display data displayed in the ending period of the 12th round jackpot is diverted and is displayed at the specific interval time of the 15th round jackpot. By adopting such an effect, it is possible to reduce the amount of display data, and it is possible to make the player think that it is a big jackpot in the 12th round. It has the effect of providing surprise and joy.

  Further, when a detecting means for detecting a game ball flowing down in the ball guiding path 72 is provided and the detecting means detects the game ball during the specific interval period, the big hit of this time is the 15th round big hit (the big hit is still big. You may make it notify that it continues. With such a configuration, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the action of stopping the firing of the game ball during the interval period during the big hit game.

  Furthermore, the configurations of the above-described embodiments may be combined to make the following. For example, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are arranged in parallel, and meanwhile, the game ball meanders horizontally from the second variable winning device 650 to the first variable winning device 65. The configuration provided with a guide path for guiding the player may be used for the following gaming machines. That is, there is a first round number (for example, 12 rounds) and a second round number (for example, 15 rounds) as the number of rounds of the jackpot game, and a variable winning device provided on the upstream side from the first round to the 12th round ( The second variable winning device 650) is opened, and the variable winning device (first variable winning device 65) provided on the downstream side from the 13th round to the 15th round is opened. Good.

  With this configuration, when the variable winning device provided on the upstream side is in the closed state, the game ball rolls along the guide path and is guided to the variable winning device on the downstream side. This guide path is configured to meander in the horizontal direction so that a predetermined time (time longer than the interval period, for example, 3 seconds) is required for the game ball to pass. The variable winning device on the upstream side and the variable winning device on the downstream side have a plurality of opening patterns set to be in an open state in a predetermined order during one jackpot game, and an opening pattern is set according to the type of jackpot. Is set.

  The open/close status of each variable winning device is configured to be displayed on the display means. That is, the player is configured to be able to grasp the situation in which the variable winning device is closed by checking the display means. However, it is displayed so that it cannot be discriminated whether the closed state is an interval period (big hit medium) or an ending period (big hit end).

  By using such a configuration, for example, in the interval period when the upstream variable winning device is closed and then the downstream variable winning device is opened, the display means indicates that the variable winning device is closed. By displaying the effect (closed effect) on the display means, the player plays the game while expecting whether the jackpot game is over or is still continuing. Then, when the interval period ends and the variable winning device on the downstream side is opened, an effect (opening effect) indicating that the variable winning device is opened is displayed on the display means on the display means. At the timing when this opening effect is displayed on the display means, the game ball rolling on the guidance route has not reached the variable winning device on the downstream side (the time required to pass the guidance route rather than the interval time). Because it is longer), while the closing effect is being executed (while the upstream variable winning device is closed), the game ball that rolls on the guide path is reliably won to the downstream variable winning device. It becomes possible. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game ball from being wasted while executing the effect indicating the closing of the variable winning device in the jackpot game. When using such a configuration, it is advisable to prepare a plurality of types of opening patterns for each variable winning device in the jackpot game.

  Below, the modification 1 of 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated with reference to FIG.

<Modification 1 of the second embodiment>
In the first modified example, the distribution value of the jackpot type selection table 202d is different from that of the above-described second embodiment, and the game characteristic different from that of the above-described second embodiment is provided. As will be specifically described later, in this modified example, when the jackpot is won in the normal game state ST1 and the probability variation game state ST3 is transitioned to, the high hit is limited to a predetermined period (100 revolutions) after the jackpot game is finished. While maintaining the probability game state, it is provided with a game property (a so-called two-time loop) that wins a jackpot at least twice.

  FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a flow of setting various game states in the present modification. The modified example 1 is different from the above-described second embodiment in the allocation value of the jackpot type selection table 202d. Since the other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, during the normal game state ST1, since the allocation is the same as that of the above-described second embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted. Next, the distribution of jackpots during the probability variation gaming state ST3 will be described.

  In the probability variation game state ST3, the actual variation target is set to the special figure 2, and if you win the big hit in the special figure 2, there is a 100% probability of a high probability game state (the probability variation game state ST3 or the latent probability variation game state ST2). Transition to. In addition, this probability variation gaming state ST3 does not win the jackpot, and if the variation of the special symbol exceeds 100 times, the electric support is terminated, and the game shifts to the latent probability variation gaming state ST2. The player plays the game while staying in the probability varying game state ST3 (until the electric support is finished) while paying attention to the next jackpot.

  Next, in the latent probability variation gaming state ST2, the distribution is set such that the withdrawal jackpot that shifts to the probability variation gaming state ST3 is 34%, and the jackpot that shifts (falls) to the time saving gaming state ST1h is 66%.

  Next, in the time saving game state ST1h, the distribution is set so that the withdrawal jackpot that shifts to the probability variation gaming state ST3 is 75%, and the jackpot that shifts (falls) to the normal gaming state ST1 is 25%. At this time, the short gaming state ST1h does not win the jackpot, and if the variation of the special symbol exceeds 100 times, the electric support is ended and the game state shifts to the normal gaming state ST1. By winning the jackpot during this period, the distribution is set so that the ratio of shifting to the probability variation gaming state ST3, which is the high-probability gaming state, is higher than the normal gaming state ST1, which is the same low-probability state.

  As described above, in the first modification, once the low-probability state (normal game state ST1) is changed to the high-probability game state (probability variation game state ST3), within a predetermined period (special symbol variation after jackpot 100 Only up to 2 times), and then two big jackpots are guaranteed while maintaining a high probability game state. Therefore, the player is not satisfied only by the transition from the low-probability state to the high-probability game state, and then has the purpose of winning the jackpot within the predetermined period in the special symbol game performed in the high-probability game state. The game can be continued. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Modification 2 of the second embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG. 88.

<Modification 2 of the second embodiment>
In this modified example 2, the upper limit number (110 times) is set for the number of games (variation number) in the high-probability game state, and the distribution value of the jackpot type selection table 202d is made different from the second embodiment described above. , Which provides different game playability from the second embodiment described above. As will be described later in detail, in this modified example, when the jackpot is won in the normal game state ST1 and the probability variation game state ST3 is transitioned to, a specific period after the jackpot game is over (a high probability game) Only during the latent probability variation game state ST2 in which the state and the electric power support have been completed), the game performance (so-called two-time loop) of winning the jackpot at least twice while maintaining the high-probability game state is provided. It is equipped. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a flow of setting various game states in the present modification. The modified example 2 is different from the above-described second embodiment in the allocation value of the jackpot type selection table 202d. Since the other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, during the normal game state ST1, since the allocation is the same as that of the above-described second embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted. Next, the distribution of jackpots during the probability variation gaming state ST3 will be described.

  In this modified example 2, the high-probability game state is set to shift (fall) to the low-probability state when the special symbol changes 110 times without winning the jackpot. In this probability variation game state ST3, the actual variation target is set in the special figure 2, and if the big hit is won in the special figure 2, the probability variation game state ST3 is set again with a probability of 70% and low with a probability of 30%. Transition to the stochastic state. This probability variation game state ST3 does not win the jackpot, and if the variation of the special symbol exceeds 100 times, the electric power support is terminated, and the latent probability variation game state ST2 is entered.

  Next, the latent probability variation game state ST2, after the jackpot, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is started from the 101st rotation, until the 110th rotation where the high probability game state shifts (falls) to the low probability state. It is a game state executed in. If the jackpot is won during the latent probability variation gaming state ST2, there is a 100% probability of transition to a high probability gaming state (probability variation gaming state ST3 or latent probability variation gaming state ST2).

  Next, in the time saving game state ST1h, the distribution is set so that the withdrawal jackpot that shifts to the probability variation gaming state ST3 is 90% and the jackpot that shifts (falls) to the normal gaming state ST1 is 10%. At this time, the short gaming state ST1h does not win the jackpot, and if the variation of the special symbol exceeds 100 times, the electric support is ended and the game state shifts to the normal gaming state ST1. By winning the jackpot during this period, the distribution is set so that the ratio of shifting to the probability variation gaming state ST3, which is the high-probability gaming state, is higher than the normal gaming state ST1, which is the same low-probability state.

  As described above, in the second modification, the low-probability state (normal gaming state ST1) is once transited to the high-probability gaming state (probability variation gaming state ST3), and then the number of fluctuations is a predetermined number (after the big hit). Only after a specific period (up to 100 special symbol variations) (latent probability variation game state ST2), two big jackpots are guaranteed while maintaining a high probability game state thereafter. Therefore, the player is not satisfied that it has transitioned from a low-probability state to a high-probability game state, and then does not win within the predetermined period in the special symbol game performed in the high-probability game state, and after a predetermined period has elapsed The game can be continued with the purpose of winning the jackpot during the specified period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Modification 3 of the second embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG. 89.

<Modification 3 of the second embodiment>
In the third modification, the ball guiding path 72 provided in the front view right side area of the game board 13 of the second embodiment described above is provided with a shortening path 75 as another path, and the flowing down game ball is guided by a ball. A distribution mechanism 75a for allocating to the path 72 and the shortened path 75, a path for guiding the game ball flowing down the shortened path 75 to the first variable winning a prize device 65, and a path for guiding the game board 13 to the lower region in front view. It is different in that a distribution mechanism 75b for distributing the data is provided. Other configurations are the same as those in the second embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 89 is an enlarged view of the right side area of the game board 13 of the third modification as viewed from the front. In this modification, the game balls that have passed through the second variable winning device 650 that is in the closed state are alternately distributed to the ball guide path 72 and the shortened path 75 by the distribution mechanism 75a. Here, the distribution mechanism 75a is configured to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise, and is configured so that the rotation range (rotation angle) is regulated by the rotation regulating member. The game balls distributed to the ball guide path 72 flow down the same path as the above-described second embodiment, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

  On the other hand, the shortened route 75 is configured such that the trajectory of the sphere is linear rather than the sphere guide route 72, and at least the gaming spheres assigned to the sphere guide route 72 at first reach the discharge unit 70e. In order to quickly eject from the shortened path 75, the game ball is configured to pass the shortened path for 2 seconds. By providing a flow path for the game balls having different shapes in this way and distributing the game balls to any path by the distribution mechanism, it is possible to intentionally change the flow order of the game balls on the game board 13. (It is possible to make the game board 13 flow down in an order different from the order in which they are fired).

  By using such a configuration, for example, when the game ball that first passed through the second variable winning device 650 is distributed to the shortened path 75 in the specific interval period, the game ball can pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. Within the period, it becomes possible to win the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65, while, when the game ball that first passed through the second variable winning device 650 is distributed to the ball guiding path 72, the probability change switch. It becomes impossible (difficult) to win the game ball to the first specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 within a period in which the game ball can pass through 65e3.

  Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 depending on which path the game ball flows down, so that the player is provided with the game playability of allowing the game ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  Furthermore, in the present modification, a distribution mechanism 75b is provided that distributes the game ball that has flowed down the shortened path 75 to the first variable winning device 65 and the path that guides the game ball 13 to the lower region in front view of the game board 13. ing. Thereby, it becomes possible to sort whether or not the game ball flowing down the shortened path 75 is guided to the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, the flow path of the game balls on the game board 13 can be made more complicated, and the player can enjoy the flow of the game balls.

  Even if the distribution mechanism in which the distribution destination is determined according to a predetermined order is used as in the present modification, a plurality of distributions are performed before the game ball reaches the first variable winning device 65 having the probability change switch 65e3. Since it is distributed to a plurality of downflow paths by the mechanism, it is possible to make it difficult to set the state of each distribution mechanism by using the launched game balls so as to be a predetermined distribution destination in advance.

  Further, when the first variable winning device 65 is in the closed state, the game balls flowing down the ball guiding path 72 flow down on the first variable winning device 65, contact the distribution mechanism 75b, and rotate the distribution mechanism 75b. While changing the state, it flows down toward the lower side of the game board. As a result, the rotation state of the distribution mechanism 75b is constantly changed.

  In this modification, only the game ball flowing down the shortened path 75 reaches the distribution mechanism 75b, but the game ball flowing down the ball guiding path 72 may reach the distribution mechanism 75b. Further, a distribution mechanism 75c (not shown) for distributing only the game balls flowing down the ball guide path 72 may be separately provided. With such a configuration, the flow path of the game ball can be further complicated, the player can enjoy the flow of the game ball, and, for example, the second variable winning device 650 in the closed state is passed. Which path the game ball is distributed to is used by the pachinko machine in which it is determined whether or not the winning game ball will be won in the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 during a period in which the gaming ball can pass the probability variation switch 65e3. It is possible to change the possibility of entering the probability variation game state.

  In addition, since a plurality of distribution mechanisms are provided in the path in which the game ball flows down during a right-handed game other than during the big hit game, the distribution of each distribution mechanism is performed when a game in which the probability change switch 65e3 passes the game ball is performed. It becomes difficult to adjust the position in advance, and the game result can be randomized.

In this modification, the distribution mechanism that distributes the game balls in two directions is used, but a distribution mechanism that distributes the game balls in three or more directions may be used. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the ball flow of the game ball more complicated, and it is possible to entertain the player.

  Further, in the present modification, a mechanism for physically distributing the game balls is used as the distribution mechanism, but other configurations may be used, for example, a lottery is performed based on having passed a predetermined area, and the result of the lottery. A means for determining the distribution direction may be provided.

  In this modification, the game balls that have passed through the second variable winning device 650 in the closed state reach the distribution mechanism 75a, but the upstream side of the second variable winning device 650 (the game ball is the second The area before reaching the variable winning device 650) may be configured to reach the sorting device 75a. In this case, the game balls that are sorted in a predetermined direction by the sorting device 75a are the second variable winning device. The game ball that has flowed down toward and passed through a specific downflow path (for example, the shortened path 75 or the ball guiding path 72) that has been distributed in a direction other than the predetermined direction The distribution mechanism 75b may be configured to distribute the game ball path reaching the first variable winning device and the other paths. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the game balls distributed by the distribution mechanism 75a other than in the direction of the second variable winning device 650 reach the first variable winning device 65 side by the distribution mechanism 75b. ..

  With this configuration, a game ball that has not won the second variable winning device 650 in the open state may be distributed to the first variable winning device 65 in the open state so that the player can win the game. There is an effect that a surprising game can be provided.

  It should be noted that during the jackpot game, the player is not informed of the timing when the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 is in the open state, so that the player moves the game ball on the game board. And, there is an effect that a game can be enjoyed while watching the open/closed state of each variable winning device.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from those of the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit occurs, a pachinko machine (commonly called a 2nd right thing, a 3rd right thing, etc.) that can increase the expected value of a big hit until a big hit state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times) including that. Referred to as). Further, after the jackpot pattern is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. In addition, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated may be implemented.

  In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in the state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is that "a display device that variably displays an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirms the identification information is provided, The variation display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the variation display of the identification information is stopped and finally displayed, and then stopped. It becomes a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time is specific".In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for fixedly displaying the symbols after variably displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is provided. Some are not. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or the predetermined By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stopping is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a special game value. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment and the restriction on the place where the game machine is installed due to the separate handling of the medal and the ball.

  All or part of each of the above-described embodiments may be combined.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown below.

<Feature A group> (Twice loop configuration)
A state setting means capable of setting at least a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state, and an advantageous privilege is given to the player based on establishment of a predetermined condition. In a gaming machine having a privilege game executing means for executing at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game, the state setting means sets the first advantageous state. When the first privilege game is executed in a state where the first privilege game is executed, the first advantageous state is set even after the first privilege game is executed, and when the second privilege game is executed, The second benefit state is set after the execution of the second benefit game, and the first benefit is executed when the first benefit game is executed in the state where the second benefit state is set. A gaming machine A1 characterized in that the first advantageous state is set after execution of a game.

  At least a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state are set by the state setting means. Based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the privilege game executing means at least executes the first privilege game that gives the player an advantageous privilege and the second privilege game different from the first privilege game. When the first privilege game is executed in the state where the first advantageous state is set, the first advantageous state is set by the state setting means even after the first privilege game is executed, and the second bonus game is executed. When the game is executed, the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means after the execution of the second privilege game. When the first privilege game is executed while the second advantageous state is set, the state setting means sets the first advantageous state after the execution of the first privilege game. As a result, even after the first privilege game is executed in the first advantageous state, the second advantageous state is set, so that the state advantageous to the player can be continuously set. Therefore, the advantageous state can be continued until a plurality of privilege games are executed, and there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A1, the privilege game executing means is capable of executing a third privilege game different from the first privilege game and the second privilege game, and the state setting means sets the first advantageous state to the first advantageous state. It is possible to set a specific state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second advantageous state, and when the third privilege game is executed in the state where the second advantageous state is set, A gaming machine A2, which sets the specific state after the execution of the third privilege game.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are produced. That is, the third privilege game different from the first privilege game and the second privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means. A specific state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means. When the third privilege game is executed in the state where the second advantageous state is set, the specific state is set by the state setting means after the execution of the third privilege game. As a result, in the second advantageous state, the specific game state that is disadvantageous to the player when the third game state is executed is set, so that the continuous state of the advantageous state can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the gambling performance of the game becomes too high.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the first advantageous state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second advantageous state, the gaming machine A3.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the first advantageous state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second advantageous state, so the advantage given to the player is excessive. The effect is that it can be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, when the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means, the bonus game execution means makes it easier to execute the bonus game. A gaming machine A4 characterized by having means.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 to A3, when the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means, the privilege game execution means improves the privilege game. As a result, there is an effect that the player can expect the bonus game to be executed.

  In either the gaming machine A1 or A4, a start condition determining means capable of determining the establishment of a first start condition and a second start condition different from the first start condition, and the start condition determining means. , A lottery means for executing a lottery on the basis that it is determined that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, and the privilege game execution means is a specific lottery by the lottery means. A gaming machine A5, which executes the privilege game based on the determination that the result has been established.

  According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect achieved by either the game machine A1 or A4, the following effect is achieved. That is, the establishment of the first starting condition and the second starting condition different from the first starting condition is determined by the starting condition determining means. The lottery means executes the lottery on the basis that the start condition determining means determines that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. The bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means based on the lottery means determining that the specific lottery result has been established. This allows the player to expect the establishment of the first start condition and the second start condition. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A3 or A4, when the advantageous state is not set by the setting means, the gaming machine A5 has a regulating means for regulating the establishment of the second starting condition.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A3 or A4, the establishment of the second starting condition is regulated by the regulating means when the advantageous state is not set by the setting means. There is an effect that a disadvantageous state can be easily set.

  In any of the gaming machines A3 to A5, the first identification information indicating the lottery result of the lottery means based on the satisfaction of the first start condition and the lottery result of the lottery means based on the satisfaction of the second start condition. It has a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying each of the two identification information on the display means, and the dynamic display means can dynamically display the first identification information and the second identification information at the same time. A gaming machine A6 characterized in that it is configured.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A3 to A5, the following effect is achieved. That is, the dynamic display means displays the first identification information indicating the lottery result of the lottery means based on the establishment of the first starting condition and the second identification information indicating the lottery result of the lottery means based on the establishment of the second starting condition. It is dynamically displayed on the means. The first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed simultaneously by the dynamic display means. Thereby, the dynamic display of the first identification information and the second identification information can be efficiently executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A5 or A6, the gaming machine A7 has a releasing means for releasing the restriction by the restricting means based on the setting of the specific advantageous state by the setting means.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A5 or A6, the restriction by the restricting means is canceled by the canceling means based on the setting of the specific advantageous state by the setting means. There is an effect that a game can be played with the expectation that a specific advantageous state is set.

  Privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player, and when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means, an advantageous state in which the privilege game is easily executed by the privilege game executing means is set. Setting means and control means for facilitating the setting of the advantageous state by the setting means even when the privilege game is executed next based on the setting of the advantageous state by the setting means. A gaming machine A8 characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine A8, the bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means. When the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means, the setting means sets an advantageous state in which the privilege game is easily executed by the privilege game executing means. Based on the setting of the advantageous state by the setting means, even when the privilege game is executed next time, the advantageous state is easily set by the control means by the setting means, so that the advantageous state is set to a plurality of privilege games. It is possible to continue setting across. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

<Characteristic B group> (Switch between advantage and disadvantage and prevent disadvantage)
The first lottery game is based on the first ball entrance into which the game ball can enter, the second ball entrance different from the first ball entrance, and the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entrance. A lottery game executing means for executing and executing a second lottery game based on having entered the second entrance, and a second lottery game being disadvantageous to the player over the first lottery game. A switching means for switching between one state and a second state in which the second lottery game is more advantageous than the first lottery game based on a predetermined trigger, and a lottery game which is disadvantageous to the player switched by the switching means. A gaming machine B1 having a suppressing means for suppressing execution of.

  According to the gaming machine B1, the first lottery game is executed by the lottery game executing means on the basis of having entered the first entrance. Further, the second lottery game is executed by the lottery game execution means based on the fact that the player has entered the second entrance different from the first entrance. The first state in which the second lottery game is disadvantageous to the player over the first lottery game and the second state in which the second lottery game is more advantageous than the first lottery game are switched based on a predetermined trigger by the switching means. Be done. The suppression means suppresses the execution of a lottery game that is disadvantageous to the player switched by the switching means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the disadvantageous side lottery game from being executed by the suppressing means, so that the player can easily execute an advantageous lottery game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a defect that gives a significant disadvantage to the player.

  In the gaming machine B1, the first identification information showing the lottery result of the first lottery game is dynamically displayed on the display means, and the second identification information showing the lottery result of the second lottery game is dynamically displayed on the display means. Dynamic display means, and dynamic display period determining means for respectively determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, The dynamic period determination means is longer than the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the lottery game favorably switched, the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the lottery game disadvantageously switched by the switching means. A gaming machine B2 characterized by facilitating determination of a dynamic display period.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first identification information indicating the lottery result of the first lottery game is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. Also, the second identification information indicating the lottery result of the second lottery game is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. The dynamic display period determining unit determines the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information that are dynamically displayed by the dynamic display unit. The dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the lottery game that has been disadvantageously switched by the switching means is dynamically determined to be the dynamic display period longer than the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the lottery game that has been advantageously switched. The means facilitate the decision. As a result, it is possible to prevent the disadvantageously switched game from being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can distinguish the game which is set to be advantageous.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, it has a launching means capable of launching a game ball to the game area, and an adjusting means for adjusting the launching force of the game ball launched by the launching means based on the operation of the player. The first ball entrance and the second ball entrance are arranged at positions where a game ball ejected from the ejecting means in a state where the player performs the same operation with respect to the adjusting means can enter. A gaming machine B3 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the following effects are produced. That is, the game ball is launched into the game area by the launching means. The ejection force of the game ball emitted by the ejection means is adjusted by the adjustment means based on the operation of the player. The first ball entrance and the second ball entrance are arranged at positions where a game ball ejected from the ejecting means in a state where the player performs the same operation on the adjusting means can enter. Thereby, the player can execute a lottery game advantageous to the player without changing the operation of the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be made easier.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, there is a privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player when the lottery result of the first lottery game or the second lottery game is a specific lottery result, The privilege granting means is configured to set a higher privilege-giving ratio that is advantageous to the player when the specific lottery result is obtained in the second lottery game than in the first lottery game. A gaming machine B4 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 to B3, the following effects are produced. That is, when the lottery result of the first lottery game or the second lottery game is a specific lottery result, the privilege is given to the player by the privilege giving means. When a specific lottery result is obtained in the second lottery game rather than in the first lottery game, the rate of giving a benefit that is advantageous to the player is set to be higher. Thereby, when the game in the second lottery game is set to be advantageous to the player, a more advantageous state can be set to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine B4, when the specific lottery result is obtained in the first lottery game, the privilege granting means is one of the first privilege and the second privilege more advantageous than the first privilege as the privilege. The gaming machine B5 is for giving one, and the switching means switches to the second state on the basis of the second privilege being given by the privilege giving means.

  According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of the game machine B4, the following effect is achieved. That is, when the specific lottery result is obtained in the first lottery game, either one of the first benefit and the second benefit which is more advantageous than the first benefit is awarded by the benefit granting means. The switching unit switches to the second state based on the second privilege being granted by the privilege granting unit. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be changed.

  In the gaming machine B4 or B5, the privilege given to the second lottery game by the privilege granting means is the first lottery game or the second lottery game until the specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine B6, characterized in that a ratio of a set privilege set so as to facilitate a specific lottery result is set higher than a privilege for the first lottery game.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B4 or B5, the privilege granted to the second lottery game by the privilege granting means is the first lottery game or until the specific condition is satisfied. The second lottery game is executed because the ratio of the setting privilege that is set so that the second lottery game is likely to be the specific lottery result is set higher than the privilege for the first lottery game. This has the effect of increasing the expectations of the player.

  In the gaming machine B6, at least the set privilege is given to the privilege granted to the second lottery game by the privilege granting means. B7.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B6, at least the set privilege is given to the privilege given to the second lottery game by the privilege giving means. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation that the second lottery game will be executed.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, a first flow path through which a game ball can flow down, a second flow path different from the first flow path, and the first ball inlet port is the first flow path. The gaming machine B8, wherein the gaming machine B8 is arranged in each of the second flow paths, and the second ball inlets are arranged in the second flow paths.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the first ball entrance is arranged in the first flow path and the second flow path, and the second ball entrance is Since it is arranged in two flow paths, there is an effect that it is possible to set a state in which only the first lottery game is executed.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the suppressing means notifies the player of notification information indicating that an unfavorable lottery game is being executed when the unfavorable lottery game is executed. A gaming machine B9 characterized by the above.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the suppressing means indicates that the disadvantageous lottery game is being executed when the game is disadvantageous to the player. Since the notification information shown is notified, the player can play the game more easily.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B9, the lottery game execution means is configured to be able to execute the first lottery game and the second lottery game at the same time.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B9, the first lottery game and the second lottery game are simultaneously executed by the lottery game execution means, so that the game can be efficiently played. There is an effect that you can.

<Characteristic C group> (Den Chu configuration)
A first lottery is executed based on a first entrance through which a game ball can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and the entry into the first entrance. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entrance, a lottery means for executing a second lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first lottery, and the first entrance Variable means that is changeable between a first state that regulates entry and a second state that makes entry easier than the first state, determination means that performs determination based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and determination thereof. Variable control means for changing the variable means from the first state to the second state when a specific determination result is determined by the means, and based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the change to the second entrance A gaming machine C1 having a restriction means for restricting entry of balls or execution of the second lottery.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the first lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the fact that the player has entered the first entrance. Further, the second lottery, which is more advantageous to the player than the first lottery, is executed by the lottery means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entrance. It is changed by the changing means between a first state in which the ball is prevented from entering the first ball entrance and a second state in which the ball is easier to enter than the first state. The variable means is changed from the first state to the second state by the variable control means when the specific determination result is determined by the determination means that performs the determination based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition. The regulation means regulates the entry into the second entry slot or the execution of the second lottery based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. As a result, it is possible to set the advantageous state and the unfavorable state for the player by the restricting means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be given a change of interest and the interest can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C1, the second ball entrance is arranged below the first ball entrance, and the variable means is in the second state, so that the variable means enters the second ball entrance. It is arranged so as to prevent the flow of the game sphere flowing down the flow path that is a ball, and the restriction means is set so that the variable means is easily changed to the second state by the variable control means. A gaming machine C2, which restricts entry into the mouth.

  According to the gaming machine C2, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1. That is, the second entrance is arranged below the first entrance. When the variable means is in the second state, the variable means is arranged so as to obstruct the flow of the game ball flowing down the flow path entering the second ball inlet. By setting the variable means to be easily changed to the second state by the variable control means, the ball entering the second ball inlet is restricted by the restricting means. Accordingly, it is possible to regulate the ball entering the second ball inlet with a simple configuration. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the configuration of the gaming machine from becoming complicated.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the gaming ball has a first flow path capable of flowing down, and a second flow path different from the first flow path, wherein the first ball inlet is the first flow path. And the second flow path, and the variable means is arranged at the first entrance opening arranged in the second flow path.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the first ball entrances are arranged in the first flow path and the second flow path, respectively. Since the variable means is arranged in the first ball entrance port arranged in the second flow path, there is an effect that the game ball flowing down the second flow path can be easily put into the first ball entrance.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the lottery result by the first lottery and the second identification information by the second lottery, and its dynamic display. Means for dynamically displaying the first identification information and a dynamic display period for determining the dynamic display period of the second identification information. A gaming machine C4, which restricts execution of the second lottery by facilitating determination of a long dynamic display period as the dynamic display period by the dynamic display period determining means.

  The gaming machine C4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C3. That is, the first identification information indicating the lottery result by the first lottery and the second identification information by the second lottery are dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. The dynamic display period determining unit determines the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information that are dynamically displayed on the dynamic display unit. By making it easier for the dynamic display period determination means to determine a long dynamic display period as the dynamic display period for the second identification information, the execution of the second lottery is regulated by the regulation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the execution can be restricted in the second lottery with a simple configuration.

<Characteristic D group> (Continuous up configuration)
Based on the first ball entrance into which the game ball can enter, the second ball entrance different from the first ball entrance, and the fact that the game ball enters the first ball entrance, A lottery means for executing a lottery and executing a second lottery which is more advantageous to the player than the first lottery on the basis of a game ball entering the second entrance, and a first lottery Dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the lottery result on the display means and dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the lottery result of the second lottery on the display means, and Dynamic display period determining means for determining dynamic display periods of the first identification information and the second identification information executed by the dynamic display means, and the dynamic display period determining means for determining the second identification information. As the dynamic display period, a long state in which a dynamic display period longer than the dynamic display period of the first identification information is easily determined and a short state in which a dynamic display period shorter than the long state is easily determined are set. Setting means capable of enabling, and a privilege granting means for granting a benefit to the player to the player when the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode. As a benefit to be given to the player by the privilege granting means, at least the first privilege and a second privilege less than the first privilege based on the lottery result of the first lottery or the second lottery. When either one of the first identification information and the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode, the other determination information is dynamically determined. If displayed, the dynamic display is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode different from the specific stop display mode, and the first state is set when the long state is set by the setting unit. A gaming machine D1 having a setting means for facilitating the determination of the second benefit by the benefit determination means in a lottery.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the first lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first entrance. The second lottery, which is more advantageous to the player than the first lottery, is executed by the lottery means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entrance. The first identification information indicating the lottery result of the first lottery is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. The second identification information indicating the lottery result of the second lottery is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. The dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information executed by the dynamic display means is determined by the dynamic display period determination means. A long state in which a dynamic display period longer than the dynamic display period of the first identification information is likely to be determined as the dynamic display period of the second identification information by the dynamic display period determination means, and a dynamic state shorter than the long state. A short state in which the display period is easily determined is set by the setting means. When the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given to the player by the privilege giving means. Based on the lottery result of the first lottery or the second lottery, at least the first benefit and the second benefit that is less privileged than the first benefit are given as the benefits given to the player by the privilege giving means. Either is determined by the privilege determination means. When either the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, if the other identification information is dynamically displayed, the dynamic display is changed to a specific stop display mode. A stop display mode different from that is displayed by the stop display means. When the long state is set by the setting means, it is easy for the setting means to set the second benefit by the benefit determination means in the first lottery. As a result, the player can be expected to execute the second privilege with few privileges. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.

  The gaming machine D1 has a game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of game states based on a predetermined condition, and the setting means has a specific game state set by the game state setting means. The game machine D2 is characterized by facilitating the determination of the second privilege by the privilege determination means in the first lottery on the condition.

  According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the following effect is achieved. That is, one game state from a plurality of game states is set by the game state setting means based on a predetermined condition. On condition that a specific game state is set by the game state setting means, the second determination is facilitated by the setting means for the bonus determination means in the first lottery. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be more expected to determine the second benefit when the specific game state is set.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, when the privilege is granted by the privilege granting unit, a setting unit that sets an advantageous state in which the privilege is easily granted by the privilege granting unit, and the advantageous state is set by the setting unit. Based on that, the gaming machine D3 further comprises control means for facilitating the setting of the advantageous state by the setting means even when the privilege is given next.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, when the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means, the setting means sets an advantageous state in which the privilege is easily granted by the privilege granting means. Based on the setting of the advantageous state by the setting means, the advantageous state is easily set by the setting means even when the privilege is given next by the control means. There is an effect that it can be easily set and the interest of the game can be further improved.

<Characteristic E group> (low priority probability change rate set)
A first variable ball entering means which is variable between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the open state, and a downstream side of the first variable ball entering means. A second variable ball entering means arranged in the second variable ball entering means, a specific area in which the game ball entering the second variable ball entering means can enter, and a game ball passing through the specific area Based on the establishment of a specific condition, a privilege granting means that grants an advantageous benefit to the player, and the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means as a bonus game that is advantageous to the player, based on a predetermined variable pattern. The variable pattern that is changed by the variable control means, and the determining means that determines the variable pattern that is changed by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns. When the 1 variable ball entering means is in the closed state, the game ball that has not entered the first variable ball entering means can enter the specific area, and the specific pattern rather than the advantageous pattern A gaming machine E1 characterized in that at least a disadvantage pattern that makes it difficult to enter the area is set.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result of the game is a win, There are those in which a privilege game that is advantageous is executed. In such a configuration, a gaming machine that offers a plurality of types of privilege games by opening and closing two entrances has been proposed as a privilege game. (For example, JP-A-2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, only the control for switching the entrance opening that is opened as a bonus game is performed, and further interest in the game has been demanded. Further, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine with an improved interest in gaming.

  According to the gaming machine E1, the privilege given to the player can be changed by the variable pattern of the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means, so that the player can be interested in the variable pattern. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E1, a launching means capable of launching a game ball based on an operation by a player, a first ball entering means into which the game ball emitted from the launching means can enter, and a first ball entering means thereof. A second ball entering means different from the above, a ball entering assisting means for allowing a game ball to enter the second ball entering means more easily than the first ball entering means, and the first ball entering means A first discriminating means for executing a first discrimination based on the fact that a game ball has entered, and a second discriminating means for executing a second discrimination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second entering means. And the first identification information indicating the first determination result of the first determination by the first determination means and the second identification information indicating the second determination result of the second determination by the second determination means are simultaneously dynamic. When the display means capable of being displayed and the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result or the second identification information indicating the specific second determination result are displayed, the privilege game is displayed. A privilege game execution means for executing the game, a first state set to allow a game ball to enter the second ball entering means and play a game, and a game ball to the second ball entering means. A game state setting means for setting one of a second state which is set so as not to allow a ball to play a game, a case where the first state is set by the game state setting means, and a second state And a ratio varying means for varying the proportion of the advantageous pattern set by the determining means when the specific second determination result is obtained. A gaming machine E2.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1, an advantageous pattern is set depending on whether the gaming state setting means sets the first state or the second state. Since the ratio is changed by the ratio changing means, if the second state is set, for example, if the ratio of the advantageous pattern is set low, the second entering means is allowed to enter the game in the second state. There is an effect that the damage can be reduced even if a fraudulent operation is performed.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the ratio varying means sets the ratio of the second probability to be lower in the second state than in the first state.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, there is an effect that damage can be reduced even when a fraud in the second state is performed.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, a first flow path through which a game ball can enter the first ball entering means more easily than the second ball entering means, and the first flow path more than the first ball entering means. A game machine E4, characterized in that it has a second flow path through which a game ball can easily enter the second ball entering means.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the flow rate of the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means is variable, so that the game ball flows down. There is an effect that the game can be changed depending on the flow path to be performed and the interest of the player can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, between the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means, the game ball that has not entered the first variable ball entering means is the second game ball. Guidance means for guiding the variable ball entrance means over a predetermined period of time is arranged, and the disadvantageous pattern is a period shorter than the predetermined time period after the first variable ball entrance means is changed to the closed state. A gaming machine E5, wherein the second variable ball entering means is changed to the open state and then to the closed state.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5, it is possible to perform the control with easy control so that it becomes difficult to enter the second variable ball entering means in the disadvantageous pattern. The effect is that the control load can be reduced.

<Characteristic F group> (Advantageous and unfavorable symbols are changed in the opening period)
First variable means that is variable between an open state in which the game ball can pass and a closed state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to pass than in the open state, and the first variable means is arranged downstream of the first variable means, and The second variable ball entering means that can enter the game ball that has passed through the 1 variable means, the specific area where the game ball that entered the second variable ball entering means can enter, and the specific area Based on the passing, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player, and a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a specific condition, as the first variable means and the second variable ball entry. And a determining unit that determines the variable pattern that is changed by the variable control unit from a plurality of different variable patterns, and is determined by the determining unit. In the variable pattern, when the first variable means is in the open state, an advantageous pattern in which the game ball entered in the first ball entering means can enter the specific area, and the advantageous pattern is more advantageous than the advantageous pattern. A gaming machine F1 characterized in that at least a disadvantage pattern that makes it difficult to enter a specific area is set.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result of the game is a win, There are those in which a privilege game that is advantageous is executed. In such a configuration, a gaming machine that offers a plurality of types of privilege games by opening and closing two entrances has been proposed as a privilege game. (For example, JP-A-2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, only the control for switching the entrance opening that is opened as a privilege game is performed, and further interest in the game has been demanded. Further, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine with an improved interest in gaming.

  According to the gaming machine F1, since the privilege given to the player can be changed by the variable pattern of the first variable means and the second variable ball entering means, the player can be interested in the variable pattern. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine F1, a launching means capable of launching a game ball based on a player's operation, a first ball entering means into which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter, and a first ball entering means thereof. Are different from the second ball entering means, and the first ball is inserted into the first ball entering means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entering means, and the game ball enters the second ball entering means. Second discriminating means for executing the second discriminating based on the sphere, first discriminating information indicating the first discriminating result of the first discriminating by the first discriminating means, and second for the second discriminating means. Display means capable of dynamically displaying simultaneously the second identification information indicating the second determination result of the determination, and the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result. When the second identification information indicating the second identification information is displayed on the display means, a privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game, and a privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means, A gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from a plurality of different gaming states based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a ratio of setting the advantageous pattern corresponding to the gaming state set by the gaming state setting means And a ratio setting means for variably setting a ratio at which the disadvantage pattern is set, a gaming machine F2.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, the ratio at which the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern are set corresponding to the gaming state set by the gaming state setting means is variable, so that depending on the gaming state. There is an effect that the interest degree of the player can be improved by changing the degree of expectation of the privilege given to the player.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the first probability and the first probability as the probability of being discriminated as the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result by the first determining means or the second determining means. The probability setting means for setting at least a high second probability and the privilege given by the privilege giving means are such that at least the second probability is set by the probability setting means. Playing machine F3.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the second probability is set by passing through the specific area, so that the game ball is in the specific area even while the privilege game is being executed. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the trouble of getting tired of the game by making the player interested in whether or not the game can be passed.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the advantageous pattern and the disadvantage pattern are set so that at least the period from the start of the privilege game to the opening of the first variable means is different. A gaming machine F4 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the start of the privilege game is discriminated by the player at the timing when the first variable means is opened, so that there is an advantageous pattern and a disadvantageous pattern. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify, and it is possible to expect the player to enter a specific area even with a disadvantageous pattern.

  In the gaming machine F4, there is a guiding means for guiding the game ball that has passed through the first variable means to the second variable ball entering means for a predetermined period or more, and the disadvantage pattern is that the first variable ball entering means has the A gaming machine F5, wherein at least the second variable ball entering means is set so as to be changed from the open state to the closed state within the predetermined period after the open state.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F4, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably suppress the game ball from passing through the specific area in a disadvantageous pattern.

<Feature G group> (Advantageous and unfavorable symbols can be changed in the interval period)
A first variable ball entering means which is variable between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the open state, and a downstream side of the first variable ball entering means. A second variable ball entering means arranged in the second variable ball entering means, a specific area in which the game ball entering the second variable ball entering means can enter, and a game ball passing through the specific area Based on the establishment of a specific condition, a privilege granting means that grants an advantageous benefit to the player, and the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means as a bonus game that is advantageous to the player, based on a predetermined variable pattern. The variable pattern that is changed by the variable control means, and the determining means that determines the variable pattern that is changed by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns. When the 1 variable ball entering means is in the closed state, the game ball that has not entered the first variable ball entering means can enter the specific area, and the specific pattern rather than the advantageous pattern A gaming machine G1 characterized in that at least a disadvantage pattern that makes it difficult to enter the area is set.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result of the game is a win, There are those in which a privilege game that is advantageous is executed. In such a configuration, a gaming machine that offers a plurality of types of privilege games by opening and closing two entrances has been proposed as a privilege game. (For example, JP-A-2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, only the control for switching the entrance opening that is opened as a bonus game is performed, and further interest in the game has been demanded. Further, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine with an improved interest in gaming.

  According to the gaming machine G1, the privilege given to the player can be changed by the variable pattern of the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means, so that the player can be interested in the variable pattern. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G1, the advantageous pattern and the unfavorable pattern are at least a period from when the first variable ball entering means is changed to the closed state until when the second variable ball entering means is changed to the open state. A gaming machine G2 characterized by being set differently.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1, there is an effect that an advantageous pattern and a disadvantageous pattern can be set by easy control.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, between the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means, a game ball that has not entered the first variable ball entering means is the second variable ball entering. Guide means for guiding to the means over a predetermined period of time is arranged, and the disadvantageous pattern is the second variable within a period shorter than the predetermined period after the first variable ball entering means is changed to the closed state. A gaming machine G3, characterized in that the ball entering means is changed to the open state and then changed to the closed state.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably make it difficult for the gaming ball to pass through the specific area in a disadvantageous pattern.

  In any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, a launching means capable of launching a game ball based on a player's operation, a first ball entering means into which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter, and its first A second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, a first judging means for executing a first judgment based on a game ball entering the first ball entering means, and a second ball entering means. Second discrimination means for executing a second discrimination based on a game ball entering the first discrimination information, first discrimination information indicating a first discrimination result of the first discrimination by the first discrimination means, and the second discrimination. Display means capable of simultaneously dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the second determination result of the second determination by the means, and the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result or the specific identification information. When the second identification information indicating the second determination result is displayed on the display means, a privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game, and a case where the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means , A gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from a plurality of different gaming states, and varying the ratio of the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern in correspondence with the gaming state set by the gaming state setting means A gaming machine G4 having a ratio variable setting means for setting.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the ratio between the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern is variably set in correspondence with the gaming state, so that the gaming state is set. As a result, there is an effect that the degree of expectation that a game ball enters the specific area can be varied and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machines G1 to G4, the first probability and the first probability higher than the first probability that the first determination means or the second determination means determines the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result. There is a probability setting means capable of setting either one of the two probabilities, and the privilege given by the privilege giving means is such that at least the second probability is set by the probability setting means. A gaming machine G5 characterized by the above.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the second probability is set by passing through the specific area, so that the specific area is executed while the privilege game is being executed. By making the player interested in whether or not the game ball can be passed, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem of getting tired of the game.

<Characteristic H group> (New zero attacker)
Based on the condition determining means for determining the satisfaction of the specific condition and the satisfaction of the specific condition determined by the condition determining means, the open state in which the game ball can enter from the closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter To the first variable ball entering means, the second variable ball entering means arranged in parallel with the first variable ball entering means, the first variable ball entering means or the second variable ball entering means Based on the fact that the ball has entered, the privilege giving means for giving a beneficial advantage to the player, and based on the determination of the satisfaction of the specific condition, the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means. A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game in which the ball entering means is varied in a predetermined order until the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first variable ball entering means, and the second variable ball entering means. Between the and, when the first variable ball entering means is in the closed state, there is a guiding means for setting the period until the game ball reaches the second variable ball entering means to a predetermined period or more. A gaming machine H1 characterized in that.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result of the game is a win, There are those in which a privilege game that is advantageous is executed. In such a configuration, as a privilege game, a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling opening and closing of two entrances has been proposed. (For example, JP-A-2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, only the control for switching the entrance opening that is opened as a privilege game is performed, and the downflow path of the gaming ball is not formed by using the two variable winning devices, and the further game is played. There was a need to improve the interests of. Further, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine with an improved interest in gaming.

  According to the gaming machine H1, even when the first variable ball entrance means is in the closed state, the period until reaching the second variable ball entrance means by the guide means is set to a predetermined period or more, so the second variable There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the game sphere flows down without entering the second variable ball entering means by the time the ball entering means is opened, and the interest of the game is reduced.

  In the gaming machine H1, the effect execution means, when the first variable ball entering means or the second variable ball entering means is in the open state, the open effect indicating the open state, and the first variable There is a performance executing means for executing at least a closing effect that indicates a closed state when the ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means are in a closed state, and the closing effect is within the predetermined period. A gaming machine H2 characterized by being executed by

  According to the gaming machine H2, in the closing effect, it is possible to notify that it is in the closed state by using a predetermined period, so that there is an effect that it is possible to perform an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, when the privilege game execution means executes one of the privilege games, the order in which the first variable ball entrance means and the second variable ball entrance means are respectively changed to the open state. And a release pattern determining means for determining the set release pattern from a plurality of release patterns.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H1 or H2, since it is determined by a plurality of opening patterns, the opening pattern can be randomized, and there is an effect that the game can be diversified.

  In the gaming machine H3, the opening pattern determined by the opening pattern determining means is preset with a timing for changing the first variable ball entering means or the second variable ball entering means from the closed state to the open state. A gaming machine H4 characterized in that the gaming machine H4.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H3, the timing for changing from the closed state to the open state is set in advance in the open pattern. There is an effect that the number of game balls entering the ball means can be stabilized and the profit given to the player can be set based on the design value.

<Characteristic I group> (Loop twice for only a predetermined period after the big hit)
A state setting means capable of setting at least a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state, and an advantageous privilege is given to the player based on establishment of a predetermined condition. In a gaming machine having a privilege game executing means for executing at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game, the state setting means sets the first advantageous state. When the first privilege game is executed in a state where the first privilege game is executed, the first advantageous state is set even after the first privilege game is executed, and when the second privilege game is executed, The second benefit state is set after the execution of the second benefit game, and the first benefit is executed when the first benefit game is executed in the state where the second benefit state is set. After the game is executed, the first advantageous state is set, and after the first advantageous state is set, the specific condition is satisfied without executing the first privilege game or the second privilege game by the privilege game executing means. A gaming machine I1 for setting the second advantageous state when established.

  Here, in game machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, a special symbol jackpot lottery is conducted, and based on the result of the lottery, the probability of being a jackpot. There is one that gives a high-probability game with a high probability. In such a configuration, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a high-probability game is continued until the jackpot is won twice (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 10-57583). In such a gaming machine, once the high-probability game is started, it is promised to win the jackpot twice while continuing the high-probability game. Therefore, after the high-probability game is started, the player is However, there was a problem of getting tired of playing games. The gaming machine I1 has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can alleviate the player's tiredness.

  According to the gaming machine I1, at least the first advantageous state advantageous to the player and the second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state are set by the state setting means. Based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the privilege game executing means at least executes the first privilege game that gives the player an advantageous privilege and the second privilege game different from the first privilege game. When the first privilege game is executed in the state where the first advantageous state is set, the first advantageous state is set by the state setting means even after the first privilege game is executed, and the second bonus game is executed. When the game is executed, the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means after the execution of the second privilege game. When the first privilege game is executed while the second advantageous state is set, the state setting means sets the first advantageous state after the execution of the first privilege game. After the first advantageous state is set, if the specific condition is satisfied without executing the first privilege game or the second privilege game by the privilege game executing means, the first advantageous state is changed to the second advantageous state. Set. As a result, if the first privilege game is executed before the specific condition is satisfied in the first advantageous state, the second advantageous state is set thereafter, so that the state advantageous to the player is continuously set. be able to. Therefore, the advantageous state can be continued until a plurality of privilege games are executed, and there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine I1, the privilege game executing means is capable of executing a third privilege game different from the first privilege game and the second privilege game, and the state setting means sets the first advantageous state to the first advantageous state. It is possible to set a specific state that is more disadvantageous to the player than any one of the second advantageous states, and when the third privilege game is executed in the state where the second advantageous state is set. The gaming machine I2, which sets the specific state after the execution of the third privilege game.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the third privilege game different from the first privilege game and the second privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means. A specific state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means. When the third privilege game is executed in the state where the second advantageous state is set, the specific state is set by the state setting means after the execution of the third privilege game. As a result, in the second advantageous state, the specific game state that is disadvantageous to the player when the third game state is executed is set, so that the continuous state of the advantageous state can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the gambling performance of the game becomes too high.

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the gaming machine I1 or I2 has a discriminating means for performing discrimination based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, and the predetermined condition is satisfied when the discriminating result by the discriminating means is a specific discriminating result. A gaming machine I3 characterized by being present.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I1 or I2, the determination is performed by the determination means based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, and the determination result by the determination means is a predetermined determination result. Since the condition of is satisfied, the player can play the game while being interested in the discrimination result by the discriminating means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine I4 according to any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, wherein the specific condition is met when the determination condition is met a predetermined number of times.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I4, the specific condition is satisfied when the determination condition is satisfied a predetermined number of times. A game is played while expecting that a predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In either the gaming machine I3 or I4, probability setting means for setting at least one of a first probability of being judged as the specific judgment result by the judging means and a second probability of being higher than the first probability. And the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state are those in which the second probability is set by the probability setting means.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I3 or I4, the following effects are produced. That is, the probability setting means sets at least one of the first probability that the determination means determines the specific determination result and the second probability that is higher than the first probability. The second probability is set by the probability setting means in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state. Thereby, in both the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, it is possible to increase the possibility that the determination result by the determination means will be the specific determination result in a short period of time. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic J group> (Structure for distributing prizes to attackers)
Based on the condition determining means for determining the satisfaction of the specific condition and the satisfaction of the specific condition determined by the condition determining means, the open state in which the game ball can enter from the closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter To the first variable ball entering means, the second variable ball entering means arranged downstream of the first variable ball entering means, and the first variable ball entering means or the second variable ball entering means. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered, the privilege giving means for giving an advantageous privilege to the player, and based on the determination that the specific condition is established, the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means. A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game in which the variable ball entering means is made variable in a predetermined order until a predetermined condition is satisfied, the first variable ball entering means, and the first variable ball entering. First distribution means for distributing at least game balls to the downstream side of the ball means, and game balls distributed to the downstream side of the first variable ball insertion means by the first distribution means, with the second variable ball input means, A gaming machine J1 characterized by having at least a second distributing means for distributing to a downstream side of the second variable ball entering means.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, a special symbol jackpot lottery is conducted, and when the result of the lottery is a jackpot, the game is played. There is one that provides a big hit game in which a game ball is inserted into a special winning opening provided on a board surface. In such a configuration, a game machine in which two big winning holes are provided on the game board surface has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, there is a problem that the game balls that have not entered one of the special winning openings do not enter the other special winning openings, and the flow of the game balls on the game board surface is poor. .. The gaming machine J1 is made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing a ball flow of a gaming ball that makes a player expect.

  According to the gaming machine J1, the condition determining means determines whether the specific condition is satisfied, and based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied, the game ball can be opened from the closed state where it is difficult to enter. The first variable ball entering means is changed to the state. The second variable ball entrance means is arranged downstream of the first variable ball entrance means. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first variable ball entrance means or the second variable ball entrance means, the privilege granting means grants an advantageous privilege to the player. Based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied, the privilege game executing means opens the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means in a predetermined order until the predetermined conditions are satisfied. Execute variable privilege games. The first distribution means distributes at least the game balls to the first variable ball entering means and the downstream side of the first variable ball entering means, and the game balls distributed to the downstream side of the first variable ball entering means to the second side. The distribution means distributes at least the second variable ball entering means and the downstream side of the second variable ball entering means. As a result, it is possible to allow the game balls distributed to the downstream side of the first variable ball entering means to enter the second variable ball entering means. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing a ball flow of a gaming ball that makes a player expect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine J1, the first sorting means and the second sorting means are rotatable portions which are rotatable in a first direction and a second direction opposite to the first direction, and a rotating portion thereof. A gaming machine J2, characterized in that it has at least a restricting means for restricting the turning range of the device at a predetermined angle.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J1, the first sorting means and the second sorting means are arranged in the first direction and the second direction opposite to the first direction by the rotating portion. Since it is rotatable and the regulation means regulates the rotation range of the rotation portion at a predetermined angle, it is possible to execute an appropriate distribution operation, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. ..

  In the gaming machine J2, the first sorting means and the second sorting means are configured to be alternately rotated in the first direction and the second direction by a flowing down game ball. Game machine J3.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J2, the first distributing means and the second distributing means are configured so that the gaming ball flowing down alternately rotates in the first direction and the second direction. Therefore, it is possible to execute a more appropriate distribution operation.

  In the gaming machine J1 or J2, when the first variable ball entering means is in the closed state, a guide means for guiding the game ball to the second variable ball entering means, and the game ball by the guide means When the second variable ball entering means is guided to the second variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means is in a closed state, it has a guide path for guiding the guided game ball to the second distributing means. A gaming machine J4 characterized by being a thing.

  The gaming machine J4 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1 or the gaming machine J2. That is, when the first variable ball entering means is closed, the guiding means guides the game ball to the second variable ball entering means. When the game ball is guided to the second variable ball entering means by the guiding means and the second variable ball entering means is in the closed state, the guided game ball is guided to the second distributing means. And a taxiway. As a result, the rotation state of the second distribution means can be changed. Therefore, there is an effect that the distribution of the game balls by the distribution member can be complicated, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic K group> (Regarding the probability change rate of one symbol at normal time by a variation method other than simultaneous variation)
A first variable ball entering means which is variable between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the open state, and a downstream side of the first variable ball entering means. A second variable ball entering means arranged in the second variable ball entering means, a specific area in which the game ball entering the second variable ball entering means can enter, and a game ball passing through the specific area Based on the establishment of a specific condition, a privilege granting means that grants an advantageous benefit to the player, and the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means as a bonus game that is advantageous to the player, based on a predetermined variable pattern. The variable pattern that is changed by the variable control means, and the determining means that determines the variable pattern that is changed by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns. When the 1 variable ball entering means is in the closed state, the game ball that has not entered the first variable ball entering means can enter the specific area, and the specific pattern rather than the advantageous pattern A gaming machine K1 characterized in that at least a disadvantageous pattern that makes it difficult to enter the area is set.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result of the game is a win, There are those in which a privilege game that is advantageous is executed. In such a configuration, a gaming machine that offers a plurality of types of privilege games by opening and closing two entrances has been proposed as a privilege game. (For example, JP-A-2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, only the control for switching the entrance opening that is opened as a bonus game is performed, and further interest in the game has been demanded. Further, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine with an improved interest in gaming.

  According to the gaming machine K1, the privilege given to the player can be changed by the variable pattern of the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means, so that the player can be interested in the variable pattern. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine K1, based on the operation of the player, a launching means capable of launching a game ball, a first ball entering means into which the game ball emitted from the launching ball can enter, and a first ball entering means thereof. A second ball entering means different from the above, a ball entering assisting means that allows a game ball to enter the second ball entering means more easily than the first ball entering means, and the first ball entering means A first discriminating means for executing a first discrimination based on the fact that a game ball has entered, and a second discriminating means for executing a second discrimination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second entering means. And the first identification information indicating the first determination result of the first determination by the first determination means and the second identification information indicating the second determination result of the second determination by the second determination means, respectively. And a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying one of the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means based on a predetermined priority order. When the first identification information indicating the determination result or the second identification information indicating the specific second determination result is displayed, the privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game and the second ball entering means are provided. The first state is set to allow the game ball to enter and play the game, and the first state is set not to allow the game ball to enter the second ball entering means to play the game. According to the game state setting means for setting one of the two states, and the case where the first state is set and the second state is set by the game state setting means, the specific second determination A gaming machine K2, characterized in that it has ratio changing means for changing the ratio of the advantageous pattern set by the determining means when the result is obtained.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K1, an advantageous pattern is set depending on whether the gaming state setting means sets the first state or the second state. Since the ratio is changed by the ratio changing means, if the second state is set, for example, if the ratio of the advantageous pattern is set low, the second entering means is allowed to enter the game in the second state. There is an effect that the damage can be reduced even if a fraudulent operation is performed.

  In the gaming machine K1 or K2, the ratio varying means sets the ratio of the second probability to be lower in the second state than in the first state.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1 or K2, there is an effect that damage can be reduced even when an illegal act is performed in the second state.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, a first flow path through which a game ball can enter the first ball entering means more easily than the second ball entering means, and the first ball entering means rather than the first ball entering means. A game machine K4, characterized in that it has a second flow path through which a game ball can easily enter the second ball entering means.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the flow rate of the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means is variable, so that the game ball flows down. There is an effect that the game can be changed depending on the flow path to be performed and the interest of the player can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K4, between the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means, the game ball that has not entered the first variable ball entering means is the second game ball. Guidance means for guiding the variable ball entrance means over a predetermined period of time is arranged, and the disadvantageous pattern is a period shorter than the predetermined time period after the first variable ball entrance means is changed to the closed state. A game machine K5, wherein the second variable ball entering means is changed to the open state and then to the closed state.

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K5, it is possible to perform the control with easy control so that it becomes difficult to enter the second variable ball entering means in the disadvantageous pattern. The effect is that the control load can be reduced.

<Characteristic L group> (Opening with a configuration other than simultaneous fluctuation, and changing the probability change rate with intervals)
A first variable ball entering means which is variable between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the open state, and a downstream side of the first variable ball entering means. A second variable ball entering means arranged in the second variable ball entering means, a specific area in which the game ball entering the second variable ball entering means can enter, and a game ball passing through the specific area Based on the establishment of a specific condition, a privilege granting means that grants an advantageous benefit to the player, and the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means as a bonus game that is advantageous to the player, based on a predetermined variable pattern. The variable pattern that is changed by the variable control means, and the determining means that determines the variable pattern that is changed by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns. When the 1 variable ball entering means is in the closed state, the game ball that has not entered the first variable ball entering means can enter the specific area, and the specific pattern rather than the advantageous pattern A gaming machine L1 characterized in that at least a disadvantageous pattern that makes it difficult to enter the area is set.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result of the game is a win, There are those in which a privilege game that is advantageous is executed. In such a configuration, a gaming machine that offers a plurality of types of privilege games by opening and closing two entrances has been proposed as a privilege game. (For example, JP-A-2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, only the control for switching the entrance opening that is opened as a bonus game is performed, and further interest in the game has been demanded. Further, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine with an improved interest in gaming.

  According to the gaming machine L1, the privilege provided to the player can be changed by the variable pattern of the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means, so that the player can be interested in the variable pattern. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine L1, a launching means capable of launching a game ball based on a player's operation, a first ball entering means into which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter, and a first ball entering means thereof. Are different from the second ball entering means, and the first ball is inserted into the first ball entering means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entering means, and the game ball enters the second ball entering means. Second discriminating means for executing the second discriminating based on the sphere, first discriminating information indicating the first discriminating result of the first discriminating by the first discriminating means, and second for the second discriminating means. The display means capable of displaying the second identification information indicating the second determination result of the determination, and either one of the first identification information and the second identification information in a predetermined priority order. Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying on the display means based on the display means, and the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result or the second identification information indicating the specific second determination result on the display means. When displayed, a privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game, and a game state setting for setting one game state from a plurality of different game states when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means. Means and a ratio variable setting means for changing and setting the ratio of the advantageous pattern and the disadvantage pattern in correspondence with the game state set by the game state setting means. Gaming machine L2.

  According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L1, the ratio between the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern is variably set according to the gaming state. There is an effect that the degree of expectation for the ball to enter can be varied and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine L1 or L2, a first probability that the first determination means or the second determination means determines the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result, and a first probability higher than the first probability. There is a probability setting means capable of setting either one of the two probabilities, and the privilege given by the privilege giving means is such that at least the second probability is set by the probability setting means. A gaming machine L3 characterized by the above.

  According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L1 or L2, the second probability is set by passing through the specific area, so that the game ball is in the specific area even while the privilege game is being executed. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the trouble of getting tired of the game by making the player interested in whether or not the game can be passed.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L3, the advantageous pattern and the disadvantage pattern cause the first variable ball entrance means to change to the closed state, and then change the second variable ball entrance means to the open state. The gaming machine L4 is characterized in that the periods up to are set to be different at least.

  According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines L1 to L3, the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern can be set by easy control.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L4, between the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means, the game ball that has not entered the first variable ball entering means is the second game ball. Guidance means for guiding the variable ball entrance means over a predetermined period of time is arranged, and the disadvantageous pattern is a period shorter than the predetermined time period after the first variable ball entrance means is changed to the closed state. A gaming machine L5, wherein the second variable ball entering means is changed to the open state and then to the closed state.

  According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines L1 to L4, it is possible to more reliably make it difficult for the gaming ball to pass through the specific area in a disadvantageous pattern.

  Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B10, C1 to C4, D1 to D3, E1 to E5, F1 to F5, G1 to G5, H1 to H4, I1 to I5, J1 to J4, K1 to K5, L1 to L5 In any one of the above, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, and the gaming machine Z1. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is moved to an operating port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

  Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B10, C1 to C4, D1 to D3, E1 to E5, F1 to F5, G1 to G5, H1 to H4, I1 to I5, J1 to J4, K1 to K5, L1 to L5 In any one of the above, the gaming machine Z2 is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "variable display means for dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided to operate the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). Due to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

  Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B10, C1 to C4, D1 to D3, E1 to E5, F1 to F5, G1 to G5, H1 to H4, I1 to I5, J1 to J4, K1 to K5, L1 to L5 In any one of the above, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operating lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
75a distribution mechanism (first distribution means)
75b distribution mechanism (second distribution means)
65 First variable winning device (second variable ball means)
650 Second variable winning device (first variable ball means)
S1680 Part of privilege granting means S1604 Benefit game executing means

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed.
Furthermore, a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by opening and closing two entrances as a privilege game has been proposed.

JP, 2003-265765, A

In such a gaming machine, only the control for switching the entrance opening that is opened as a privilege game is performed, and the downflow path of the gaming ball is not formed by using the two variable winning devices, and the further game is played. There was a need to improve the interests of.

Claim 1 gaming machine described, the first variable ball entrance means capable Yu skill ball game ball from ball entrance difficult closed is varied to ball entrance can open in order to achieve this object And, the second variable ball entering means which is arranged on the downstream side of the first variable ball entering means and which can be changed from a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter into an open state in which the game ball can enter. And a privilege granting means capable of granting an advantageous privilege to the player based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first variable ball entering means or the second variable ball entering means, and the specific condition is enacted in particular based, be performed privilege game to vary until the first variable ball entrance means and said second variable ball entrance means and a predetermined condition to said open condition in a predetermined order, each of which holds With a possible privilege game executing means, the second variable ball entering means sets a game state that is advantageous to the player after the privilege game is finished, based on the passage of the game ball. It is those having a specific area, the game machine, the between the first variable ball entrance means and before Symbol second variable ball entrance means, downstream without ball entrance to the first variable ball entrance means Guidance means that can make the period until the game ball that has flown down reaches the second variable ball entering means a predetermined period or more, and the first variable ball entering means when the privilege game is executed. Setting means capable of setting one of the plurality of patterns for changing the timing of the second variable ball entering means to the open state, and the plurality of setting means set by the setting means. The pattern is at least a first pattern and a second pattern in which it is more difficult for a game ball to pass through the specific area than the first pattern, and the second pattern is the second pattern. 1 After the variable ball entering means has changed from the open state to the closed state, the second variable ball entering means is in a state in which the game ball entering the second variable ball entering means can pass through the specific area. The period in which the open state is set is set to be shorter than the predetermined period, and the gaming machine sets the ratio at which the first pattern is set by the setting means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. It is configured to be variable .

According to claim 1 the gaming machine, comprising: a first variable ball entrance means capable Yu skill ball game ball from ball entrance difficult closed is varied to ball entrance can open, the first The second variable ball entering means, which is arranged on the downstream side of the variable ball entering means and can be changed from a closed state where the game ball is difficult to enter to an open state where the game ball can enter , and the first variable ball entrance means or a game ball to the second variable ball entrance means based on the fact that the ball entrance, and benefits providing means capable of imparting favorable benefits to the player, based in particular specific condition is satisfied Te, the first variable ball entrance means and said second variable ball entrance means and said open state capable benefits game execution performing a privilege game to vary until a predetermined condition is satisfied in a predetermined order, respectively And a second variable ball entering means having a specific area in which a game state that is advantageous to the player is set after the bonus game is finished, based on the passage of the game ball. and at the gaming machine, the between the first variable ball entrance means and before Symbol second variable ball entrance means, game balls flowing down to the downstream without ball entrance to the first variable ball entrance means Guidance means that can make the period until reaching the second variable ball entrance means a predetermined period or more, and the first variable ball entrance means and the second variable ball entrance when the privilege game is executed. Setting means capable of setting one pattern from a plurality of patterns for changing the timing of the ball means to the open state, and the plurality of patterns set by the setting means are At least one pattern and a second pattern in which it is more difficult for a game ball to pass through the specific area than the first pattern are set, and the second pattern is the first variable ball entering means. After the state is changed from the open state to the closed state, the second variable ball entering means is set to the open state in a state in which the game ball entering the second variable ball entering means can pass through the specific area. The period is set to be shorter than the predetermined period, and the gaming machine can change the rate at which the first pattern is set by the setting means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. It is configured to be possible . Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view of a variable winning device. (A) is sectional drawing of the variable winning a prize device of La-La section, (b) is a Lb-Lb sectional view, (c) is a top view of a variable winning device. (A)-(b) is a rear view of some variable winning a prize devices. (A) is a flow chart showing the transition of the gaming state in the first embodiment, (b) is a jackpot type selected in each gaming state in the first embodiment, and when the jackpot type is selected It is a schematic diagram showing a game state that shifts to. (A) is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display device in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the display mode displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example. (A)-(b) is an example of the display mode in the probability variation game state displayed with the 3rd symbol display device in 1st Embodiment. (A)-(b) is an example of the display mode in the probability variation game state displayed with the 3rd symbol display device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a figure showing a frame button in a 1st embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing a selection switch in a 1st embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counters in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the content of ROM of the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the 1st random number table in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed the small hit random number table in 1st Embodiment typically, FIG. 7C is a diagram schematically showing a second random number table in the first embodiment. (A)-(c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller 110 in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table set in a ROM of main controller 110 in the first embodiment. (A)-(b) is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main controller 110 in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the universal figure fluctuation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main controller 110 in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of RAM of the main control apparatus 110 in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of RAM223 typically. It is a flow chart which shows the timer interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit judging processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 deviation|variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change pattern selection processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation stop processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 disengagement stop process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol big hit judging processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 deviation change process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol change pattern selection processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 disengagement stop process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st pre-reading processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd pre-reading processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a through gate passage processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a startup process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the big hit operation setting processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing an ending process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the information processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the abnormal processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device in 1st execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device in 1st execution form. 7 is a flowchart showing a stop type command reception process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the winning command processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control device in 1st execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the notification lottery process performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing a state command reception process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. (A)-(b) is an example of the display mode in the normal play state or the latent probability change play state displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (A)-(b) is an example of the display mode in a latent probability change play state or a probability change play state displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. It is the enlarged view which expanded a part of front surface of the game board of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow diagram showing a game state transition in the second embodiment. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the big hit game in the second embodiment. (A)-(b) is an example of the display mode displayed with the 3rd symbol display device in 2nd Embodiment. It is an example of the display mode displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in a 2nd embodiment. (A)-(b) is an example of the display mode displayed with the 3rd symbol display device in 2nd Embodiment. It is an example of the display mode displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in a 2nd embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the content of ROM of the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment, (b) showed the content of the RAM of the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment typically. It is a figure. (A) is the figure which showed typically the 1st random number table in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed the small hit random number table in 2nd Embodiment typically, FIG. 7C is a diagram schematically showing a second random number table in the second embodiment. (A)-(b) is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the jackpot classification selection table set in ROM of the main controller 110 in 2nd Embodiment. (A)-(b) is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the jackpot classification selection table set in ROM of the main controller 110 in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main controller 110 in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main controller 110 in 2nd Embodiment. (A)-(b) is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main controller 110 in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the universal figure fluctuation pattern table set to ROM of the main controller 110 in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a small hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the special electric auditors product operation table set to ROM. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of RAM typically. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the transfer of the game state in the 1st modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the transfer of the game state in the 2nd modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is an enlarged view which expanded a part of game board of the pachinko machine in the 3rd modification of a 2nd embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 58. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape substantially the same as the outer frame 11 with respect to the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinge 18 serves as an opening/closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and starting ports 630, 631, 640, 67 and the like is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by the ball flowing down on the front surface of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 19 is used as an opening/closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 can be released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with its front surface protruding and the upper surface opened, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to descend to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 (FIG. 11A) and a selection switch 600 (see FIG. 11B) are provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the effect, background, or the like displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) described later.

  As shown in FIG. 11B, the selection switch 600 is a decision switch (a) for deciding selection of effects, etc., a left switch 600b for instructing left selection, and an up selection. The upper switch 600c and the right switch 600d for instructing the rightward selection include a lower switch 600e for instructing the downward selection.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, electric decoration portions 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and when the jackpot or the reach production is performed, the illumination parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach before the jackpot is in progress. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is provided and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying during payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs is provided.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the illumination section 32 on the right side by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more glitter.

  A ball rental operating unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state where banknotes, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount as a number as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not necessary in a so-called cash machine, which is a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to share a pachinko machine using a card unit with a cash machine.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central portion of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is provided, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a for pressing, a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 by the change of the electric resistance. (Not shown) and are built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes as a result, and thus the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described configuration is used, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the main control device 110 and other control devices detect a game ball launched by the ball launch unit 112a, and a solenoid of the ball launch unit 112a. May be configured to detect that a game ball has been launched. Further, the number of detected game balls may be counted and stored until a process such as RAM clear is executed.

  At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball-pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, and The sphere spontaneously falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "dollar box") placed below the lower plate 50 for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50. The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and wind turbines for guiding balls and rails 61 and 62, a first starting opening 63a, a first starting opening 63a, and The second starting port 63b, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The 1st starting opening 630, the right 1st starting opening 631, the 2nd starting opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arrange|positioned by the through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and a game board. It is fixed from the front side of 13 with wood screws or the like. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and inside the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area formed by partitioning the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 on the front surface of the game board 13 (where a starting opening or the like is provided, and a shot ball is It is the area that flows down. In addition, the game area includes all areas where the game balls that have passed through the return ball prevention member 68 flow down before they pass through the outlet 66 and the winning port.

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (the upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a momentum higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the center. In addition, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 formed by forming an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  On the right side of the game board 13, a first normal symbol starting port 67a and a second normal symbol starting port 67b are provided below the first normal symbol starting port 67b. The first normal symbol starting port 67a and the second normal symbol starting port 67b are configured in the same shape, and are configured with a gate-type starting port having a sensor capable of detecting passage of a game ball. There is. When the game ball passes through the first normal symbol starting opening 67a or the second normal symbol starting opening 67b, the lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the lottery performed for the game sphere passing to the first normal symbol starting opening 67a or the second normal symbol starting opening 67b, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is hit.

  When the normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn, the variable symbol of the normal symbol is started to be displayed on the second symbol display device 83 provided in the variable display device unit 80, which will be described later, and "○" and "x" are displayed. After the symbols are alternately lighted for a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds), a normal symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol "○" or "x") indicating the lottery result is stopped (lighted). When the ball passes through the first normal symbol starting port 67 or the second normal symbol starting port 67b while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is the first normal symbol starting port 67a. It is reserved up to a maximum of four times in total with the second ordinary symbol starting port 67b. The number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37. When the variable display ends in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal symbol starting port 67 (the first normal symbol starting port 67b or the second normal symbol starting port 67b) remains, the next A lottery for ordinary symbols is performed, and variable display according to the lottery is started.

  When it is determined that the winning symbol is a normal symbol, the symbol “◯”, which is a symbol indicating that the lottery of the ordinary symbol was a winning symbol, is lit and displayed on the second symbol display device 83. When the winning symbol is displayed, the first ordinary electric accessory 632 operates. The first ordinary electric accessory 632 has a left guiding member 632a and a right guiding member 632b, and a space is left between the left guiding member 632a and the right guiding member 632b so that one game ball can pass therethrough. Normally, it is maintained in an upright position. A predetermined angle (in the present embodiment, the left guiding member 632a is 40 degrees counterclockwise and the right guiding member 632b is 40 degrees clockwise) from the state where the left guiding member 632a and the right guiding member 632b are erected substantially vertically. It moves (that is, is changed to an open state), and the game ball enters the second starting port 640 by guiding the game ball to the second starting port 640 by the left guiding member 632a and the right guiding member. It becomes an easy state (special state). On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is off, the symbol "x", which is a symbol indicating that the lottery for the normal symbol is out, is lit and displayed on the second symbol display device 83. At this time, the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is not operated, and the next variation of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed.

  The first symbol display provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LED”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area in front view (upper right side of FIG. 2) A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 is a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a, the first starting opening 630, the right starting opening 631, the second starting opening 640, the first normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67a, the second normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67b ball winning Among them, the number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls) for which variable display has not been executed, is indicated by a lighting state. In addition, the number of rounds in a big hit and an error display are also indicated by a corresponding lighting state.

  The 7-segment display 37b is composed of two 7-segment LEDs on the left and right. The 7-segment LED on the left side has a variable display of the first special symbol indicating the result of the determination (lottery) of the lottery (hereinafter, referred to as the first lottery game) based on the winning of the first start opening 630 or the right start opening 631 (dynamic). Is displayed. Specifically, the variable display (in the present embodiment, 7 segments is displayed until the variable time (dynamic display time) determined based on the winning of the first start opening 630 or the right first start opening 631 has elapsed. After the central segment blinks), it is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the determination result. If the determination result is out, a symbol "-" indicating that the one segment in the center is illuminated is displayed. On the other hand, when the determination result is a hit, a symbol different from the symbol indicating the deviation such as the symbols “3” and “7” corresponding to the hit is displayed.

  The 7-segment LED on the right side has a second special symbol (dynamic display) showing the result of the determination (lottery) of the lottery (second lottery game) based on the winning of the second start opening 640. Specifically, it is displayed until the variable time determined based on the winning of the second start opening 640 elapses, and is configured similarly to the first lottery game. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the respective LEDs emit different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and the combination of the emitted colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

  In addition, the first special symbol indicating the determination (lottery) result of the first lottery game and the second special symbol indicating the determination (lottery) result of the second lottery game are the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) described later. See also). As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can perform various variable displays as compared with the 7-segment display device 37b, so that the player's interest can be improved.

  Further, the variation pattern (variation mode or dynamic display mode) in the pachinko machine 10, which will be described later, has a variation time set for each variation mode and corresponds to a dynamic display mode regarding time information. Furthermore, the variation pattern can be divided into a variation pattern with reach and a variation pattern with non-reach, a long-term variation pattern having a relatively long variation time and a short-term variation pattern having a relatively short variation time. In this way, even when sorting is performed based on a fixed time standard (here, reach, non-reach, or a reference time (for example, whether it is longer than 10 seconds or not)), dynamic information regarding time information is obtained. It corresponds to the display mode.

  Further, as will be described later, the time information until the fluctuation start time also corresponds to the time when the accurate fluctuation starts, and the time information of the rough fluctuation pattern described above (for example, whether it is a long time fluctuation pattern or not) Information about time information (for example, the number of long-time fluctuation patterns performed before the start of fluctuation) determined based on whether or not) is also applicable.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in the lottery (first lottery game, second lottery game) performed for winning the first start opening 630, the right first start opening 631, and the second start opening 640, it is a big hit. Whether or not the jackpot is determined (big hit lottery) and the jackpot type is also determined. As the jackpot type determined here, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), jackpot A (15R jackpot probability variation jackpot), jackpot B (15R regular jackpot), jackpot E (15R regular jackpot (electric support Yes)) is set (see FIGS. 16A to 16C). Here, the presence of the electric jackpot for the big hit E means that the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is easily set to the special state (open state). In jackpot E, after 15 rounds of jackpot games, the electric support state is set until the total number of times of the first lottery game and the second lottery game reaches 100 times.

  As the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), two types of jackpot C (15R probability variation jackpot (with electric support)) and jackpot D (15R probability variation jackpot (without power support)) are set (FIG. 16). (See (a) to (c)).

  Here, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the variable winning devices 65 are arranged as the winning devices that are operated in the open state during the big hit game. The variable winning device 65 is operated such that the jackpots A to E are opened until the first specific winning opening 65a is played 15 times for a predetermined period or a predetermined number (10 balls in this embodiment) of game balls. ..

  The configuration of the variable winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 6. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 4, the variable winning a prize device 65 is combined with the opening forming member 65b projectingly arranged on the front side of the game board 13 and the back side of the opening forming member 65b to form the variable winning device 65. A base member 65c for screwing to the game board 13 and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 65c to turn on the LEDs from the back side of the base member 65c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 are provided. It has an LED board 65d arranged, a back cover body 65e for sandwiching the LED board 65d with a base member 65c, and an opening/closing door 65f1 for opening and closing a specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65d. The opening/closing unit 65f, the flow path cover body 65g that is combined with the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, and protrudes into the flow path formed by the back cover body 65e and the flow path cover body 65g to play the game. A switching member 65h for switching the flow path of the sphere, a link member 65i engaged with the switching member 65h, a back cover body 65j arranged on the back side of the flow path cover body 65g, and a back surface of the back cover body 65j. And a fixing cover body 65m for fixing the side passage solenoid 65k from the rear side to fix the rear side cover body 65j with a screw. There is.

  FIG. 5 is a sectional view of the variable winning device 65. 5C is a top view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 5B is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 taken along the line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 5B, the variable winning a prize device 65 is formed with a specific winning opening 65a which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening 65a is formed with a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and the game ball that has passed through the opening is inclined to the lower left so as to be guided to the left in FIG. 5B. The bottom surface is formed. At the left end portion of the bottom surface, a detection opening 65a1 constituted by a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting the winning of a game ball is arranged. The game sphere that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to the distribution flow path formed on the back surface side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG. 6B.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 5B, the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is an open state in which a game ball can be entered by the opening/closing door 65f1 configured by a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 and a non-entering state. It is changed to a closed state where it is possible (difficult to enter). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening/closing door 65f1, and the game ball can be rolled on the upper part of the opening/closing door. Further, in the open state, the opening/closing door 65f1 is configured to be retracted from the inside of the specific winning port 65a by being retracted inside the base member 65c (inside the game board 13).

  With this configuration, when the opening of the variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the variable winning device 65 and is guided to the right first starting opening 631 side. Is configured. Therefore, even during the time saving game (including the probability variation game), it is possible to enter the game ball into the second starting opening 640 while keeping the right hit state, and immediately after the jackpot game, the left hit method is used. The time and effort to change can be reduced. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.

  Further, in the open state, the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the variable winning device 65, so that more game balls can be efficiently won in the specific winning port 65a. Therefore, the time required for the big hit game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 5A is a La-La sectional view shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5A, the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is inclined toward the distribution flow path side of the back cover body 65e.

  With reference to FIG. 6, a configuration in which the game balls guided to the distribution flow paths of the back cover body 65e are distributed to a normal discharge flow path 65e1 and a special discharge flow path 65e2 described later will be described.

  FIG. 6A is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that the game balls are distributed to the special discharge port 65e2. As shown in FIG. 6A, the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted and a guide piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 65g. Is rotatably supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h is rotated from the back side of the flow path cover body 65g into the distribution flow path. It is configured so that it can be arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 6(a), the game ball guided from the detection port 65a1 into the distribution channel is guided to the upper surface of the guiding piece 65h2 arranged obliquely leftward and to the special discharge port 65e2. .. The game ball that has passed through the special discharge port 65e2 is detected by the probability change switch 65e3 that is formed of a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge port 65e2, and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. ..

  Here, as will be described in detail later, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the gaming ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 described above during the jackpot game, so that the gaming state after the jackpot game is a high probability gaming state (probability variation). The game state) is set. That is, the probability variation switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for giving a probability variation gaming state. In addition, the switching member 65h is configured to sort the gaming state after the big hit into the low-probability gaming state (normal gaming state ST1) or the probability variation gaming state.

  In this way, since the gaming state set after the jackpot game can be changed by the flow route of the game balls that have won the first specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot game, it is possible to improve the interest of the player even during the jackpot game. You can The time required to pass from the opening of the first variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge port 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is configured to be at least 1 second. .. The operation timing and the operation time of the switching member 65h are set depending on the type of jackpot. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A, the jackpot C and the jackpot D are won, the switching member 65h is operated for 5 seconds in synchronization with the opening timing of the first variable winning device 65 at the start of the 14th round. Has been done. In addition, when the big hit B and the big hit E are won, the switching member 65h is configured to be actuated for 0.5 seconds in synchronization with the opening timing of the first variable winning device 65 at the start of the 14th round.

  Therefore, in the jackpot A, the game ball that has won the first variable winning device 65 is configured to be able to pass the probability variation switch 65e3, but in the jackpot B, it is impossible to pass the probability variation switch 65e3. Has been done. Therefore, the probability variation imparting ratio can be controlled depending on the type of jackpot, and it is possible to prevent excessive disadvantage from occurring.

  A case where the game ball is guided to the normal outlet 65e2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6B is a diagram showing a state in which the flow path solenoid 65k is inactive and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h closes the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge port 65e2.

  The game ball guided from the detection port 65a1 to the distribution channel is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and is normally guided to the discharge port 65e1. A discharge confirmation switch 65e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting passage of a game ball is provided at the end of the normal discharge port 65e1. As a result, it is possible to determine whether all the game balls entered in the first variable winning device 65 have been discharged by the total of the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 and the probability variation switch 65e3. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem that the winning ball is won in the probability variation switch 65e3 even if the jackpot B is won in the 14th round in a state where the game balls won before the 14th round are not discharged.

  In this way, the game ball that has won the first specific winning port 65a in the first variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on this, a prize ball as a privilege for the player (in this embodiment, one ball winning) You can pay out 15 prize balls for each. Further, by using the game ball after being detected, it is possible to sort whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 passes, so that it is possible to execute a lottery as to whether or not the probability variation game state is given. .. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning opening for providing the probability variation gaming state separately from the first variable winning a prize device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 7, various game states in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 7A is a diagram showing a flow in which various game states are set. FIG. 7(b) is a diagram showing a jackpot type generated for each special symbol in various game states, and a game state shifted after the jackpot occurs.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7A, the following four game states are set as the game states. The first is the normal gaming state ST1 in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is a low probability (normal) and there is no electric support (the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is unlikely to be in a special state (open state)). The second is that the jackpot probability of the special symbol is a low probability (normal) as in the normal game state ST1, but there is an electric power support (the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is likely to be in a special state (open state)). Time saving game state ST1h. Third, the probability of jackpot of the special symbol is high probability, there is no electric support (it is difficult for the first ordinary electric accessory 632 to be in a special state (open state)), and the probability variation electric support non-playing state (so-called, Latent probability variation game state) ST2. The fourth is a high probability that the jackpot of the special symbol is high, and yet with electric power support (the first ordinary electric auditor product 632 is likely to be in a special state (open state)) Certain probability variation electric power support game state (so-called probability variation game state) ST3.

  In this embodiment, the variation of the first special symbol and the variation of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time. However, in each gaming state, the variation of either one of the special symbols is substantially performed (also referred to as a substantial variation target). Specifically, compared to the variation time of the special symbol that is the subject of the actual variation, the variation time of the special symbol that is not the subject of the actual variation is configured to be longer. In addition, the game ball is difficult to enter the starting opening for the special symbol lottery that is not subject to substantial variation, or the gaming ball is entering the starting aperture for performing the special symbol lottery that is subject to actual variation. It is configured so that the game state is easy to play. As a result, the jackpot of the special symbol that is not the subject of substantial change is not substantially generated (it is difficult to occur), and the jackpot of the special symbol that is the subject of substantial change is substantially generated (can be easily generated).

  In addition, the method of subjecting one of the special symbols to the substantial variation is not limited to the method described above. For example, a normal electric auditors product is provided in each of the starting opening which becomes the lottery trigger of the first special symbol and the starting opening which becomes the lottery trigger of the second special symbol. Then, in each gaming state, it is conceivable that only the normal electric accessory of the starting opening corresponding to the special symbol to be substantially changed is movable (or easy). As a result, the game ball enters the starting opening corresponding to the special symbol that is the actual variation target, and the game ball does not enter the starting opening corresponding to the special symbol that is not the actual variation target (it is difficult to enter) You can In this case, the lottery for moving the ordinary electric accessory provided at each starting port may be separately performed. For example, a lottery for moving one of the normal electric symbols is performed based on the ball entering (passing) the first ordinary symbol starting port (called a lottery of the first ordinary symbol), and the other ordinary electric symbols are movable. The lottery for doing may be performed by entering (passing) into the second normal symbol starting opening (referred to as a lottery of the second normal symbol). Furthermore, the lottery for the first ordinary symbol and the lottery for the second ordinary symbol may be executed at the same time, and like the lottery for the special symbol in the present embodiment, when the lottery for one ordinary symbol is a big hit. The lottery for the other ordinary symbol may be missed. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the game state and improve the interest of the player.

  In the present embodiment, the big hit based on the first special symbol and the big hit based on the second special symbol have different probabilities that a big hit that allows the game ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 is selected. That is, the probability of being able to shift (loop) to the high-probability game state (latent probability variation game state ST2 or probability variation game state ST3) is different. Although it will be specifically described later with reference to FIG. 16, the jackpot based on the first special symbol has a low probability of being able to shift (loop) to a high-probability gaming state (latent probability variation gaming state ST2 or probability variation gaming state ST3) ( 34%), that is, there is a high probability (66%) of shifting (falling) to a low probability state (normal gaming state ST1 or time saving gaming state ST1h). On the other hand, the jackpot based on the second special symbol has a high probability (100%) of being able to shift (loop) to a high-probability game state (latent probability variation game state ST2 or probability variation game state ST3). In the following, in explaining the flow of setting various game states, a jackpot that allows transition to a high probability game state (a game ball can pass through the probability variation switch 65e3) is selected (generated) for convenience. In this case, it is assumed that the high probability game state is entered (the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3).

  In each gaming state, it is possible to adjust (set) whether it is easy to shift to a high-probability gaming state (loop) or to easily shift to a low-probability state (fall) by setting a special symbol that is a target of actual variation. As a result, in each gaming state, in addition to two types (high probability and low probability) of the probability that the lottery result will be a big hit, two types (probability) of transition (loop) to the high probability gaming state after the big hit ( It is possible to set a state with a high probability that the transition to the high-probability gaming state is low. Therefore, variations in the game state can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  Specifically, in the probability variation game state ST3, which is a high-probability game state, the actual variation target is set in the special figure 1 so that the game state can easily transition (fall) to the low-probability state, and is also the high-probability game state. By setting the actual variation target in the special figure 2 in the latent probability variation game state ST2, it becomes possible to make the game state easy to shift (loop) to the high probability game state. In other words, even if the same high-probability game state (or low-probability state), by changing the special symbol that is the subject of substantial variation, it is possible to change the distribution of the game state to be transferred after the jackpot game is over, It is possible to increase the variations in which the game state shifts, and improve the interest of the player.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description will be continued. First, in the state where the pachinko machine 10 is initialized (the state where the RAM clear switch is pressed and the power is turned on), the normal game state ST1 is set. In the normal gaming state ST1, the first special symbol is substantially subject to change. In other words, it is a gaming state in which the probability (probability change rate) of a jackpot that shifts to the high-probability gaming state is low (34%). Specifically, a variation time of 8000 ms (8 seconds) to 30,000 ms (30 seconds) is selected as the variation time of the first special symbol (special figure 1) (see FIG. 17). And, in the jackpot of the first special symbol, as a jackpot type, jackpot A (15R probability variation jackpot) that shifts to the high probability game state is selected with a probability of 34%, and jackpot B (15R regular jackpot) that remains in the low probability state Is selected with a probability of 66% (see FIG. 7B and FIG. 16 ).

  On the other hand, in the normal gaming state ST1, the variation time of the second special symbol (special feature 2) that is not a substantial variation target is set to be long. Specifically, if the result of the win/no determination (lottery) is out of alignment, the variation time of Toku-zu 2 is 64800000 ms (18 hours) (see FIG. 17). Therefore, while the deviation change of the second special symbol is performed once, it is possible to execute the lottery 2160 to 8200 times in the first special symbol. The jackpot probability in the normal game state ST1 (low probability state) is 1/400, so if it is a normal game, the jackpot with the first special symbol will end before the second special symbol, which is off, changes once. Is configured to occur. In addition, since the business hours of the amusement store are mainly about 15 hours from 9 am to 11 pm, it is set to be longer than that. Therefore, in the normal game state ST1, even if the second lottery game is executed, the deviation variation of the special figure 2 does not end within the business hours. With such a configuration, in the normal gaming state ST1, a big hit of the first special symbol (special figure 1) which is a substantial variation target is generated (easy to perform).

  If the second lottery game is executed and the result of the win/fail judgment does not come off, and if there is a win, 600,000 ms (10 minutes) is selected as the variation time of Toku-zu 2 (see FIG. 17). Although this will be specifically described later, when a variation based on the jackpot is started in one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation based on the other special symbol is removed. This is because it is controlled so that When 64800000 ms (18 hours) is selected as the variation time when the hit determination result of Toku-zu 2 is a hit, the variation based on the jackpot of Toku-zu 2 does not end within business hours. Therefore, there arises a problem that all the fluctuations (first lottery game) based on Toku-zu 1 executed during business hours are controlled so as to be missed (not to be a big hit). Therefore, the fluctuation based on the jackpot in Special Figure 2 is set to a time (10 minutes) that can be completed within business hours. Thereby, the above-mentioned problem can be solved.

  However, when the variation based on the jackpot of the special figure 2 is short (for example, 500 ms (0.5 seconds)), the player can determine the result of the judgment of the special figure 2 in a short time. Actions may be performed. For example, a game ball is thrown into the second starting opening 640, and it is determined that the winning/failing determination result of Toku-zu 2 based on the entering is wrong (the variation display of Toku-zu 2 is executed for more than 0.5 seconds. In this case, there is a possibility that a fraudulent act (so-called reset goto) of resetting (initializing) the pachinko machine 10 is executed. As described above, when the RAM clear switch of the pachinko machine 10 is pressed and the power is turned on (reset), the normal gaming state ST1 is set, and the fluctuation of each special symbol is also initialized (that is, fluctuation stop). Be done). Therefore, by repeating the above-mentioned fraudulent act (reset goto), it is possible to generate a jackpot based on Toku-zu 2 that is not a target of actual fluctuation. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the variation based on the jackpot of the special map 2 is set to 10 minutes so that the player cannot determine the result of the determination (lottery) of the special figure 2 in a short time. As a result, a period of at least 10 minutes is required to execute the fraudulent act (reset goto), and thus the frequency of execution of the fraudulent act (reset goto) can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally generate the big hit of the special figure 2 by the above-mentioned illegal act (reset goto).

  In addition, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is not limited to the above-mentioned thing, and may be changed suitably. For example, in a gaming machine that cannot execute the second lottery game unless the player intentionally shoots a game ball (for example, right-handed game), performs a right-handed game in the normal game state ST1 (performs a second lottery game) As a penalty, the variation time based on the jackpot of special figure 2 may be set to a time longer than 600,000 ms (10 minutes) (for example, 1 hour). Further, in this case, it may be notified that the cheating (the right-handed game in the normal gaming state ST1) is being executed (or has been executed).

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the second starting port 640 is provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80. Therefore, in order to enter the game ball into the second starting opening 640 (perform the second lottery game), it is necessary to perform a game (right-handed game) of passing the right side of the variable display unit 80. In the normal gaming state ST1, the electric accessory 632 provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 is configured to be difficult to be set to a special state (open state) (that is, it is difficult to enter the right first starting opening 631). Therefore, when the right-handed game is played in the normal game state ST1, it is difficult to execute the first lottery game according to Toku-zu 1 which is a substantial change target, and the second lottery game according to Toku-zu 2 which is not a substantially change target is easily executed. become. That is, the right-handed game in the normal game state ST1 is set to be more disadvantageous for the player than performing the game (left-handed game) by passing the game ball through the left side of the variable display unit 80. Therefore, in the normal game state ST1, the player plays the left-handed game. When the left-handed game is performed in the normal game state ST1, the game ball does not enter the second starting port 640, but the game ball enters the first starting port 630. Thereby, the big hit of the second special symbol does not occur (difficult to do), the big jackpot of the first special symbol occurs (easy to do) in the gaming state (that is, the gaming state in which it is difficult to shift to the high-probability gaming state) You can

  In the normal game state ST1, the big hit B occurs, and after the big hit B big hit game is executed, the normal game state ST1 is set (shifted to). On the other hand, after the big hit A occurs and the big hit game is executed, the latent probability variation game state ST2 is set (shifted to) (see FIG. 7(b)). However, after the big hit game based on the big hit A is executed, if the game ball does not pass the probability change switch 65e3, the normal game state ST1 is set (shifted to).

  The latent probability variation gaming state ST2 is a gaming state in which the jackpot probability is set to be 10 times higher than the normal gaming state ST1 (in a high-probability gaming state), and the second special symbol is a gaming state in which it is substantially subject to change. That is, this is a gaming state in which the probability (probability change rate) of a jackpot that can continue the high-probability gaming state is high. Specifically, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to 500 ms (0.5 seconds). As a result, in the latent probability variation game state ST2, by performing the right hitting game, the second lottery game can be efficiently performed. Then, as a jackpot type in the jackpot of the second special symbol, the jackpot C (15R probability variation jackpot) in which the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 is continued (loop) is selected with a probability of 66%, and the jackpot is shifted to the probability variation gaming state ST3. D (15R probability variation jackpot) is selected with a probability of 34%.

  On the other hand, in the latent probability variation game state ST2, the variation time of the first special symbol which is not a substantial variation target is set to be long. Specifically, when the result of the determination (lottery) of the first special symbol is off, the variation time is selected as 1800000 ms (30 minutes) (see FIG. 18A). Therefore, while the deviation variation of the first special symbol is performed once, it is possible to execute the lottery a maximum of 3,600 times with the second special symbol. During the probability change (high probability game state), the jackpot probability is 1/40, so if it is a normal game, it will be a jackpot with the second special symbol by the end of the variation of the first special symbol once. Is configured to be able to. On the other hand, if the result of the determination whether or not the first special symbol is hit is 500 ms (0.5 seconds), the variation time is selected (see FIG. 18(a)). In the latent probability variation game state ST2, if the pachinko machine 10 is reset (initialized), the game state shifts to the normal game state ST1, so that the above-mentioned injustice (reset goto) cannot be executed. Therefore, in the case of a big hit in the first special symbol, the variation time is set as short as 500 ms (0.5 seconds). As a result, even when a big hit occurs in the first special symbol in the latent probability variation game state ST2, it is possible to make the gaming machine capable of continuing the game without lowering the efficiency (rotation rate) of the game.

  Also, as will be described later in detail, in the latent probability variation game state ST2, the winning result of the second special symbol is configured to be a small hit with a probability of 8/400. In the small hit in the latent probability variation game state ST2, about 3 game balls can be entered into the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65. Since the number of prize balls to be paid out on the basis of entering the specific winning opening 65a is 15, about 45 balls are paid out to the player for each small winning game. As a result, in the latent probability variation game state ST2, the right-handed game can be executed in a more advantageous state (state in which consumption of holding balls is suppressed) than in the normal game state ST1.

  In the latent probability variation gaming state ST2, the jackpot of the second special symbol, and when the jackpot D (15R probability variation jackpot) is selected, then the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 is set again (loop). On the other hand, when jackpot C (15R probability variation jackpot) is selected, after that, a gaming state with probability variation power support (probability variation gaming state ST3) is set.

  The probability variation gaming state ST3 is a gaming state in which the lottery probability of the special symbol is set to be 10 times higher (set to the high-probability gaming state), and the first special symbol is a gaming state in which it is substantially subject to change. Furthermore, the lottery probability of the ordinary symbol is set to be 40 times higher, and the variation time of the ordinary symbol is also easily selected with a short variation time (see FIG. 19). Further, the time (open time) in which the electric accessory 632 is maintained in the special state (open state) is also set to be longer than in the normal game state ST1 and the latent probability variation game state ST2. Therefore, when the player strikes to the right, it is possible to easily win the right first starting opening 631. In this embodiment, 95% of the game balls hit to the right are configured to win the right first starting opening 631. Therefore, 85% of the remaining 5% of the game balls is won in the second starting opening 640, and the remaining 5% is consumed as an out ball. Therefore, in the probability variation game state, about 99% of the right-handed game balls will enter the right first start opening 631 or the second start opening 640, and 99% of the right-handed game balls will be used as a prize ball. Be paid out to the person. Therefore, the player can play the game while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls the player has.

  In the probability variation gaming state ST3, it is configured to be a small hit with a probability of 5/400 as the lottery result of the second special symbol. In the small hit in the probability variation gaming state ST3, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65. As a result, in the probability variation gaming state ST3, it can be prevented (suppressed) from becoming too advantageous to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball may be allowed to enter the specific winning opening 65a (for example, one ball). Thereby, it is possible to increase the privilege for the player and improve the interest of the player.

  In the probability variation gaming state ST3, the variation time of the second special symbol that is not a substantial variation target is set to be long, and the variation time of the first special symbol that is a substantial variation target is set to be short. Specifically, as the variation time of the second special symbol, 500 ms (0.5 seconds) is selected irrespective of the result of the determination (lottery) (see FIG. 18(b)). On the other hand, as for the variation time of the first special symbol, if the result of the judgment (lottery) is out of the range, the variation time is selected as 1800000 ms (30 minutes) (see FIG. 18(b)). Therefore, while the deviation change of the second special symbol is performed once, it is possible to execute the lottery a maximum of 3600 times with the first special symbol. During the probability change (high probability game state), the jackpot probability is 1/40, so if it is a normal game, it will be a jackpot with the first special symbol by the end of the variation of the second special symbol which is out once. Is configured to be able to. On the other hand, when the result of the determination (lottery) of the first special symbol is a hit, the variation time is selected to be 5000 ms (5 seconds) (see FIG. 18(b)). As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 is reset (initialized), the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the normal gaming state ST1, and thus the above-described illegal act (reset goto) cannot be executed. Therefore, in the probability variation gaming state ST3, when a big hit with the second special symbol, the variation time is set to be as short as 5000 ms (5 seconds). As a result, even when a big hit occurs in the second special symbol in the probability variation game state ST3, it is possible to make the game machine capable of continuing the game without lowering the efficiency (rotation rate) of the game.

  Further, as described above, in the probability variation game state ST3, 95% of the game balls that have been shot win the right first start opening 631. Therefore, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting opening 640 and the second lottery game is difficult to be executed, so that it is possible to suppress the jackpot of the second special symbol which is not substantially the target of change.

  When the first special symbol big hit in the probability variation gaming state ST3, the big hit A is selected at a rate of 34%. After the big hit game based on the big hit A, the latent probability variation game state ST2 is set (shifted to). Therefore, the latent probability variation game state ST2 is selected (shifted to) with a probability of 34%, and it is possible to play a game with a high probability until the jackpot is won at least twice. On the other hand, when the big hit B is selected with a probability of 66%, the normal gaming state ST1 is set (so-called falling) after the big hit game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the latent probability variation game state ST2 is set, with the consumption of the ball being held suppressed, until the jackpot is executed twice, with a high probability advantageous to the player. Two lottery games (or first lottery games) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the player can execute the big hit game twice in a short period of time as compared with the normal game state, and it is possible to provide the player with a sense of superiority.

  Further, until the jackpot is executed twice, the player is displayed with a high probability that the lottery game is executed with a high probability, so that at least two jackpots can be given to the player. There is an effect that it can be made to feel assured and a sense of security can be provided.

  In the present embodiment, in the latent probability variation game state ST2, when the jackpot B of the first special symbol is reached, the normal game state ST1 will be set (shift to). That is, you cannot get the big hit twice. In the latent probability variation game state ST2, as described above, the right lottery game in which the first lottery game is difficult to be executed is performed, and the second lottery is held during the fluctuation of the deviation of the first special symbol which is a long time fluctuation. The game is executed a plurality of times, and the big hit of the second special symbol is generated (easy to do) (substantially not the big hit of the first special symbol). However, due to the holding ball of the first special symbol stored in the latent probability variation game state ST2, the first special symbol may be a big hit. For example, when the latent probability variation game state ST2 is a big hit in the first lottery game for the first time (probability of 1/40). Therefore, in this case, in the latent probability variation gaming state ST2, the jackpot A is selected with a probability of 34% as the jackpot of the first special symbol, and the jackpot E is selected with a probability of 66% ( 7(b) and 16(b)). If the jackpot A is selected, then the latent probability variation game state ST2, which is a high-probability game state, is entered, so that it is possible to obtain two jackpots. On the other hand, when the big hit E is selected, the big hit cannot be obtained twice, and the low probability state is entered. In this case, 100 time saving games are provided after the jackpot game is over. As a result, a state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state ST1 is provided. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player is discouraged and the motivation for the game is significantly lowered.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. In the game area, there are arranged a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the first starting opening 630, the right first starting opening 631, and the winning (starting winning) to the second starting opening 640 are used as triggers while synchronizing with the variable display in the first symbol display device 37. A third symbol display device 81 including a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display of the third symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is provided.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114, so that the first display is performed as shown in FIG. Shows the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2) which is one of the third symbols in the area Dm, left (left display area Dm1), middle (middle display area Dm2) and right Three symbol rows in the (right side display area Dm3) are displayed. The type of the third symbol displayed in the first display area (Dm) (whether the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2) is determined and displayed according to the game state.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal game state ST1 (low-probability game state) and the game state with probability variation electric power support (probability variation game state), the first special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm, and the probability variation electric power support. When there is no game state (probability of latent change game state ST2), the second special symbol is set to be displayed in the first display area Dm.

  In the present embodiment, the type of the special symbol displayed in the first display area Dm is set to be switched as described above, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the same special symbol may be always displayed. Good.

  Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol (first special symbol) is variably displayed on the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. (Dynamic display).

  The third symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm is composed of 10 kinds of special symbols with numbers "0" to "9". . Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbol is aligned (for example, "777"), the variable display is performed, and the variable display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot occurs after the end of.

  Specifically, in the first display area Dm, three symbol columns Z1, Z2, Z3 are displayed for each of the left, the center and the right. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of numbers, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from the top to the bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

  Further, in the first display area Dm, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line L1. If the third symbol is stopped in line on the activated line with a combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols), a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  Further, a second display area Dn and a second sub display area Dt below the second display area Dn are formed on the upper right of the first display area Dm. In the second display area Dn, a symbol row showing the first special symbol or the second special symbol (depending on the game state) is displayed. Further, in the second sub display area Dt, a symbol showing the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (depending on the gaming state) displayed in the second display region Dn is displayed. Although details will be described later, in the probability variation gaming state ST3, as shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, as a third symbol showing the second special symbol, the symbol of the treasure box is the second display area. It is displayed in Dn. Then, when the variation of the second special symbol is started, the blinking display for alternately repeating and displaying the state of FIG. 9A and the state of FIG. 9B in a short cycle (for example, 1 second) is executed. . Then, in the case where the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of alignment, the display is stopped and displayed in the state shown in FIG. On the other hand, if the lottery result is a win, the display is stopped and displayed in the state shown in FIG.

  A third display area Du is formed at the upper left of the first display area Dm. In this third display area Du, two kinds of symbol rows of “◯” and “×” as shown in FIG. 8B are displayed in parallel, and two rows are displayed in parallel, and the symbol on the left side is the lottery for the first special symbol. The result is shown, and the symbol on the right side is configured to show the lottery result of the second special symbol. In addition, you may make it show the lottery result of a 1st special symbol or a 2nd special symbol by another aspect, without being limited to this. For example, two types of "○" and "x" symbol rows are displayed in parallel, and when two "○" symbols are displayed in the left and right columns, the first special symbol or the second special symbol (game) It may be configured to notify that the winning (depending on the state) has been successful. Further, the third display area Du and the second display area Dn may be shared. For example, in the normal gaming state ST1, two kinds of symbol rows of "○" and "x" are displayed in parallel in the second display area, and two rows are displayed in parallel, and in the probability variation gaming state ST3, FIG. ), as the third symbol indicating the second special symbol, the symbol of the treasure box may be displayed in the second display area Dn. In this case, the display area may be switched based on the switching of the gaming state after the big hit game. As a result, the display area of the first display area Dm can be widened, so that the effect of the effect displayed in the first display area Dm can be enhanced. Moreover, when the variation based on the second special symbol is not executed (when there is no suspension of the special diagram 2), the second display area Dn and the second sub display area Dt may not be displayed. Thereby, the display area of the first display area Dm can be widened.

  Furthermore, although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, it is possible to simultaneously execute the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing at the same time, if one is stopped and displayed in a mode showing a big hit (or a small hit), the change of the other special symbol being changed is also forced. It is configured to be stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a disconnection.

  Here, in the big hit, the opening/closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning a prize device 65 is executed 15 times (called 15 rounds), whereas in the small hit, the opening/closing operation of the specific winning a prize opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is performed. It is executed twice (for example, two rounds). In addition, one round of the big hit game is executed until 30 seconds elapse or 10 game balls enter the variable winning device 65. On the other hand, one round of the small hit game in the latent probability variation game state ST2 is set until 1.8 seconds elapses or 10 game balls are won in the variable winning device 65. Therefore, in the small hitting game in the latent probability variation game state ST2, about three game balls can be entered. Further, one round of the small hit game in the probability variation game state ST3 is set until 0.5 seconds elapses or until 10 game balls are won in the variable winning device 65. Therefore, in the small hitting game in the probability variation game state ST3, it is almost impossible to enter the game ball into the variable winning device 65, and it is difficult to obtain the prize ball.

  Even in the probability variation gaming state ST3, as described above, when the stop display is performed in the lottery result indicating the small hit in the first special symbol, the changing second special symbol is forcedly removed (FIG. 9). It is stopped and displayed in (a). In this case, the deviation fluctuation of the second special symbol which is not a substantial fluctuation target which is a fluctuation for a long time (10 minutes) is stopped, and after the small hit game of the special figure 1 is finished, with a new fluctuation of the special figure 1. At the same time, the second lottery game is executed based on the new hold (next hold) ball of the second special symbol. That is, a big hit based on the second special symbol may occur. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot in the second lottery game with the second special symbol is a jackpot, the jackpot C (15R probability variation jackpot) that can shift to the high-probability game state is always (100%) selected. It is configured (see FIG. 16C), which is advantageous for the player. Therefore, when the variation is started based on a new hold (next hold) of the second special symbol, as shown in FIGS. 10A to 10B, the first special in the second display area Dn. The variation of the symbol is displayed, and the variation of the second special symbol is changed to be displayed in the first display area Dm. Similarly, a symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed in the second sub display area Dt, and a symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is changed to be displayed in the sub display region Ds. .. Note that the variable mode is not limited to this, and the display area of the second display area Dn in which the variation of the second special symbol is displayed is enlarged, and the first display in which the variation of the first special symbol is displayed. The area Dm may be reduced.

  When the variation of the second special symbol is changed so as to be displayed in the first display area Dm, the display mode in which the treasure box opens is executed, and as shown in FIG. The word "sorry" is displayed in the treasure box, and the player is informed that the lottery result has been missed. On the other hand, if the result of the hit/miss determination is a win, the word "Congratulations" is displayed in the treasure box as shown in FIG. It

  In this way, in the probability variation gaming state ST3, when the first special symbol is won as a small hit, the variation of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed, and the variation of the new second special symbol is started. 2 It is possible to increase the chance that the lottery game is executed. Further, in that case, the variation based on the second special symbol is emphasized and displayed as shown in FIGS. 10(a) to 10(b), and the player is expected to win the jackpot with the second special symbol. Can be made

  In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main controller 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, while the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, a sub display area Ds is formed below the first display area Dm. In this sub display area Ds, as shown in FIG. 8B, a reserved symbol “black circle” corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed. On the other hand, a second sub display area Dt is formed below the second display area Dn. In the second sub display area Dt, as shown in FIG. 9A, a reserved symbol "black triangle mark" corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed. In the present embodiment, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to four, respectively, so that the reserved symbol "black circle" is displayed at maximum four in the sub-table display area Ds. Then, a maximum of four reserved symbols “black triangle marks” are displayed in the second sub-display area Dt.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the reserved symbols of the first special symbol are displayed by being distinguished by "black circles" and the reserved symbols of the second special symbol are distinguished by "black triangles". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reserved symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be the same. By using the same reserved symbol for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the capacity of the symbol data can be reduced. Furthermore, the reserved symbol of the first special symbol and the reserved symbol of the second special symbol may be displayed in the sub display area Ds. For example, the reserved symbol of the first special symbol may be displayed in the left side region of the sub display region Ds, and the reserved symbol of the second special symbol may be displayed in the right side region, or the fluctuation starts from the left side of the display region. The reserved symbols may be displayed in order.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 composed of the first lottery game and the second lottery game has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and three or four or more lottery games and the corresponding start. Of course, each mouth may be provided so that the variation display of each lottery result can be simultaneously performed.

  When a game ball wins the first starting opening 630, the right first starting opening 631, and the second starting opening 640, a first starting opening switch or a second starting opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 Turns on. The first starting port 630 and the right first starting port 631 form a common guide path on the back side of the game board 13 for guiding the entered game ball to the first starting port switch. Due to the turning on of the first starting opening switch and the second starting opening switch, the main control device 110 makes a big hit lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first starting opening 630, the right first starting opening 631, and the second starting opening 640 are also one of the winning openings through which one ball is paid out as a prize ball.

  When one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol indicating a big hit, the variable display based on the other special symbol is forcibly ended. In the present embodiment, in the case where the variation in which one of the special symbols is the winning/decision result is a big hit is started, the special symbol which is started to be changed after the other is forcibly changed as the result of the lottery. Is configured to start. As a result, it is possible to suppress the problem that the jackpot game is continuously started and the jackpot game is started at the same time.

  In the present embodiment, when the special lottery game is executed with one special symbol, the other lottery game is forcibly executed on the other, but is not limited to this, and the other The lottery game may be executed according to the lottery result, and the jackpot game may be continuously started. In addition, when it becomes a big hit in one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the measurement of the variation time in the other special symbol is interrupted, and the remaining variation display is continued after the big hit. Good. In this case, during the interruption, the first special symbol or the second special symbol may be displayed in a blinking manner in a state of being stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode "for example, the letter h" in a predetermined cycle. By thus configuring, it is possible to notify the player that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (interrupted).

  Further, in each gaming state, a special symbol to be preferentially displayed in a variable display may be defined, and a variable display of the special symbol may be preferentially executed. For example, in the normal gaming state ST1, the first special symbol variation is preferentially executed. In this case, the variation of the second special symbol may be provisionally stopped (or forced stop) based on the execution start of the variation of the first special symbol. Thereby, the variation of the second special symbol can be executed if the first special symbol has not changed, but when the variation of the first special symbol is started, the variation of the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (or Will be forced to stop). Therefore, it is possible to preferentially execute the variation of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state ST1.

  Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering a certificate or an identification label are provided in the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate or the like affixed to the adhesive space K1 is provided on the front frame 14 It can be seen through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. Balls that have not won any of the winning openings are guided to a ball discharging path (not shown) through the outlet 66. On the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93 as a unit. Also, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

  The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

  Further, in the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), a box base and a box cover are connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to extend over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and when the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or when the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. To be cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing sticker, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls is paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch (122 in FIG. 3). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as the ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<About the configuration>
Details of the characteristic configuration of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In this embodiment, a left flow path PA1 through which the game ball flows down the left side of the variable display unit 80 and a right flow path PA2 through which the right side of the variable display unit 80 flows down are formed. A first starting port 630 is arranged below the center of the variable display unit 80. As described above, the game ball flowing down the right flow path PA2 is configured such that 85% of the game ball flowing down enters the second starting opening 640 by the nail groups T2 and T3. Therefore, the first starting port 630 is configured so that the game ball flowing down the left flow path PA1 is easier to enter than the game ball flowing down the right flow path PA2.

  In the right flow path PA2, the first normal symbol starting port 67a is arranged, the variable winning device 65 is arranged below it, the right first starting port 631 is arranged below it, and the second ordinary pattern is on its right side. The symbol starting port 67b is arranged. The second starting port 640 is arranged below the right first starting port 631. A plurality of nails T for changing the rolling direction of the game ball are arranged on the game board 13.

  In the game ball shot to the right flow path, the electric accessory 632 is in a normal state (a state where the left guiding member 632a and the right guiding member 632b are erected) by the nail group T4 (consisting of three nails). It is configured so that the game ball does not enter the 1 starting opening 631. When the electric accessory 632 is in a normal state, 85% of the game balls flowing down the right flow path is configured to flow down the left side of the right first start opening 631. The ratio of the game balls flowing down the left side and the right side of the right first starting opening 631 can be changed by adjusting the angle (tilt) of the nail T1. By inclining the angle of the nail T1 toward the variable winning device 65 side (the side opposite to the nail group T4), the width of the nail T1 and the nail group T4 becomes wider, and the nail T1 flows down between the nail group T1 and the nail group T4. That is, the percentage of the game ball flowing down the right side of the right first starting opening 631 increases. On the other hand, by inclining the nail T1 to the right first starting port 631 side (nail group T4 side), the width between the nail T1 and the nail group T4 becomes narrower, and the game ball flows down on the right side of the right first starting port 631. By decreasing the ratio of playing, it is possible to increase the ratio of gaming balls flowing down the left side of the right first starting opening 631.

  The game ball flowing down the left side of the right first starting port 631 is configured to be guided to the second starting port 640 by the nail group T3 (constituted by five nails). The nail group T3 is arranged such that the width of each nail is narrower than that of one game ball, and the game ball cannot pass through (width) between them. The game ball guided to the nail group T3 is prevented from flowing down below the second starting port 640 by the nail group T2 (consisting of three nails), so that all the balls enter the second starting port 640. It is configured. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is of course possible that some of the game balls flow downward from the nail group T3 side (or the nail group T2 side, or both).

  Here, in the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting opening 640, one prize ball is set to be paid out to the player. Eighty-five percent of the game balls shot to the right channel PA2 are configured to win the second starting opening 640 (when the electric accessory 632 is in the normal state), so the game balls shot by the player Of these, 85% is configured to be refunded as prize balls. Therefore, the player can suppress the consumption (reduction) of the game ball as a holding ball by launching the game ball in the right flow path PA2 rather than launching the game ball in the left flow path. In addition, in the present embodiment, the game ball flowing down the right side of the right first starting opening 631 is configured not to win the second starting opening 640 by the nail group T2. Accordingly, by adjusting the nail T1, it is possible to adjust the ratio of the game balls that enter the second starting opening 640, that is, the ratio that is paid back as a prize ball in the right-handed game.

  Next, in a special state (state in which the left guiding member 632a and the right guiding member 632b are rotated until the left guiding member 632a and the right guiding member 632b are substantially horizontal, open state), the left guiding member 632a causes the left side of the right first starting opening 631 to move. Is configured so that the flow path that flows down is closed. Accordingly, when the electric accessory 632 is in the special state (open state), it is configured to prevent the game ball flowing down the right flow path from winning the second starting opening 640. Therefore, in the time saving game state ST1h and the probability variation game state ST3, the winning to the right first starting opening 631 increases, the winning to the second starting opening 640 decreases, and the first lottery game with the first special symbol The number of executions (execution frequency) is increased. Furthermore, in the time saving game state ST1h and the probability variation game state ST3, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to be long, so that the number of executions (execution frequency) of the second lottery game can be reduced (lower).

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the latent probability variation game state ST2, the variation time of the second special symbol that is advantageous to the player is set to be short, so the game is performed so as to shoot the game ball in the right flow path. As described above, the ratio of the game balls that win the second starting opening 640 is set to 85% of the game balls that flow down the right flow path, so the player's balls decrease. However, in the present embodiment, when the latent probability variation game state ST2 is reached, the probability of winning the small hit with the second special symbol is set to be high. Furthermore, the small hit game executed during the latent probability variation game state ST2 is set until the open time of one round of the one variable winning device 65 is 1.8 seconds or until 10 balls are won, and the open time per round is other. Since it is extended compared to the small hit in the gaming state, a prize ball can be obtained by the small hit. In the present embodiment, the probability of a small hit during the latent probability change is set to be 15% that is consumed by flowing down the right flow path, and is configured to compensate for the decrease in the number of balls the player has. Has been done. Therefore, even in the latent probability variation game state ST2, the player can play the game while suppressing the decrease of the number of balls he holds.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state ST1, it is prohibited to play the game in a right-handed game (a game ball is shot in the right flow path PA2), and the second starting opening is made in the normal gaming state ST1. When the game ball wins in 640, the abnormal process is executed, and the alarm display "please play by left-handing" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the same warning is issued by voice. In addition, in the normal game state ST1, when a game ball is won in the second starting opening 640, the jackpot may be controlled to be invalid, or an abnormal signal is output to a hall computer or the like. May be.

  In this embodiment, the game method (left-handed game or right-handed game) is changed in each game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Either the left-handed game or the right-handed game may be performed in all game states, or the left-handed game or the right-handed game may be performed in a specific game state You may. For example, the starting opening of the first special symbol and the starting opening of the second special symbol are provided at the lower center of the game board 13. Then, by performing a left-handed game, a game ball flowing down the left channel PA1, and by performing a right-handed game, a game ball flowing down the right channel PA2 is a start opening of the first special symbol, and a second It may be configured so that it can enter the starting port of the special pattern. This eliminates the need to separate the left-handed game and the right-handed game in all game states or in a specific game state, so that the player's game load can be reduced.

<Electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  In the main control device 110, main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 13) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 13, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters, in order to perform jackpot lottery, setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of the display result of the second symbol display device 83, etc., the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Used in.

  To set the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a first random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a first hit type counter C2 used for the selection of the jackpot symbol. , A fluctuation type counter C3 used for selecting a fluctuation pattern, and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first random number counter C1. Moreover, the second per random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for the initial value setting of the second per random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and some counters are not included in the main process (S1600) (see FIG. 45). It is updated periodically, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, the RAM 203 has a first special symbol reserve ball storage area 203a in which respective counter values are stored for winning with respect to the first starting opening 630 and the right first starting opening 631, and winning with respect to the second starting opening 640. The second special symbol reservation ball storage 203b for storing each counter value is provided. In the present embodiment, the first starting opening 630 and the right first starting opening 631 have a maximum of four holding balls in total, and the second starting opening 640 has a maximum of four holding balls. A maximum of eight reserved balls can be stored. Therefore, when the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, or when the special symbol jackpot is not being played, the game ball is in the first starting opening 630 or the right first starting opening 631 during a period in which the special symbol can be drawn. When a prize is won, each counter value is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and when a game ball is won in the second starting opening 640, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. . After that, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is moved to the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), and the first special symbol is variably displayed (dynamic display). Various settings and control processing for execution are executed. Similarly, each counter value stored in the second special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203b is moved to the second special symbol reservation sphere execution area (not shown), various for displaying the second special symbol variably Settings and control processes are executed.

  On the other hand, during the period during which the special symbols cannot be selected by lottery such as during the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the game ball is the first starting opening 630 or In the case where the right first starting opening 631 and the second starting opening 640 are won, when the number of holdings for the winning starting opening is less than the upper limit value (four in this embodiment), acquisition of each counter value It is stored in the first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203b corresponding to the winning opening. Further, when the number of holdings for the winning start opening is equal to or more than the upper limit value (four in this embodiment), each counter value or the like is not acquired and one prize ball (one game ball in this embodiment). ) Is treated as an invalid ball that is only paid out to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls is four in total for the first starting port 630 and the right first starting port 631 and four for the second starting port 640, but is not limited thereto. Alternatively, the number may be four, respectively, or the upper limit may not be provided.

  Each counter shown in FIG. 9 will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It is configured to return to. Particularly, when the first per random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the per first random number counter C1. The first random number counter C1 is commonly obtained for each ball entering the first starting port 630 or the right first starting port 631 and the second starting port 640.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (S1600) (see FIG. 45).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the ball has the first starting opening 630, the right first starting opening 631, and the second starting opening. At the timing of winning the prize in 640 (start prize), it is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning opening of the RAM 203. The value of the random number to be a big hit is set by the first per random number table 202a (see FIG. 14) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first per random number counter C1 is equal to the first per random number table. When the value of a random number that is a big hit set by 202a (in the present embodiment, "7" at a low probability and "0 to 9" at a high probability) matches, it is determined as a big hit.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In the first random number counter C1, the number of random number values (hit values) to be a big hit is 1 when the probability is low, the value "7" is 10 when the probability is high, and the value "0-9" is It is stored in the first random number table 202a.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines a big hit type in the case of a big hit, and is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) to obtain a maximum value (99 in the present embodiment). ) Is reached and then returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated regularly (once in each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the ball is the first start opening 630, the right first start opening 631, and the second start. At the timing of winning the prize in the mouth 640 (starting prize), it is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 corresponding to the winning starting mouth. The timing at which the value of the first random number counter C1 is acquired is actually the timing at which the game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch (not shown) or the second starting opening switch (not shown). That is.

  Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, a random number that is out. If there is, the variation pattern in the variation display effect and the type of the stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as “stop type”) are those at the time of disconnection. On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding sphere execution area 203b is a random number, it is a variation pattern in the variation display effect or The type of stop will be that of a big hit. In this case, the variation pattern and the stop type at the time of the big hit are determined corresponding to the big hit type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16) stored in the ROM 202.

  As the jackpot type, as described above, jackpot A, jackpot B and jackpot E are set as jackpot types dedicated to the first special symbol, and jackpot C and jackpot D are set as jackpot types only for the second special symbol. Has been done. The jackpots A to E are each composed of 15 rounds of jackpot games. Furthermore, in the big hit A, big hit C, and big hit D, the switching member 65h of the variable winning device 65 is rotated for 5 seconds at the start of the 14th round, and the gaming ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3. By detecting the game ball in the probability variation switch 65e3, the gaming state after the big hit game is set to the probability variation gaming state ST3 or the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 which is the high probability gaming state.

  The method for making the game ball passable to the probability variation switch 65e3 is not limited to the method described above. For example, the entered game ball can pass the probability change switch 65e3 (provided with the probability change switch 65e3) V variable winning a prize device 651, the game ball entered can not pass the probability change switch 65e3 (probability change switch 65e3 The non-V variable winning device 652 is provided. Then, in the jackpot that allows the gaming state after the jackpot game to shift to the high-probability gaming state, the V variable winning device 651 is controlled to be opened and closed, and the gaming state after the jackpot game cannot shift to the high-probability gaming state. In the jackpot, the V variable winning device 651 is not opened and closed, and the non-V variable winning device 652 is opened and closed. Further, the V variable winning device 651 may be provided with a switching member 65h as in the present embodiment. Then, the switching member 65h is moved at a specific timing (for example, at the start of the 14th round) so that the game ball can pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. And, in the big hit which can shift the game state after the big hit game to the high probability game state, the V variable winning a prize device 651 is controlled to be opened and closed in the 14th round, and the game state after the big hit game is set to the high probability game state. In the case of a jackpot that cannot be moved to, the non-V variable winning device 652 is controlled to be opened and closed in the 14th round. As a result, it is not necessary to change the control of the probability variation switch 65e3 for each jackpot type, so that the design cost and the program capacity can be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the case of the big hit B and the big hit E, the switching member 65h is rotated only for 0.5 seconds at the start of the 14th round. It takes 0.5 seconds or more before the game ball that has won the variable winning device 65 reaches the probability variation switch 65e3. Therefore, in the case of the jackpot B and the jackpot E, the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3. It is configured so that it is impossible to do, and the game state after the big hit is not set to the high-probability game state. In addition, in the case of the big hit B and the big hit E which are not shifted to the high probability game state after the big hit game, the switching member 65h may not be rotated. Thereby, in the big hit B and the big hit E, it is possible to reliably prevent the game ball from passing to the probability variation switch 65e3, and it is not necessary to rotate the switching member 65h, so that the power consumption can be reduced.

  Therefore, even if the jackpot game is started, it is determined for the player whether or not the probability variation is given during the subsequent jackpot game, so that the expectation for the probability variation can be continued for a long time. Furthermore, since the probability that the probability variation is given is different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the player can play the game by changing the degree of expectation that the probability variation is imparted due to the difference in the special symbol.

  As shown in FIGS. 16A to 16C, the jackpot type selection table 202d is composed of three types of tables, a jackpot type selection table A to C. FIG. 16A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table A. This jackpot type selection table A is for determining the jackpot type based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 when a jackpot is hit in the normal game state ST1 (including the time saving game state ST1h). It is a selection table. As shown in FIG. 16A, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), jackpot A (15R probability variation jackpot) and jackpot B (15R normal jackpot) are set. For the jackpot A, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is set as a determination value of "0 to 33", and for the jackpot B, the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "34 to 99" is set as the determination value. Is set as. As the big hit type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), one kind of big hit C is set, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "0 to 99" is set as the determination value. That is, in the normal game state ST1, the big hit A is selected with a 34% probability and the big hit B is selected with a 66% probability when a big hit occurs in Toku-zu 1. On the other hand, the jackpot C is selected with a probability of 100% when the jackpot in the special figure 2 is hit.

  Note that, as shown in FIG. 16A, the big hit A has a high probability of hitting a normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened, and the operating time of the electric accessory 632 is also set to be long (electricity). It is a jackpot in which a V winning open pattern is set in which the probability variation switch 65e3 of the variable winning device 65 is provided with an open pattern in which a game ball can be won. On the other hand, the jackpot B is a jackpot to which the electric power support state is not given and the V winning opening pattern is not set. The jackpot C is set as the jackpot to which the electric power support state is given and the V winning opening pattern is set.

  In this way, in the normal game state ST1, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol that should not normally be played (varied), only the jackpot C is set, and as a result, a jackpot occurs in the second special symbol due to fraud, etc. Also, it is configured so as not to give the latent probability variation game state ST2, and to prevent the problem that at least two big jackpots are illegally given in the high probability game state.

  Next, FIG. 16B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table B. The jackpot type selection table B is a table for determining the jackpot type when the jackpot is established in the latent probability variation game state ST2. In this jackpot type selection table B, jackpot A and jackpot E are set as jackpot types of special figure 1, and jackpot C and jackpot D are set as jackpot types of toku figure 2, respectively.

  The jackpot E is a 15-round short-time jackpot, and the electric support state is given until the first special symbol or the second special symbol starts to change 100 times after the jackpot game is over. The jackpot probability in this case is set to a low probability state. Incidentally, when the latent probability variation gaming state ST2, the variation time of the special figure 1 is set to be long, so it is a big hit that the variation of the first special symbol that transits to the latent probability variation gaming state ST2. Is generally considered. In that case, the jackpot E, which is not selected in the normal game state ST1, is set to be selected instead of the jackpot B in order to rescue the player. Therefore, the player's discouragement can be suppressed, and the problem that the player's motivation for the game is significantly reduced can be suppressed.

  In the case of a big hit in Toku-zu 2, a big hit C and a big hit D are set respectively. The jackpot D is a jackpot in which the latent probability variation of 15 rounds is set. Here, in the present embodiment, when the latent probability variation game state ST2 is set, the probability that the special symbol lottery probability is set to the high-probability game state is set high until at least two jackpot games are executed. ing. Therefore, for the player, the jackpot D is set as a jackpot type that is more advantageous than the jackpot C for which the probability variation game state ST3 is set.

  In the jackpot type selection table B, the jackpot C has a determination value of "0 to 65", and the jackpot D has a determination value of "66 to 99". Therefore, the jackpot C is selected with a probability of 66% when the second special symbol is a hit, and the jackpot D is set with a probability of 34%. Therefore, the player performs the game in the expectation that the jackpot D is selected when the jackpot is hit with the second special symbol during the latent probability variation game state ST2.

  FIG. 16C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table C. The jackpot type selection table C is a selection table used for determining the jackpot type when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state ST3. In the jackpot type selection table C, jackpot A and jackpot B are set as jackpot types of the first special symbol, and only jackpot D is selected as the jackpot type of the second special symbol. Note that the jackpot A is selected at a rate of 34% (determination value “0 to 33”), and the jackpot B is selected at a rate of 66% (determination value “34 to 99”). ).

  In this way, when the probability variation gaming state ST3 is set, the jackpot D is always selected when the jackpot is the second special symbol, so that the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 is set, and the player has at least 2 The high-probability game state is configured to be easily set continuously until the jackpot is executed. Here, in the present embodiment, in the probability variation game state ST3, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to be long, and further, the electric accessory 632 is easily set to the special state (open state) (electric support). ), the number of balls entering the second starting port 640 is suppressed. As will be described later, when the probability variation game state ST3 is reached, 3000 ms is selected at a rate of 191/199 for the regular symbol and 30,000 ms is selected at a rate of 8/199 by lottery (see FIG. 19). Therefore, the variation time of 30000 ms, which has a long variation time, is selected with a low probability.

  Until the variation time of 30,000 ms elapses, the electric accessory 632 is not operated in the special state (open state), and during that time, the game ball is easy to win in the second starting opening 640 (right-handed). Since 85% of the game balls enter), it is possible to increase the reserved balls of the second special symbol. On the other hand, during the probability variation game state ST3, in the case of deviation as shown in FIG. 18(b), the variation time of 1800000 ms is set as the variation time of the second special symbol, so normally the second special symbol. It is configured so that a new lottery is not efficiently executed even in the state where the reserved ball of is stored. However, during the probability variation gaming state ST3, the small hit probability of the first special symbol is set to 1/80 (see FIG. 15(b)), so each time the small hit is won in the first special symbol, The variation being executed with the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed, and the variation of the reserved ball stored next is started. In other words, by winning a small hit in the first special symbol, the chances of lottery in the second special symbol are increased, and the lottery advantageous to the player is set to be easily executed. Therefore, the player can play the game with the expectation that the first special symbol wins the small hit, and the expectation of the player can be increased in addition to the big hit. The small lottery probability may be set to an appropriate value as appropriate.

  Returning to FIG. 9, description of various counters will be continued. The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, reaches a maximum value (that is, 198), and then returns to 0.

  The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated, for example, periodically (once in each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the ball moves to the first start port 630, the right first start port 631 or the second start port 640. At the timing of winning (starting winning), it is stored in the first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired at the timing of the start winning, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the value may be acquired at the timing of the variation start. Naturally, the first random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2 may be configured to be selected at the start of fluctuation.

  As shown in FIG. 17 and FIGS. 18A and 18B, the variation pattern selection table 202e is a variation pattern selection table A (see FIG. 17) for selecting a variation pattern in a low probability game state, a latent probability variation game. A variation pattern selection table B for selecting a variation pattern in the state ST2 (see FIG. 18A), a variation pattern selection table C for selecting a variation pattern in the probability variation game state ST3 or the time saving game state ST1h (see FIG. 18( b)) are set respectively.

  In each variation pattern selection table, the variation pattern type is set corresponding to the number of holding balls when the variation starts, the value of the variation type selection counter CS1, and the result of the judgment. The type of the fluctuation pattern determined by the main controller 110 is a rough content of the fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation time and the rough fluctuation type (non-reach, reach various) are mainly determined. Then, the voice lamp control device 114 is configured to determine the details of the more detailed variation pattern. With this configuration, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 17, in the normal game state ST1, the winning/disapproval determination result is deviated as the variation time of the second special symbol, and an extremely long variation time (dynamic display time) is determined regardless of the hit. Has been done. Specifically, 64800000 ms is selected and 18 hours are set. Business hours of the amusement store are generally long from 9:00 am to 11:00 pm, so the business hours are 15 hours, which is longer than that. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a big hit by playing a game with the second special symbol in the normal game state ST1. In addition, in the present embodiment, a long fluctuation time is used even in the case of a big hit. In this case, by outputting the fact that the game is being played with the second special symbol to the hall computer or the like, the game store side can monitor illegal games and provide guidance on the correct game method.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the second special symbol also has a long variation time in the case of a hit, but may have a short variation time such as 500 ms in the case of a hit. With such a configuration, the extremely long hit variation is executed in the second special symbol, so that it is possible to suppress the problem that the hit variation is not executed in the first special symbol during that time.

  As shown in FIG. 18A, in the latent probability variation game state ST2, the variation time of the first special symbol in the case of being off is configured to be 180,000 ms, which is set to be extremely long. On the other hand, the variation time of the first special symbol, which is a hit, is configured to be 500 ms and is set to be short. By configuring in this manner, even when the latency variation game state ST2 is shifted to and the first special symbol of the first variation is a big hit E, it is difficult to understand that the latency variation game state ST2 is entered. it can. Further, the jackpot game can be continuously executed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 18(b), in the probability variation game state ST3, the variation time of the deviation of the second special symbol is constituted by 180,000 ms, which is set extremely long. On the other hand, the variation time per hit is set to 5000 ms, which is set according to the period in which the treasure box effect described later is executed.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the variable display that is a big hit with the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured not to change at the same time, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and it is possible to display a variable display that is a big hit at the same time. When configured, the variable display time that is a jackpot of the second special symbol is shorter than the first special symbol (for example, 5 seconds) or extremely short variation time (for example, 0.5 seconds), the first special The variation time to be a big hit of the symbol may be configured such that a variation time longer than the second special symbol (for example, 60 seconds) or an extremely long variation time (for example, 5 minutes) is selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to postpone the jackpot with the second special symbol which may determine the jackpot B, which is a type of jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player, during which the second special It is possible to make a big hit with a symbol and give a big hit C to the player. In this case, when the jackpot is started with one special symbol, a configuration is conceivable in which the lottery game being changed with the other special symbol is invalidated. With this configuration, the jackpot C, which is an unfavorable jackpot type, is given to the player and is immediately determined after the probability variation gaming state ST3 is set, and the probability variation gaming state ST3 ends in a short period of time. It is possible to suppress defects.

  Further, in the configuration described above, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed in a variable display at the same time that the win/loss determination result is a big hit. In the configuration, the win/loss determination result in the first special symbol is a variation. By setting the display time long (for example, 100 seconds), and setting the variation time per hit determination result in the second special symbol to be short (for example, 1 second), the first special symbol during the time saving game The number of times the lottery result is displayed can be reduced (the number of times the first special symbol is variably displayed) can be reduced, and the number of lottery with the second special symbol advantageous to the player can be increased. In addition, when the number of times saved is set to display the first special symbol or the second special symbol 100 times in a variable manner, the variation time of the first special symbol is 100 times in succession due to deviation of the second special symbol. It is possible to effectively reduce the number of times the second special symbol is variably displayed during the time saving game by configuring the time longer than the time when variably displayed.

  Returning to FIG. 13, description of various counters will be continued. The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). The ball is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball passes through the first normal symbol starting port 67a or the second normal symbol starting port 67b. Then, the value of the random number that is a jackpot of the normal symbol is set by the second per random number table 202c (FIG. 15(c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the second per random number counter C4. However, when it matches with the value of the random number which is the hit set by the second hit random number table 202c (FIG. 15(c)), it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol.

  When the second per random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second per random number counter C4. The value of the second random number counter C4 is updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) in the present embodiment, and the sphere is the first normal symbol starting port 67a (through gate) or the second normal symbol starting port 67b ( It is acquired when passing through the through gate) is detected. The number of random number values to be won is 5 in the normal gaming state ST1, and the range is “5 to 9”. Also, in the high-probability game state, it is 200, and the range is "5-204". That is, in the normal gaming state ST1, it is determined that the winning is achieved when the value of the acquired second per-random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 9", and in the high probability gaming state, the acquired per-second random number counter. When the value of C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the winning is achieved, and the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol) on the second symbol display device 83, and the electric accessory The left guide member 632a and the right guide member 632b of 632 are opened once for a predetermined time (1.2 s in the present embodiment) in the normal game state ST1, and for a predetermined time (this execution in the high probability game state). In the form, the opening operation of 1 s) is performed twice. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value=0 to 239), and is set once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). While being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (S1600) (see FIG. 41).

  When the game ball passes through the first normal symbol starting port 67a or the second normal symbol starting port 67b, the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being displayed in a variable state, and each counter is based on the reserved ball in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. If the value is not stored, a random number value is obtained from the second random number counter C4 in the normal symbol holding sphere execution area (not shown), and is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c. Further, when the normal symbol (second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner or the random number value corresponding to the reserved sphere stored in the ordinary symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c is less than the upper limit value (four in this embodiment) Is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c of the number of holdings (normal symbol holding 1 to 4) corresponding to the random number value acquired from the second random number counter C4. In addition, when a random number value is stored in each area, the normal symbol flag (not shown) is set to ON, and the variable display of the normal symbol is stopped based on the random number value, or due to the completion of the hold. When the data is shifted to the previous holding area, it is set to OFF. Here, when the data is shifted, the normal symbol flag of the reserved area newly shifted and stored is set to ON. Whether or not data is stored in the holding area, or whether or not the normal symbol is being variably displayed is determined depending on which holding area or the normal symbol flag of the execution area is turned on.

  In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed according to the value of this counter or the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  In addition, in this embodiment, about the lottery of the first lottery game and the second lottery game, it is configured to select various common counter values, but the first lottery game (first special symbol) and the second lottery With the game (the second special symbol), by setting various dedicated counters respectively, by updating the update timing and the initial value of the various counters of the first lottery game and the second lottery game, different values are updated. Of course, it may be configured with the counter value.

  By configuring in this way, in the lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, even if the counter value is acquired at the same trigger, it is possible to acquire the counter value of a different value, It is possible to suppress a variation pattern selected by the 1 special symbol and the second special symbol, and a problem that the determination result of the winning or hitting is synchronized.

  Further, even if the variation pattern is selected from the common variation pattern table for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation pattern to be selected is prevented from being synchronized, and various effects are produced. It can be performed. Further, it is possible to suppress the storage data of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and to have an inexpensive configuration (use a RAM or the like having a small storage area).

  Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 13, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, and I/O. And a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. It should be noted that the RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power shutdown (including the occurrence of a power failure. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on by eliminating power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before power-off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by the main process (S1600) (see FIG. 45), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 44). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 43) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

  RAM203, 1st special design reservation sphere storage area 203a, 2nd special design reservation sphere storage area 203b, normal design reservation sphere storage area 203c, 1st special design reservation sphere number counter 203d, 2nd special design reservation sphere number counter 203e , Normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, probability variation setting flag 203h, probability variation passage counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, notification counter 203m, remaining ball timer flag 203n, remaining ball timer 203o, probability variation valid flag 203p, discharge number counter 203s, time saving medium counter 203t, big hit flag 203u, special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w, prefetch reserved sphere storage area 203x, small hit flag 203y, time saving flag 203a2, other memory It has at least the area 203z.

  The first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired based on winning the first starting opening 630 up to the upper limit number (four in the present embodiment). is there. In addition, the second special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203b stores various counter values obtained based on the fact that the game sphere has won the second starting opening 640 up to the upper limit number (four in the present embodiment). This is a storage area for

  The first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area for storing various counter values for starting the variable display of the first special symbol, and when the first special symbol stops variable display, When various counter values are stored in the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, the various counter values are shifted and stored. The second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the second special symbol are stored, and for details, the first special symbol holding ball execution area ( (Not shown).

  The first special symbol reserve ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol reserve ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol reserve ball execution area (not shown), the second special symbol reserve ball execution area (not shown), start The respective values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 13) upon the detection of the winning are respectively stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won the first starting opening 630 or the right first starting opening 631 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22 ), the MPU 201 detects each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 from the counter buffer. The value is acquired and stored in the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has won the second starting opening 640, the values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 are acquired from the counter buffer, and the corresponding values are obtained, as in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. It is similarly stored in each area (not shown).

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuating effect, it performs the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81, and the like, in order to execute the above-described first. Among the data (each value of the counters C1 to C2, CS1) corresponding to each starting winning stored in the special symbol holding sphere storing area 203a and the second special symbol holding sphere storing area 203b, one starting winning is associated. Data is shifted to this special symbol holding ball execution area 203c. The shift in this embodiment means moving the data stored in one area to another area.

  In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, the second per random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 13) with the detection of the starting winning of the first normal symbol starting opening 67a or the second normal symbol starting opening 67b. This is a storage area to be stored. When the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 detects that the ball has passed through the first normal symbol starting port 67a or the second normal symbol starting port 67b (start winning) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), The value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired from the counter buffer, and is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c. The normal symbol flag (not shown) is set to ON and stored (stored). The normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c has four holding areas so that the data (value of the counter C4, ordinary symbol flag (not shown)) corresponding to one starting winning can be stored (held) up to four times. have. In the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c, the data of the holding spheres in the order of passing through the first ordinary symbol starting opening 67a or the second ordinary symbol starting opening 67b (starting winning), in the holding area in which the data is empty, is consumed. The holding areas are stored in order from the earliest reserved area.

  Further, the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), based on the start winning, when it is detected that it is the execution start timing of the variable display effect of the normal symbol, each counter value is stored, the normal symbol hit lottery Alternatively, it is a memory for storing data (value of the counter C4) to be referred to in processing such as setting of display (variation pattern) on the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, when the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variable display effect of the normal symbol, the winning lottery, the setting of the display of the second symbol display device 83 or the second symbol display device 88, etc. are executed. In the data (value of the second random number counter C4) corresponding to each starting winning stored in the above-mentioned ordinary symbol holding sphere storage area 203c, the data corresponding to one starting winning is held in this ordinary symbol holding Shift to a ball execution area (not shown). The shift in this embodiment means moving the data stored in one area to another area.

  The first special symbol holding sphere number counter 203d, the second special symbol holding sphere number counter 203e, the first start detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) that is regularly executed every 2 milliseconds. Based on the winning in the mouth 630 or the second starting opening 640, the number of balls to hold (the number of waiting times) of the variable display effect (the variable display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed on the first symbol display device 37. Each is a counter that counts up to four times. The first special symbol holding sphere number counter 203d and the second special symbol holding sphere number counter 203e are set to zero as initial values by the initial setting process (FIG. 44, S1514) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, each time the start winning is detected and the number of balls to be held for variable display is increased, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the first special symbol holding sphere number counter 203a, the second special symbol holding sphere number counter 203b is decremented by 1 each time the variable display effect is executed.

  Further, the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d (that is, the number of holding balls) is based on the game ball winning the first starting opening 630 or the right first starting opening 631, the first special symbol holding When the counter value is stored in the ball storage area 203a, the voice lamp controller 113 is notified by the first special symbol holding ball number command output from the main controller 110. The first special symbol holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1. Is.

  Further, the value of the second special symbol reservation ball number counter 203e (that is, the number of reserve balls) is based on the game ball winning the second starting opening 640, the counter value in the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b When is stored, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol holding ball number command output from the main control device 110. The second special symbol reservation ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the second special symbol reservation ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1. Is.

  MPU201, the respective values of the counters C1 to C2, CS1 acquired from the counter buffer in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), respectively. If stored, the data stored in the first special symbol reservation ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol reservation ball execution area (not shown), the first special symbol fluctuation start process (Figure 23, S203) or the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 23, S206), and perform jackpot lottery based on the reference data, and determine the variation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result. In the first symbol display device 37, by the control of the main control device 110, a variable display effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

  The fluctuation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or special figure 2 change pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, in the third symbol display device 81, the variable display effect is performed based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is the first normal symbol starting port 67a or the second normal symbol starting port 67b that is detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) that is regularly executed every 2 milliseconds. Based on that the game ball has passed (hereinafter referred to as "start prize"), the variable display effect (the second symbol display device 83 of the third symbol display device 81, the second symbol) performed on the first symbol display device 37. It is a counter that counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display effect performed on the display device 88 up to a maximum of 4, respectively. This normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is a counter that stores the total number of holding balls stored based on the fact that the game ball has passed the first normal symbol starting port 67a or the second normal symbol starting port 67b. Zero is set as an initial value by the initial setting process (S1514 in FIG. 44) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, every time the start winning is detected and the number of balls held in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value 4. On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display effect is executed (see FIG. 41, S1205).

  A normal symbol flag (not shown) is a flag indicating that the data of the second random number counter C4 is stored and is held, and is also a flag indicating that the normal symbol is being variably displayed. is there. It is set to ON when the value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere execution area (not shown) or the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c. Further, when the value of the second hit counter C4 is shifted to the next holding area (holding area corresponding to the number of holdings in which holding is exhausted and the number of holdings is reduced by one), the holding area before shifting The normal symbol flag (not shown) is set to OFF, while the normal symbol flag (not shown) in the shifted and stored holding area is set to ON. Further, when the variable display of the normal symbol is subjected to the fluctuation stop process, the normal symbol flag (not shown) is set to OFF.

  The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the current game state is a high-probability game state (latent probability variation game state ST2 or probability variation game state ST3). If the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON, it indicates that the game state is a high-probability game state (latent probability variation game state ST2 or probability variation game state ST3). ) Is shown. In the present embodiment, the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON when the probability variation setting flag 203h described later is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game (see S11682 of FIG. 50). On the other hand, when the jackpot game is started, it is set to off. It should be noted that, in the initialized state, it is set to off, and when a normal power cutoff occurs, the state immediately before the power cutoff is backed up.

  The probability variation setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the high-probability game state (latent probability variation game state ST2 or probability variation game state ST3) after the jackpot game. In this pachinko machine 10, whether the gaming state is set to the high probability gaming state (hidden probability variation gaming state ST2 or probability variation gaming state ST3) is determined by the probability variation switch 65e3 (see FIG. 6(a)) during the jackpot game. It is determined by whether or not the game ball has passed. Here, when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1682 in FIG. 50). On the other hand, the probability variation flag 203g is set to OFF based on the ON setting. The probability variation setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Further, it is set to OFF in the initialized state.

  If the probability variation setting flag is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before the power was turned off. May be configured to be officially turned on and returned. In this case, whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed through before the power is cut off can be determined by whether or not a probability variation passage counter 203i, which will be described later, has a value greater than zero. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce damage to the amusement store side by discriminating an illegality in which only the probability variation setting flag 203h is rewritten to be on and the power is turned on again while the power is off. it can.

  The probability variation passage counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the probability variation switch 65e3 in one round during the jackpot game (13 rounds in the jackpot A in this embodiment). It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether all the game balls that have won the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 have been discharged, based on the total of the probability variation passage counter 203i and the discharge number counter 203s described later. The probability variation passage counter 203i is incremented by 1 and updated when the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed (S1681 in FIG. 50). In addition, after the processing for determining whether the number of game balls that have won the variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged balls match, the initial value is reset to "0" (S1711 in FIG. 51). The probability variation passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is cut off. Further, it is set to 0 in the initialized state.

  The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the detection opening 65a1 (see FIG. 4) provided in the variable winning a prize device 65, it is incremented by 1 and updated (S1673 in FIG. 50). . On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes (the value of the prize count counter 203j) and the number of discharged prizes (the total value of the discharge count counter 203s and the probability variation passage counter 203i) are equal to each other. After it is discriminated whether it is done, it is reset to the initial value "0". The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. Further, it is set to 0 in the initialized state.

  The operation counter 203k is a counter for measuring (counting) the time when the flow path solenoid (probability change solenoid) 65k is set to ON (excitation). In the present pachinko machine 10, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to ON for 5 seconds on the basis of the start of 14 rounds in the jackpot A, and the flow path solenoids 65k are set to 0.5 on the basis of the start of 14 rounds in the jackpot B and the jackpot E. Set to on for seconds. In the operation counter 203k, the jackpot A is set with a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds as start data for 14 rounds, and the jackpot B is set with a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds (S1642 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, in the process of S1679 of the winning process (FIG. 50, S1632) executed by the MPU 2011 of the main controller 110, the value is subtracted by 1 and updated. Further, based on the fact that the value of the operation counter 203k is determined to be 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off. The operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and in the initialized state, the initial value 0 is set. In this way, by setting the operation counter 203k and controlling the flow path solenoid 65k, the winning of the probability variation switch 65e3 can be controlled according to the jackpot type.

  The notification counter 203m is a counter for determining the timing of outputting a notification effect (in the present embodiment, a sound "Look at the liquid crystal") for attracting the player's attention. In the present embodiment, the notification counter 203m corresponding to one second is set at the end timing of the twelfth round (10 balls won in the variable winning device 65 or 30 seconds have passed). The notification counter 203m is updated by being decremented by 1 by the processing of S1664 of the notification processing (FIG. 49, S1631) of the main control device 110. Based on the notification counter 203m becoming 0, the notification command output to the voice lamp control device 113 is set. Upon receipt of this command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the above-described process for outputting the voice.

  With this configuration, the voice "Look at the liquid crystal" is output before the start of the 14th round when the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, so that the player can display the third symbol display device corresponding to the liquid crystal. Look at 81. Here, in the 13th round of the jackpot game, the character "girl" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the word "attention", which is a notice prompting the player to see the third symbol display device 81, is displayed. It is displayed. In the 14th round, the passage solenoid 65k operates, so if the player pays close attention to the operation, the jackpot type being executed is determined. In order to keep the player expected to be given the probability variation game state ST3 until the end of the jackpot game, the movement of the switching member 65h (see FIG. 6A) is made invisible to the player. Notification performance is being executed. However, when the 13th round is finished, the player may see the switching member 65h during the interval display, so during the interval period, a notification is given to watch the third symbol display device 81 by voice. The notification effect is executed. As a result, after the interval effect is executed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the displayed contents, and it is possible to divert the player's attention from the operation of the switching member 65h.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, by notifying the third symbol display device 81 so as to be shown, it is configured to divert the player's attention from the switching member 65h, but the present invention is not limited to this. The device 65 may be informed to hold the player's hand so that the movement of the switching member 65h is hidden by the player's hand. Further, the present invention is not limited to the third symbol display device 81, and may be configured so as to divert the player's attention by notifying the player of the decorative lamp 34 or the like so as to look at it. Furthermore, the player may be distracted by displaying a three-dimensional code or the like during 13 rounds and giving a notification prompting the user to read it with a mobile phone. In this embodiment, the distraction is set to the longest time (5 seconds from the start of 14 rounds) until the operation of the switching member 65h ends. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem in which it is determined whether the jackpot A, the jackpot C, the jackpot D, the jackpot B, or the jackpot E is determined by the notification time.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203n is a flag indicating that the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, it means that the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning a prize device 65 is set from the open state to the closed state in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203o described later is incremented by 1 and updated (see S1632 in FIG. 50). The remaining ball timer 203o is a counter for determining the time after the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed, and for determining whether or not the time required for discharging the game ball in the variable winning a prize device 65 has elapsed. Is the counter.

  The remaining ball timer 203o is a time required for discharging the game ball won in the variable winning device 65 when the preset round 1 is finished and the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed. Is a counter for determining whether or not has elapsed. In the present embodiment, the time required until the gaming balls won in the variable winning device 65 are discharged is 2 seconds, and in the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds in advance is the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203o. Is set as. Based on the upper limit value (3 seconds in this embodiment) of the remaining ball timer 203o, it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the variable winning device 65 and the number of dischargings thereof match ( 51 S1707). If they do not match, an error command is set and the fact is notified. Therefore, the fact that the game ball is clogged in the variable winning device 65 can be notified at an early stage. Therefore, illegally leave the game ball in the variable winning device 65, give a shock or the like at the start timing of the 14th round, and make the game ball reach the switching member 65h earlier than it actually is, and hit the jackpot B and jackpot E. Even in this case, it is possible to suppress the fraud of passing the game ball through the probability variation switch 65e3.

  If the winning number and the discharging number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set even if the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3. The configuration may not be set to ON. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the probability variation gaming state ST3 from being illegally given.

  The probability variation valid flag 203p is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the gaming ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 after the passage solenoid 65k is set to off. When the probability variation valid flag 203p is set to ON, the game ball that has flown into the special discharge port 65e2 (see FIG. 6A) is based on that the flow path solenoid 65k is ON, and the probability variation switch 65e3. It is less than the time required to pass through. That is, it indicates that it is a normal period that the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3.

  The probability variation valid timer 203r is a counter for counting the time after the above-mentioned probability variation validity flag 203p is set to ON. After the passage solenoid 65k is turned off by the probability variation effective timer 203r, it is possible to determine the period required to normally pass the probability variation switch 65e3. In this embodiment, the time required for the game ball that has entered the special discharge port 65e2 to pass the probability change switch 65e3 is 1 second. The upper limit value of the probability variation valid timer 203r is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even if the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed thereafter, it is determined to be incorrect and not to pass.

  As a result, in a state where the switching member 65h is not guided to the special discharge port 65e2 illegally, the player can enter the special discharge port 65e2 to pass the game ball to the probability variation switch 65h, or play the piano wire from below the probability variation switch 65h. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud that pushes up a sphere and allows it to pass, or causes a magnetic sensor to be erroneously detected as passing by a radio wave.

  The discharge number counter 203s is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (see FIG. 6A) in one round. The discharge number counter 203s is reset to 0, which is an initial value, after the number of game balls that have won the variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged balls are determined (S1711 in FIG. 51).

  The time saving counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time saving game state ST1h. The time saving medium counter 203t is set to 100 when the probability variation setting flag is off at the end of the jackpot game. That is, in the present embodiment, if the probability variation game state ST3 is not set after the big hit game, the time shift game state ST1h is repeated 100 times.

  The jackpot flag 203u indicates that the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired based on winning in the first starting opening 630, the right first starting opening 631 or the second starting opening 640 is a hit at the start of fluctuation. It is a flag that is set to ON when it is determined. Also, when the jackpot game is over, it is set to off. In addition, it is configured with a flag that can identify which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is a big hit corresponding to the symbol. Specifically, it is composed of 2 bits, the big hit flag 203u is turned on for the first special symbol by "10", and the big hit flag 203u is set as on for the second special symbol by "01", When "00", the big hit flag 203u is set as OFF.

  Here, the jackpot flag 203u is commonly used by the first special symbol and the second special symbol, so at the start of fluctuation, one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to ON first. When the other lottery result is a big hit, the big hit flag 203u is not overwritten, and the other lottery result is processed in the same manner as the miss. Thereby, with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is possible to perform processing so that the variable display that is a big hit is not executed at the same time.

  That is, when the variation display that is a big hit is started with one of the special symbols, the variation display that is a big hit is not started with the other special symbol, and only the deviation mode is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are common to the big hit flag 203u, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol each have an independent big hit flag. Then, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured such that the variable display which is a big hit is executed at the same time. With such a configuration, during the probability variation gaming state ST3, the first special symbol, even if the fluctuation display of the big hit B, big hit E is started, the fluctuation time is set to be long, and the second special By configuring the symbols to be easily drawn in a short variation time, it is possible to configure the second special symbol to easily win the jackpots before the jackpot B is started. Therefore, by executing an effect that informs the player of the time until the jackpot B is started (that is, the period until the probability variation gaming state ST3 is ended), the player is rushed to win the jackpot with the second special symbol. It is possible to execute an effect in which a game is performed in an attempt to win the prize. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a fresh effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v is a flag indicating that the jackpot game of the second special symbol is started to be executed while the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. In S1004 of the second special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 36, S207) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later, it is set to ON. Further, in the processing of S611 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 29, S204), it is set to OFF.

  Special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is the flag which shows that the big hit of the 1st special design is executed while the 2nd special design is variably displayed. In S605 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 29, S204) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later, it is set to ON. Further, in the process of S1011 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 36, S207), it is set to OFF.

  The look-ahead pending storage area 203x stores the judgment information such as the hit/miss judgment result for the holding balls stored in the first special symbol holding sphere storing area 203a and the second special symbol holding sphere storing area 203b, the jackpot type, and the variation type. It is a storage area that is stored.

  The small hit flag 203y is a flag indicating that the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a small hit. This small hit flag is configured to be able to identify which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the small hit. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not small hits at the same time (if one is a small hit, the other is out). Therefore, this small hit flag 203y does not become a value indicating that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are small hits.

  The time saving flag 203a2 is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state of a special symbol (electric power support state, high probability game state of normal symbol). If the value of the time saving flag 203a2 is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol time saving state (electric support state), and if the value of the time saving flag 203a2 is off, the pachinko machine 10 is a special symbol normally. Indicates that it is in a state (ordinary symbol low probability state). The time saving flag 203a2 has an initial value set to OFF, and is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game of the jackpot type with electric support in the ending process (see FIG. 48) executed at the end of the jackpot game. (See S1655 in FIG. 48). Then, in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 41), the game state is referred to for determining whether it is a time saving (electric support) state (see S1208 and S1214 in FIG. 41), and the next jackpot game is started. 29 (S607 in FIG. 29, S1007 in FIG. 36), or when the number of lottery for special symbols in the time saving (electricity support) state reaches a predetermined number (see S628 in FIG. 30), it is set to OFF.

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

  Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the large opening solenoid for opening and closing the specific winning opening 65a and the electric accessory. A solenoid 209, such as a solenoid for driving, is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to them via the input/output port 205.

  The I/O port 205 is connected with various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasing switch (122 in FIG. 3) circuit 253, which will be described later, provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is Various processes are executed based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O and the like are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input/output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

  The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch handle 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated) on condition that the operation handle is not operated. The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and a variable display effect ( This is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as (variable display). The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory.

  An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the vibration sensor 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input/output port 225.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, it is displayed in the winning order displayed in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. The voice output device 226 is controlled so that the displayed pending symbol display is rearranged and displayed in the variable display start order, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

  A vibration sensor (not shown) is attached to the back surface of the game board 213. In the pachinko machine 10, since the winning of the starting opening is an important factor that determines the gaming state, it is necessary to change the flow of the ball by vibration to prevent intentional winning of the winning opening. Therefore, when it is determined from the output of the vibration sensor 228 that the pachinko machine 10 is vibrated by the player or the like, an error command for notifying the vibration error is transmitted to the display control device 114. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 determines an error in accordance with the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and issues an error command including the error type. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, control for displaying an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay is performed.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113>
Next, details of the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 21A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. At least a variation pattern selection table 222a is set in the ROM 222.

  The fluctuation pattern selection table 222a is a selection table for determining the detailed contents of the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110. This fluctuation pattern selection table 222a corresponds to a fluctuation time and a rough fluctuation pattern (reach, non-reach, etc.) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110, and a plurality of kinds of fluctuation contents (for example, fluctuations). One variation content is determined from the reach variation patterns of different display contents of the reach A to D configured with the same time and the same determination result.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 has a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol holding sphere number counter 223c, a second special symbol holding sphere number counter 223d, a special figure 2 variation start flag 223e, and a special figure 2 variation start flag 223f. The special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i, the effect counter 223j, the subordinate state setting area 223k, and the other memory area 223z are provided at least.

  The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until a process for the command is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 46) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination processing is executed. , The command is analyzed, and the process according to the command is performed.

  The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area) for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, and in each of these areas. Stores winning information. Based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result or the like of the reserved balls before the start of variation.

  The 1st special symbol reservation sphere number counter 223c is the same as the special symbol 1 reservation sphere counter 203d of the main controller 110, the variation effect (variation) performed on the 1st symbol display device 37 (and the 3rd symbol display device 81). It is a display), and is a counter for counting the maximum number of times (4) the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable effect held in the main controller 110. That is, the number of holding balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the holding ball number command output from the main controller 110.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b manages the holding ball number. It has become.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of balls to be held in the variable display is added by entering the first starting opening 630 or the right first starting opening 631, or in the special symbols in the main control device 110. When the variable display is executed and the number of holding balls is subtracted, a holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d of the main control device 110 is acquired from the holding ball number command. The special symbol 1 is stored in the reserved sphere number counter 223b. Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, according to the reservation ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, since the value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 223c is updated, the first special symbol of the main control device 110. The value can be updated in synchronization with the number of reserved balls counter 203d.

  The value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 223c is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and also holds the first special symbol after storing. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the sphere number counter 223b, a display reserved sphere number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  In the display control device 114, when receiving this display holding sphere number command, the value of the holding sphere number indicated by the command, that is, the holding sphere for the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that several symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 223b is changed in value in synchronization with the special symbol holding sphere counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere numbers displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved sphere counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of holding balls whose variable display is held.

  The second special symbol holding sphere number counter 223d is based on the holding sphere number command output from the main control unit 110, with respect to the first special symbol holding sphere number counter 223c, the number of holding spheres corresponding to the second special symbol. However, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. Is set to. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. Is set to. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON when the first stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the first special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to ON when the second stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the second special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The effect counter 223j is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, selecting an addition time from the addition time selection table 222b, and the like. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198. Each time the main process is executed, it is incremented by 1 and updated.

  Data corresponding to the status command output from the main controller 110 is set in the slave status setting area 223k. Based on the data set in the sub-state setting area 223h, the current gaming state can also be determined by the voice lamp control device 113. The state setting command is output from the main controller 110 even when the power is turned on, and the backup game state can be discriminated by the voice lamp controller 113.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch (see FIGS. 3 and 122) (see FIG. 3). And a RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

  The RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 has the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) (see FIG. 3) pressed when the power is turned on (the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122)). In this case, it is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

  The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes control processing such as detection of winning of special symbols and normal symbols, and various lottery such as selection of winning and variation patterns for the winning. Therefore, the control load of the MPU 201 is large, and in order to stably execute the control of the pachinko machine 10, as in the present embodiment, a lottery on whether or not to set the game operation suggestion setting is performed as a sub-control. The control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced by making the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 corresponding to the device perform the control.

  The control boards for the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113 are covered with a box (box) which is called a board box and is composed of a transparent plastic base member and a lid member. The substrate box is crimped by a member for preventing fraud called a "sealing member" so that the base member and the lid member cannot be easily separated from each other. Generally, when the base member and the lid member are fitted to each other, the sealing member inserts a pin-shaped sealing member into a through hole provided through a part of the base member and the lid member (or Therefore, it is difficult to separate the base member and the lid member from each other unless there is a method of leaving an unopened mark such as breaking the member forming the through hole or breaking the sealing member. There is.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 has an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a ROM 234, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. The output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via the bus line 241. Further, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a model having a completely same specification as the symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if it is a different model having a different winning probability for the jackpot or the number of prize balls paid out in one jackpot. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the ROM 234, and the image controller 237 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described. First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, various processes are executed according to the control program stored in the ROM 234.

  As described above, the ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the data of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the ROM 234 after releasing the system reset via the bus line 240, and executes the control program stored in the ROM 234. The ROM 234 is connected to the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the ROM 234 to the work RAM 233. The MPU 231 outputs the image data transferred to the work RAM 233 to the third symbol display device 81 at any time, and controls the display of the third symbol display device 81.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are configured such that the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be simultaneously varied. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37, of the two 7-segment LEDs of the 7-segment display 37b, the left 7-segment LED, the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol is executed, the right 7 In the segment LED, the variable display corresponding to the second special symbol is executed.

<Regarding control processing executed by main controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 22 to 51. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, a main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is regularly started (at an interval of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of description, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process. The main processing will be described.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a regular process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first random type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, each of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 is incremented by 1, and the counter values thereof are maximum values (in the present embodiment, When each reaches 299, 99, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, as a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 and the like is executed (S104), and thereafter. A start winning process associated with winning (start winning) of the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, and the second starting port 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process (S104) and the starting winning process (S105) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S106), and the first normal symbol starting port 67a or the second normal symbol starting port 67b. The through-gate passage process is executed in association with the passage of the sphere in (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process (S106) and the through gate passage process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42. After the through-gate passage processing is executed, the firing control processing is executed (S108), and other processing that should be executed periodically is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing is ended. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a and that the hit switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated, and the ball is fired. Is a process for determining whether to turn on or off. The main control unit 110 instructs the firing control unit 112 to launch a sphere when the sphere launch is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23, a special symbol variation process (S104) which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). Special symbol variation process (FIG. 23, S104), the first special symbol and the second special symbol, based on each counter value acquired, various determinations and determinations are made, and the determined variation display by predetermined control. In the mode, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are controlled to enable variable display at the same time, or control to stop and display in the display mode showing the determination result is executed. Hereinafter, the special symbol variation process (FIG. 23, S104) will be described.

  In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 23, S104), first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot game is in progress (S201). If it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S201: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the first special symbol is being displayed in variation (S202). When it is determined that the variation display of the first special symbol is being performed (S202: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process is executed (S204). In the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S204), when the prescribed fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the variable display has elapsed, the process of stopping the variable display with the symbol showing the determination result of the first lottery game is executed. To be done. Further, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S204), the second special symbol is variably stopped by a symbol indicating a big hit (or a small hit), and a big hit game (or a small hit game) of the second lottery game is executed. In this case, a process of forcibly stopping the first special symbol that is being variably displayed is executed. In addition, when the second special symbol is variably stopped in a symbol indicating a big hit (or a small hit), the variation of the first special symbol that is being variably displayed may be interrupted (temporarily stopped). The details of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S204) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not being variably displayed (S202: No), the first special symbol variation start process is executed (S203). In the first special symbol variation start process (S203), if the hold data (various counter values) is stored in the first special symbol holding sphere number storage area 203a, the jackpot determination and the variation pattern selection based on the hold data The process is executed. Further, in the first special symbol variation start process (S203), when the lottery result is a big hit (or a small hit), the big hit flag 203u (or a small hit flag 203y) is set to ON. As a result, during execution of the variable display based on the big hit (or the small hit) of the first special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled so as to be a variable display. The first special symbol variation start process (S203) will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. 24 to 28. When the second special symbol is variably stopped with a symbol indicating a big hit (or a small hit), if it is configured to suspend (temporarily stop) the variation of the first special symbol that is being displayed in a variability, the interruption ( It may be configured to perform the process of resuming the variable display of the first special symbol that is (temporarily stopped).

  After the first special symbol variation start process (S203) is executed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is being variably displayed (S205). When it is determined that the second special symbol is being variably displayed (S205: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop process (S207) is executed. The second special symbol variation stop process (S207) will be described in detail later, but like the first special symbol variation stop process (S204), when the prescribed variation time of the second special symbol that is being varied has elapsed. , The process of stopping the variable display with the symbol showing the determination result of the second lottery game is executed. In addition, the first special symbol is variably stopped in the symbol showing the big hit (or the small hit), when the big hit game (or the small hit game) of the first lottery game is executed, the second special symbol in the variable display is displayed. The process of forcibly stopping is executed. In addition, when the first special symbol is variably stopped by a symbol indicating a big hit (or a small hit), the variation of the second special symbol being variably displayed may be interrupted (temporarily stopped). Details of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S207) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the second special symbol is not being variably displayed (S205: No), the second special symbol variation start process is executed (S206). In the second special symbol fluctuation start process (S206), if the holding data (various counter values) is stored in the second special symbol holding number storage area 203b, the jackpot determination and the variation pattern selection based on the holding data. The process is executed. In the second special symbol variation start process (S206), when the lottery result is a big hit (or a small hit), the big hit flag 203u (or a small hit flag 203y) is set to ON. Thereby, during the execution of the variable display based on the big hit (or small hit) of the second special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol is controlled so as to be a variable display. The second special symbol variation start process (S206) will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 35. In addition, when the first special symbol is changed and stopped with a symbol showing a big hit (or a small hit), if it is configured to suspend the fluctuation of the second special symbol that is being displayed (temporarily stopped), it is interrupted ( It may be configured to perform the process of resuming the variable display of the second special symbol that is (temporarily stopped).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the first special symbol variation start process (S203) which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 22, S104) will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S203).

  In the first special symbol fluctuation start process (FIG. 24, S203), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding counter 203d is acquired (S301). It is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S302). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S303). .. The data stored in the holding areas 1 to 4 of the first special symbol holding number storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side (S304). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of holding area 1→execution area, holding area 2→holding area 1, holding area 3→holding area 2, holding area 4→holding area 3.

  Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S305). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 24, S305) will be described in detail later, but based on the value of the first per random number counter C1 shifted to the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), Based on the game state that has been set, the jackpot determination of whether or not it is a jackpot is executed.

  Next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S306). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306) will be described later in detail, but the result of the hit/miss judgment based on the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). Is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on each counter value based on the.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S305) which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 23, S203) will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S305).

  In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 25, S305), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S401). It is determined whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state ST3 (during probability variation) (S402). Whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state ST3 is determined by whether or not the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON. If it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is on (that is, the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state ST3 (during probability variation)) (S402: Yes), the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 15A) is displayed. Based on the result, it is determined whether or not the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the jackpot determination value for high probability, and the lottery result is acquired (S403). On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is off (that is, the game state is the low-probability game state (not in probability variation)) (S402: No), the first random number table 202a (FIG. 15(a)). Based on the reference), it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the big probability determination value for low probability, and the lottery result is acquired (S404).

  When the process of S403 or S404 is completed, it is determined whether the big hit flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y is ON (S405). Here, when the big hit flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y is set to ON, it indicates that the change to be the big hit or the small hit has been started in the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, the jackpot flag 203u (and the small hit flag 203y) is commonly used in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously a big hit. It is configured so that the following fluctuations are not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a problem that a big hit (or a small hit) is continuously generated in a short time and the loss on the gaming shop side becomes excessively large. In addition, when the variation to be a big hit or a small hit in the second special symbol is started, the lottery of the first special symbol is not performed (skipping the processing of S402 to S404), and the first special symbol The variation display based on the deviation (special figure 1 deviation change process (S410)) may be executed. As a result, the lottery process (the processes of S402 to S404) can be skipped, and the processing load can be reduced.

  In S405, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203u and the small hit flag 203y are off, that is, when it is determined that the change to be the big hit or the small hit in the second special symbol is not started (S405: No). ), it is determined whether the lottery result executed in the process of S403 or S404 is a big hit (S406). When it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S406: Yes), the big hit flag 203u is set to ON for the first special symbol (S407). After that, the lottery result of the first special symbol (special diagram 1 lottery result) is set as a jackpot (S408), and the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set as the value of the jackpot type counter C1. It is set based on the game state (S409). Then, this process is completed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S405, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y for the second special symbol is ON (S405: Yes), or the lottery result is determined to be missed in the process of S406. In that case (S406: No), the special figure 1 deviation process is executed (S410). Note that this special figure 1 deviation variation process (S410) will be described with reference to FIG. 26, but when the lottery result of the first special symbol is out, setting of the deviation symbol or the like is executed.

  In this way, even if the lottery result based on the value of the first winning random number C1 actually acquired is a big hit, the big hit flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y has already been set to ON, that is, the By the two special symbols, when the variation to be a big hit or a small hit is started, the setting to be forced out is executed with the first special symbol. As a result, in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a change that is a big hit (or a small hit) is not executed at the same time, and a big hit (or a small hit) is continuously made in a short period of time. It is possible to suppress a problem that the fluctuation starts and the damage on the side of the game shop becomes excessively large. In addition, a big hit (or a small hit) is executed simultaneously or successively, so that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player is puzzled.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured such that the variation that is a big hit is not executed at the same time, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be configured to be executed simultaneously. In this case, the special jackpot flag may be set for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, when the jackpot game is executed with the other special symbol, in the variation of the one special symbol, the measurement of the variation time is temporarily stopped, and the special symbol is fluctuated in a pseudo manner. It is conceivable to make a temporary stop.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special figure 1 deviation variation process (S410) which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 24, S203) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the content of the special figure 1 deviation process (S410). In the special figure 1 deviation process (FIG. 26, S410), first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y is on for the second special symbol (S412). When it is determined that the big hit flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y is turned on (S412: Yes), the first special symbol display device 37 is set to the off symbol of the first special symbol (S416). Then, this process is completed. In this way, when the big hit or the small hit is set in the second special symbol, the first special symbol is forcibly set to the deviating symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously changed to a big hit or a small hit.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S411, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203u and the small hit flag 203y are off for the second special symbol (S411: No), whether the lottery result is a small hit, the present (S412) based on the gaming state and the small hitting random number table 202b (see FIG. 15B). In the process of S412, if it is determined that it is not a small hit (S412: No), it means that the lottery result is out of order, so the process of S416 is executed and this process is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S412, when it is determined that the small hit (S412: Yes), the small hit flag 203y is set to ON for the first special symbol (S413). The lottery result of the first special symbol is set to small hit (S414), and the small hit symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S415). Then, this process is completed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306) which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 24, S203) will be described. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S306).

  In the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (FIG. 27, S306), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 25, S305), whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot, that is, It is determined whether or not the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S501). Here, whether or not it is a big hit is determined by whether or not the big hit flag 203u is on for the first special symbol. This big hit flag 203u is set to ON in the process of S407 in the first special symbol big hit determination process (see FIG. 25) described above.

  In the processing of S501, if it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S501: Yes), the current gaming state (normal gaming state ST1, latent probability variation gaming state ST2, probability variation gaming state ST3, A variation pattern selection table 202e corresponding to the time saving game state ST1h) is set (S502). The jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIGS. 16A to 16C) corresponding to the set gaming state and the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2. (S503). A variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern selection table 203e set in the process of S502 and the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S504). The special figure 1 variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern selected in the processing of S504 (S505). Then, the process of S507 is executed.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S501, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out (that is, the jackpot flag 203u for the first special symbol is off) (S501: No), the special symbol 1 is out. A variation pattern selection process is executed (S506).

  Here, the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection processing (S506) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection processing (S506). In the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection processing (FIG. 28, S506), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit (S511). Here, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203y is set to ON for the first special symbol (S511). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203y is ON (S511: Yes), a small hit variation pattern is set (S512). In the case of a small hit, one type of variation pattern is set in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Specifically, a variation pattern with a variation time of 3000 ms (3 seconds) is set. When the process of S512 is finished, the special figure 1 variation pattern command indicating the small hit is set (S513). Then, this process is completed.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S511, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a small hit (that is, it is out) (S511: No), the variation pattern selection table (figure corresponding to the current game state) 17 and FIG. 18) are set (S514). From the set fluctuation pattern selection table, the deviation fluctuation pattern is selected based on the judgment result (miss) and the value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 (S515). The special figure 1 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern (S516). Then, this process is completed.

  27, the description will be continued. After the processing of S505 or the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection processing (FIG. 28, S506) is executed, the processing of S507 is executed. In the process of S507, a state command indicating the current game state is set (S507). Then, this process is completed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the first special symbol variation stop process (S204) which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 22, S104) will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S204).

  In the first special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 29, S204), first, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the variation based on the first special symbol that is being executed (S601). In the processing of S601, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the variation based on the first special symbol that is being executed (S601: Yes), the big hit flag 203u is turned on for the first special symbol (special symbol 1). It is determined whether or not is set (S602). When it is determined that the big hit flag 203u is set to ON for the first special symbol (S602: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to ON (S603). Although illustration is omitted, when the processing of S603 is executed, a special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is turned on is set.

  When the process of S603 is completed, the special figure 1 stop type command indicating the set stop type is set (S604). Then, the start of the jackpot game based on the selected jackpot type is set (S605). After that, the time saving medium counter 203t is reset to 0 which is the initial value (S606), and the time saving flag 203a2 is set to OFF (S607). Next, the special figure 1 decision command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to stop the first special symbol is set (S608). A process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is being variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 37 is executed (S609), and this process is ended.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S601, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variation based on the first special symbol that is being executed (S601: No), then whether the special figure 1 variation stop flag 203v is on or not. It is determined (S610). When it is determined that the special figure 1 variation stop flag 203y is off in the process of S610 (S610: No), the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v is turned on in the process of S610 (S610 of FIG. 29), it is the case where the second special symbol is stopped by the big hit or the small hit, so that it is being executed. In order to stop the variation based on the first special symbol, the processing of S611 and S612 is executed. In the process of S611, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v is set to OFF, and the process proceeds to S612.

  In S612, the special figure 1 disengagement stop processing for stopping and displaying the first special symbol in the disengagement mode is executed. In the process of S602 described above, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is off for special figure 1 (S602: No), similarly, the special figure for stopping and displaying the first special symbol in a disengaged manner 1 disengagement stop processing is executed (S612). When the processing of S612 ends, this processing ends.

  In this way, in the first special symbol stop process (S204), when the prescribed fluctuation time of the first special symbol that is being variably displayed has passed (S601: Yes), a symbol showing the determination result of the first lottery game The process of stopping the variable display (S603 to S609 or S612) is executed. Further, when the second special symbol is stopped by a symbol showing a big hit (or a small hit) and the big hit game (or the small hit game) of the second lottery game is executed (S610: Yes), the variable display is being performed. A process (S612) of forcibly stopping the first special symbol is executed. In addition, when the first special symbol is variably stopped with a symbol indicating a big hit (or a small hit) (S610: Yes), the variation of the second special symbol that is being variably displayed is suspended (temporarily stopped). You may.

  Here, the special figure 1 disengagement stop processing (S612) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 disengagement stop processing (S612). In the special figure 1 disengagement stop processing (S612), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203y is set to ON for the first special symbol (S621). The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to ON (S622). Then, the special 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to ON (indicating that the special figure 2 is compulsorily stopped by fluctuation) is set (S623). The start of the small hit game is set (S624). Then, the process of S625 is executed.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S621, when it is determined that the small hit flag 203y is off for the first special symbol (S621: No), since the lottery result of the first special symbol is out, S622. To S624, the process of S624 is skipped and the process proceeds to S625. In the processing of S625, it is determined whether or not the time saving/medium counter 203t is greater than 0 (S625). In the processing of S625, when it is determined that the time saving medium counter 203t is larger than 0 (S625: Yes), the time saving medium counter 203t is updated by subtracting 1 (S626), and the time saving medium counter 203t after the subtraction is set to 0. It is determined whether or not (S627). In the processing of S627, when it is determined that the time saving medium counter 203t is 0 (S627: Yes), this is the case where the time saving gaming state ST1h ends, so the time saving flag 203a2 is set to OFF (S628), The process shifts to S629.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S627, when it is determined that the time saving intermediate counter 203t after subtraction is not 0 (greater than 0) (S627; No), it is the case where the time saving gaming state ST1h continues, so the processing of S628 is executed. The process is skipped, and the process proceeds to S629.

  In the process of S629, the special figure 1 confirmation command is set (S629). A process of variably stopping the first special symbol that is variably displayed (dynamically displayed) on the first special symbol display device 37 is executed (S630). Then, this process is executed. Here, returning to FIG. 29, after executing the special figure 1 disengagement stop processing (S608), this processing ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time, but if the first special symbol is stopped by the lottery result of the big hit or the small hit, the second special symbol is displayed. The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to ON so as to execute the process of forcibly changing the special symbol. On the other hand, as will be described later, when the second special symbol is to stop fluctuating due to the lottery result of the big hit or the small hit, the special symbol 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v is set to ON, and the fluctuation stop of the first special symbol Forced to run. As a result, the simultaneous variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be efficiently executed.

  In addition, in one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, if the variation to be a big hit or a small hit has already been started, in the other special symbol, as a result of the winning/disapproval judgment of being forced out. The variable display is started. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the big hit and the small hit from being continuously and forcibly executed, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the gambling performance becomes too high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the second special symbol variation start process (S206) which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 22, S104) will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation start process (S206).

  In the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 31, S206), the above-described first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 24, S203), the first special symbol holding ball number of each process from S301 to S306 Counter 203d, the value of the first special symbol holding sphere number counter (N1), the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S305), the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (S306) In each processing of S701 to S706, the second special symbol reservation ball number counter 203e, the value of the second special symbol reservation ball number counter (N2), the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S705), the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S706) is the same except that it is changed, so the description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S705) which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 23, S206) will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S705).

  In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 32, S705), the following points differ from the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 25, S305). In the process of S801 corresponding to the process of S401, the point that the first special symbol reservation ball execution area (not shown) is changed to the second special symbol reservation ball execution area (not shown), and the process of S408 In the corresponding process of S808, the special figure 1 (first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 (second special symbol), and in the processes of S809 and S810 corresponding to the processes of S409 and S410, the first They differ in that the special symbol is changed to the second special symbol. Since other points are the same, description thereof will be omitted. In addition, the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation processing (S810 in FIG. 32, FIG. 33) executed in the second special symbol jackpot determination processing (refer to FIG. 32) is also the same as the above-mentioned special figure 1 deviation fluctuation processing (refer to FIG. 26). Since the same processing as is executed for the second special symbol, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S706) which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 23, S206) will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S706).

  The second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 34, S706) differs from the above-mentioned first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 27, S306) in the following points. In the process of S901 corresponding to the process of S501, the special figure 1 lottery result (lottery result of the first special symbol) is changed to the special map 2 lottery result (lottery result of the second special symbol), and S506 to S507. In each process of S906 to S907 corresponding to each process up to, the difference is that the special figure 1 variation pattern command (variation pattern command of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 variation pattern command. Since other points are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the second special symbol variation stop process (S207) which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 22, S104) will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S207). The second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S207) differs from the above-described first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 29, S204) in the following points. In the process of S1002 corresponding to the process of S602, "for special figure 1" is changed to "for special figure 2" and the process of S1003 corresponding to the process of S603 The change stop flag is changed to the special figure 1 change stop flag, and the point that the special figure 1 stop type command is changed to the special figure 2 stop type command in the process of S1004 corresponding to the process of S604. In the processes of S1009 and S1010 corresponding to the process of S610, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag is changed to the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag, and the special figure 1 disengagement stop process is special in the process of S1011 corresponding to S611. The difference is that it is changed to the disengagement stop processing in FIG. Since other points are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

  Further, the special figure 2 disengagement stop processing (S1011 of FIG. 36, FIG. 37) executed in the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 36) is similarly performed, and the special figure 1 disengagement stop processing described above (see FIG. 30). Since the same processing as is executed for the second special symbol, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In this way, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed at the same time. Can be made Therefore, the lottery game with more special symbols can be executed within the predetermined time, and the probability that the jackpot is awarded to the player within the predetermined time can be increased. Therefore, the player can efficiently play the game.

  Even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time and the lottery game is executed, if the jackpot game occurs on one of the first or second special symbols, the other Since the variable display of the special symbols is temporarily stopped, the player can concentrate on the big hit game and play the game.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when it is a big hit or a small hit stop display in either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be variably displayed while being temporarily stopped or the measurement of the variation time is interrupted. In such a case, the special symbols that have been temporarily stopped are stopped in a display mode or a notification mode that allows the player to know that they are temporarily stopped, so the player loses the lottery game that was in the middle of variable display. It is possible to grasp that it is not and play the jackpot game with peace of mind.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, a start winning process (S105) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 22) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (FIG. 38, S105) determines whether the game ball has won in any of the first starting opening 630, the right first starting opening 631, and the second starting opening 640. Up to the upper limit number (up to four in each of the first starting opening 630 and the right first starting opening 631 and the second starting opening 640), the acquired respective counter values, the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol This is a process of storing in the reserved ball storage area 203b. Further, each counter value acquired based on the reserved sphere is stored in the first special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203b, respectively, the first special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a Alternatively, based on each counter value stored in each of the second special symbol holding sphere storage areas 203b, a process of predicting a win/fail judgment result, a selected variation pattern, or the like is executed in advance. The start winning process (FIG. 38, S105) will be described below.

  In the starting winning process (FIG. 38, S105), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won (starting winning) the first starting port 630 which is the first starting port or the right first starting port 631 (S1101). Here, the winning of the first start opening 630 or the right first start opening 631 is detected. If it is determined that the ball has won the first starting opening 630 or the right first starting opening 631 (there is a starting winning) (S1101: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is It is acquired (S1102). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1103). It is determined whether the number is less than 4 which is the upper limit value of the reserved number for the first starting port 630 and the right first starting port 631 (that is, whether the reserved number is not stored up to the upper limit value). When it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1103: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding number counter 203d (1104). A reserve ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the reserve number is set (S1105). Various counter values, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the variable type counter CS1 each value is read (acquired) from the counter buffer, the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203a of the RAM203 Are stored (stored) in the corresponding storage areas of the number of reserved balls (S1106).

  Next, the first prefetching process is executed (S1107). The first look-ahead process (S1107) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 39, but it is determined whether or not there is a win/fail judgment result from each counter value newly stored in the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, and a fluctuation pattern determined. A process for determining the stop type and the like is executed.

  Next, regarding each processing of S1108 to S1114, with respect to winning of the game ball to the first starting opening (first starting opening 630 and right first starting opening 631) executed in each processing of S1101 to S1107 The detailed description is omitted because the same processing as the processing performed by the second starting opening 640 is the same as the processing performed by the second starting opening 640.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the first prefetching process (S1107) which is one process of the start winning process (FIG. 38, S105) will be described. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing this first prefetch processing (S1107).

  In the first prefetching process (FIG. 39, S1107), first, various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area 203a, that is, a first random number counter C1 and a first per type counter C2. Each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is read (S1121). The read data is stored in the area having the smallest winning order among the empty storage areas of the prefetch pending storage area 203x (S1122).

  The judgment result is judged based on the data stored in the read-ahead reserved storage area 203x. The hit/no hit determination result determined here is determined in the case of winning in the normal gaming state ST1. Since the variation time is variably set depending on the number of holdings, the timing to start the variation cannot be discriminated between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and therefore the exact gaming state at the time of the variation start cannot be discriminated. Therefore, the judgment result can be accurately determined only when the value of the first random number counter C1 having the same jackpot determination value in both the high-probability game state and the low-probability game state is "7". Therefore, in the process of S1123, it is determined whether or not it is determined as a hit during the normal gaming state ST1.

  In the process of S1123, when it is determined that the hit/non-win determination result is a big hit (S1123: Yes), the first special symbol is a big hit, and the first winning command also showing the big hit type is set. Then, this process is completed. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1123 that the winning/disapproval determination result is out (S1123: No), the first winning command indicating that the prefetch lottery result of the first special symbol is out of position is set (S1125). .. Then, this process is completed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game ball is won in the first starting opening (the first starting opening 630 or the right first starting opening 631) and newly stored, the information stored in the reserved storage is changed. Based on the result, the result of the judgment is judged before the fluctuation starts and the result is notified to the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, the display mode of the holding sphere is changed (for example, the color of the holding sphere is changed to a color different from the normal color) based on the result of the hit determination stored and held, or before the fluctuation starts. It is possible to display an announcement pattern or the like and execute an effect that suggests the win/fail judgment result to the player.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, in the case of prefetching, the winning/non-winning determination is determined as the normal gaming state ST1, but the present invention is not limited to this, the gaming state at the start of fluctuation is accurately determined, and the winning/non-winning determination is made based on the gaming state. It may be configured to execute. In this case, it is possible to make a determination by arranging not to change the selection of the variation pattern according to the number of reserved balls but to select a constant variation pattern regardless of the number of reserved balls at the start of the variation. When performing prefetching, the game state at the start of the variation can be determined by determining the variation order until the retention ball starts to vary based on the information stored in the reserve.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the second prefetching process (S1114) which is one process of the start winning process (FIG. 38, S105) will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the second prefetching process (S1114).

  The second prefetching process (FIG. 40, S1114) is based on the above-described first prefetching process (FIG. 39, S1107) winning the first starting opening (first starting opening 630 or right first starting opening 631). In contrast to the process of pre-reading the hold data in advance and making various determinations, the process of pre-reading the hold data based on winning the second start opening 640 in advance and making various determinations. Since the same processing is executed only with the difference, detailed description will be omitted.

  In the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously. When a variation display that is a big hit or a small hit is executed in one special symbol, the other special symbol is configured to be forced to be displayed as a variation display. Therefore, in the above-described first prefetching process or second prefetching process, when prefetching the lottery result, it may be configured to forcibly determine whether or not the lottery result is missed. To do so, for example, when pre-reading the lottery result of the first special symbol, the period (time) during which the dynamic display of the pre-reading lottery result is executed is calculated. Then, in the period in which the dynamic display is executed, it is only necessary to determine whether or not a variation that is a big hit or a small hit of the second special symbol is executed. In addition, when the lottery result is out of alignment, it is out regardless of the execution state of the second special symbol, so it may not be determined. As a result, the processing load due to the above determination can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, a normal symbol variation process (S106) which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display unit 88, the opening time of the electric accessory 632, and the like.

  In this normal symbol variation process (FIG. 41, S106), first, now, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting. (S1201). The normal symbol (second symbol) is in the middle of hitting, from the time when the second symbol display device 83 displays the hit to the middle of when the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 632 is being performed. When it is determined that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being hit (S1201: Yes), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hitting (S1201: No), it is determined whether or not the normal symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is being variably displayed (S1202). When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner (S1202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the normal symbol that is being executed on the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed ( S1222). The variable time here is a time preset by the processes of S1220 and S1221, which will be described later, before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 88.

  In the processing of S1222, if the variation time has not elapsed (S1222: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S1222, when it is determined that the variation time of the normally displayed variable symbol has elapsed (S1222: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S1223). .. In the process of S1223, the lottery of the normal symbol is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S1213, the "○" symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as the second symbol (lighting display). ) Is set to be. On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is out of order and the display mode at the time of disengagement is set by the process of S1218, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed (lit up) as the second symbol on the second symbol display device 83. Display) is set. By the processing of S1223, when the stop display is set, the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 ends, the processing of S1213, the display mode set by the processing of S1218, the stop symbol (second symbol) is The stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the two symbol display device 83.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the regular design lottery this time is a win (S1224). When it is determined that the normal symbol lottery result this time is a win (S1224: Yes), the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 632 is set (S1225). On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the regular design lottery this time is out (S1224: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1202, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not being displayed in a variably manner (S1202: No), the value of the ordinary symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (the number M of variably displayed holdings in the ordinary symbol) is acquired. (S1203).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S1204). When it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is 0 (S1204: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is not 0 (S1204: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S1205).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is shifted (S1206). In the process of S1206, the data stored in the normal symbol reserve 1 to the normal symbol reserve 4 of the normal symbol reserve sphere storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, normal symbol hold 1 → execution area, ordinary symbol hold 2 → ordinary symbol hold 1, ordinary symbol hold 3 → ordinary symbol hold 2, ordinary symbol hold 4 → ordinary symbol hold 4, etc. in each area Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding sphere execution area (not shown) is acquired (S1207).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag 203a2 is on, that is, whether it is the time saving gaming state ST1h or the probability variation gaming state ST3 (S1208). In the process of S1208, when it is determined that the time saving flag 203a2 is off (S1208: No), based on the hit determination value of the second random number table 202c for low probability (FIG. 15(c)), The determination result is acquired (S1211). On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving flag 203a2 is on (S1208: Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit (S1209). When it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in a big hit (S1209: Yes), the process of S1211 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not in a big hit (S1209: No), the high hit probability second hit random number table 202c (FIG. 15 (c)) hit determination value Based on, the result of the judgment is obtained (S1210).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is a win (S1212). When it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is not winning (that is, it is out) (S1212: No), the display mode of "x" which is the display mode at the time of removal is set. (S1218). On the other hand, when the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is determined to be a win (that is, it is a win) (S1212: Yes), the display mode of "○" which is the display mode at the time of winning is It is set (S1213).

  It is determined whether or not the time saving flag 203a2 is on, that is, whether or not the time saving gaming state ST1h or the probability variation gaming state ST3 (S1214). When it is determined in the process of S1214 that the time saving flag 203a2 is off (S1214: No), the process of S1217 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving flag 203a2 is on (S1214: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in a big hit (S1215). When it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in a big hit, the process of S1216 is executed.

  In the process of S1216, the opening time of the guide member (the left guide member 632a and the right guide member 632b) of the electric accessory 632 is set to 1 s and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S1216). On the other hand, in the processing of S1215, when it is determined that the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in progress (that is, the low probability game state) (S1215: Yes), the electric accessory 632 The blade opening time is set to 0.2 s, and the opening frequency is set to 1 (S1217).

  It is determined whether or not the gaming state is during the time saving gaming state ST1h (including the probability variation gaming state ST3) (S1219). When it is determined that the time is shortening (S1219: Yes), the variable time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is acquired by the value of the universal symbol variation type counter CS2, and the universal symbol variation pattern selection table 202f (Fig. The variation time is determined from (see 19) (S1220). Then, this process is completed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) of the universal figure is determined from the universal figure variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 19) based on the value of the universal figure variation type counter CS2. As shown in FIG. 19, in the universal figure variation pattern selection table 202f, variation patterns of ordinary symbols are set corresponding to each gaming state. Except for the probability variation game state ST3 (probability variation: with electric support), there is only one variation pattern, and the same variation time is always determined regardless of the value of the selected universal figure variation type counter CS2. On the other hand, in the probability variation gaming state ST3, the variation time of 3000 ms is determined by the determination value “0 to 190”, and the variation time of 30000 ms is determined by the determination value “191 to 198”.

  As a result, in the probability variation game state ST3, a variation time longer than in other cases is selected with a probability of 8/199. When this long variation time is selected, the electric accessory 632 is not activated until the variation time elapses. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the second starting port 640 is arranged below the electric accessory 632, and when the electric accessory 632 operates, it is possible to enter the second starting port 640 by the left guiding member 632a. The flow path is blocked. Therefore, during that time, the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 640 is configured to be restricted.

  Here, as described above, when the long variation time (30000 ms) is selected as the variation pattern of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 632 does not operate during that time, so the game hit right during that time. About 85% of the balls will enter the second starting opening 640. Therefore, by selecting a long variation time as the variation time of the normal symbol in the probability variation game state ST3, the number of winnings to the second starting opening 640 can be increased.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 16(c), during the probability variation gaming state ST3, the big hit D is always selected when the second special symbol hits, which is more advantageous than the big hit in the first special symbol. Is selected. Therefore, in the probability variation gaming state ST3, the lottery with the second special symbol can be advantageous to the player in the case of a big hit, rather than the lottery with the first special symbol. Therefore, by increasing the number of winnings to the second starting opening 640 during the probability variation gaming state ST3, it is possible to give the player an advantageous period.

  Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 22), and it is determined whether the game ball has passed the first normal symbol starting port 67a or the second normal symbol starting port 67b. The process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 when the game ball has passed.

  In the through gate passage process (FIG. 42, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the first normal symbol starting port 67a or the second normal symbol starting port 67b (S1301). Here, it is detected that the game ball has passed the first normal symbol starting port 67a or the second normal symbol starting port 67b over three timer interrupt processes. When it is determined that the ball has passed through the first normal symbol starting opening 67a or the second normal symbol starting opening 67b (S1301: Yes), it is determined whether the game state is the normal game state (S1302). .. In the process of S1302, when it is determined that the game state is the normal game state (S1302: Yes), the right-handed game is executed despite the normal game state. The notification command shown is set, and the process proceeds to S1304. In addition, when the notification command indicating the discharge abnormality is set, the present process may be terminated without performing the normal symbol lottery.

  On the other hand, if the game state is not the normal game state (S1302: No), the process of S1303 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1304. In the process of S1304, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is acquired (S1304). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S1305).

  Whether the ball has not passed the first normal symbol starting port 67a or the second normal symbol starting port 67b (S1301: No), or the ball has passed the first normal symbol starting port 67a or the second normal symbol starting port 67b. Even if it does, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is not less than 4 (S1305: No), this process ends. On the other hand, the ball passes through the first normal symbol starting opening 67a or the second normal symbol starting opening 67b (S1301: Yes), and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S1305). : Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S1306). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S106 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first of the empty holding areas (ordinary symbol holding 1 to ordinary symbol holding 4) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203f of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area (S1307). In the process of S1307, the value of the normal symbol holding sphere counter 203g is referred to, and if the value is 0, the area of the normal symbol holding 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the area of the normal symbol reserve 2, if the value is 2, the area of the normal symbol reserve 3, if the value is 3, the area of the normal symbol reserve 4, first, respectively. Area.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1401), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

  Note that the NMI interrupt processing described above is similarly executed in the payout emission control device 111, and the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this startup processing.

  This startup processing is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 44), first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1501). For example, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Next, a wait process (1 second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable. (S1502). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1503).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch (122 in FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1504), and if it is turned on (S1504: Yes), the process proceeds to S1512. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) is not turned on (S1504: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1505), and if it is not stored. (S1505: No), there is a possibility that the previous process at the time of power shutoff did not end normally, and in this case also, the process proceeds to S1512.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1505: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1506), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1507: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is shut off, the backed up data is destroyed, and in such a case also, the process proceeds to S1512. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1512, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1512). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1513, S1514) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) is pressed at the time of executing the start-up process, the initialization process (S1513, S1514) of the RAM 203 is executed.

  In addition, the initialization processing (S1513, S1514) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner even when the information on occurrence of power failure is not set or when the abnormality of the backup is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value or the like). .. In the RAM initialization processing (S1513, S1514), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1513), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1514). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S1510.

  On the other hand, the RAM erasing switch (122 in FIG. 3) is not turned on (S1504: No), the information about the occurrence of power failure is stored (S1505: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) If normal (S1507: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S1508). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S1509), and the process proceeds to S1510. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is ready to start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  Next, the production permission command which permits execution of various productions is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S1510). After that, the interrupt is permitted (S1511). Then, the process shifts to a main process (S1600) described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the main processing (S1600) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the startup processing described above will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this main processing (S1600). In the main process (S1600), roughly, a counter updating process and a power-off process are executed.

  In the main process (FIG. 45, S1600), first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), the output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 is output to each sub side. External output processing to be transmitted to the control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1601).

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1602). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

  When the change type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1603). After the processing of S1253 is executed, the probability variation setting processing is executed (S1254). This probability variation setting process (S1254) will be described later with reference to FIG. 42, but when the big hit A or big hit C is executed, the game ball enters the second specific entrance (not shown). When it is determined whether or not the player has entered the ball, a process of setting data indicating that the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to the probability variation gaming state ST3 in the jackpot after-state setting area is executed.

  When the probability variation setting process (S1254) is executed, the jackpot control process is executed (S1255). This jackpot control process (S1255) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 43, but a process of setting the operations of the variable winning a prize device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 in the jackpot game is executed.

  After the jackpot game process (S1255) is executed, the electric accessory opening/closing process is executed (S1256). In the electric accessory opening/closing process (S1256), the opening/closing process of the electric accessory 632 is executed. Then, the display control process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1257).

  Next, the display control process of the second symbol (for example, a symbol of "O" or "x") by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1258). Briefly described, on the condition that the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes, and the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The variable display of the second symbol is carried out. And the lottery of the second symbol is carried out by the value of the second hit random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is hit, the electric accessory 632 is opened for a predetermined time.

  After that, it is determined whether or not the power cut occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1259), and if the power cut occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1259: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main processing (S1260). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1260: Yes), the process proceeds to S1251 and the above-described processes after S1251 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous main processing (S1260: No), the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing, The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1261, S1262).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1261). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 and 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffers of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1252 (S1262).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1251 to S1258 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but displayed variable. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

  Further, in the processing of S1256, if the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1259: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 40 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S1263 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1263), and a power-off command indicating that the power supply has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S1264). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1265), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1266), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

  The processing of S1259 is at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1251 to S1258 ends, or the end of one cycle of the processing of S1261 and S1262 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the start-up processing is completed. It is possible to start from the processing of S1251. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of S1251 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup processing. Therefore, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the process when the power is shut down, the stack pointer is not changed in the initialization process (S1301). By setting the value to the predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1251 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing malfunction or runaway of the main control device 110.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the startup process described above will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a regular process of 4 msec cycle, and the counter updating process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process (FIG. 45, S1600), first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), output data such as a command stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is output to the sub side. The external output processing to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1601). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 22) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, it corresponds to the number of balls acquired to the payout control device 111. Send the prize ball command. In addition, the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 23) and the starting winning process (see FIG. 38) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 with the reserve ball number command. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variable display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 46) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1602). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the change type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1603), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or changed. The jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1604). In the jackpot control processing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In this embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1604) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, the electric accessory opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessory 632 associated with the right first starting opening 630 is executed (S1605). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S1225 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 41), the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is started. It should be noted that the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and opening number set in the processing of S1216, the processing of S1217, and the processing of S1220 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is executed (S1606). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 24, S203) or the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 31, S206), depending on the variation pattern The variable display is started on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, until the variation time elapses after the variation is started, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED Is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. Is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, each time a main process is executed, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 so that the player can confirm the change of the LED lighting color, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 24) or the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 31) ends. , The first symbol display device 37A, the variable display being executed in 37B is ended, and in the display mode set by the processes of S306 and S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 65), the stop symbol (the first symbol) ) Is stopped (lit) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1607). In the second symbol display update process, when the variable time of the second symbol is set by the process of S1220 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 41), the variable display is started on the second symbol display device. As a result, in the second symbol display device, variable display is performed in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S1223 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 41), the variation executed in the second symbol display device. The display is ended, and in the display mode set by the process of S1212 or the process of S1223 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 41), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lighting display). ) Do.

  After that, it is determined whether or not the power cut occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1608). If the power cut occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1608: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S1609). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1609: Yes), the process moves to S1601 and the above-described processes after S1601 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S1609: No), the first time is reached during the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1610, S1611).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1610). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are respectively stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1602 (S1611).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1601 to S1607 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

  In the process of S1608, if the RAM 203 stores the information on the occurrence of power failure (S1608: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 43 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S1612 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1612), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S1613). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1614), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1615), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

  The processing of S1608 is at the timing of the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1601 to S1607, or the end of one cycle of the processing of S1610 and S1611 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. The process can be started from S1601. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1601 as in the case of being initialized in the startup process. Therefore, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the power-off process, the stack pointer is not saved in the initial setting process (S1501). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1601 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing malfunction or runaway of the main control device 110.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1604) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1604). This jackpot control process (S1604) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 45), when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and a specific winning prize. This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large opening mouth) 65a.

  In the big hit control process, first, it is determined whether the big hit or the small hit of the special symbol is started (S1621). Specifically, S606 of the first special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 29) or S1006 of the second special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 36) or S624 of the special figure 1 disengagement stop process (see FIG. 30). The process of S1024 of the special figure 2 disengagement stop processing (see FIG. 37) is executed, and if the big hit or the small hit of the special symbol is set, the big hit or the small hit of the special symbol is started. judge. In the processing of S1621, when the big hit or the small hit of the special symbol is started (S1621: Yes), the opening command is set (S1622), and this processing is ended.

  The opening command may be delayed (variable) and transmitted according to the gaming state and the jackpot type. Specifically, an opening counter that is updated regularly (every 4 ms) is provided. Then, when the big hit or the small hit of the special symbol is started, the opening counter is initialized to 0, and then the opening counter is a predetermined value (for example, 2500 for the big hit A and 5000 for the big hit B). If this happens, the opening command should be sent. By doing this, for example, when a big hit in a left-handed game, the time until the big hit starts is lengthened, and when a big hit is in the right-handed game, the time until the big hit starts Can be shortened. In the present embodiment, when a big hit occurs during a left-handed game, it is necessary to switch to a right-handed game as a big hit game. According to the above configuration, when a big hit in the left-handed game, a sufficient time to switch to the right-handed game (big hit game) can be secured. This can reduce the operational burden on the player.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1621, when the big hit or the small hit of the special symbol is not started (S1621: No), it is determined whether the big hit or the small hit of the special symbol is in progress (S1623). During the big hit or small hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the big symbol of the special symbol (including during the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed. Including during the predetermined time after the end of the special symbol jackpot game. In the process of S1623, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S1623: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1624). When it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1624: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process is executed (S1625). This jackpot operation setting process (S1625) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 47, but the opening setting for the variable winning a prize device 65 and the probability variation solenoid in each round corresponding to the jackpot type is executed.

  The big hit operation setting process (S1625) which is one process in the big hit control process (FIG. 46, S1604) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the contents of this jackpot operation setting process (S1625). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 47, S1625), first, an opening scenario in which an opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is set is read (S1641). The opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probably variable solenoid) 65k (see FIG. 4) is set based on the data read in S1641 (S1642). The opening operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 (see FIG. 4) of the variable winning device 65 is set by the data read in the processing of S1641. Then, this process is completed.

  In this way, since each operation of the variable winning a prize device 65 is set at the start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the big hit game, the big hit game ends in the middle. It is possible to suppress defects.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of a small hit game, the operation of the probability variation solenoid 65k is not set, but only the opening operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 is set. The small hit consists of two rounds, and the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened for 1 second in each round.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. In the process of S1624, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1624: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the opening/closing door 65f1 and the flow path solenoid (probability variation solenoid) 65k (S1626). When it is determined that it is the operation timing (S1626: Yes), the opening solenoid 65f2 is set to ON (S1627). After that, the flow path solenoid (probably variable solenoid) 65k is set to ON (S1628). Then, this process is completed.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1626, when it is determined that it is not the opening operation timing (S1626: No), it is determined whether it is the ending effect start timing (S1629). The start timing of the ending effect is the start timing of the ending effect when the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed and the waiting time (3 seconds in the present embodiment), which is the ball throwing time, has elapsed after the 15th round has ended. Is determined as. When it is determined that it is the ending timing of the ending effect (S1629: Yes), the ending process is executed (S1630). Then, this process is completed.

  Here, the details of the ending process (S1630) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the contents of this ending process (FIG. 48, S1630). In the ending process (FIG. 48, S1630), first, an ending command indicating the start of ending is set to the voice lamp control device 113 (S1651). Next, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1652). In the process of S1652, when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is ON (S1652), the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S1653), and the process proceeds to S1654. Although illustration is omitted, the probability variation setting flag 203h is configured to be set to OFF based on the probability variation flag 203g being set to ON.

  In the process of S1654, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is a type with a power support (big jack C) (S1654). When it is determined in the process of S1654 that the jackpot type is the type with electric power support (S1654: Yes), the time saving flag 203a2 is set to ON (S1655), and the present process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S1654, when it is determined that the jackpot type is not the type with the power support (big jack C) (S1654: No), the process of S1655 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  When it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is off in the process of S1652 (S1652: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is the jackpot E (S1656). When it is determined that the jackpot type is the jackpot E in the process of S1656 (S1656: Yes), 100 is set to the time saving medium counter 203t (S1657), the process of S1655 is executed, and the process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S1656, when it is determined that the jackpot type is not the jackpot E, the processes of S1657 and S1655 are skipped and the present process ends.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is on, and if it is on, the probability variation flag 203g is set to on. Therefore, at the end of the big hit game, it is possible to determine whether the game ball has passed the probability variation switch 65e3 and set the high-probability game state. Therefore, until the jackpot game is over, it is possible to keep the player expecting to shift to the high-probability game state (hidden probability variation gaming state ST2 or probability variation gaming state ST3). Furthermore, if the probability variation switch 65e3 allows the game ball to pass during the big hit game, a high-probability game state (hidden probability variation game state ST2 or probability variation game state ST3) is given after the big hit game, so even during the big hit game. A game can be played with an interest in whether or not the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. In the process of S1629, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1629: No), the notification process is executed (S1631). Here, the details of the notification process (S1631) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the contents of this notification process (S1631).

  In the notification process (S1631), first, it is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203m is greater than 0 (S1631). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1631: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the 13th round (S1632). The determination of the end timing of the 13th round is made based on the case where it is detected that 10 balls have been won in the 13th round or when it has been determined that 30 seconds have passed. When it is determined that it is the end timing of the 13th round (S1632: Yes), the counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the notification counter 203m. Then, this process is completed. On the other hand, in the processing of S1632, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the thirteenth round (S1632: No), this processing is ended. Here, by setting the counter of 2 seconds in S1633, the notification counter 203m becomes 0 during 3 seconds of the interval time which is the ball throwing time after the end of 13 rounds, and the sound of looking at the liquid crystal appears. Is output. Therefore, the flow path solenoid 65k operates in the 14th round, but since the player is attracted to the liquid crystal from the interval time after the 13th round, the movement of the switching member 65h of the variable winning a prize device 65 is identified, It is possible to prevent the jackpot type from being identified by the player. Therefore, the player can play the game until the jackpot game is over, with the expectation that the probability variation game state ST3 is given.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, by providing the notification counter 203m, the effect of attracting attention to the liquid crystal is performed over the 14th round from 1 second before the end of the interval time. It may be executed continuously.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1221, when it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is greater than 0 (S1661: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203m is updated by -1 (S1664). It is determined whether the value of the updated notification counter 203m is 0 (S1665). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1665: Yes), the notification command is set (S1666). Then, this process is completed. The notification command causes the audio lamp control device 113 to set the output of the audio "Look at the liquid crystal".

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. When the notification process (FIG. 49, S1631) is executed, the winning process is executed (S1632). Here, the winning process (S1632) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the contents of this winning process (S1632).

  In the winning process (FIG. 50, S1632), it is first determined whether the round is in the valid period (S1671). The round valid period is a period during which the round game is set, that is, a period from the opened state of the opening door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that the round is out of the valid period (S1671: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round valid period (S1671: Yes), it is determined whether the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed. If it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning port 65a has been passed (S1672: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is incremented by 1 and updated (S1673). After that, the processing of S1674 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 has not been passed (S1672: No), the process of S1674 is executed.

  In the process of S1674, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1674). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1674: Yes), the opening/closing door 65f1 of the specific winning port 65a is set to be closed (S1676). After that, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON (S1677). Then, the process of S1678 is executed. Since the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, it can be determined that the ball-balling time is in progress after the opening/closing door 203n is closed.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1674, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed (S1675). When it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1675: Yes), the process of S1676 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1675: No), the process of S1678 is executed.

  In the process of S1678, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1678). When it is determined that the value of the motion counter 203k is larger than 0 (S1678: Yes), the value of the motion counter 203k is updated by -1 (S1679). It is determined whether the game ball has passed the probability change switch 65e3 (S1680). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the probability variation passage switch 65e3 (S1680: Yes), the value of the probability variation passage counter 203i is incremented by 1 and updated (S1681). The probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1682). After that, the processing of S1683 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S1680, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the probability variation switch 65e3 (S1680: No), the process of S1683 is executed. In the process of S1683, it is determined whether the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1683). When it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off (S1684). The probability variation valid flag 203p is set to ON (S1685). Then, this process is completed. Here, the probability variation valid flag 203p is set to ON, and after the switching member 65h is switched, if the game ball remaining in the special flow path 65e2 has passed the probability variation switch 65e3, the probability variation game. Can be controlled to be set.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1678, when it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1678: No), it is determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203p is on (S1686). If the probability variation valid flag 203p is off (S1686: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation valid flag 203p is on (S1686: Yes), the probability variation valid timer 203r is incremented by 1 and updated (S1687). It is determined whether the value of the probability variation valid timer is the upper limit value (1.2 s in this embodiment) (S1688). When it is determined that the probability variation valid timer 203r is the upper limit value (S1688: Yes), the probability variation valid flag 203p is set to OFF (S1689). The probability variation valid timer 203r is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S1690). Then, this process is completed. On the other hand, in the process of S1688, when it is determined that the probability variation valid timer 203r is not the upper limit value (S1688: No), the process of S1680 is executed.

  As a result, if the probability variation valid timer 203r is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the probability variation switch 65e3, and thus the probability variation game state ST3 can be set in consideration of the time of ball spitting. Further, since there is an upper limit to the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the probability variation game state ST3 from being illegally passed by causing the probability variation switch 65e3 to pass the game ball.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. When the winning process (FIG. 50, S1632) is executed, the abnormal process is executed (S1633). Then, this process is completed. Here, the abnormality processing (S1633) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the contents of this abnormality processing (S1633). In the abnormality process (S1633), a process of monitoring whether the probability variation switch 65e3 is illegally passed is executed.

  In the abnormality processing (FIG. 51, S1633), first, it is determined whether or not it is the round valid period (S1701). If it is outside the round valid period (S1701: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round valid period (S1701: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S1702). When it is determined that the game ball has passed the ball discharge switch 65e4 (S1702: Yes), the value of the ball discharge number counter 203s is incremented by 1 and updated (S1703). Then, the process of S1704 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S1702: No), the process of S1704 is executed.

  In the process of S1704, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1704). When it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is off (S1704: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1704: Yes), the remaining ball timer 203o is incremented by 1 and updated because it is during the ball expelling time (S1705). The remaining ball timer 203o determines whether the upper limit value (3 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed (S1706). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit value (S1706: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S1706: Yes), the discharged number (the total value of the probability variation passage counter 203i and the discharged number counter 203s) matches the winning number (the value of the winning number counter 203j). It is determined (S1707).

  If it is determined that they match (S1707: Yes), the process of S1709 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S1707: No), an error command is set (S1708). Then, the process of S1709 is executed. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from remaining illegally in the variable winning device 65 and prevent the game ball from passing through the probability variation switch 65e3 even if the jackpot B is a big hit.

  In the process of S1709, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to OFF (S1709), and the remaining ball timer 203o is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S1710). After that, the winning number counter 203j, the discharging number counter 203s, and the probability variation passage counter 203i are reset to their initial values (S1711), and then this process is terminated.

<Regarding the control processing executed by the voice lamp control device 114>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 61. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on and a main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

  First, with reference to FIG. 52, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S2001). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, the power-up processing of S2116 is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous interruption”) in the current startup processing (see FIG. 53) ) Is determined during the execution of () (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 53, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives the power-off occurrence information from the main control device 110 (see S2113 in FIG. 53), the power-off process in S2116 is executed. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S2116 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in progress flag.

  If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S2002: No), the startup processing this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure has occurred, and the power-off in S2116 is performed. It is started after completing the execution of the process, or is started (without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

  The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S2006. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not “55AAh”, it is possible to confirm the data destruction in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), the process proceeds to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to S2008.

  If the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to power shutdown). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2004. On the other hand, the startup process of this time is started after the momentary power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process of S2116 is completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2003: No), and the process proceeds to S2008.

  If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S2002: Yes), the startup processing of this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S2116, the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The MPU 221 has been reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S2004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S2004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, and it is confirmed whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read/write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

  If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S2006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a read/write check abnormality is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You can

  In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S2116 is executed (see S2115 in FIG. 53). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S2116 is executed. Therefore, the process of S2008 with the power-off flag turned on is that the startup process of this time is instantaneous. This is a case after the power failure has occurred and started in a state in which the execution of the power-off processing in S2116 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010), and then the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S2011), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing the commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of S2008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the current startup process is started after the power has been completely cut off, for example, and the process of S2004 to S2006 is followed to the process of S2008. This is the case where the processing has been started, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) and started due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S2009, is skipped, the process proceeds to S2010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010).

  It should be noted that skipping the clearing process in S2009 is performed when all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S2004 when the process in S2008 is performed through the processes in S2004 to S2008. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or since the processing of S2101 was executed last time (S2101), 1 millisecond. If the above has not passed (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2111 without performing the processes of S2102 to S2110. In the processing of S2101, it is the processing related to the display (effect) of S2102 to S2110 that determines whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). , It is preferable to execute the command determination processing of S2111 and the variable display setting processing of S2112 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S2111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S2111 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is executed. Based on the above, it is possible to set the variable display effect without delay.

  If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, the various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S2103 to S2112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S2102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2108 described later (S2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2104). The power-on notification processing is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that the power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S2105 without any notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S2105, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the retained quantity display updating process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting production, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, the setting of switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is a command as a display control device. Sent to 114.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S2107). In this frame button input monitoring/production process, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the production effect is monitored and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is dealt with. It is a process of setting to produce an effect. In this processing, when the player's operation on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button input monitoring/effect process is completed, a ramp edit process is then executed (S2108), and then a sound edit/output process is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination portions 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing of S2109, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S2110). After this, the process proceeds to S2111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp edit process of S2108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing/output processing of S2109 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  After that, a command determination process (S2111) is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control device 110, and the process proceeds to S2112. Details of this command determination processing (S2111) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S2112, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81, and the command is displayed by the display control device 114. The variable display setting process, which is a process to be set for transmission to the user, is executed. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S2112 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S2113 (S2113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S2115), and the power-off process is executed (S2116). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S2117), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of the information about the occurrence of power failure is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if the power cut occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2113 (S2113: No), it is determined whether the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2114: No), the process returns to S2101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2114: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and thus can call a store clerk or the like in the hall and request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the command determination processing (S2111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S2111). This command determination process (S2111) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 53) performed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. . Details of the command determination process (S2111) will be described below.

  In the command determination processing (FIG. 54, S2111), first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read and analyzed from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, and the main controller 110 is read. Further, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation pattern command is received (S2201). Here, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is a command for variably displaying the first special symbol. When it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command is received (S2201: Yes), the special figure 1 variation start processing is executed to variably display the first special symbol (S2202). This special figure 1 variation start process (S2202) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 55, but the settings required to variably display the special symbol corresponding to the first special symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Is executed.

  Here, the special figure 1 variation start processing (S2202) will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 variation start process (S2202). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (FIG. 55, S2202), first, the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2241), and the fluctuation pattern type is selected from the received special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command. It is extracted (S2242). The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 so as to be identifiable as the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and is displayed in a variation display setting process (FIG. 61, S2112) described later. It is used when setting the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol for notifying the control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the first special symbol and the variation pattern type of the first special symbol.

  When the process of S2242 is executed, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the latent probability variation game state ST2 (probability variation electric power support-free game state) (S2243). When it is determined that the game state is other than the latent probability variation game state ST2 (S2243: No), this process ends. When it is determined that the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 (S2243: Yes), the variation lottery result of the variation of the first special symbol that starts variation is a variation of jackpot E (15R normal jackpot: electric support 100 times). It is determined (S2244). When it is determined that the change is not the big hit E (S2244: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation is the big hit E (S2244: Yes), the characters indicating the chance zone (see FIGS. 63A and 63B) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S2245). ). Then, this process is completed.

  In the present embodiment, when the latent probability variation game state ST2 is reached, in the normal game state ST1, the variation time of the second special symbol, which has been set long and is disadvantageous to the player, is set short. On the other hand, in the normal game state ST1, the variation time of the first special symbol that is mainly executing the game is set to be long. As a result, when the player shifts to the latent probability variation game state ST2, he/she comes to the right to play the game so that the game ball wins the second special symbol. However, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed at the same time. Here, in the latent probability variation game state ST2, in the second special symbol, a high-probability game (probability variation) is always granted when it becomes a big hit, but in the first special symbol, when it becomes a big hit, a normal probability game (low-probability game) Are configured so that there is a possibility that they will be awarded by lottery. Therefore, in the normal gaming state ST1, even if the first special symbol is a big hit and the big hit A (15R probability variation big hit: no electric support) is given, the fluctuation started with the first special symbol after the big hit game is the big hit E. Then, it will be immediately shifted to the normal gaming state ST1.

  As described above, normally, after transitioning to the latent probability variation game state ST2 in which the second special symbol is mainly played, based on the variation that becomes the jackpot E in the first special symbol is started, the third symbol display The device 81 displays a chance zone (a notification mode indicating the time saving game state ST1h or the probability variation game state ST3). As shown in FIG. 62(b), the player displays the heaven zone (informing mode indicating that it is in the latent probability change gaming state ST2) on the third symbol display device 81, and thereafter, the big hit game twice. Recognize that the high-probability game state (probability change) is maintained (high possibility) until is executed. However, in the chance zone, the player may not be convinced (big expectation) whether the probability variation game state ST3 will be given after the next big hit, and it is possible that the player is in the time saving game state ST1h (low probability state). You will be playing while recognizing.

  Therefore, for example, when the latent probability variation game state ST2 is entered and the first variation of the first special symbol is a variation that is a jackpot E, the heaven zone is normally displayed, but the chance zone is displayed. The Rukoto. This can prevent the player from being discouraged in a short time.

  Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After the processing of the special figure 1 variation start processing (FIG. 55, S2202) is executed, this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the processing of S2201, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command is not received (S2201: No), it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. Yes (S2203). Here, the special figure 2 variation pattern command is a special symbol showing a variation display mode for variably displaying the second special symbol. If it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received (S2203: Yes), the special figure 2 variation start process (S2204) is executed. Details of the special figure 2 variation start processing (S2204) will be described with reference to FIG.

  Details of the special figure 2 variation start process (S2204) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 variation start process (S2204). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S2204), first, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2301), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command ( S2302). The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 so as to be identifiable as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and is displayed in a variation display setting process (FIG. 61, S2112) described later. It is used when setting the variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol that notifies the control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the second special symbol and the variation pattern type of the second special symbol.

  When the processing of S2302 is executed, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the probability variation game state ST3 (the game state with the probability variation power distribution support) (S2203). If the gaming state is other than the probability variation gaming state ST3 (S2303: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state ST3 (S2303: Yes), it is determined whether or not the win/loss determination result of the second special symbol that starts changing is a big hit (S2304). Here, the determination is performed by determining whether or not the variation pattern is a jackpot variation from the received special figure 2 variation pattern command.

  In the process of S2304, when it is determined that the winning/discarding determination result of the second special symbol that starts changing is a big hit (S2304: Yes), the notice effect command per treasure box is set to the display control device 114 (S2305). . On the other hand, if the result of the hit/miss determination is a miss, a treasure box removal notice effect command is set to the display control device 114 (S2306).

  Here, the treasure box winning notice effect command is a command for instructing the third symbol display device 81 to display the display mode shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, when the probability variation game state ST3 is entered, as shown in FIGS. 9A to 9B, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm, and the third symbol is displayed. In the 2 display area Dn, the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed. Here, the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol displayed in the second display area Dn becomes the symbol of the treasure box, and the display mode shown in FIG. 9A and the display mode shown in FIG. 9B. By repeatedly displaying and in a short time period (for example, every 0.5 seconds), it is possible to display as if blinking.

  Here, when the probability variation gaming state ST3 is set, the long out variation pattern C (1800000 ms) is selected when the result of the determination whether or not the second special symbol is out. Therefore, the frequency at which the variation of the second special symbol is started becomes extremely small. However, when you win the small hit in the first special symbol, based on the stop of the fluctuation, the fluctuation of the changing second special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed, and is newly stored after the small hit game. The variation with respect to the reserved ball of the second special symbol that is being started. In this case, the player expects that the variation that becomes a jackpot is started in the second special symbol in which the advantageous jackpot more advantageous than the first special symbol is easily selected.

  When the second special symbol starts changing, as shown in FIGS. 10A to 10B, the treasure box representing the change of the second special symbol is enlarged and displayed large in the first display area Dm. .. On the other hand, the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed in the second display area Dn. After that, after the treasure box is displayed in a display mode that vibrates for about 2 seconds, the treasure box opens, and when the result of the judgment is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 10B, “Congratulations” from the treasure box. Is displayed to inform that the second special symbol has been a big hit. Then, a notification mode indicating that the probability variation game state ST3 of "continuation of chance!" is continuously executed is displayed.

  In the probability variation gaming state ST3, when the jackpot D of the special figure 2 is configured to be selected, the jackpot D is selected (that is, when the latency probability variation variation game state ST2 is configured to be configured), the latent probability variation It suffices to display a notification mode (for example, the characters “Heaven zone plunge!”) indicating the transition to the gaming state ST2. In this case, it should be configured to also display a notification mode of "stop firing!" for instructing to stop the firing of the game ball. Here, to instruct the stop of the firing, in the probability variation game state ST3, the game is mainly executed in the first special symbol, but in the latent probability variation game state ST2, the game is mainly executed in the second special symbol. Is set to do. Therefore, the game ball enters the right first starting opening 631 and the storing of the reserved ball of the first special symbol is a trigger for executing the lottery, which is disadvantageous to the player, and therefore the firing is stopped. By instructing, the problem can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, if the win/fail judgment result is out, as shown in FIG. 10(a), the treasure box open display is executed as in the case where the win/no judgment result is a big hit, and then the win/fail judgment is made from the treasure box. The word "sorry" is displayed to indicate that the judgment result is incorrect. After that, when 5 seconds have elapsed after the start of fluctuation, the display mode is switched to the display mode shown in FIGS. 9A to 9B, and the blinking display is executed until the fluctuation time set in the second special symbol elapses. To be done.

  Thereby, the player pays attention to the second special symbol only for a certain period at the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed at the same time. Can pay attention to the fluctuation of the first special symbol. Therefore, the game becomes easy to understand, and the player can play the game with a good feeling.

  Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S2204) is executed, this process ends. When it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command is not received (S2203: No), it is determined whether the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command is received from the main control device 110 (S2205). When it is determined that the special type 1 or special type 2 stop type command is received (S2205: Yes), the stop type command reception process is executed (S2206). This stop type command reception process (S2206) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the contents of this stop type command reception process (S2206). In the stop type command reception process (S2206), first, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received according to the received command, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON. When the special figure 2 stop type command is received, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to ON. (S2311). The stop type (big hit A to big hit E, out, reach out, etc.) is extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command (S2312). The extracted stop type is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. The stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is the second special symbol. Each of the stop types is stored so that it can be identified.

  It is determined whether the current game state is the normal game state ST1 (S2313). When the gaming state is a gaming state other than the normal gaming state ST1, this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming state is the normal gaming state ST1 (S2313: Yes), it is determined whether or not the stop type is a jackpot A (15R probability variation jackpot: no electric support) (S2314). When it is determined that the stop type is other than the jackpot A (S2314: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type is the jackpot A (S2314: Yes), the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is reserved 1 (the first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a in the earliest digestion order area). It is determined whether or not the hold determination result of the reserved ball stored in) is a jackpot E (15 round normal jackpot: 100 electric support) (S2315). Here, the jackpot random number value of the corresponding holding ball notified by the winning command is read from the winning information storage area 223b to be determined. Although not shown, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp controller 113 has a first random number table 202a (FIG. 15(a)) and a jackpot type selection table 202d (FIG. 15) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. 16(a) to (c)) are stored, and based on the value of the first random number counter C1 and the value of the first hit type counter C2 given to the winning command output from the main controller 110, The sound lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to determine the hit/no hit determination result in the probability variation state.

  In the process of S2315, when it is determined that the holding 1 of the first special symbol is a determination result other than the jackpot E (S2315: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hold 1 of the first special symbol is the jackpot E (S2315: Yes), the character "chance zone entry" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the ending of the jackpot game. The display command to be instructed is set to the display control device 114 (S2316). On the other hand, when it is determined that the hold 1 of the first special symbol is not the jackpot E (S2315: No), as shown in FIG. 62(a), in the heaven zone (hidden probability variation gaming state ST2) at the ending of the jackpot game. A display command for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the characters "Enter the heaven zone!", which indicates the shift, is output to the display control device 114 (S2317). Then, this process is completed.

  Here, in the present embodiment, when the latent probability variation game state ST2 is transitioned, the probability variation game is likely to be continuously set until the jackpot game is executed at least twice. Therefore, the player can recognize that at least two big hits have been promised when the characters of the heaven zone are displayed. Further, since it is configured to be displayed at the end of the jackpot game, the player can play until the end of the jackpot game in anticipation of a transition to the latent probability variation gaming state ST2, which improves the enjoyment of the game. it can.

  Further, even if the jackpot A is won in the normal gaming state ST1, if it is determined that the jackpot E is won in the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 for the holding 1 of the first special symbol, in the ending of the jackpot A, the time saving gaming state ST1h or Since the character "Chance zone entry!!" indicating that the probability variation game state is ST3 is displayed, the player does not recognize that the jackpot game has been confirmed to occur at least twice, and the time saving game state ST1h. It is possible to play a game by recognizing that it is the certainty variation game state ST3. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize the transition to the latent probability variation gaming state ST2, and it is possible to suppress the discouragement of shifting to the time saving gaming state ST1h in a short time.

  Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After the stop type command reception processing (FIG. 57, S2206) is executed, this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S2205, when it is determined that the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command is not received (S2305: No), it is determined whether the hold ball number command is received from the main control device 110. (S2207). When it is determined that the reserved ball number command is received (S2207: Yes), the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d or the second special symbol reserved ball of the main control device 110 included in the received reserved ball number command. The value of the number counter e (that is, the number of holding balls of the variable display effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol held in the main controller 110) is extracted, and the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is a voice lamp. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c of the control device 113, the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223d (S2208).

  Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the balls win the first starting opening 630, the right first starting opening 631 or the second starting opening 640 (start winning). , Each time there is a start winning, by the process of S2207, the first special symbol of the main controller 110 the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c and the second special symbol holding ball counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 It can be set to the values of the reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e, respectively. Therefore, due to the influence of noise and the like, the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 223c or the second special symbol holding ball counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 is the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d of the main control device 110. Or even if it deviates from the value of the second special symbol holding ball counter 203e, at the time of starting winning detection, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c or the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected. However, the value can be adjusted to the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d or the second special symbol holding ball counter 203e of the main controller 110.

  When it is determined that the reserved ball count command has not been received (S2207: No), it is determined whether a winning command has been received (S2209). When it is determined that the winning command is received (S2209: Yes), the winning command process is executed (S2210). Details of the winning command process (S2210) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the winning command process (S2210). In the winning command processing (S2210), first, the information of the received winning command is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b (S2401). Here, the winning information command is configured to be able to identify the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the holding order (number of holding balls) and the result of winning/deciding in the normal gaming state ST1 can be determined. ing. Further, the values of various counters acquired at the time of winning the start prize are also configured by commands that can be discriminated.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the low probability gaming state (S2402). In the processing of S2402, when it is determined that the gaming state is not the low-probability gaming state (S2402: No), the process proceeds to S2405. On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming state is the low-probability gaming state (that is, the probability variation is not in progress) (S2402: Yes), whether or not there is information about the probability variation jackpot in the winning information storage area 223b provided in the RAM 223. It is determined (S2403). In the process of S2403, when it is determined that there is no information about the probability variation jackpot in the winning information storage area 223b (S2403: No), the processes of S2403 and S2404 are not executed, and the process directly proceeds to S2405. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is probability variation jackpot information in the winning information storage area 223b (S2403: Yes), the notification lottery process (S2404) is executed, and the process proceeds to S2405. The notification lottery process of S2404 will be described with reference to FIG. In the processing of S2405, other processing is executed (S2405), and the winning command processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the notification lottery process (S2404) will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this notification lottery process (S2404). In the notification lottery process (S2405), first, the value of the effect counter 223j provided in the RAM 223 is acquired (S2501). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the effect counter 223j is the determination value (S2502). In the process of S2502, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223j is not the determination value (S2502: No), this process is directly terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223j (counter in the range of 0 to 198) is the determination value (any of “0 to 50” in this embodiment) (S2502: Yes), the third A stop display mode command for displaying the characters "Stop firing!" for informing the symbol display device 81 to stop firing the game ball is set to the display control device 114 (S2503), and this processing is performed. To finish.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the normal game state ST1, when the probability variation jackpot, that is, the jackpot information of the jackpot A, is received, a lottery is executed as to whether or not to notify the player of stopping the firing. Here, when shifting from the normal game state ST1 to the latent probability variation game state ST2, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to be short, and the game method with the second special symbol is the main game method (the second special symbol is the actual variation target). ). However, when the jackpot A is won in the normal game state ST1, if the reserved ball for the first special symbol is stored, the lottery disadvantageous to the player is executed with the first special symbol even during the latent probability change game state ST2. Will be done. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, when the suspension to win the jackpot A in the normal game state ST1 is stored, the notification for stopping the firing of the game ball is executed by the lottery, so that the player can play the game ball at an early timing. Can be stopped, and winning of the winning in the first starting opening 630 can be suppressed. In addition, the player can recognize that the jackpot A will be achieved at an early stage by being informed that the launch has been stopped, and thus can provide various effects of the game.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the game ball launch stop notification is performed by lottery, but it may be configured to notify when the jackpot A holding ball is stored.

  Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After executing the winning command process (FIG. 58, S2210), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S2209: No), it is determined whether the state command has been received (S2211). When it is determined that the status command is received (S2211: Yes), the status command reception process (S2212) is executed. Details of this status command reception processing (S2212) will be described with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, a state command reception process (S2212) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the state command reception process (S2212).

  In the state command reception process (S2212), first, it is determined whether or not the game state is changed based on the state command received from the main control device 110 (S2601). The determination as to whether the gaming state has been changed is performed by comparing the gaming state information set in the sub-state setting area 223k with the received gaming state. When it is determined that the game state is changed (S2601: Yes), the process proceeds to S2602. In the process of S2602, it is determined whether or not to change the game state to the normal game state ST1 (that is, the time saving game state ST1h) (S2602). When it is determined to change the game state to the normal game state ST1 (that is, the time saving game state ST1h) (S2602: Yes), the main display area setting command corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is set (S2603). Here, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol in the first display area Dm, the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol in the second display area Dn ("○ ×" in the present embodiment) is displayed. As described above, a display command for instructing the display control device 114 is set. A display command for displaying the characters of "lower bound zone" indicating the normal game state ST1 on the third symbol display device 81 is set to the display control device 114 (S2604). Then, the process of S2612 is executed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2602, when it is determined that the game state has been changed to a state other than the normal game state ST1 (S2602: No), the game state is changed to the latent probability variation game state ST2 (probability variation electric support-free game state). Whether or not it is determined (S2605). In the processing of S2605, when it is determined that the gaming state has been changed to the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 (S2605: Yes), the main display area setting command corresponding to the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 is set (S2606). Here, the display control device 114 is instructed to display the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol in the first display area Dm and the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol in the second display area Dn. The display command to be set is set. Further, a holding symbol indicating the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is displayed in the sub display area Ds, and a holding symbol indicating the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is set to be displayed in the second sub display area Dt. It

  Next, in the hold 1 of the first special symbol, it is determined from the winning information storage area 223b whether or not the hold information in which the jackpot E is confirmed is stored (S2607). When the holding information that the holding 1 of the special figure 1 is other than the jackpot E is stored (S2607: No), the characters indicating the heaven zone (see FIG. 62(b)) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display command to be set is set (S2608). Then, the process of S2612 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hold 1 of the first special symbol is the big hit E (S2607: Yes), the display command for displaying the character indicating the chance zone on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S2609). .. Then, the process of S2612 is executed. By the processing of S2607 and S2609, the jackpot E occurs immediately after the transition to the latent probability change state ST2, and when the game shifts to the time saving game state ST1h, it is possible to prevent the display of the heaven zone from being displayed. It can prevent (suppress) excessive discouragement.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2605, when it is determined that the game state has transitioned to a game state other than the latent probability variation game state ST2 (that is, the probability variation game state ST3) (S2605: No), the probability variation game state ST3 (game with probability variation power support). The main display area setting command corresponding to (state) is set to the display control device 114 (S2610). Here, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol in the first display area Dm, the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol in the second display area Dn (the symbol of the treasure box in the present embodiment (FIG. 9A)). (See (b))) is set, a display command is set to instruct the display control device 114 to display.

  Then, a display command for displaying the characters of the chance zone on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S2611). Then, the process of S2612 is executed. In the process of S2612, the state of the gaming state indicated by the received state command is set in the secondary state setting area 223k (S2612). Then, this process is completed.

  Meanwhile, returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After executing the status command reception process (S2212), it is determined whether or not a notification command is received (S2213). In the process of S2213, when it is determined that the notification command is received (S2213: Yes), the voice/lamp notification mode indicated by the received command is set (S2214), and the display corresponding to the notification mode indicated by the received command is set. A command is set (S2215), and this processing ends. By the processing of S2214, for example, based on the notification command indicating the emission abnormality set and transmitted in the above-described through-gate passage processing (see FIG. 42), the notification sound indicating the emission abnormality (“Please hit left!”). Is output). Further, by the processing of S2215, for example, based on the notification command indicating the emission abnormality transmitted and set in the above-mentioned through-gate passage processing (see FIG. 42), the display indicating the emission abnormality (“Please hit left! Character) is output to the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S2213, when it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S2213: No), the process according to the other command is executed (S2219), and this process ends.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S2112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S2112). The variable display setting process (FIG. 61, S2112) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variable display setting process (FIG. 61, S2112) is performed on the first or special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Based on this, a variable pattern command for display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is generated, and a process of transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop type (big hit A to big hit E), a process of setting a special display type for display 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (FIG. 59, S2112), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2701). If it is determined that the special figure 1 variation start flag 223e is off (S2701: No), it means that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, so the process of S2705 is executed. Move to. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S2701: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off (S2702).

  Next, in the process of S2703, the variation pattern in the variable display effect of the first special symbol extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command in the process of S2203 of the command determination process (FIG. 54, S2111) is stored in the other memory area of the RAM 223. Obtained from 223z, the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol is generated (S2703). The variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is configured to be distinguishable from the variation pattern command for display corresponding to the first special symbol or the variation pattern command of the second special symbol. Specifically, if the high-order 2 bits of the high-order byte of the display variation pattern command having a 2-byte structure is "10", it indicates that it corresponds to the first special symbol, and if "01", the second special symbol. Is configured to indicate that

  The variable pattern command for display of the first special symbol set in the process of S2703 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed by the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 53). Is transmitted to the control device 114 for use. In the display control device 114, by receiving the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the special pattern corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbols is performed.

  With the setting of the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set variation pattern command for display is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the reserved ball of the first special symbol). In accordance with the display setting), the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c is decremented by 1 (S2704).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation start flag 223f provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2705). When it is determined that the special figure 2 variation start flag 223f is not on (that is, it is off) (S2705: No), the state where the special figure 2 variation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110. Therefore, the processing of S2709 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is on (S2705: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set to off (S2706). In the processing of S2302 of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (FIG. 55, S2205), the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display effect of the second special symbol extracted from the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is acquired from the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223. Then, the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol is generated (S2707).

  The variable pattern command for display of the second special symbol set in the process of S2707 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed by the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 53). Is transmitted to the control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol, the special pattern corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the second special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbols is performed.

  With the setting of the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set variation pattern command for display is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the reserved ball of the second special symbol). In accordance with the display setting), the value of the second special symbol holding sphere number counter 223d is decremented by 1 (S2708).

  Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to ON (S2709). When it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i are not set to ON (that is, OFF) (S2709: No), this process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is on (S2709: Yes), the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is on. In addition, when the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to OFF and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to ON, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to OFF (S2710). ).

  In the processing of S2206 of the command determination processing (FIG. 54, S2111), the stop type extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command is set (S2711). When the set stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, based on the stop type, the stop type (whether it is 15R probability variation big hit, 15R normal big hit) to the display control device 114. A special display 1 stop type command for display for notification is generated. If the set stop type is the stop type of the second special symbol, based on the stop type, the display control device 114 has a stop type (whether it is a 15R certainty jackpot or a 15R normal jackpot). ) A special display 2 stop type command for display is generated to notify () (S2712). It should be noted that the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command notified from the main control device 110 notifies the big hit type when a big hit occurs, and notifies even if the determination result is out of order. To be done. If the determination result is out, the stop type is not referred, and the out symbol is set.

  With such a configuration, the voice lamp control device 113 controls the display control device 114 so as to variably display both the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time. You can

  Thus, in the present embodiment, based on the transition of the game state, by switching the special symbol that sets a long variation time in the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the player plays the game. It is configured to control the special symbols that are possible. Then, in the latent probability variation state ST2, since only the jackpot which becomes the high probability game state (latent probability variation game state ST2 or probability variation game state ST3) is set to be drawn by the second special symbol given at the time of the jackpot, Even after the jackpot is executed, the high-probability game state (latent probability variation game state ST2 or probability variation game state ST3) is set again. Therefore, for the player, when the latent probability variation game state ST2 is entered, the probability variation state can be set until at least two big hits are executed. Therefore, the player can recognize that if the latent probability variation game state ST2 is reached, the jackpot is guaranteed twice.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the electric accessory 632 is not operated, 85% of the right-handed game ball is configured to win the second starting opening 640. Further, in the latent probability variation game state ST2, the second special symbol is set to win the small hit, and the lottery probability is that about 15% of the game balls hit to the right are small hit games as prize balls for the player. It is set with the probability that it will be paid out. Therefore, the operation frequency of the electric accessory 632 is set low (non-electric power support state), even in the latent probability variation game, the game is performed in a state in which the decrease of the player's possession ball is suppressed when the right-handed game is performed. be able to.

  Furthermore, when the latent probability variation game state ST2 is a big hit with the second special symbol, the probability transition to the probability variation game state ST3 with a probability of 66%. Here, in the probability variation game state ST3, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to be long and the variation time of the first special symbol is set to be short. Then, when the big jackpot with the first special symbol, either the jackpot which is shifted to the probability variation gaming state ST3 again or the jackpot which is shifted to the normal gaming state ST1 is given by lottery. Therefore, the player can play the game with the expectation that he can win the jackpot twice again. Further, by providing a case where the probability variation game state ST3 is shifted to the normal game state ST1, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high. Incidentally, in the probability variation gaming state ST3, by a big hit based on the first special symbol, the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 or the normal gaming state ST1 may be shifted to. As a result, the player plays the game with the expectation of shifting from the probability variation game state ST3 to the latent probability variation game state ST2 in which the jackpot can be obtained twice again, so that the player's interest can be improved.

  Furthermore, in the normal gaming state ST1, when the jackpot is hit mainly with the first special symbol that is mainly played, the lottery ratio of the jackpot A to which the latent probability variation game state ST2 is given is set lower than that of the jackpot B. , It is possible to increase the difficulty level of shifting to the latent probability variation game state ST2 and suppress the increase in gambling.

  In the present embodiment, the gaming state is configured to be switched when the jackpot game is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming state can be switched depending on the jackpot type when the jackpot game is won. You may comprise. With this configuration, the small hits are more easily drawn than the big hits, so that the gaming state can be switched more frequently. Therefore, it is possible to switch to an advantageous gaming state by winning a small hit even when the player is in a gaming state that is unfavorable, and it is possible to expect the player to win a small hit. In addition, even when an advantageous game state is set, it is possible to switch to a game state that is disadvantageous to the player by making a small hit, and it is possible to suppress gambling.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 86. First, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65. 64 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 65 is an enlarged view of the right side region of the game board 13.

  The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the second variable winning device 650 is provided on the upper right side of the game board 13 as viewed from the front, and the ball guiding path forming member 70 is the right side area of the game board 13 as viewed from the front. And the point that the lower right decoration member 71 is provided on the lower right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, and the second starting port 640 is accompanied by the second ordinary electric auditors object 640a. The point provided on the side, the point that the first variable winning device 65 is attached to the lower right decoration member 71, and the normal symbol starting opening (through) instead of the first normal symbol starting opening 67a and the second normal symbol starting opening 67b. The difference is that the gate) 670 is provided on the lower side when viewed from the front of the game board 13 and the right first starting opening 631 is deleted. The same parts as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 64, in addition to the first embodiment, the game board 13 is configured by assembling a ball guide path forming member 70, a lower right decoration member 71, and the like. The first starting port 630, the second starting port 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, It is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with wood screws or the like. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The points added to the first embodiment regarding the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG. 64.

  A through gate 670 is provided on the right side of the game board 13. The through gate 670 is composed of a starting opening having a gate type sensor that can detect passage of a game ball. When a game ball passes through the through gate 670, a lottery for normal symbols (second symbol) is performed. In the lottery performed for the game ball passing through the through gate 670, it is determined whether or not the winning symbol is a normal symbol.

  When the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is drawn, the variable symbol of the ordinary symbol is started to be displayed on the second symbol display device 83 provided in the variable display device unit 80 (see FIG. 2), and "○" and " After the “X” symbols are alternately turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the normal symbols (“O” or “X” symbols in the present embodiment) indicating the lottery result are stopped (lit).

  When it is determined that the winning symbol is a normal symbol, the symbol “◯”, which is a symbol indicating that the lottery of the ordinary symbol was a winning symbol, is lit and displayed on the second symbol display device 83. When the winning symbol is displayed, the second ordinary electric accessory 640a associated with the second starting opening 640 operates for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). The second ordinary electric role 640a is maintained in an upright state so as to regulate the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 640 in the normal state (non-operating state), while the second ordinary electric role By operating the object 640a, the second ordinary electric auditors product 640a rotates clockwise by a predetermined angle (40 degrees in this embodiment), and a state in which a game ball is allowed to enter the second starting opening 640 (special state ) Is configured to be. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is off, the symbol "x", which is a symbol indicating that the lottery for the normal symbol is out, is lit and displayed on the second symbol display device 83. At this time, the second ordinary electric accessory 640a is not operated, and the next variation of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in the lottery performed for the entrance to the first start opening 630 and the second start opening 640, the jackpot determination is made as well as the jackpot type determination. Also do. The jackpot type will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 74, but as the jackpot type determined here, eight types of jackpot A to jackpot H are available as jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1). It is set (see FIG. 74). These eight kinds of jackpot types are long and short interval time (1 second or 4 seconds), availability of V operation, and presence or absence of electric support after the jackpot game (whether to make the second ordinary electric accessory 640a a special state easily. Or not) is set in combination with each other.

  Here, the length of the interval time means that the game ball is brought to a predetermined timing (probability change switch) to the first variable winning a prize device 65 provided with a special discharge port (specific area) 65e2 (see FIG. 6) provided with a probability change switch 65e3. It is the length of the interval time set to change whether or not (easy or difficult) it is possible to guide the vehicle at a timing when it can pass 65e3.

  Although detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG. 80, in the present embodiment, an interval time between specific rounds during the jackpot game (a round in which the second variable winning device 650 performs an opening/closing operation (in the present embodiment, 4R) and the round in which the first variable winning device 65 opens and closes (5R in the present embodiment) is changed, so that the game ball reaches the first variable winning device 65. Whether the game ball can pass to the probability change switch 65e3 provided in the first variable winning device 65 depending on the timing when the game ball reaches the first variable winning device 65 (easy or difficult Or) can be set.

  Whether or not the V operation is possible is whether or not the gaming ball that has won in the first variable winning device 65 can pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 (see FIG. 6) provided in the special discharge port 65e2 (see FIG. 6) (easy or difficult). If the V operation is possible, the game ball that has won in the first variable winning device 65 is set to be able to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3, while the V operation is not possible. In this case, the game ball that has won the first variable winning device 65 is set to be unable (difficult) to pass the probability variation switch 65e3. The detailed content is the same as that of the first embodiment described above, and therefore the description thereof is omitted. However, in the present embodiment, the operation of the switching member 65h (see FIG. 6) provided in the first variable winning a prize device 65. It is configured that whether or not the V operation can be set by controlling the.

  In the present embodiment, whether or not the V operation is set by driving and controlling the switching member 65h may be set as long as it is possible to set whether or not the game ball can pass the probability variation switch 65e3, for example, A lid member that is constantly opened and closed at a constant interval is provided on the upstream side of the passage having the probability variation winning switch 65e3, and a stopper member that retains game balls is provided further upstream of the lid member. Then, only when the timing when the stopper member is released matches the timing when the lid member is opened, the game ball may be allowed to pass through the probability variation winning switch 65e3. By using such a configuration, it becomes possible for the player to understand that the lid member is regularly opened, and the player is allowed to win the game ball into the first specific winning opening 65. If so, it is possible to think that there is a possibility that the probability variation switch 65e3 may be passed, and it is possible to increase the motivation for the game.

  In addition, by changing the opening time (opening timing) of the lower attacker (opening/closing door) 65f1 for opening the first specific winning opening 65a to make it difficult for the game ball to win in the first variable winning device 65, It may be possible to set whether or not the ball can pass the probability change switch 65e3.

  The presence/absence of electric support is for setting whether or not the second ordinary electric accessory 640a is likely to be operated in a special state (electric support state) after the jackpot game is over.

  Further, in the present embodiment, similar to the first special symbol, eight types of jackpot A to jackpot H are set as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) (see FIG. 74).

  Here, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are arranged as the variable winning devices that are operated in the open state during the jackpot game. The first variable winning a prize device 65 is provided on the lower side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 64), and in the specific round during the jackpot game (fifth round in the present embodiment), the first specific winning port 65a is in a predetermined period ( In this embodiment, 29 seconds) or a predetermined number (10 balls in this embodiment) of the game balls are operated so as to be opened (see FIG. 80(b)).

  On the other hand, the second variable winning device 650 is provided on the upper side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 64), and is a round other than the specific round during the jackpot game (the first to fourth rounds and the sixth to seventh rounds in this embodiment). In, the second specific winning opening 650a is operated to be opened until a predetermined period (30 seconds in the present embodiment) or a predetermined number (10 balls in the present embodiment) of game balls are entered.

  Returning to FIG. 64, the description will be continued. On the right side of the game board 13, a ball guide path forming member 70 for guiding a game ball shot by a right-handed game is attached to the surface of the game board 13 with screws. The ball guide path forming member 70 is an opening 70a that is an opening through which a game ball shot by a right-handed game can pass, and a plurality of guides that guide the game ball that has passed through the opening 70a to meander and flow down. Members (first guide member (first guide surface) 70b, second guide member (second guide surface) 70c, third guide member (third guide surface) 70d), and a game ball flowing down the third guide member 70d. And a discharge section 70e for discharging the are combined and configured as one unit.

  With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the positional relationship between the position where the game ball passes (the positions of the opening 70a and the discharge part 70e) and the member (each guide member) that guides the game ball shifts. In addition to the above, it is possible to suppress the problem that the positional relationship between the guide members is deviated, and it is possible to improve the manufacturing efficiency in the process of manufacturing the pachinko machine 10.

  Below the ball guide path forming member 70, a lower right decorative member 71 including the first variable winning device 65 is attached to the surface of the game board 13 with screws. The lower right decoration member 71 is a fourth guide member (fourth guide surface) 71a that receives the game ball rolling on the third guide member 70d of the ball guide path forming member 70, a first variable winning device 65, The decorative portion 71b is assembled and configured as one unit.

  A decoration lamp (light emitting means) (not shown) is provided in the decoration portion 71b, and it is possible to emphasize that the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is open during the big hit game. Has been done. Specifically, the surface of the decoration portion 71b (the surface visible to the player) is configured by a half mirror, and when the decoration lamp is in the off state, it becomes difficult to see the inside of the first variable winning a prize device, and the first identification. When the winning port 65a is opened, the decoration lamp is turned on and the inside of the first variable winning device is visible.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player easily notice that the player is in the game state aiming at the first specific winning opening 65a, and not in the game state or in the normal game state (during a big jackpot game). In a non-gaming state), it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing (difficulty) the structure inside the first variable winning a prize device 65, and thus, a fraudulent act (for example, a jig dedicated to the first specific winning hole 65a). It is possible to make it difficult to perform the operation of inserting the switch and deforming the switching member.

  Returning to FIG. 64, the description will be continued. In the right side area of the game board 13, a ball guiding path 72 is formed by the above-mentioned ball guiding area forming member 70 and the fourth guiding member 71a. The ball guide path 72 is configured so that the game ball meanders, and a specific configuration will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 65 is an enlarged front view of the right side area of the game board 13. Here, the flow of the game ball in the ball guide path 72 will be described. First, the game ball that has passed through the opening 70a is received by the first guide member 70b. The first guide member 70b is assembled so as to be inclined toward the lower right direction in the front view of the game board 13, and the game ball flows down (rolls) downward on the first guide member 70b. The lower end of the first guide member 70b is assembled so as to face the second guide member 70c, and the game ball that has flowed down the first guide member 70b falls onto the second guide member 70c.

  The second guide member 70c is assembled so as to be inclined toward the lower left direction in the front view of the game board 13, and the game ball flows down (rolls) on the second guide member 70c in the lower left direction. The lower end of the second guide member 70c is assembled so as to face the third guide member 70d, and the game ball that has flowed down the second guide member 70c falls onto the third guide member 70d.

  The third guiding member 70d is assembled so as to be inclined toward the lower right direction in the front view of the game board 13, and the game ball flows down (rolls) downward on the third guiding member 70d. The lower end of the third guiding member 70d is assembled so as to face the fourth guiding member 71a, and the game ball flowing down the third guiding member 70d passes through the discharging portion 70e and is placed on the fourth guiding member 71a. To fall.

  Then, the fourth guide member 71a is attached to the game board 13 so as to be inclined toward the lower left direction in a front view of the game board, and the game ball flows downward (rolls) on the fourth guide member 71a in the lower left direction. ) Do. The lower end of the fourth guiding member 71a is configured to communicate with the opening/closing door 65f1 (see FIG. 6) of the first variable winning device 65, and when the first specific winning port 65a is closed, the fourth guiding member 71a is closed. The game ball flowing down the member 71a flows down (rolls) on the opening/closing door 65f1 and is discharged to the lower region of the game board 13 (the region where the through gate 670 and the second starting opening 640 are arranged). Composed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the ball guiding path 72 is configured so that the game ball meanders. Therefore, the time required for the game ball to pass through the ball guiding path 72 (guide path passing time) is meandering. It becomes possible to set it longer than the case where it is not set.

  Further, each of the guiding members that form the ball guiding path 72 is configured such that the inclination angle becomes gradually smaller from the upstream side. Specifically, the first guiding member 70b and the second guiding member 70c are set to about 20 degrees, the third guiding member 70d is set to about 10 degrees, and the fourth guiding member 71a is set to about 5 degrees.

  With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the flow velocity of the game ball on the downstream side of the ball guiding path 72, and to open and close the fourth guiding member 71a and the rolling surface of the fourth guiding member 71a. A plurality of game balls can be stayed (rolled) on the door 65f1 at the same time.

  Therefore, when the first specific winning opening 65a is opened, it is possible to win a plurality of game balls in a short period of time.

  Further, in the present embodiment, between the guide members, the game ball is configured to drop on the inclined surface that is inclined in the direction opposite to the flow direction, so that the flow speed of the game ball can be efficiently reduced. It is possible.

  In this embodiment, in order to simultaneously retain (roll) a plurality of game balls on the downstream side of the ball guide path 72, the inclination angle of the guide member is made gentle, and the flow speed of the game balls is reduced. However, other configurations may be adopted. For example, a material having a high friction coefficient (urethane or the like) may be attached to the game ball rolling surface of the guide member to reduce the flow rate of the game ball. Further, the guide member (fourth guide member 71a) provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path 72 and the game ball rolling surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 meander in the depth direction (horizontal direction) when viewed from the front of the game board 13. You may. Even if such a configuration is adopted, the same effect can be obtained.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent a step from being formed between the guide surface of the fourth guide member 71a and the surface (guide surface) of the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65, the fourth guide is provided. The member 71a is provided on the lower right decoration member 71 which is formed separately from the ball guiding path forming member 70. With this configuration, for example, when the ball guiding path configuration of the pachinko machine 10 is adopted for the pachinko machine 10 in which the shape of the first variable winning device 65 is slightly changed, the fourth guiding member 71a is used. Only by changing the shape corresponding to the shape of the first variable winning device 65, the ball guiding path forming member 70 can be used. That is, there is an effect that the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  Next, the opening 70a of the above-described ball guiding path 72 is located below the second variable winning a prize device 650, and the second specific winning port 650a of the second variable award winning device 650 is open (the attacker 650b is open). In the operated state, the game ball is configured so that it cannot pass (difficult) through the opening 70a.

  In addition, although detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG. 67, in the present embodiment, a period (opening period, interval period) of closing the second specific winning port 650a of the second variable winning a prize device 650 during the jackpot game. By changing the length, the game ball that has passed through the ball guide path 72, the first variable winning device at the timing when the game ball can pass the probability change switch 65e3 by the operation of the switching member 65h of the first variable winning device 65. It is possible to control whether or not to win 65.

  In the present embodiment, the two variable winning devices are arranged vertically apart from each other, and the ball guiding path 72 is provided between them (between the paths along which the game balls flow down). The game balls that have passed through without winning the winning device 650) reach the lower variable winning device (first variable winning device 65), but the time is set to be delayed. Other configurations may be used. For example, a plurality of variable winning devices may be provided in the left-right direction, and the ball guiding path 72 may be provided between them.

  Also, a plurality of variable winning devices and the ball guiding path 72 between them may be assembled as one unit. With this configuration, there is an effect that the assembling work to the game board 13 can be facilitated and the manufacturing efficiency can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as the ball guide path 72, a configuration in which the game ball meanders in the left and right direction of the game board is used, but if the time for which the game ball passes the ball guide path 72 is set to a predetermined time or more, Other configurations may be used. For example, the path may be meandered in the depth direction (horizontal direction) of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, or the game balls may be three-dimensionally meandered using both the left-right direction and the depth direction.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the distance that the game ball flows down the time when the game ball passes through the right side area of the game board 13 (the time when the game ball flows down from the second variable winning device 650 to the first variable winning device 65). Is extended or a configuration in which the speed at which the game ball flows down is delayed is used to realize extension for a predetermined time or longer, but other methods may be used. For example, a regulation member that regulates the flow down of the game sphere is provided in the ball guiding path 72, and the regulation member is electrically driven at all times or at regular intervals to set the time for the game sphere to pass through the ball guiding path 72. You may make it the structure made to be more than predetermined time. By using the electrically driven restricting member in this way, it is possible to more reliably make the time for passing through the ball guiding path longer than a predetermined time.

  In the second embodiment, a game ball is difficult to win in the first starting port 630 during a right-handed game, but like the first embodiment described above, the first starting port is located in the right side area of the game board 13. 631 may be provided.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, a flow of setting various game states in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a flow in which various game states are set. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a limit (100 times) to the number of electric support provided in the probability variation game state ST3 with respect to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, and a flow in which various game states are set. Are different. Since the other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the transition rate of the high-probability game state or the low-probability state after the jackpot game is finished, the type of special symbol (first special symbol, two types of second special symbol) and the gaming state (normal gaming state) It is different from the above-described first embodiment in that a total of eight types can be set by a combination of ST1, a time saving game state ST1h, a latent probability variation game state ST2, and a probability variation game state ST3). Detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG.

  First, the flow of setting various game states in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 and 66. In the normal game state ST1, first, a left-handed game is performed in which the first starting opening 630 (see FIG. 64) provided in the lower center of the game board 13 is aimed at. During the normal game state ST1, the first special symbol is the subject of substantial variation, and specifically, in the normal game state ST1, the variation time of the first special symbol game is 8000 ms (8 seconds) to 30000 ms (30 seconds). Time is selected, and 600,000 ms (10 minutes) is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol game (see FIG. 76). By configuring in this way, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol start changing at the same time in the normal gaming state ST1, by the time the second special symbol finishes changing once, the first special symbol Since the symbol can be changed a plurality of times (minimum 20 times in this embodiment), the first special symbol can be substantially changed.

  Then, during the normal gaming state ST1, when the jackpot in the first lottery game of the first special symbol (special diagram 1), jackpot B (7R normal jackpot: no electric support) and jackpot D (7R normal jackpot: electric support available) ) And jackpot E (7R probability variation jackpot: with electric support) and jackpot H (7R regular hit: without electric support) are selected.

  Here, if you win the jackpot in the first lottery game during the normal gaming state ST1, the probability of transitioning to the high-probability gaming state (hidden probability variation gaming state ST2 or probability variation gaming state ST3) after the jackpot is set to 50%. And, the probability of transitioning to the low probability state (normal game state ST1 or time saving game state ST1h) is set to 50%, and if the jackpot B, D, H is won in the first lottery game, after the jackpot game is over If the normal gaming state ST1 is set again and the jackpot E is won in the first lottery game, the probability variation gaming state ST3 is set after the jackpot game is over.

  As described above in the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which the jackpot probability does not shift to a high probability unless the gaming ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot game. Even if you win the jackpot E in the lottery game, if the gaming ball does not pass the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, the probability variation game state ST3 is not set, and the probability variation game state ST3 (high probability: with electric support) is a jackpot. When the probability becomes low, the game will be shifted to the short game state ST1h (low probability: electric support is available).

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even if the same jackpot type is won, depending on the result of the game during the jackpot game (the result of whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed during the jackpot game) The game state to be moved after the end may be different, but when explaining the flow of setting various game states, the game state that can be changed according to the jackpot type (shifts by performing the game normally) The game state) will be described as a transition destination after the jackpot game is over.

  In the normal game state ST1, if the second lottery game is played, it is set not to shift to the high-probability game state after the jackpot game, but to shift to the 100% low-probability state (see FIG. 74). ). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the second lottery game from being illegally played during the normal game state ST1.

  Next, during the normal gaming state ST1, the probability variation gaming state ST3 that shifts with a probability of 50% when the jackpot is won in the first lottery game will be described. In the probability variation game state ST3, a right-handed game is performed in which the second starting opening 640 (see FIG. 64) provided on the right side of the game board 13 is aimed. During the probability variation game state ST3, the second special symbol is the target of the actual variation, and specifically, in the probability variation game state ST3, the variation time of 600,000 ms (10 minutes) is selected as the variation time of the first special symbol game, As a variation time of the second special symbol game, 500 ms (0.5 seconds) is configured to be selected (see FIG. 78). In this way, by lengthening the variation time of the first special symbol and making the variation time of the second special symbol shorter than the variation time of the first special symbol, it is possible to make the second special symbol a target of substantial variation. ..

  Then, during the probability variation game state ST3, when the jackpot in the second lottery game of the second special symbol (special diagram 2), the jackpot E (7R: high probability: electric support is available) and the jackpot F (7R: high probability: Either no electric support) or a big hit G (7R: low probability: with electric support) is selected.

  Here, if you win the jackpot in the second lottery game in the probability variation gaming state ST3, after the jackpot is over, the probability of transitioning to a high-probability gaming state (hidden probability variation gaming state ST2 or probability variation gaming state ST3) is set to 70%. And, the probability of shifting to a low probability state (normal game state ST1 or time saving game state ST1h) is set to 30%, and if the jackpot E is won in the second lottery game, after the jackpot game ends, the probability variation game state When ST3 is set again and the jackpot F is won in the second lottery game, the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 is set after the jackpot game is over. When the big hit G is won in the second lottery game, the time saving game state ST1h is set.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that the power support is ended when the total number of fluctuations of the first lottery game and the second lottery game in the probability variation game state ST3 reaches 100 times. Therefore, when the special symbol variation exceeds 100 times in the probability variation gaming state ST3, the process shifts to the latent probability variation gaming state ST2.

  In the probability variation game state ST3, if the first lottery game is performed, the ratio of shifting to the high-probability game state after the jackpot game is set to 10%, and the ratio of shifting to the low-probability state after the jackpot game. Is set to 90% (see FIG. 74).

  Next, the latent probability variation game state ST2 that shifts by 10% when the jackpot is won in the second lottery game in the probability variation game state ST3 will be described. In the latent probability variation game state ST2, a right-handed game is performed in which the second starting opening 640 (see FIG. 64) provided on the right side of the game board 13 is aimed. During the latent probability variation game state ST2, the second special symbol is the target of the actual variation, and specifically, in the latent probability variation game state ST2, the variation time of 600,000 ms (10 minutes) is selected as the variation time of the first special symbol game. , 500ms (0.5 seconds) is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol game (see FIG. 78). In this way, by lengthening the variation time of the first special symbol and making the variation time of the second special symbol shorter than the variation time of the first special symbol, it is possible to make the second special symbol an actual variation target. ..

  Then, in the latent probability variation game state ST2, when the jackpot in the second lottery game of the second special symbol (special diagram 2), jackpot E (7R: high probability: with electric support) and jackpot F (7R: high probability) : No power support) is selected.

  Here, if you win the jackpot in the second lottery game during the probability variation gaming state ST3, after the jackpot is finished, the probability of transitioning to a high-probability gaming state (hidden probability variation gaming state ST2 or probability variation gaming state ST3) is set to 100%. It is set so as not to shift to a low probability state (normal game state ST1 or time saving game state ST1h), and when the jackpot E is won in the second lottery game, after the jackpot game ends, the probability variation game state When ST3 is set and the jackpot F is won in the second lottery game, the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 is set again after the jackpot game is over.

  Next, the time saving game state ST1h will be described. In the time saving game state ST1h, a left hitting game is performed in which the first starting opening 630 (see FIG. 64) provided in the center of the game board 13 is aimed at. During the time saving game state ST1h, the first special symbol is the target of the actual variation, and specifically, in the time saving game state ST1h, the variation time of 600,000 ms (10 minutes) is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol game, As a variation time of one special symbol, 1000 ms (1 second) to 30000 ms (30 seconds) is configured to be selected (see FIG. 77). In this way, by lengthening the variation time of the first special symbol and making the variation time of the second special symbol shorter than the variation time of the first special symbol, it is possible to make the second special symbol an actual variation target. .

  Then, during the time saving game state ST1h, when the jackpot is achieved in the first lottery game of the first special symbol (special diagram 1), the jackpot A (7R: low probability: no electric support) and the jackpot C (7R: low probability: One of the big hit E (7R: high probability: with electric support) and the big hit F (7R: high probability: without electric support) is selected (see FIG. 75).

  Here, if you win the jackpot in the first lottery game during the time saving game state ST1h, after the jackpot is over, the probability of moving to a high probability game state (hidden probability variation gaming state ST2 or probability variation gaming state ST3) is set to 95% And, the probability of transitioning to a low probability state (normal game state ST1 or time saving game state ST1h) is set to 5%, and if the big hits A and C are won in the first lottery game, after the big hit game is over, it is usually If the gaming state ST1 is set and the jackpot E is won in the first lottery game, the probability variation gaming state ST3 is set after the jackpot game is over, and if the jackpot F is won in the first lottery game, after the jackpot game is over. , The latent probability variation game state ST2 is set.

  In addition, as will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 75, the time saving game state ST1h is provided with electric support, and the second ordinary electric auditors accessory 640a attached to the second starting opening 640 is in a special game state in a gaming state. However, as mentioned above, during the time saving game state ST1h, the first special symbol is the target of the actual change, and since the change of the second special symbol is a long change, during the time saving game state ST1h, the second starting opening A game aiming at 640 is a very inefficient game. Further, since the second starting port 640 has one prize ball of the game ball set, even if a right hitting game is performed during the time saving game state ST1h and a game ball is won in the second starting port 640. The number of payouts does not increase, therefore, in the time saving game state ST1h, the same game (left-handed game) as the substantially normal game state ST1 is performed.

  The flow of setting various game states of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has been described above. Here, the main game characteristics (transition of various game states) of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 66. To do.

  First, in the normal gaming state ST1, the jackpot E is won in the first lottery game to aim at the probability variation gaming state ST3 (sorting 50%). Next, in the probability variation game state ST3, while the second lottery game is performed, the jackpot F is won to aim for the latent game state ST2 (sorting 10%). Alternatively, the special symbol game is performed 100 times without making a big hit, and the aim is to shift to the latent game state ST2 by ending the electric support.

  In the probability variation game state ST3, the probability variation game state ST3 is set again after the jackpot game is over, and since 60% of the total jackpots account for the entire jackpot, the latent probability variation game state ST2 is obtained while winning balls by the jackpot. The goal is to make the transition.

  In addition, the probability variation game state ST3 is configured such that a small hit is won as a lottery result of the second lottery game and the small hit game is performed so that the player can play the game without reducing the number of balls he has.

  Next, in the latent probability variation gaming state ST2, after the jackpot game is over, the jackpot in which the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 is set again occupies 90% of the entire jackpot. This latent probability variation game state ST2 is a game state in which the player can expect the most payout in the pachinko machine 10. Although a detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 80, the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 is configured to be able to obtain more payouts than the probability variation gaming state ST3 by repeating the small hit game. .. That is, during the latent probability variation game state ST2, it is possible to increase the number of balls in the small hit game and the big hit game, and to repeat (loop) the same mode with a 90% probability after the big hit game is finished. It is configured.

  In addition, the probability probability change gaming state ST2 has a high probability game state transition rate of the second lottery game of 100%, and even if the remaining probability 10% is won instead of 90% which loops the probability probability variation game state ST2. It just shifts to the game state ST3. In other words, in the latent probability variation gaming state ST2, the jackpot can be won at least twice (ST2→ST3, ST3→ST1h twice) in the high probability gaming state.

  Lastly, the time saving game state ST1h is a game state set when a transition (fall) from a high-probability state to a low-probability state, and the number of times the special symbol changes is a predetermined number (100 times in this embodiment). ) Is a game state in which electric support is provided until. At this time, the short-time gaming state ST1 is set to have a higher rate of transition to the high-probability gaming state after the jackpot is over than the normal gaming state, and when the jackpot is won in the first lottery game during the short-time gaming state ST1, it is high. The ratio of shifting to the probability game state is set to 95% (probability variation game state ST3 is 70% and latent game state ST2 is 25%). Then, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol exceeds 100 times, the normal game state ST1 is entered.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) and gaming state (normal gaming state ST1, time saving gaming state ST1h, latent probability variation gaming state ST2, probability variation gaming state ST3) Since it is configured so that a plurality of ratios of transitioning to the high probability game state after the jackpot game can be set based on the special jackpot that can be changed in accordance with the game state, the special symbol that is the actual variation target, in the normal game state ST1 When the second lottery game that is not a target of substantial change is played, it is possible to extremely reduce the rate of transition to the high-probability game state (0% in this embodiment). With this configuration, even if an improper game (illegal game) is performed, it does not shift to a state advantageous to the player (high-probability gaming state), so an illegal game targeting the pachinko machine 10 can be performed. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the actual variation target of the latent probability variation gaming state ST2, which is a high-probability gaming state, is the second lottery game in which the second special symbol varies, and the lottery result of the second lottery game is a big hit only during the latent probability variation gaming state ST2. Since it is configured to shift to the high-probability game state 100% when it becomes, it is possible to make a big hit in the high-probability game state at least twice in a part of the high-probability game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with excellent game playability, and it is possible to improve the interest of the gaming machine.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, a control flow of various devices during the jackpot of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. 67 is a timing chart showing the flow of various devices executed from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. Of the operation controls of various devices, the description of the same operation controls as those of the above-described first embodiment will be omitted, and the details of other operation controls will be described later with reference to FIG.

  First, when the jackpot game is started, various devices (the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650) related to the jackpot game are operated a predetermined number of times at a predetermined timing by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 80). Then, based on various commands output from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the effect display corresponding to the big hit game on the third symbol display device 81.

  First, when the jackpot game is started, after a predetermined period t1 (opening period) has elapsed, the attacker (upper attacker) 650b is opened (turned on) to open the second specific winning port 650b of the second variable winning device 650. ). Then, the attacker (upper attacker) 650b is closed when a predetermined period (29 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses or a predetermined number of winnings (10 in the present embodiment) are satisfied. The period t2 in which the second specific winning opening 650b is in the open state is defined as one open period (round) and is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times (seven times in the present embodiment) in one jackpot game.

  In the present embodiment, the second specific winning opening 650a is always open during the opening period t2, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the second specific winning opening is closed and open during the opening period. The upper attacker 650b may be operated so as to repeat the state. Even when such a configuration is used, the opening period t2 is set when the predetermined period elapses or a predetermined number of winning conditions are satisfied after the second specific winning opening is first opened. It will end.

  Then, the next round is started after a predetermined period t3 (interval period) has elapsed since the end of one round. As shown in FIG. 80, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes a game in which the second specific winning port 650a of the second variable winning device is opened in the first round to the fourth round, and the fifth round is executed. A game is executed in which the eyes open the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65.

  Next, a flow between the fourth round and the fifth round in which the specific winning opening which is opened during the jackpot game is switched from the second specific winning opening 650a to the first specific winning opening 65a will be described. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that a predetermined period t4, which is a specific interval period between the fourth round and the fifth round, can be changed according to the gaming state (see FIG. 80). For example, the jackpots A to D have an interval period of 1 second, and the jackpots E to H have an interval period of 4 seconds.

  Here, the influence on the game by changing the specific interval period will be described. First, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game ball launched by the right-handed game aiming at the right side of the game board 13 passes through the closed second variable winning device 650, and then the ball is guided. By passing through the path 72, it is possible to win the first specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 64). The ball guide path 72 is designed so that the ball guide path transit time is 3 to 4 seconds.

  In addition, the switching member 65h of the first variable winning device 65 operates in such a manner that the game ball can pass the probability variation switch 65e3 at the same time as the first specific winning port 65a is opened (the attacker 65b is on) (V It is controlled so that the opening operation is turned on, and the mode (the state where the V opening operation is turned on) is continued for a predetermined period t5 (2 seconds in this embodiment), and after a predetermined period (V opening period) t5, a game is played. The sphere is controlled so as to operate (V opening operation is off) in a manner that the sphere cannot pass (difficult) through the probability variation switch 65e3.

  That is, during the jackpot game of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in order to pass the game ball to the probability variation switch 65e3, the specific interval period t4 and the V opening operation period (2 seconds) t5 are added to V. The effective period t6 needs to be longer than the sphere guidance route passage period (up to 4 seconds in this embodiment). Specifically, by setting the specific interval period t4 to 4 seconds, the V effective period t6, which is the sum of the specific interval period t4 (4 seconds) and the V open period t5 (2 seconds), is set to 6 seconds, and the ball guiding It is longer than the route passage period (up to 4 seconds). With this configuration, after the upper attacker 650a of the fourth round is turned off (after the game ball can pass through the ball guiding route 72), the game ball passing through the ball guiding route 72 is V effective. Within the period t6, the first specific winning opening 65a can be won and the probability variation switch 65e3 can be passed.

  On the other hand, if the V effective period t6 is set shorter than the ball guide route passage period, it becomes possible (difficult) for the game ball to win the first specific winning opening 65a within the V effective period t6. ..

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by changing the length of the specific interval period t4 according to the game state, the jackpot game in which V can be passed substantially without changing the operation control of the first variable winning device 65. And it is possible to provide a jackpot game in which V cannot pass (difficult). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the main control device 110 during the big hit game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described in the first embodiment described above, operation control of the first variable winning device 65 (switch member 65h) according to the type of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol). (Operation control that allows the game ball to pass the probability change switch 65e3 and operation control that cannot be passed (difficult)) is set, and the length of the specific interval period t4 is set according to the game state when the jackpot is won. It is configured to set.

  In the present embodiment, by changing the operation content of the switching member 65h as described in the above-described first embodiment, the game ball can pass the easy change switch 65e3 (easy) and the passage failure. It is configured to set possible (difficult) operation patterns, but by changing the opening pattern of the opening/closing door (lower attacker) 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65, the game ball can pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. It may be configured to set an (easy) operation pattern and an impassable (difficult) operation pattern.

  Specifically, first, when the round in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened (5 rounds in this embodiment) is started, the switching member 65h is turned on for 2 seconds. In other words, when the game ball wins at the timing when the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened, the switching member 65h allows the game ball to pass (easy) through the probability change switch 65e3. Drive. Then, the opening/closing door (lower attacker) 65f1 is provided to the first specific winning opening 65a (opening pattern for opening/closing the opening (for example, an opening pattern for continuously opening for 29 seconds)) in which a game ball can be won (easy), and to the first specific winning opening 65a. The opening/closing door opening pattern in which the game ball cannot be won (difficult) (for example, opening pattern in which 0.4 seconds is repeatedly opened 5 times from the start of 5 rounds and then continuously opened for 27 seconds) is configured to be changeable.

  With this configuration, the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (easy) and the passage failure without changing the operation content of the switching member 65h, only by changing the opening pattern of the opening/closing door 65f1. A possible (difficult) operation pattern can be set. Therefore, it is possible to set a plurality of jackpot games that can substantially pass the probability variation switch 65e3, provide various game characteristics to the player, and improve the interest of the game. ..

  In addition, by changing the opening pattern of the opening/closing door 65f1, the game ball can enter the first specific winning opening 65a (easy) and the game ball cannot enter the first specific winning opening 65a (difficult). In the case of using a configuration that enables setting of a different state, not only the timing at which the driving of the switching member 65 is started but also the timing at which the driving of the first variable winning device 65 is started, for example, the pachinko machine 10 The operation may be controlled so that a constant operation is repeated at the timing when the power is turned on.

  Further, by changing the opening pattern of the opening/closing door 65f1, the game ball can enter the first specific winning opening 65a (easy) and the game ball cannot enter the first specific winning opening 65a (difficult). It is possible to set the period during which the switching member 65h is turned on longer than 2 seconds by using the configuration that enables setting of the different states. Thereby, the game ball that has entered the first specific winning opening 65a can be more reliably passed through the probability variation switch 65e3.

  In the present embodiment, by changing the specific interval period t4, it is possible to change whether or not the game ball can win the first variable winning device 65 within the V effective period, but other than that. You may employ the structure of. For example, the game ball may be configured to switch the ball guide route passage time, which is the time required for the game ball to pass the ball guide route 72. Further, the value of the V valid period t6 may be changed by changing the value of the V open period t5. Even if such a configuration is used, the same effect as that of the present embodiment can be obtained.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the first specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened in the fifth round of the jackpot game is shown, but for example, in the first round of the first variable winning device 65, In the case of a big hit game in which the first specific winning opening 65a is in the open state, the period changed according to the game state may be set as the opening period t1.

  With such a configuration, for example, by setting the time obtained by adding the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 to be longer than the ball guide route passage time, the right hand hit with the jackpot game start (start of the opening period t1) The hit game ball can win the first variable winning device 65 within the V effective period t6 and can pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. On the other hand, by setting the total time of the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 to be shorter than the ball guide route passage time, the gaming ball hit to the right with the start of the jackpot game is first in the V effective period t6. It is possible to make it impossible (difficult) to win the first specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65.

  As a specific configuration, an opening/closing door 65f1 (see FIG. 6) that operates to open the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is configured to operate multiple times within one round. (It is configured such that the first specific winning opening 65a repeats the open state and the closed state within one round), and the gaming ball that wins when the specific winning opening 65a first becomes the open state has the probability change switch 65e3. It may be configured to allow passage. In addition, the opening/closing door 65f1 that operates to open the first specific winning opening 65a is configured by a plurality of members that perform different predetermined movements, and the specific winning is performed only when the plurality of members perform a specific operation. The mouth may be open.

  By using the specific configuration described above, even when a big hit game (a big hit game in which the game ball cannot pass (difficult) the probability variation switch 65e3) with a short opening period t1 is set, the open state (within one round) Since the game ball wins the specific winning opening in the second open state), there is an effect that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

  Returning to FIG. 67, the description will be continued. When the opening/closing door (lower attacker) 65f1 (not shown) is turned off (end of the fifth round) and the first specific winning opening 65a is closed, the upper attacker 650b is turned on after the elapse of the interval period t3 (second). The specific winning opening 650a is open). After that, the operation of the upper attacker 650b is repeated until the final round (7 rounds) is completed, and after the second specific winning opening 650a of the final round (7 rounds) is closed, the ending period t7 elapses and the jackpot game is played. finish.

  The third symbol display device 81, while the jackpot game is being played, the effect display corresponding to the jackpot game is being executed. Specifically, at the beginning of the big hit game, an effect display (effect A) that celebrates the big hit game is executed, and after that, the special winning opening to be opened in the next round is switched and the big hit After the game is over, an effect display (effect B) for informing (suggesting) that a game for deciding whether or not to shift to the high-probability game state will be performed is executed. Then, the effect display (effect C) for driving whether or not to shift to the high-probability game state is executed, and in the final stage of the big-hit game, the game state provided after the big-hit game is finished (high-low probability of jackpot, presence or absence of electric support). The effect display (effect D) for informing (indicating) is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the timing at which the effect B and the effect C described above are switched is different (delayed) from the timing at which the upper attacker 650b is closed (the timing at which the fourth round ends). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the various processes executed by the pachinko machine 10 from being concentrated.

  Further, the timing of switching the production B and the production C is between the timing when the upper attacker 650b is closed (the timing when the fourth round ends) and the timing when the lower attacker 65f1 opens (the timing when the fifth round starts). Since it is set to the interval period (specific interval period t4), the game ball is the probability change switch 65e3 in the jackpot game of this time based on the timing at which the player switches the effect display displayed on the third symbol display device 81. There is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not it is a jackpot that can be passed, and it is possible to suppress tiredness of the game due to early grasp of the result of the jackpot game.

  It should be noted that by preparing a plurality of timings at which the effect display is switched within the specific interval period t4 and providing a means for randomly setting the timing at which the effect display is switched, the jackpot game can be played further based on the timing at which the effect display is switched. It can be difficult to get the results.

  Next, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 71. The same parts as the contents of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 described in the above-described first embodiment will not be described or described on the display screen, but the same in this embodiment. It has a display.

  First, in the present embodiment, a stage in which the hero is walking outdoors is displayed on the display screen during the normal gaming state ST1 (not shown). Then, when the jackpot is won and the probability variation game state ST3 is entered, the display screen illustrated in FIG. 68(a) is displayed. FIG. 68A is a diagram exemplifying a display screen showing effects in the probability variation gaming state ST3.

  In the display screen of FIG. 68(a), the variation of the first special symbol is displayed on the upper left of the screen, and the variation of the second special symbol is displayed on the upper right of the screen. On the lower side of the screen, there is provided a game state display area in which "tower search mode (probability variation game state ST3)" which is the current game mode (game state) and "right hit" for notifying the game method are displayed. Further, on the right side of the screen, there is provided a status display area in which an object imitating the tower currently being searched by the main character is displayed. In this state display area, "1F" which is the lowest floor of the object, "100F" which is the top floor, "Rooftop" which is above the top floor, and "30F" which shows the current floor number are displayed. Has been done.

  During the probability variation gaming state ST3, every time the special symbol changes once, the tower goes up one floor, and the display is updated every time the special symbol changes 100 times without winning the jackpot to reach the rooftop. That is, the number of floors displayed with a cursor as "current floor" ("30F" in the figure) is the same as the current number of special symbol fluctuations after the jackpot is over. By the display of this status display area, the special symbol is changed 100 times without winning the jackpot during the probability variation game state ST3, and the latent character transitions to the latent probability variation game state ST2. It is configured to be displayed as an effect to reach.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 68(b), description will be given of the display contents when the jackpot is won during the probability variation gaming state ST3. FIG. 68(b) is a diagram illustrating a display screen showing that the jackpot is won during the probability variation gaming state ST3. In FIG. 68(b), the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as "555", which indicates that the result of the lottery is a big hit. Further, the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed by "246" indicating the disengagement. In the situation display area, "50F" is shown as the current number of floors (the number of special symbol fluctuations since the last jackpot end).

  In the probability variation gaming state ST3, when a big hit is won, a display body (elevator) for notifying that the big hit has been won is displayed on the display screen. During the big hit game, an effect of riding on the elevator and fueling the destination of the elevator is executed (not shown). As an elevator destination, "outdoor" when the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to the normal gaming state ST1 or the time saving gaming state ST1h, and the "tower search mode (tower when the probability variation gaming state ST3 is set 1F)”) and the latent probability variation game state ST2 when set to “roof mode” (see FIG. 69), each of which is configured so that the destination is suggested by the effect executed during the jackpot game. There is.

  In the present embodiment, the gaming state set after the jackpot is changed depending on whether or not the game ball passes the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, so the jackpot game before the jackpot game starts or at the beginning of the jackpot game. The game state set after the end is not fixed.

  Therefore, based on the jackpot type (A to H) won, it is determined whether the gaming state is changed when the gaming ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 and the gaming state when the gaming ball is not passed (for example, the jackpot type is In the case of the big hit E, the game state that shifts after the big hit game is the probability variation game state ST3 or the time saving game state ST1h), and the effect common to the determination results is used as the effect of the big hit game opening stage (for example, effect A in FIG. 67). Then, after that, it may be configured to determine whether or not the game ball has passed the probability variation switch 65e3, and set the final game effect (for example, effect D in FIG. 67) based on the determination result. With such a configuration, the effect on the display screen can be displayed without a sense of discomfort with respect to the game result during the jackpot game (result of whether or not the game ball has passed the probability variation switch 65e3).

  69 is a diagram exemplifying a display screen showing effects in the latent probability variation gaming state ST2. On the display screen of FIG. 69, it is displayed that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing, and the right-handed display and the current game mode (game state) are displayed in the game state display area. A certain "rooftop mode (probability change game state ST2)" is displayed. Further, in the situation display area, the display of "roof" is highlighted in order to notify that the hero has reached the roof.

  This "roof mode" is a mode for notifying (indicating) the latent probability variation game state ST2. In this pachinko machine 10, various values are set so that the gaming state in which the player is most likely to obtain a payout is the latent probability variation gaming state ST2. For details, the description will be given later with reference to FIGS. 78(a) to 80, but in the latent certainty variation game state ST2 in which the second special symbol is the actual variation target, the variation time of the special figure 2 is set to be short. And, the small hitting game time (of the small hitting game time, the opening period and the ending time in which the game ball does not win the specific winning opening) is also set to be short (shorter than the probability variation gaming state ST3). That is, the latent probability variation game state ST2 is set to a game state in which the first specific winning opening 65a is in the longest open time in the small hit game per unit time among all the game states. Furthermore, the jackpot probability is set to a high probability.

  To the "roof mode" that suggests the latent probability variation gaming state ST2, win the jackpot F during the probability variation gaming state ST3 (10% of the total jackpot), or without winning the jackpot during the probability variation gaming state ST3, It is designed to move by changing the special symbol 100 times.

  At that time, as the effect display performed on the third symbol display device 81, for example, a jackpot is won during the probability variation gaming state ST3 (FIG. 68(b)), and an effect (not shown) to get into the elevator is started. Then, is the elevator going up to the upper floor or going down to the lower floor during the jackpot game? After informing (indicating) which mode to shift to after the jackpot game is over to the player, an effect display for the elevator to reach the rooftop is executed.

  In addition, in the probability variation gaming state ST3, when the game shifts to the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 without winning the jackpot, the effect shown in FIG. 68(a) is continuously displayed until the special symbol changes 100 times, every time. The current number of floors displayed in the status display area increases by one floor for each change. Then, when the special symbol fluctuates 100 times and shifts to the "roof mode", the cursor displayed in the situation display area shifts from 100F to "roof" and shifts to the "roof mode".

  Next, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the "roof mode" will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70A is a diagram exemplifying a display screen showing effects in the latent probability variation game state ST2. FIG. 70(b) is a diagram illustrating a display screen showing an effect when a small hit is won with the second special symbol in the latent probability variation game state ST2.

  In the display screen of FIG. 70(a), it is displayed that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing, and the right-handed display and the current game mode (game) are displayed in the game state display area. "Rooftop mode (probability of latent change game state ST2)" which is the state) is displayed. Further, in the situation display area, the display of "roof" is highlighted in order to notify that the hero has reached the roof.

  Further, "possessed G (obtained medium display)" is displayed on the upper side of the display screen as a value corresponding to the game ball acquired by the player. A plurality of treasure boxes are displayed on the roof of the tower in the center of the display screen. This treasure box is displayed so that it is opened when the result of the special symbol game is a big hit or a small hit.

  The acquisition medium display displayed on the upper side of the display screen is a display corresponding to the game ball acquired in the sequence of the game in the pachinko machine 10 (the flow from the initial jackpot to the transition to the normal game state ST1). It is something.

  In the present embodiment, as the acquired medium display, a value corresponding to the total number of media acquired during a series of games is displayed, but for example, during a series of games, it corresponds to the media acquired in the jackpot game. The value and the value corresponding to the medium obtained in the small hit game may be displayed in a display mode in which the player can identify the value. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to easily understand how the player has obtained the medium in the series of games. Further, when such a display is executed, if the value corresponding to the medium obtained in the small hit game satisfies a predetermined condition (the value corresponding to the medium obtainable in one big hit game), another value is obtained. It is preferable to display the display mode. With this configuration, the player can easily recognize that the medium equivalent to the big hit game can be obtained as a result of the small hit game of a plurality of times.

  On the display screen of FIG. 70(b), the second special symbol is stopped and displayed at "123" indicating a small hit. Then, the first special symbol, which was changing at the same timing as the stop of the change of the second special symbol, is forcibly displayed as a stoppage at the outlier. At the center of the display screen, the selected treasure box opens, and an effect in which a treasure indicating a small hit appears from the inside is displayed.

  71 is a diagram exemplifying a display screen showing an effect when the jackpot is won with the second special symbol in the latent probability variation game state ST2. When the jackpot is won in the second special symbol, one of the treasure boxes displayed on the display screen of FIG. 70(a) is opened during the change, and the effect in which the monster appears is displayed. Then, during the jackpot, a battle with a monster starts, and according to the result of the battle, the game state after the jackpot game is informed (indicated) and displayed (not shown). For example, when a battle is won, the player reaches the roof and shifts to the "roof mode". Further, when the player escapes from the battle, the display is changed to the "tower search mode (1F)", and when the battle is lost, the display is changed to the "outdoor" stage (not shown).

  As described above, in the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment, the effect that the story progresses for each mode corresponding to the game state is displayed, and the story is selected according to the special symbol lottery result (big hit, small hit). The results are configured to change. Then, since the player can grasp whether or not the present state is advantageous for the player only by looking at the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the game property more complicated than that of the conventional pachinko machine 10 ( There is an effect that a player can play a game without being confused even if he adopts a game property that can obtain a large number of game balls other than the jackpot game.

<Electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 81. The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are changed. Since the other points are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Further, the second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed. The difference between the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 81. Since the other points are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 72A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to this embodiment. The ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the present embodiment operates the small hit type selection table 202g and the special electric auditors (the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650) in comparison with the first embodiment. The difference is that the table 202h and the jackpot scenario 202i are added, and the values of various counter values referred to in various tables are changed, and other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment. , Its detailed description is omitted.

  The first hit random number table 202a differs from the first embodiment in that the value set as the big hit determination value is different. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The small hitting random number table 202b differs from the first embodiment in that the conditions for small hitting determination are changed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The second hit random number table 202c is different in that the value set as the hit determination value is different. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The jackpot type selection table 202d is different from the first embodiment in that the number of jackpots is increased so that jackpots with different specific interval periods during jackpot can be selected, and jackpot type selection used in the time saving game state ST1h. The difference is that the table D is newly provided. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75.

  The variation pattern selection table 202e and the universal figure variation pattern selection table are different from the first embodiment in that the variation time set is changed. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 to 79.

  The small hit type selection table 202g is a table used when the small hit random number table 202b is stabilized as a small hit, and is a table in which the small hit type corresponding to each gaming state is selected. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The special electric auditors product operation table 202h is a table in which the operation contents of the special electric auditors product corresponding to the set big hit type or small hit type are stored. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The jackpot scenario 202i is an area for storing a scenario selected when a jackpot is hit, and stores the timing and the number of times the accessory action is performed during each jackpot. The jackpot scenario 202i is updated by the jackpot control process 2 (S1720 of FIG. 85) and reset by the ending process 2 (S1730 of FIG. 86).

  FIG. 72B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to this embodiment. The RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the small hit type selection table 202g and the special electric auditors (first variable winning device 65 and second variable winning device 650) operation table. The difference is that 202h is added and that the values of various counter values referred to in various tables are changed, and other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, so detailed description thereof is omitted. To do.

  The jackpot scenario setting area 203b2 is an area for setting (storing) the jackpot scenario updated by the jackpot control process 2 (S1720 of FIG. 85), and in the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S254 of FIG. 82). The jackpot scenario corresponding to the jackpot type is set.

  When the big hit scenario is set in the big hit scenario setting area 203b2 in the big hit control process 2 (S1720 of FIG. 87), the scenario counter 203c2 is updated by adding 1 to the ending process 2 (S1730 of FIG. 86). It will be cleared when you reset the jackpot scenario.

  The other memory area 203z includes the other memory area set in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, and at least the incoming ball number counter 203j and the operation counter 203k shown in the above-described first embodiment. The notification counter 203m, the remaining ball timer flag 203n, and the remaining ball timer 203o are included and are used in the same control as the above-described first embodiment.

  Next, the contents of the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202a. The first random number counter C1 is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 199, and in the low probability game state, when the value of the first random number counter C1 is "7", the high probability In the gaming state, when the value of the first random number counter C1 is "7 to 9", it is determined that the first random number (big hit). That is, the probability of being a jackpot in the low-probability gaming state is "1/200", and the probability of being a jackpot in the high-probability gaming state is "3/200". In addition, the first lottery game by the first special symbol and the second lottery game by the second special symbol used in the present embodiment are both hit determinations using the first hit random number table 202a.

  The contents of the small hitting random number table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hitting random number table 202b. In the present embodiment, there is no chance to win the small hit by the first lottery game of the first special symbol (special diagram 1). On the other hand, in the second lottery game of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the first random number counter C1 is “10” in the low probability game state (low probability: no electric support, low probability: electric support). If it is ~20", it is determined to be a small hit, and in the high-probability game state (high accuracy: no electric support, high accuracy: electric support), the value of the first random number counter C1 is "10-199". If there is a small hit, it is determined. That is, the small hit probability by the first lottery game is "0/200", the small hit probability by the second lottery game in the low probability game state is "11/200", and the second lottery game in the high probability game state The small hit probability due to is 190/200.

  As a result, in the high-probability game state in which the second lottery game is performed (hidden probability variation game state ST2 and probability variation game state ST3), the small hit game is frequently given. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 80(b), in the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 and the probability variation gaming state ST3, the time when the second specific winning opening 650 is in the open state as a small hit game is the same, The opening time and the ending time set as a small hit game are different, and the opening time and the ending time of the small hit game in the latent certainty variation game state ST2 are set shorter. That is, the opening time of the second specific winning opening 650 per unit time is longer in the latent probability changing game state ST2 than in the probability changing game state ST3. Therefore, the number of game balls that a player can obtain as a small hit game can be increased in the latent probability variation game state ST2 than in the probability variation game state ST3, and the player can obtain a game ball other than the jackpot game. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine with a surprising degree and improve the interest of the game.

  In the present embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the first lottery game is set to 0%, but may be set to, for example, about 10%, or the second lottery during the low probability game state. The probability of winning the small hit in the game is set to "11/200", but it may be set to the same probability as the second lottery game in the high probability game state, for example.

  The contents of the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 73(c). FIG. 73(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202c. In the present embodiment, the second random number counter C4 is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 99, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is "0 to 98" in the low probability game state. In the case of “”, in the high-probability game state, when the value of the second random number counter C4 is “0 to 99”, it is determined that the second win (per normal figure). That is, the probability of winning in the low-probability gaming state is "99/100", and the probability of winning in the high-probability gaming state is "100/100". In addition, in the case of winning per universal figure, the second ordinary electric accessory 640a operates, and the game ball easily enters the second starting opening 640 (special state). In the present embodiment, a slight difference in height is provided between the high-probability probability and the low-probability probability as the second hit, but the probability may be the same.

  Next, the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 75. 74(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the jackpot type selection table A202d referred to in the normal gaming state ST1, and FIG. 74(b) is a jackpot type referred to in the probability variation gaming state ST3. It is a schematic diagram which showed the selection table B202d typically. 75(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the jackpot type selection table C202d referred to in the latent probability variation game state ST2, and FIG. 75(b) is a jackpot referred to in the time saving game state ST1h. It is a type selection table D202d.

  This jackpot type selection table 202d is referred to when the jackpot is won as the lottery result of each special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol), and the type of the special symbol that is won the jackpot (the first symbol) 1 special symbol (special symbol 1) or second special symbol (special symbol 2)), and, based on the game state at the time of jackpot winning, jackpot type jackpot using the counter value obtained from the first hit type counter C2 It is selected from any one of A to jackpot H.

  The jackpot type selection table 202d used in the present embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the jackpot type selection table D202d referred to in the time saving game state ST1h is added, and the jackpot type selected. The difference is that it has been increased, the interval time of the jackpot game can be set according to the jackpot type, and the ratio of the first hit type counter value that is distributed to each jackpot type is changed, and other configurations Are the same. Descriptions of the same parts will be omitted, and differences will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 74(a), in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the special game 1 in the normal game state ST1, the percentage of the gaming state after the jackpot game is high probability gaming state (high probability) At 50%, the interval time (specific interval time t4 in FIG. 67) and V operation (operation of the switching member 65h) are set for each jackpot type so that the probability of being in the low probability state (low probability) is 50%. The presence or absence of electric support after the jackpot game is set. Specifically, depending on the game state, the opening pattern (V possible) that controls the operation of the switching member 65h so that the game ball can pass (enter) the probability variation switch 65e3 as a V operation, and the game ball is the probability variation switch 65e3. One of the opening patterns (V not possible) that controls the operation of the switching member 65h is set so that it cannot pass (enter) (is difficult).

  Further, depending on the gaming state as the interval time, if the V operation is V enabled, the gaming ball is placed in the first variable winning device 65 during the period in which the gaming ball can pass (enter) the probability variation switch 65e3. Even if "4 seconds (V is possible)" that can be won at the specific winning opening 65a and V operation is V is possible, the game ball is transferred to the probability variation switch 65e3 while the game ball can pass (ball). Any one of "1 second (V not possible)" that is impossible (difficult) to win is set to the first specific winning opening 65 of the 1-variable winning device 65.

  Then, it is set whether or not electric support (100 times) is given after the jackpot game is over. Note that, regarding the provision of the electric support, the game ball is provided even if the game ball passes (enters) the probability variation switch 65e3 or does not pass (enter). For example, the electric support “ If the jackpot type that is set to "Yes" is selected, when the game ball passes (enters) the probability variation switch 65e3, the probability variation game state (ST3) is entered after the jackpot game, and the game ball temporarily switches the probability variation switch 65e3. If it does not pass (enter), it will shift to the time saving game state (ST1h) after the jackpot game is over.

  In this way, the big hit type of this time is selected from the big hit types in which different contents are set, by the first hit type counter value acquired from the first hit type counter C2. For example, when the big hit is won in the special figure 1 during the normal game state ST1 and 50 is acquired as the first hit type counter value, the big hit type E is selected. During the jackpot game provided by this jackpot type E, the gaming ball passes (enters) the probability variation switch 65e3, so that the probability variation gaming state ST3 is provided after the jackpot game ends.

  In the present embodiment, jackpot B, jackpot D, and jackpot H are set as jackpot types for which the normal gaming state ST is selected after the jackpot game is over. It is possible to shift to the normal gaming state ST1 after the jackpot game is over, regardless of whether "1 second" or "4 seconds" is selected as the interval time and "V is possible" or "V is not" is selected as the V operation. It indicates that there is a property. With this configuration, it becomes impossible (difficult) to grasp the game state after the jackpot game is finished only by grasping the interval time and the contents of the V operation. Therefore, the player pays attention to the notification (indication) of the gaming state after the jackpot game, which is performed during the jackpot game (or the first special symbol change after the jackpot game is finished), and is performed by the pachinko machine 10. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the situation where the player gets tired of the game at an early stage by making the displayed effect interesting.

  Further, the distribution of V motions being “V allowed” and “V not allowed” is different only depending on the type of the special symbol, and is set so as not to be changed according to the gaming state. Specifically, in the first special symbol, the rate of V motion being “V acceptable” is set to 90% and the rate of “V not being possible” is set to 10%, and in the second special symbol, V motion is “V acceptable”. The ratio of "No V" is set to 0%. With this configuration, it is not necessary to change the V operation (the operation of the switching member 65h) depending on the game state, so that the capacity for storing the operation instruction content for the first variable winning a prize device 65 (switching member 65h) is reduced. It is possible (can be two types). There is an effect.

  Next, the selection of the jackpot type when the jackpot is won with the second special symbol will be described with reference to FIG. 74(a). In the normal game state ST1, a game aiming at the first special symbol (left-handed game) is a proper game method advantageous to the player, but when an improper game (illegal game) is performed, a normal game state A game using the second special symbol is performed during ST1. As an inappropriate game, in the normal game state ST1, by resetting the RAM of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 so as to shorten the fluctuation of the second special symbol for which long fluctuation (10 minutes) is set. By receiving the lottery a plurality of times in a shorter time than the normally required fluctuation time, the player can shift to the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 that is most advantageous for the player without going through an appropriate game flow (see FIG. 66). Possible actions. Assuming a case where such a game is performed, when the big hit is won with the second special symbol during the normal game state ST1, the big hit H is set to be selected. The big hit H is a big hit type that shifts to the normal game state ST1 after the big hit game is over.

  Therefore, it is possible to give a penalty (penalty) to a player who plays an inappropriate game during the normal game state ST1. As for the penalty (penalty) to be executed for an inappropriate player, a content other than the above may be used, and for example, a small win is won in the second special symbol which is not substantially subject to change during the normal game state ST1. If done, the variation pattern of the special symbol after the small hitting game is set to a special variation pattern, and at least the variation pattern in which the first special symbol is a long variation may be forcibly selected. With such a configuration, it is difficult to substantially continue the game, and it is possible to prevent the inappropriate game from being continuously executed.

  In addition, as a result of improper game, if you win the jackpot, the operation content of the special electric auditors during the jackpot game, the special operation content (the operation that cannot enter the game ball into the specific winning opening (difficult) The contents) may be stored in advance in the ROM of the main controller 110.

  In addition, for example, when the jackpot is won in a state where the second special symbol is held and there is a transition to the normal gaming state ST1 after the jackpot game is over, the inappropriate game described above is performed without the player's intention. Since it may be broken, it may be executed only after a predetermined number of times (the upper limit storage number of the second special symbol (four)) after the jackpot game is over, or the second starting opening 640 during the normal game state ST1. It may be executed only when winning the prize. By doing so, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the penalty (penalty) for an inappropriate game from being given to a player who is playing a normal game, and to give the player a feeling of dissatisfaction. There is an effect that can suppress.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 74(b), the jackpot type selection table B202d referred to in the probability variation gaming state ST3 will be described. As shown in FIG. 74(b), in the present embodiment, in the probability variation game state ST3, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1, the ratio of the gaming state after the jackpot game is high probability gaming state (high probability). At 10%, the ratio of the low probability state (low probability) is set to 90%. This is because the game of the special figure 1 in the probability variation game state ST3 is an improper game like the special figure 2 game in the normal game state ST1, and therefore a penalty (penalty) is given to the player. On the other hand, in the case of winning the big hit in the special map 2, 70% of the game state after the big hit game is a high probability game state (high accuracy), and 30% of a low probability state (low probability). Is set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 75(a), the jackpot type selection table C202d referred to in the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 will be described. As shown in FIG. 75(a), in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 in the latent probability variation gaming state ST2, the gaming state after the jackpot game is finished is a high probability gaming state (high probability). Is set to 30%, and the ratio of low probability state (low probability) is set to 70%. This is because the game of the special figure 1 in the latent probability variation game state ST2 is an improper game like the special figure 2 game in the normal game state ST1, so a penalty (penalty) is given to the player. On the other hand, in the case of winning the big hit in the special map 2, 90% of the game state after the big hit game is in the high probability game state (high accuracy), and 10% in the low probability state (low accuracy). Is set to be

  Next, the jackpot type selection table D202d referred to in the time saving game state ST1h will be described with reference to FIG. 75(b). As shown in FIG. 75(b), in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 in the time saving game state ST1h, the proportion of the gaming state after the jackpot game is high probability gaming state (high probability) At 95%, the ratio of the low probability state (low probability) is set to 5%. On the other hand, in the case of winning the big hit in the special map 2, the percentage of the gaming state after the jackpot game is high probability gaming state (high probability) is 5%, and the low probability state (low probability) is 95%. Is set to be This is because the game of the special figure 2 in the time saving game state ST1h is an improper game like the special figure 2 game in the normal game state ST1, and therefore a penalty (penalty) is given to the player.

  In this way, when the big hit in special figure 1 is won during the time saving game state ST1h, even if it is the same low probability state, there is a higher probability that the game state after the big hit game is finished with a higher probability than in the normal game state ST1. It is set so that the player can enter the gaming state. With this configuration, even if the player shifts (falls) to the low-probability state, it is possible to provide the player with a chance (return chance) to shift to the high-probability game state for a predetermined period. This has the effect of increasing the player's willingness to play the game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since it is possible to set the transition rate to the high-probability gaming state according to the gaming state and the type of special symbol, it is possible to provide a wider variety of gameplay than conventional pachinko machines. It is possible to provide the information, and it is possible to suppress the situation in which the player gets tired early. It is also possible to give a proper penalty to the player who played the inappropriate game.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 78, a variation pattern selection table for selecting a variation pattern in each gaming state will be described. The present embodiment is the same as the first embodiment except that the variation time set in each variation pattern is different. The description of the same parts will be omitted, and only the differences will be described.

  FIG. 76 is a schematic diagram showing a variation pattern selection table A referred to in the normal game state ST1. In the normal game state ST1, it differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the fluctuation time of special figure 2 is set to 600,000 ms (10 minutes). In the present embodiment, as described above, a penalty can be given to an inappropriate game, and thus the variable time is set to be short.

  FIG. 77 is a schematic diagram showing a variation pattern selection table B referred to in the time saving game state ST1h. In the time saving game state ST1h, like the normal game state ST1, the variation time of the special figure 2 is set to 600,000 ms (10 minutes), and the variation time of each out-of-range variation pattern of the special figure 1 is shortened as described above. This is different from the first embodiment.

  FIG. 78(a) is a schematic diagram showing a variation pattern selection table C referred to in the latent probability variation game state ST2. In the latent probability variation game state ST2, unlike the first embodiment, since the special figure 2 is targeted for the actual change, the change time of the special figure 1 is changed to 600,000 ms (10 minutes), and the change time of the special figure 2 is changed to 500 ms. It is different from the above-described first embodiment in that it is changed.

  FIG. 78(b) is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern selection table D referred to in the probability variation gaming state ST3. The probability variation gaming state ST3 differs from the first embodiment described above in that the variation time when the special figure 1 is out is 600,000 ms (10 minutes).

  FIG. 79 is a schematic diagram showing a general pattern variation pattern selection table for selecting a variation time of a normal symbol. This embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the type of the normal symbol is one type, and therefore is different in that the type of the normal symbol referring to this table is one type.

  FIG. 80A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the small hit type selection table 202g. FIG. 80(a) is a small hit type selection table 202g used in the case of a small hit as a result of the determination of whether or not the special symbol game is successful, and a small hit predetermined according to the game state is selected. It is set. If the gaming state is the normal gaming state ST1 or the time saving gaming state ST1h, if the small hit is won, then the small hit 1 is selected. When the small hit is won during the gaming state ST2, the small hit 3 is selected. Note that the small hit 1, small hit 2, and small hit 3 each have different operation contents of the special electric accessory during the small hit game. The detailed content will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 80(b), the operation contents of the special electric auditors (the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650) that are operated during the big hit game or the small hit game will be described. FIG.80(b) is the figure which showed typically the special electric auditors product operation table 202h. This special electric auditors product operation table 202h sets the operation contents of the special electric auditors product corresponding to the big hit type.

  First, the operation contents of the special electric auditors product based on each jackpot type will be described. The same operation is set from jackpot A to jackpot E of jackpot type, the opening time is 5 seconds, the number of rounds is 7, and the second round variable winning device from 1 round (R) to 4 rounds as the opening operation during the round. 650 (upper) is opened for 29 seconds, and in the fifth round, the first variable winning device 65 (lower) is opened for 29 seconds. Then, from the sixth round to the seventh round, the second variable winning device 650 (upper) is set to open again for 29 seconds. Although the opening operation time during the round is set to 29 seconds, it is set so that the specific winning opening is closed when 10 game balls are won in the specific winning opening of each variable winning device during that time. Then, the inter-round interval is set to 2 seconds, the inter-round specific interval (t4 in FIG. 67) is set to 1 second, and the ending time is set to 5 seconds.

  The jackpot types E to H are different from the above jackpots A to E in that the time of the specific interval between rounds is increased from 1 second to 4 seconds, and the same values are set for the other items. .. In this way, by making the specific intervals between rounds different, as described with reference to FIG. 67, it becomes possible to set whether the gaming ball can pass to the probability variation switch 65e3 (easy or difficult). There is. In this way, during a specific round (a round in which a game ball is won in the second specific winning port 650a of the second variable winning device 650 and a round in which a game ball is won in the first specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65). By simply changing the interval time of (between) and, it is possible to set a plurality of jackpot game ratios that can substantially pass the probability variation switch 65e3, provide various playability to the player, and The effect is that the interest can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, by changing the specific interval period t4, it is possible to change whether or not the game ball can win the first variable winning device 65 within the V effective period t6 (see FIG. 67). However, other configurations may be adopted. For example, the game ball may be configured to switch the ball guide route passage time, which is the time required for the game ball to pass the ball guide route 72. Further, the value of the V valid period t6 may be changed by changing the value of the V open period t5. Even if such a configuration is used, the same effect as that of the present embodiment can be obtained.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the first specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning a prize device is opened in the fifth round of the jackpot game is shown. However, for example, the first variable winning a prize device 65 of the first variable winning device 65 is opened in the first round. In the case of the big hit game in which the 1 specific winning opening 65a is in the open state, the period changed according to the game state may be set as the opening period t1. With such a configuration, for example, by setting the time obtained by adding the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 to be longer than the ball guide route passage time, the right hand hit with the jackpot game start (start of the opening period t1) The hit game ball can win the first variable winning device 65 within the V effective period t6 and can pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. On the other hand, by setting the total time of the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 to be shorter than the ball guide route passage time, the gaming ball hit to the right with the start of the jackpot game is first in the V effective period t6. It is possible to make it impossible (difficult) to win the first specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65.

  In the present embodiment, the operation contents of the special electric auditors product set by the special electric auditors product operation table 202h and the operation contents of the switching member 65h corresponding to each jackpot type are set as the jackpot scenario. Other configurations may be adopted. For example, the special electric auditors product operation table 202h may be configured so that the operation contents of the switching member 65h can be set.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 having the probability change switch 65e3 is configured to be opened only once in the fifth round in one big hit game, but in the one big hit game, the first The variable winning a prize device 65 may be configured to be opened a plurality of times. Specifically, for example, the first variable winning device 65 may be configured to be opened in the third round, the fifth round, and the seventh round.

  With such a configuration, the round before the round in which the first variable winning device 65 is in the open state can be changed to the round in which the second variable winning device 650 is in the open state, and during one jackpot game. It is possible to have a plurality (three) of specific interval periods. Therefore, for each specific interval period, it becomes possible to set whether or not the gaming ball can reach the first specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning a prize device 65 at a timing at which the gaming ball can pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. There is an effect that it is possible to make a player expect a plurality of times during one big hit game.

  When the above-described configuration is adopted, if the V motion is V-allowable (FIG. 74), that is, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened, and the switching member 65h is turned on for 2 seconds. In this case, it is determined whether the game ball is fired at a timing that can pass the probability variation switch 65e3, and if the game ball is not fired at a timing that can pass the probability variation switch 65e3, a proper game method is selected by the player. You should inform us.

  Specifically, a detection means for detecting the passage of the game ball is provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path 72, it is determined that the passage of the game ball has been detected within the specific interval period, and the third based on the determination result. As the display for informing the game method on the symbol display device 81, it is preferable to display the contents for explaining the game method such as "Don't stop right-handing!" and "Probability change chance if you keep firing!". By performing such a display, it is possible to support the game so that the player can appropriately play the game when the first variable winning device 65 is opened (the fifth round or the seventh round). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused about playability.

  Note that the method of determining whether or not a proper game is being played during the jackpot game is not limited to the contents described above, and other methods may be used. For example, a method of determining that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the game ball during the big hit game is operated, or a method of detecting the rotation amount of the handle and determining that the right-handed game is not being used, is used. May be.

  Further, regarding the display content of the display for notifying (guidance) the game method, the display content may be changed based on the content of the jackpot won. For example, if a proper game is played, if the game ball is a big hit that passes through the probability variation switch 65e3, the display may be emphasized.

  Further, it may be possible to set a jackpot scenario in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened in successive rounds. By using such a configuration, even if the interval time is short, the game ball can pass through the probability variation switch 65e3, the number of variations can be further increased, and the interest of the game can be improved. It will be possible.

  Next, the operation content of the special electric accessory based on the small hit type will be described. The small hit types include small hits 1 to small hits 3, and the small hits 1 are small hits selected when the game state is the normal game state ST1 or the time saving game state ST1h, and the small hit 2 changes the game state with certainty. It is a small hit selected in the gaming state ST3. Then, the small hit 3 is a small hit selected when the game state is the latent probability variation game state ST2 (see FIG. 80(a)).

  Each small hit is set so that the opening time, the opening operation during the round, and the ending time are different. Specifically, the small hit 1 is set such that the opening time and the ending time are set to 7.5 seconds, and the opening operation of 0.3 seconds is repeated 6 times as the opening operation during the round. That is, the small hit 1 is set as a small hit in which high speed opening is repeated, and there is almost no (difficulty) that a game ball wins a specific winning opening during a small hit game.

  Next, for the small hit 2, the opening time and ending time are set to 7.5 seconds like the small hit 1, but as the opening operation during the round, the opening operation of 1.8 seconds is performed once. It is set. That is, in the small hit 2, the operation of the special electric auditors is set so that the game ball can win the specific winning opening.

  Specifically, in the probability variation game state ST3 (see FIG. 80(a)) in which the small hit 2 is selected, the variation time of the special figure 2 is set to 0.5 seconds, and the small hit game of the small hit 2 is set. The time is set to 16.8 seconds (about 17 seconds) by adding the opening time (7.5 seconds), the opening time (1.8 seconds) and the ending time (7.5 seconds). If the number of game balls to be won in the specific winning opening during the small hitting game is two and the number of prize balls in the specific winning opening is 10, it is possible to obtain about 60 to 70 prize balls in one minute. Becomes

  Finally, the small hit 3 has the same opening operation during the round as the small hit 2, but the opening time and ending time are set to 0.3 seconds. That is, the period for which the specific winning opening is closed is set to be 10 times or more shorter than the small hit.

  Specifically, in the latent probability variation game state ST2 (see FIG. 80(a)) in which the small hit 3 is selected, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is set to 0.5 seconds, and the small hit 3 small hits are set. The game time is set to 2.4 seconds (about 2.5 seconds) by adding the opening time (0.3 seconds), the opening time (1.8 seconds) and the ending time (0.3 seconds). If the number of game balls to be won in the specific winning opening during the small hitting game is 2 and the number of prize balls in the specific winning opening is 10, it is possible to obtain about 480 prize balls in 1 minute. .

  That is, in the small hit 3, the operation of the special electric auditors is set so that the game ball can win the specific winning opening, and further, the specific winning opening is not opened in the small hitting game. By shortening the opening time and the ending time, it is possible to make the open state of the specific winning opening by the small hit game appear more frequently than the small hit 2. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to obtain a lot of game balls, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game. Also, by adding another game property (a game property waiting for the game state to shift to the latent probability changing game state ST2) to the game property such as waiting for the jackpot game to be executed as in the conventional case, A variety of effects can be provided, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 81, a detailed electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 81A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. Further, FIG. 81( b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

  The ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this embodiment is the same as that in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. Further, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that an advantageous period flag 223m and an advantageous information storage area 223n are added, and other configurations Are the same as those in the first embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The advantageous period flag 223m is a flag that is set to ON while the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the high-probability gaming state, and is set to ON when the gaming state becomes the high-probability gaming state, and the gaming state is It is set to OFF when the low probability game state is entered.

  The advantageous information storage area 223n is an area for storing game information while the advantageous period flag 223m is set to ON (in the advantageous state). As the game information, the number of game balls acquired during the advantageous period, the number of big hits and the number of small wins won during the advantageous period are stored. The information stored in the advantageous information storage area 223n is cleared when the advantageous period flag 223m is set to OFF.

  By using the advantage period flag 223m and the advantage information storage area 223n described above to temporarily store the number of game balls obtained by the player during the continuation of the high probability game, the obtained medium is displayed on the display screen during the latent probability change gaming state ST2. (See FIG. 70) can be displayed.

<Regarding Control Processing Executed by Main Controller 110 in Second Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 82 to FIG. 86, the control processing executed by the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. It should be noted that the same processing as that of the first embodiment will not be illustrated and described, and only different control processing will be illustrated and described.

  With reference to FIG. 82, the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S254) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S254). The first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (FIG. 82, S254) is different from the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 29, S204) in the first embodiment in that the process of S651 is added. .. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the processing of S609, after the fluctuation stop of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is executed, the processing of S651 is executed. In the processing of S651, the jackpot scenario 202i (determined by the special electric auditors operation table) specified for the jackpot game operation corresponding to the jackpot type that has been decided is selected from the ROM 202 and set in the jackpot scenario setting area 203b2. (S651).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257). The second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (FIG. 83, S257) is different from the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 36, S207) in the first embodiment in that the process of S1051 is added. . The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the processing of S1009, after the fluctuation stop of the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is executed, the processing of S1051 is executed. In the process of S1051, the jackpot scenario 202i defined for the jackpot game operation corresponding to the determined jackpot type is selected from the ROM 202 and set in the jackpot scenario setting area 203b2 (S651).

  Here, in the jackpot scenario, the operation for each time in the jackpot game is set. When the start of the jackpot game is set, the specific winning opening set in the jackpot scenario is set and opened after the opening period set in the jackpot scenario has elapsed. After that, when the closing condition (for example, until 10 balls are won or until the opening time of 30 seconds elapses), the specific winning opening is closed, and after that, after the interval period set in the jackpot scenario has passed, The jackpot round is started and the opening of specific winning openings is set.

  In the second embodiment, the jackpot scenarios are respectively stored in the ROM 202 corresponding to the gaming state and the jackpot type when the jackpot is hit, and the corresponding jackpot scenario is selected. Here, even if the jackpot type is set in the open pattern that allows the game ball to enter the probability change switch 65e3, the opening change period or the interval period is set to be variable, so that the game ball is set to the probability change switch 65e3. It is possible to set a jackpot that can enter and a jackpot that makes it impossible to enter. Thereby, depending on the jackpot gaming state, the jackpot type that can enter the probability variation switch 65e3 is regulated by the opening time or the interval time, so that the probability variation ratio for each gaming state can be variably set.

  In the normal game state ST1 in which the normal game method is set to let the game ball flow down into the left flow path PA1 and enter the game ball into the first starting opening 630, in the right flow path PA2. When the game is played by letting the game ball flow down, the second ordinary electric accessory 640a is easily opened, so when the game ball is allowed to flow into the left flow path PA1, the first starting port 630 is opened. It is possible to easily enter the game ball into the second starting opening 640 rather than entering the game ball. For the player, it is advantageous to let the game ball flow down in the right flow path PA2 even in the normal gaming state to play the game because it is possible to obtain more lottery opportunities in the second special symbol. However, in the second embodiment, when the jackpot in the normal game state with the second special symbol, even if it is a jackpot type that is released in the opening pattern that allows the probability variation switch 65e3 to enter, it is set in the jackpot scenario. Due to the interval period, before the game ball reaches the first variable winning a prize device 65, the opening period of the specific winning port 65a is configured to end, so that the probability variation switch 65e3 can pass the game ball. Not possible, the probability variation is not given to the player, that is, the probability variation rate of the second special symbol is set to 0%. Therefore, even if an illegal game is performed in which the game ball is caused to flow down to the right flow path PA2 in the normal game state ST1, the disadvantage on the game shop side can be suppressed.

  Similarly, in each gaming state, even if the flow paths (the left flow path PA1 and the right flow path PA2) in which the game is played are set by design, it is disadvantageous to the player about the probability change rate in the winning opening that enters the different flow paths. It can be set according to the jackpot scenario.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the normal symbol variation process 2 (S156) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the contents of this normal symbol variation process 2 (S156). This normal symbol variation process 2 (S156) differs from the normal symbol variation process (FIG. 41, S106) in the first embodiment in that the processes of S1214 to S1215 are deleted. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, since the processing of S1214 to S1215 in the first embodiment is deleted, in the present embodiment, regardless of the gaming state, the opening time of the second ordinary electric auditors product 640a and the number of times per second are two times. The opening pattern is set. Therefore, the opening pattern is always in a support state in which it is easy to win the second starting opening 640, and the second starting opening 640 can be set so that the winning can be easily done when the opening is opened.

  As a result, when the gaming state is such that the gaming ball flows down to the right flow path PA2 to play the game (time saving game state ST1h, latent probability variation gaming state ST2, probability variation gaming state ST3), the gaming ball is further extended to the second starting opening 640. You can win many prizes. In the present embodiment, when the game ball flows down into the right flow path PA2, it is more difficult to win the prize than in the case where the game ball flows down into the left flow path PA1 through the first starting opening 630. Therefore, it is possible to preferentially change the second special symbol to play the game, and the jackpot can be easily set to the player with the second special symbol.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the jackpot control process 2 (S1720) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the contents of this jackpot control process 2 (S1720). The big hit control process 2 (S1720) is different from the big hit control process (FIG. 46, S1604) of the first embodiment in that the processes of S1621 to S1623 are changed to the processes of S1721 to S1724. For other processing, the same processing as that of the first embodiment is executed.

  In the process of S1721, it is determined whether or not the big hit scenario is set in the big hit scenario setting area 203b2 (S1721). When it is determined that the jackpot scenario is set (S1721: Yes), the scenario counter d2 is incremented by 1 and updated (S1722). Then, the process of S1723 is executed. On the other hand, in the processing of S1721, when it is determined that the jackpot scenario is not set (S1721: No), this processing ends. The jackpot scenario is set with data corresponding to the scenario counter, and the operation data corresponding to the current scenario counter is read out and controlled.

  In the process of S1723, it is determined whether the data corresponding to the current scenario counter is the data indicating the start of the opening (S1723). If the data indicates the start of the opening (S1723: Yes), the opening command is set (S1724). Then, this process is completed. On the other hand, in the process of S1723, when it is determined that the opening has not started (S1723: No), the process of S1624 is executed.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, since the start of the opening and the start timing of the new round can be determined by the jackpot scenario, the opening time and the interval time can be easily changed for each jackpot type. You can control it.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 86, an ending process 2 (S1730) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the contents of this ending process 2 (S1730). The ending process 2 (FIG. 86, S1730) is different from the ending process (FIG. 48, S1630) in the first embodiment in that the processes of S1656 to S1657 are changed to the processes of S1731 to S1733. In the present second embodiment, even if it is a jackpot to which the probability variation game state is given, a jackpot type is set in which the upper limit of the number of times that a normal symbol is a time saving state is set, so the processing of S1731 (time saving counter 203t The process of setting 100 to 100) is changed and set. Further, in the final process of ending process 2 (S1730) for setting the process of ending the jackpot, the jackpot scenario set in the jackpot scenario setting area 203b2 is cleared to 0 and reset. As a result, whether or not the jackpot game is being played can be determined by the jackpot scenario setting area 203b2.

  As described above, according to the second embodiment, according to the special symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol) and gaming state (normal gaming state ST1, time-saving gaming state ST1h, latent latency variation gaming state) In the case where the second lottery game which is not substantially subject to change in the normal game state ST1 is performed, since it is possible to set a plurality of rates to shift to the high-probability game state after the jackpot game is over based on ST2 and the probability variation game state ST3) It is possible to extremely reduce the rate of transition to the high-probability game state (0% in this embodiment). With this configuration, even if an improper game (illegal game) is performed, it does not shift to a state advantageous to the player (high-probability gaming state), so an illegal game targeting the pachinko machine 10 can be performed. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

  In the second embodiment, the jackpot type selection table 202d is used to select the jackpot type based on the type of special symbol and the gaming state. However, for example, selection of the jackpot type based on the type of special symbol Alternatively, the selection of the interval time based on the game state may be performed using another table. Specifically, in the jackpot type selection table 202d, the jackpot type is selected based on the type of the special symbol, and a different table (for example, an interval time type selection table) is used, and the interval time corresponding to the gaming state. Select. Then, the jackpot control may be performed using the selected jackpot type and the interval time. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the types of jackpot types, and it is possible to reduce the capacity of main controller 110.

  Further, in the above-mentioned interval time type selection table, the game state and the interval time are associated with each other (in the case of a certain game state, a specific interval time is always selected), but a predetermined counter (for example, interval A plurality of interval times may be selected based on the counter value of the time type counter). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the game more complicated and improve the interest of the game.

  Further, the second embodiment has been described by using a pachinko machine (simultaneous variation type) in which the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed at the same time, but it is adopted for other types of gaming machines. May be. As other types of gaming machines, for example, a gaming machine of the type that executes a variation in the order in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol win the starting mouth, and the variation of one special symbol is the other special symbol. There is a type of gaming machine or the like that is executed with priority over the fluctuation of

  Furthermore, by winning a game ball in the first starting opening, a winning lottery is carried out, and when the result of the drawing is the first result, the first winning opening is operated so that it can be won. 1 privilege game, when the result of the lottery is the second result, the second privilege game that activates the second winning opening to a state in which it can win, and the second privilege game during the second privilege game, Used in a gaming machine (1 type 2 type mixing machine) provided with a third privilege game in which a game ball passes through a specific area provided in a winning opening to operate the first winning opening to a winning state. May be.

  The second embodiment has a configuration in which the game ball passes through the ball guiding path 72 only when the second variable winning device 650 is in the closed state, but when the second variable winning device 650 is in the open state, Alternatively, the game ball that has passed a specific route may be configured to pass the ball guiding route 72. With such a configuration, it is possible to complicate the flow of the game balls on the game board 13 and entertain the player.

  Further, the game balls that have passed a specific route other than the ball guide route 72 may be configured to win the first specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65. With such a configuration, it is possible to complicate the flow of the game balls on the game board 13 and entertain the player.

  According to the second embodiment, two specific winning openings are provided in the flow path of the gaming ball, and the gaming ball that has passed through the upper (upstream) specific winning opening in the closed state is specified on the lower side (downstream side). A game that is configured to be able to reach the winning opening, and further has a delay guiding path for delaying the flowing time of the game ball between the specific winning opening on the upper side (upstream side) and the specific winning opening on the lower side (downstream side) In the machine, by changing the length of the specific interval period t4 (see FIG. 67) according to the game state (normal, probability change, latency, time reduction), the timing at which the game ball reaches the specific winning opening on the downstream side is changed. Configure as possible.

  With this configuration, it is changed whether or not the game ball that has won the specific winning opening on the downstream side passes through the specific area (probability change switch 65e3) provided in the specific winning opening. The mode of the game state to be transferred (set) after the end of the big hit game is configured to be changeable. It is possible to provide a jackpot game that can substantially pass V and a jackpot game that cannot pass V (difficult) without changing the operation control of the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the main control device 110 during the big hit game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described in the first embodiment described above, operation control of the first variable winning device 65 (switch member 65h) according to the type of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol). (Operation control that allows the game ball to pass the probability change switch 65e3 and operation control that cannot be passed (difficult)) is set, and the length of the specific interval period t4 is set according to the game state when the jackpot is won. Since it is configured as described above, it is possible to set a plurality of jackpot game ratios that can substantially pass the probability variation switch 65e3, provide various playability to the player, and improve the enjoyment of the game. There is an effect that can be.

  In the present embodiment, by changing the specific interval period t4, it is possible to change whether or not the game ball can win the first variable winning device 65 within the V effective period, but other than that. You may employ the structure of. For example, the game ball may be configured to switch the ball guide route passage time, which is the time required for the game ball to pass the ball guide route 72. Further, the value of the V valid period t6 may be changed by changing the value of the V open period t5. Even if such a configuration is used, the same effect as that of the present embodiment can be obtained.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the first specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning a prize device is opened in the fifth round of the jackpot game is shown. However, for example, the first variable winning a prize device 65 of the first variable winning device 65 is opened in the first round. In the case of the jackpot game in which the 1 specific winning opening 65a is in the open state, the period changed according to the game state may be set as the opening period t1. With such a configuration, for example, by setting the time obtained by adding the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 to be longer than the ball guide route passage time, the right hand hit with the jackpot game start (start of the opening period t1) The hit game ball can win the first variable winning device 65 within the V effective period t6 and can pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. On the other hand, by setting the total time of the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 to be shorter than the ball guide route passage time, the gaming ball hit to the right with the start of the jackpot game is first in the V effective period t6. It is possible to make it impossible (difficult) to win the first specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65.

  Furthermore, when different time can be set as the specific interval time, it is a big hit game, and the time of a predetermined interval period after the specific interval period is set so as to cancel the difference of the specific interval time, and the big hit game It is preferable that the sum of the interval times in 1 is matched. With such a configuration, for example, during the big hit game, it is possible to unify the time used for each process performed using an interval period with a small amount of information processing, and it is possible to execute a stable process. There is an effect of becoming.

  In the present embodiment, the sphere guidance route 72 (delayed guidance route) is provided so that the sphere guidance route passage time becomes a predetermined time (delayed), but the entrance (opening 70a) and the exit (discharge part 70e) of this route are provided. ), a detection means (sensor) for detecting passage of the game ball may be provided, and a means for determining (monitoring) that the game ball is passing within a predetermined time may be provided. By using such a configuration, it is possible to easily find a ball clogging that has occurred in the ball guiding path 72, or a fraudulent act of intentionally staying the game ball in the guiding path using a magnet or a ball with a thread. There is an effect that it becomes possible.

  The first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the ball guiding path 72 (see FIG. 65) used in the second embodiment may be used in the following gaming machine. . That is, there is a first round number (for example, 12 rounds) and a second round number (for example, 15 rounds) as the number of rounds of the jackpot game, and a variable winning award provided on the upper side of the game board 13 from the first round to the 12th round. The device (the second variable winning device 650) is opened, and from the 13th round to the 15th round, the jackpot game in which the variable winning device (first variable winning device 65) provided under the game board 13 is opened is executed. It may be used for a game machine.

  By using the first variable winning device 65 used in the second embodiment, the second variable winning device 650, and the ball guiding path 72 in such a gaming machine, the game balls that have been shot are wasted. Without, and using a specific interval time between specific rounds (between the 12th and 13th rounds), it is possible to entertain the effect during the jackpot game.

  Specifically, at the end of the 12th round, the second variable winning device 650 is closed and the game ball flows down to the ball guiding path 72. Since the time required for the game ball to pass through the ball guide path 72 is set to 3 to 4 seconds (see FIG. 65), the game ball that has passed through the opening 70a of the ball guide path 72 is the first variable winning device. It takes at least 3 seconds to reach 65.

  Using this time (arrival time) required for the game ball to reach the first variable winning device 65, an effect between rounds (an effect that fuels whether the current jackpot game is a 12-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot) By doing, there is an effect that it is possible to eliminate (reduce) a useless game ball (a game ball that does not win a specific winning opening of a variable winning device even if it is a big hit) even if the right-handed game is continued. is there.

  That is, if the above-described effect during the jackpot game is executed on a gaming machine having one variable winning device, the variable winning device is passed during a specific interval time (the specific winning opening of the variable winning device is closed). The game ball cannot be won at the specific winning opening even during the big hit game, resulting in a useless game ball. In addition, if the specific interval time is shortened in order to reduce the useless game balls, the effect executed between the specific rounds (the effect that fuels whether this jackpot game is a 12-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot) There is a problem that the effect is weakened.

  On the other hand, when the above-described effect during the big hit game is executed by the gaming machine using the configuration of the present embodiment, the ball guiding path 72 through which the game balls can flow when the second variable winning device 650 is in the closed state. Since the effect during the specific interval time using the time (3 to 4 seconds) during which the game ball flows down is performed, it is possible to suppress the wasted ball that occurs during the big hit, and the effect that is executed between the specific rounds (this big hit) There is an effect that it is possible to strengthen the effect of the effect of inspiring whether the game is a 12-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot.

  If the interval time between specific rounds is set to be shorter than the time during which the game ball flows down the ball guiding path 72, before the game ball that has passed through the second variable winning device 650 reaches the first variable winning device 65. Since the first variable winning device 65 is in the open state, it is possible to eliminate the generation of useless game balls.

  In addition, as the effect in this case, it is conceivable that the display data displayed in the ending period of the 12th round jackpot is diverted and is displayed at the specific interval time of the 15th round jackpot. By adopting such an effect, it is possible to reduce the amount of display data, and it is possible to make the player think that it is a big jackpot in the 12th round. It has the effect of providing surprise and joy.

  Further, when a detecting means for detecting a game ball flowing down in the ball guiding path 72 is provided and the detecting means detects the game ball during the specific interval period, the big hit of this time is the 15th round big hit (the big hit is still big. You may make it notify that it continues. With such a configuration, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the action of stopping the firing of the game ball during the interval period during the big hit game.

  Furthermore, the configurations of the above-described embodiments may be combined to make the following. For example, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are arranged in parallel, and meanwhile, the game ball meanders horizontally from the second variable winning device 650 to the first variable winning device 65. The configuration provided with a guide path for guiding the player may be used for the following gaming machines. That is, there is a first round number (for example, 12 rounds) and a second round number (for example, 15 rounds) as the number of rounds of the jackpot game, and a variable winning device provided on the upstream side from the first round to the 12th round ( The second variable winning device 650) is opened, and the variable winning device (first variable winning device 65) provided on the downstream side from the 13th round to the 15th round is opened. Good.

  With this configuration, when the variable winning device provided on the upstream side is in the closed state, the game ball rolls along the guide path and is guided to the variable winning device on the downstream side. This guide path is configured to meander in the horizontal direction so that a predetermined time (time longer than the interval period, for example, 3 seconds) is required for the game ball to pass. The variable winning device on the upstream side and the variable winning device on the downstream side have a plurality of opening patterns set to be in an open state in a predetermined order during one jackpot game, and an opening pattern is set according to the type of jackpot. Is set.

  Then, the open/close status of each variable winning device is configured to be displayed on the display means. That is, the player is configured to be able to grasp the situation in which the variable winning device is closed by checking the display means. However, it is displayed so that it cannot be discriminated whether the closed state is an interval period (big hit medium) or an ending period (big hit end).

  By using such a configuration, for example, in the interval period when the upstream variable winning device is closed and then the downstream variable winning device is opened, the display means indicates that the variable winning device is closed. By displaying the effect (closed effect) on the display means, the player plays the game while expecting whether the jackpot game is over or is still continuing. Then, when the interval period ends and the variable winning device on the downstream side is opened, an effect (opening effect) indicating that the variable winning device is opened is displayed on the display means on the display means. At the timing when this opening effect is displayed on the display means, the game ball rolling on the guidance route has not reached the variable winning device on the downstream side (the time required to pass the guidance route rather than the interval time). Because it is longer), while the closing effect is being executed (while the upstream variable winning device is closed), the game ball that rolls on the guide path is reliably won to the downstream variable winning device. It becomes possible. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game ball from being wasted while executing the effect indicating the closing of the variable winning device in the jackpot game. When using such a configuration, it is advisable to prepare a plurality of types of opening patterns for each variable winning device in the jackpot game.

  Below, the modification 1 of 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated with reference to FIG.

<Modification 1 of the second embodiment>
In the first modified example, the distribution value of the jackpot type selection table 202d is different from that of the above-described second embodiment, and the game characteristic different from that of the above-described second embodiment is provided. As will be specifically described later, in this modified example, when the jackpot is won in the normal game state ST1 and the probability variation game state ST3 is transitioned to, the high hit is limited to a predetermined period (100 revolutions) after the jackpot game is finished. While maintaining the probability game state, it is provided with a game property (a so-called two-time loop) that wins a jackpot at least twice.

  FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a flow of setting various game states in the present modification. The modified example 1 is different from the above-described second embodiment in the allocation value of the jackpot type selection table 202d. Since the other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, during the normal game state ST1, since the allocation is the same as that of the above-described second embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted. Next, the distribution of jackpots during the probability variation gaming state ST3 will be described.

  In the probability variation game state ST3, the actual variation target is set to the special figure 2, and when the big hit is won in the special figure 2, there is a 100% probability that the probability probability is high (probability variation game state ST3 or latent probability variation game state ST2). Transition to. In addition, this probability variation gaming state ST3 does not win the jackpot, and if the variation of the special symbol exceeds 100 times, the electric support is terminated, and the game shifts to the latent probability variation gaming state ST2. While the player stays in the probability varying game state ST3 (until the electric support is finished), the player plays the game while paying attention to win the next jackpot.

  Next, in the latent probability variation gaming state ST2, the distribution is set such that the withdrawal jackpot that shifts to the probability variation gaming state ST3 is 34%, and the jackpot that shifts (falls) to the time saving gaming state ST1h is 66%.

  Next, in the time saving game state ST1h, the distribution is set so that the withdrawal jackpot that shifts to the probability variation gaming state ST3 is 75%, and the jackpot that shifts (falls) to the normal gaming state ST1 is 25%. At this time, the short gaming state ST1h does not win the jackpot, and if the variation of the special symbol exceeds 100 times, the electric support is ended and the game state shifts to the normal gaming state ST1. By winning the jackpot during this period, the distribution is set so that the ratio of shifting to the probability variation gaming state ST3, which is the high-probability gaming state, is higher than the normal gaming state ST1, which is the same low-probability state.

  As described above, in the first modification, once the low-probability state (normal game state ST1) is changed to the high-probability game state (probability variation game state ST3), within a predetermined period (special symbol variation after jackpot 100 Only up to 2 times), and then two big jackpots are guaranteed while maintaining a high probability game state. Therefore, the player is not satisfied only by the transition from the low-probability state to the high-probability game state, and then has the purpose of winning the jackpot within the predetermined period in the special symbol game performed in the high-probability game state. The game can be continued. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Modification 2 of the second embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG. 88.

<Modification 2 of the second embodiment>
In this modified example 2, the upper limit number (110 times) is set for the number of games (variation number) in the high-probability game state, and the distribution value of the jackpot type selection table 202d is made different from the second embodiment described above. , Which provides different game playability from the second embodiment described above. As will be described later in detail, in this modified example, when the jackpot is won in the normal game state ST1 and the probability variation game state ST3 is transitioned to, a specific period after the jackpot game is over (a high probability game) Only during the latent probability variation game state ST2 in which the state and the electric power support have been completed), the game performance (so-called two-time loop) of winning the jackpot at least twice while maintaining the high-probability game state is provided. It is equipped. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a flow of setting various game states in the present modification. The modified example 2 is different from the above-described second embodiment in the allocation value of the jackpot type selection table 202d. Since the other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, during the normal game state ST1, since the allocation is the same as that of the above-described second embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted. Next, the distribution of jackpots during the probability variation gaming state ST3 will be described.

  In this modified example 2, the high-probability game state is set to shift (fall) to the low-probability state when the special symbol changes 110 times without winning the jackpot. In this probability variation game state ST3, the actual variation target is set in the special figure 2, and if the big hit is won in the special figure 2, the probability variation game state ST3 is set again with a probability of 70% and low with a probability of 30%. Transition to the stochastic state. This probability variation game state ST3 does not win the jackpot, and if the variation of the special symbol exceeds 100 times, the electric power support is terminated, and the latent probability variation game state ST2 is entered.

  Next, the latent probability variation game state ST2, after the jackpot, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is started from the 101st rotation, until the 110th rotation where the high probability game state shifts (falls) to the low probability state. It is a game state executed in. If the jackpot is won during the latent probability variation gaming state ST2, there is a 100% probability of transition to a high probability gaming state (probability variation gaming state ST3 or latent probability variation gaming state ST2).

  Next, in the time saving game state ST1h, the distribution is set so that the withdrawal jackpot that shifts to the probability variation gaming state ST3 is 90% and the jackpot that shifts (falls) to the normal gaming state ST1 is 10%. At this time, the short gaming state ST1h does not win the jackpot, and if the variation of the special symbol exceeds 100 times, the electric support is ended and the game state shifts to the normal gaming state ST1. By winning the jackpot during this period, the distribution is set so that the ratio of shifting to the probability variation gaming state ST3, which is the high-probability gaming state, is higher than the normal gaming state ST1, which is the same low-probability state.

  As described above, in the second modification, the low-probability state (normal gaming state ST1) is once transited to the high-probability gaming state (probability variation gaming state ST3), and then the number of fluctuations is a predetermined number (after the big hit). Only after a specific period (up to 100 special symbol variations) (latent probability variation game state ST2), two big jackpots are guaranteed while maintaining a high probability game state thereafter. Therefore, the player is not satisfied that it has transitioned from a low-probability state to a high-probability game state, and then does not win within the predetermined period in the special symbol game performed in the high-probability game state, and after a predetermined period has elapsed The game can be continued with the purpose of winning the jackpot during the specified period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Modification 3 of the second embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG. 89.

<Modification 3 of the second embodiment>
In the third modification, the ball guiding path 72 provided in the front view right side area of the game board 13 of the second embodiment described above is provided with a shortening path 75 as another path, and the flowing down game ball is guided by a ball. A distribution mechanism 75a for allocating to the path 72 and the shortened path 75, a path for guiding the game ball flowing down the shortened path 75 to the first variable winning a prize device 65, and a path for guiding the game board 13 to the lower region in front view. It is different in that a distribution mechanism 75b for distributing the data is provided. Other configurations are the same as those in the second embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 89 is an enlarged view of the right side area of the game board 13 of the third modification as viewed from the front. In this modification, the game balls that have passed through the second variable winning device 650 that is in the closed state are alternately distributed to the ball guide path 72 and the shortened path 75 by the distribution mechanism 75a. Here, the distribution mechanism 75a is configured to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise, and is configured so that the rotation range (rotation angle) is regulated by the rotation regulating member. The game balls distributed to the ball guide path 72 flow down the same path as the above-described second embodiment, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

  On the other hand, the shortened route 75 is configured such that the trajectory of the sphere is linear rather than the sphere guide route 72, and at least the gaming spheres assigned to the sphere guide route 72 at first reach the discharge unit 70e. In order to quickly eject from the shortened path 75, the game ball is configured to pass the shortened path for 2 seconds. By providing a flow path for the game balls having different shapes in this way and distributing the game balls to any path by the distribution mechanism, it is possible to intentionally change the flow order of the game balls on the game board 13. (It is possible to make the game board 13 flow down in an order different from the order in which they are fired).

  By using such a configuration, for example, when the game ball that first passed through the second variable winning device 650 is distributed to the shortened path 75 in the specific interval period, the game ball can pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. Within the period, it becomes possible to win the first specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65, while the game ball that first passed through the second variable winning device 650 is distributed to the ball guiding path 72, the probability change switch. It becomes impossible (difficult) to win the game ball to the first specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 within a period in which the game ball can pass through 65e3.

  Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 depending on which path the game ball flows down, so that the player is provided with the game playability of allowing the game ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  Furthermore, in the present modification, a distribution mechanism 75b is provided that distributes the game ball that has flowed down the shortened path 75 to the first variable winning device 65 and the path that guides the game ball 13 to the lower region in front view of the game board 13. ing. Thereby, it becomes possible to sort whether or not the game ball flowing down the shortened path 75 is guided to the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, the flow path of the game balls on the game board 13 can be made more complicated, and the player can enjoy the flow of the game balls.

  Even if the distribution mechanism in which the distribution destination is determined according to a predetermined order is used as in the present modification, a plurality of distributions are performed before the game ball reaches the first variable winning device 65 having the probability change switch 65e3. Since it is distributed to a plurality of downflow paths by the mechanism, it is possible to make it difficult to set the state of each distribution mechanism by using the launched game balls so as to be a predetermined distribution destination in advance.

  Further, when the first variable winning device 65 is in the closed state, the game balls flowing down the ball guiding path 72 flow down on the first variable winning device 65, contact the distribution mechanism 75b, and rotate the distribution mechanism 75b. While changing the state, it flows down toward the lower side of the game board. As a result, the rotation state of the distribution mechanism 75b is constantly changed.

  In this modification, only the game ball flowing down the shortened path 75 reaches the distribution mechanism 75b, but the game ball flowing down the ball guiding path 72 may reach the distribution mechanism 75b. Further, a distribution mechanism 75c (not shown) for distributing only the game balls flowing down the ball guide path 72 may be separately provided. With this configuration, it is possible to further complicate the flow path of the game ball, the player can enjoy the flow of the game ball, and, for example, pass through the closed second variable winning device 650. Which path the game ball is distributed to is used by the pachinko machine in which it is determined whether or not the winning game ball will be won in the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 during a period in which the game ball can pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. It is possible to change the possibility of entering the probability variation game state.

  In addition, since a plurality of distribution mechanisms are provided in the path in which the game ball flows down during a right-handed game other than during the big hit game, the distribution of each distribution mechanism is performed when a game in which the probability change switch 65e3 passes the game ball is performed. It becomes difficult to adjust the position in advance, and the game result can be randomized.

In this modification, the distribution mechanism that distributes the game balls in two directions is used, but a distribution mechanism that distributes the game balls in three or more directions may be used. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the ball flow of the game ball more complicated, and it is possible to entertain the player.

  Further, in the present modification, a mechanism for physically distributing the game balls is used as the distribution mechanism, but other configurations may be used, for example, a lottery is performed based on having passed a predetermined area, and the result of the lottery. A means for determining the distribution direction may be provided.

  In this modification, the game balls that have passed through the second variable winning device 650 in the closed state reach the distribution mechanism 75a, but the upstream side of the second variable winning device 650 (the game ball is the second In the area before reaching the variable winning device 650), the distribution device 75a may be configured to be reached. In this case, the game balls distributed in a predetermined direction by the distributing device 75a are the second variable winning device. The game ball that has flowed down toward, and has been distributed in a direction other than the predetermined direction, has passed through a specific specific flow-down path (for example, shortening path 75 or ball guiding path 72), and the game ball that has passed through the specific flow-down path. The distribution mechanism 75b may be configured to distribute the game ball path reaching the first variable winning device and the other paths. With this configuration, it is possible to make the game balls distributed by the distribution mechanism 75a in directions other than the direction of the second variable winning device 650 reach the first variable winning device 65 side by the distribution mechanism 75b. .

  With this configuration, a game ball that has not won the second variable winning device 650 in the open state may be distributed to the first variable winning device 65 in the open state so that the player can win the game. There is an effect that a surprising game can be provided.

  It should be noted that during the jackpot game, the player is not informed of the timing when the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 is in the open state, so that the player moves the game ball on the game board. And, there is an effect that a game can be enjoyed while watching the open/closed state of each variable winning device.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from those of the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit occurs, a pachinko machine (commonly called a 2nd right thing, a 3rd right thing, etc.) that can increase the expected value of a big hit until a big hit state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times) including that. May be implemented as). Further, after the jackpot pattern is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. In addition, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated may be implemented.

  In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in the state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is that "a display device that variably displays an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirms the identification information is provided, The variation display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the variation display of the identification information is stopped and finally displayed, and then stopped. It becomes a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time is specific".In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for fixedly displaying the symbols after variably displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is provided. Some are not. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or the predetermined By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stopping is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a special game value. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment and the restriction on the place where the game machine is installed due to the separate handling of the medal and the ball.

  All or part of each of the above-described embodiments may be combined.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown below.

<Feature A group> (Twice loop configuration)
A state setting means capable of setting at least a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state, and an advantageous privilege is given to the player based on establishment of a predetermined condition. In a gaming machine having a privilege game executing means for executing at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game, the state setting means sets the first advantageous state. When the first privilege game is executed in a state where the first privilege game is executed, the first advantageous state is set even after the first privilege game is executed, and when the second privilege game is executed, The second benefit state is set after the execution of the second benefit game, and the first benefit is executed when the first benefit game is executed in the state where the second benefit state is set. A gaming machine A1 characterized in that the first advantageous state is set after execution of a game.

  At least a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state are set by the state setting means. Based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the privilege game executing means at least executes the first privilege game that gives the player an advantageous privilege and the second privilege game different from the first privilege game. When the first privilege game is executed in the state where the first advantageous state is set, the first advantageous state is set by the state setting means even after the first privilege game is executed, and the second bonus game is executed. When the game is executed, the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means after the execution of the second privilege game. When the first privilege game is executed while the second advantageous state is set, the state setting means sets the first advantageous state after the execution of the first privilege game. As a result, even after the first privilege game is executed in the first advantageous state, the second advantageous state is set, so that the state advantageous to the player can be continuously set. Therefore, the advantageous state can be continued until a plurality of privilege games are executed, and there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A1, the privilege game executing means is capable of executing a third privilege game different from the first privilege game and the second privilege game, and the state setting means sets the first advantageous state to the first advantageous state. It is possible to set a specific state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second advantageous state, and when the third privilege game is executed in the state where the second advantageous state is set, A gaming machine A2, which sets the specific state after the execution of the third privilege game.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are produced. That is, the third privilege game different from the first privilege game and the second privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means. A specific state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means. When the third privilege game is executed while the second advantageous state is set, the specific state is set by the state setting means after the execution of the third privilege game. As a result, in the second advantageous state, the specific game state that is disadvantageous to the player when the third game state is executed is set, so that the continuous state of the advantageous state can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the gambling performance of the game becomes too high.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the first advantageous state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second advantageous state, the gaming machine A3.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the first advantageous state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second advantageous state, so the advantage given to the player is excessive. The effect is that it can be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, when the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means, the bonus game execution means makes it easier to execute the bonus game. A gaming machine A4 characterized by having means.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 to A3, when the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means, the privilege game execution means improves the privilege game. As a result, there is an effect that the player can expect the bonus game to be executed.

  In either the gaming machine A1 or A4, a start condition determining means capable of determining the establishment of a first start condition and a second start condition different from the first start condition, and the start condition determining means. , A lottery means for executing a lottery on the basis that it is determined that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, and the privilege game execution means is a specific lottery by the lottery means. A gaming machine A5, which executes the privilege game based on the determination that the result has been established.

  According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect achieved by either the game machine A1 or A4, the following effect is achieved. That is, the establishment of the first starting condition and the second starting condition different from the first starting condition is determined by the starting condition determining means. The lottery means executes the lottery on the basis that the start condition determining means determines that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. The bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means based on the lottery means determining that the specific lottery result has been established. This allows the player to expect the establishment of the first start condition and the second start condition. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A3 or A4, when the advantageous state is not set by the setting means, the gaming machine A5 has a regulating means for regulating the establishment of the second starting condition.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A3 or A4, the establishment of the second starting condition is regulated by the regulating means when the advantageous state is not set by the setting means. There is an effect that a disadvantageous state can be easily set.

  In any of the gaming machines A3 to A5, the first identification information indicating the lottery result of the lottery means based on the satisfaction of the first start condition and the lottery result of the lottery means based on the satisfaction of the second start condition. It has a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying each of the two identification information on the display means, and the dynamic display means can dynamically display the first identification information and the second identification information at the same time. A gaming machine A6 characterized in that it is configured.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A3 to A5, the following effect is achieved. That is, the dynamic display means displays the first identification information indicating the lottery result of the lottery means based on the establishment of the first starting condition and the second identification information indicating the lottery result of the lottery means based on the establishment of the second starting condition. It is dynamically displayed on the means. The first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed simultaneously by the dynamic display means. Thereby, the dynamic display of the first identification information and the second identification information can be efficiently executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A5 or A6, the gaming machine A7 has a releasing means for releasing the restriction by the restricting means based on the setting of the specific advantageous state by the setting means.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A5 or A6, the restriction by the restricting means is canceled by the canceling means based on the setting of the specific advantageous state by the setting means. There is an effect that a game can be played with the expectation that a specific advantageous state is set.

  Privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to a player, and when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means, an advantageous state in which the privilege game is easily executed by the privilege game executing means is set. Setting means and control means for facilitating the setting of the advantageous state by the setting means even when the privilege game is executed next based on the setting of the advantageous state by the setting means. A gaming machine A8 characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine A8, the bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means. When the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means, the setting means sets an advantageous state in which the privilege game is easily executed by the privilege game executing means. Based on the setting of the advantageous state by the setting means, even when the privilege game is executed next time, the advantageous state is easily set by the control means by the setting means, so that the advantageous state is set to a plurality of privilege games. It is possible to continue setting across. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

<Characteristic B group> (Switch between advantage and disadvantage and prevent disadvantage)
The first lottery game is based on the first ball entrance into which the game ball can enter, the second ball entrance different from the first ball entrance, and the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entrance. A lottery game executing means for executing and executing a second lottery game based on having entered the second entrance, and a second lottery game being disadvantageous to the player over the first lottery game. A switching means for switching between one state and a second state in which the second lottery game is more advantageous than the first lottery game based on a predetermined trigger, and a lottery game which is disadvantageous to the player switched by the switching means. A gaming machine B1 having a suppressing means for suppressing execution of.

  According to the gaming machine B1, the first lottery game is executed by the lottery game executing means on the basis of having entered the first entrance. Further, the second lottery game is executed by the lottery game execution means based on the fact that the player has entered the second entrance different from the first entrance. The first state in which the second lottery game is disadvantageous to the player over the first lottery game and the second state in which the second lottery game is more advantageous than the first lottery game are switched based on a predetermined trigger by the switching means. Be done. The suppression means suppresses the execution of a lottery game that is disadvantageous to the player switched by the switching means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the disadvantageous side lottery game from being executed by the suppressing means, so that the player can easily execute an advantageous lottery game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a defect that gives a significant disadvantage to the player.

  In the gaming machine B1, the first identification information showing the lottery result of the first lottery game is dynamically displayed on the display means, and the second identification information showing the lottery result of the second lottery game is dynamically displayed on the display means. Dynamic display means, and dynamic display period determining means for respectively determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, The dynamic period determination means is longer than the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the lottery game favorably switched, the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the lottery game disadvantageously switched by the switching means. A gaming machine B2 characterized by facilitating determination of a dynamic display period.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first identification information indicating the lottery result of the first lottery game is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. Also, the second identification information indicating the lottery result of the second lottery game is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. The dynamic display period determining unit determines the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information that are dynamically displayed by the dynamic display unit. The dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the lottery game that has been disadvantageously switched by the switching means is dynamically determined to be the dynamic display period longer than the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the lottery game that has been advantageously switched. The means facilitate the decision. As a result, it is possible to prevent the disadvantageously switched game from being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can distinguish the game which is set to be advantageous.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, it has a launching means capable of launching a game ball to the game area, and an adjusting means for adjusting the launching force of the game ball launched by the launching means based on the operation of the player. The first ball entrance and the second ball entrance are arranged at positions where a game ball ejected from the ejecting means in a state where the player performs the same operation with respect to the adjusting means can enter. A gaming machine B3 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the following effects are produced. That is, the game ball is launched into the game area by the launching means. The ejection force of the game ball emitted by the ejection means is adjusted by the adjustment means based on the operation of the player. The first ball entrance and the second ball entrance are arranged at positions where a game ball ejected from the ejecting means in a state where the player performs the same operation on the adjusting means can enter. Thereby, the player can execute a lottery game advantageous to the player without changing the operation of the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be made easier.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, there is a privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player when the lottery result of the first lottery game or the second lottery game is a specific lottery result, The privilege granting means is configured to set a higher privilege-giving ratio that is advantageous to the player when the specific lottery result is obtained in the second lottery game than in the first lottery game. A gaming machine B4 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 to B3, the following effects are produced. That is, when the lottery result of the first lottery game or the second lottery game is a specific lottery result, the privilege is given to the player by the privilege giving means. When a specific lottery result is obtained in the second lottery game rather than in the first lottery game, the rate of giving a benefit that is advantageous to the player is set to be higher. Thereby, when the game in the second lottery game is set to be advantageous to the player, a more advantageous state can be set to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine B4, when the specific lottery result is obtained in the first lottery game, the privilege granting means is one of the first privilege and the second privilege more advantageous than the first privilege as the privilege. The gaming machine B5 is for giving one, and the switching means switches to the second state on the basis of the second privilege being given by the privilege giving means.

  According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of the game machine B4, the following effect is achieved. That is, when the specific lottery result is obtained in the first lottery game, either one of the first benefit and the second benefit which is more advantageous than the first benefit is awarded by the benefit granting means. The switching unit switches to the second state based on the second privilege being granted by the privilege granting unit. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be changed.

  In the gaming machine B4 or B5, the privilege given to the second lottery game by the privilege granting means is the first lottery game or the second lottery game until the specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine B6, characterized in that a ratio of a set privilege set so as to facilitate a specific lottery result is set higher than a privilege for the first lottery game.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B4 or B5, the privilege granted to the second lottery game by the privilege granting means is the first lottery game or until the specific condition is satisfied. The second lottery game is executed because the ratio of the setting privilege that is set so that the second lottery game is likely to be the specific lottery result is set higher than the privilege for the first lottery game. This has the effect of increasing the expectations of the player.

  In the gaming machine B6, at least the set privilege is given to the privilege granted to the second lottery game by the privilege granting means. B7.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B6, at least the set privilege is given to the privilege given to the second lottery game by the privilege giving means. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation that the second lottery game will be executed.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, a first flow path through which a game ball can flow down, a second flow path different from the first flow path, and the first ball inlet port is the first flow path. The gaming machine B8, wherein the gaming machine B8 is arranged in each of the second flow paths, and the second ball inlets are arranged in the second flow paths.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the first ball entrance is arranged in the first flow path and the second flow path, and the second ball entrance is Since it is arranged in two flow paths, there is an effect that it is possible to set a state in which only the first lottery game is executed.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the suppressing means notifies the player of notification information indicating that an unfavorable lottery game is being executed when the unfavorable lottery game is executed. A gaming machine B9 characterized by the above.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the suppressing means indicates that the disadvantageous lottery game is being executed when the game is disadvantageous to the player. Since the notification information shown is notified, the player can play the game more easily.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B9, the lottery game execution means is configured to be able to execute the first lottery game and the second lottery game at the same time.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B9, the first lottery game and the second lottery game are simultaneously executed by the lottery game execution means, so that the game can be efficiently played. There is an effect that you can.

<Characteristic C group> (Den Chu configuration)
A first lottery is executed based on a first entrance through which a game ball can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and the entry into the first entrance. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entrance, a lottery means for executing a second lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first lottery, and the first entrance Variable means that is changeable between a first state that regulates entry and a second state that makes entry easier than the first state, determination means that performs determination based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and determination thereof. Variable control means for changing the variable means from the first state to the second state when a specific determination result is determined by the means, and based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the change to the second entrance A gaming machine C1 having a restriction means for restricting entry of balls or execution of the second lottery.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the first lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the fact that the player has entered the first entrance. Further, the second lottery, which is more advantageous to the player than the first lottery, is executed by the lottery means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entrance. It is changed by the changing means between a first state in which the ball is prevented from entering the first ball entrance and a second state in which the ball is easier to enter than the first state. The variable means is changed from the first state to the second state by the variable control means when the specific determination result is determined by the determination means that performs the determination based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition. The regulation means regulates the entry into the second entry slot or the execution of the second lottery based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. As a result, it is possible to set the advantageous state and the unfavorable state for the player by the restricting means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be given a change of interest and the interest can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C1, the second ball entrance is arranged below the first ball entrance, and the variable means is in the second state, so that the variable means enters the second ball entrance. It is arranged so as to prevent the flow of the game sphere flowing down the flow path that is a ball, and the restriction means is set so that the variable means is easily changed to the second state by the variable control means. A gaming machine C2, which restricts entry into the mouth.

  According to the gaming machine C2, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1. That is, the second entrance is arranged below the first entrance. When the variable means is in the second state, the variable means is arranged so as to obstruct the flow of the game ball flowing down the flow path entering the second ball inlet. By setting the variable means to be easily changed to the second state by the variable control means, the ball entering the second ball inlet is restricted by the restricting means. Accordingly, it is possible to regulate the ball entering the second ball inlet with a simple configuration. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the configuration of the gaming machine from becoming complicated.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the gaming ball has a first flow path capable of flowing down, and a second flow path different from the first flow path, wherein the first ball inlet is the first flow path. And the second flow path, and the variable means is arranged at the first entrance opening arranged in the second flow path.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the first ball entrances are arranged in the first flow path and the second flow path, respectively. Since the variable means is arranged in the first ball entrance port arranged in the second flow path, there is an effect that the game ball flowing down the second flow path can be easily inserted into the first ball entrance.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the lottery result by the first lottery and the second identification information by the second lottery, and its dynamic display. Means for dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information, the dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period of the second identification information. A gaming machine C4, wherein a long dynamic display period as a dynamic display period is easily determined by the dynamic display period determining means, thereby restricting execution of the second lottery.

  The gaming machine C4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C3. That is, the first identification information indicating the lottery result by the first lottery and the second identification information by the second lottery are dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. The dynamic display period determining unit determines the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information that are dynamically displayed on the dynamic display unit. By making it easier for the dynamic display period determination means to determine a long dynamic display period as the dynamic display period for the second identification information, the execution of the second lottery is regulated by the regulation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the execution can be restricted in the second lottery with a simple configuration.

<Characteristic D group> (Continuous up configuration)
Based on the first ball entrance into which the game ball can enter, the second ball entrance different from the first ball entrance, and the fact that the game ball enters the first ball entrance, A lottery means for executing a lottery and executing a second lottery which is more advantageous to the player than the first lottery on the basis of a game ball entering the second entrance, and a first lottery Dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the lottery result on the display means and dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the lottery result of the second lottery on the display means, and Dynamic display period determining means for determining dynamic display periods of the first identification information and the second identification information executed by the dynamic display means, and the dynamic display period determining means for determining the second identification information. As the dynamic display period, a long state in which a dynamic display period longer than the dynamic display period of the first identification information is easily determined and a short state in which a dynamic display period shorter than the long state is easily determined are set. Setting means capable of enabling, and a privilege granting means for granting a benefit to the player to the player when the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode. As a benefit to be given to the player by the privilege granting means, at least the first privilege and a second privilege less than the first privilege based on the lottery result of the first lottery or the second lottery. When either one of the first identification information and the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode, the other determination information is dynamically determined. If displayed, the dynamic display is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode different from the specific stop display mode, and the first state is set when the long state is set by the setting unit. A gaming machine D1 having a setting means for facilitating the determination of the second benefit by the benefit determination means in a lottery.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the first lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first entrance. The second lottery, which is more advantageous to the player than the first lottery, is executed by the lottery means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entrance. The first identification information indicating the lottery result of the first lottery is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. The second identification information indicating the lottery result of the second lottery is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. The dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information executed by the dynamic display means is determined by the dynamic display period determination means. A long state in which a dynamic display period longer than the dynamic display period of the first identification information is likely to be determined as the dynamic display period of the second identification information by the dynamic display period determining means, and a dynamic state shorter than the long state. A short state in which the display period is easily determined is set by the setting means. When the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given to the player by the privilege giving means. Based on the lottery result of the first lottery or the second lottery, at least the first benefit and the second benefit that is less privileged than the first benefit are given as the benefits given to the player by the privilege giving means. Either is determined by the privilege determination means. When either the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, if the other identification information is dynamically displayed, the dynamic display is changed to a specific stop display mode. A stop display mode different from that is displayed by the stop display means. When the long state is set by the setting means, the second benefit is easily set by the setting means by the benefit determining means in the first lottery. As a result, the player can be expected to execute the second privilege with few privileges. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.

  The gaming machine D1 has a game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of game states based on a predetermined condition, and the setting means has a specific game state set by the game state setting means. The game machine D2 is characterized by facilitating the determination of the second privilege by the privilege determination means in the first lottery on the condition.

  According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the following effect is achieved. That is, one game state from a plurality of game states is set by the game state setting means based on a predetermined condition. On condition that a specific game state is set by the game state setting means, the second determination is facilitated by the setting means for the bonus determination means in the first lottery. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be more expected to determine the second benefit when the specific game state is set.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, when the privilege is granted by the privilege granting unit, a setting unit that sets an advantageous state in which the privilege is easily granted by the privilege granting unit, and the advantageous state is set by the setting unit. Based on that, the gaming machine D3 further comprises control means for facilitating the setting of the advantageous state by the setting means even when the privilege is given next.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, when the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means, the setting means sets an advantageous state in which the privilege is easily granted by the privilege granting means. Based on the setting of the advantageous state by the setting means, the advantageous state is easily set by the setting means even when the privilege is given next by the control means. There is an effect that it can be easily set and the interest of the game can be further improved.

<Characteristic E group> (low priority probability change rate set)
A first variable ball entering means which is variable between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the open state, and a downstream side of the first variable ball entering means. A second variable ball entering means arranged in the second variable ball entering means, a specific area in which the game ball entering the second variable ball entering means can enter, and a game ball passing through the specific area Based on the establishment of a specific condition, a privilege granting means that grants an advantageous benefit to the player, and the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means as a bonus game that is advantageous to the player, based on a predetermined variable pattern. The variable pattern that is changed by the variable control means, and the determining means that determines the variable pattern that is changed by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns. When the 1 variable ball entering means is in the closed state, the game ball that has not entered the first variable ball entering means can enter the specific area, and the specific pattern rather than the advantageous pattern A gaming machine E1 characterized in that at least a disadvantage pattern that makes it difficult to enter the area is set.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result of the game is a win, There are those in which a privilege game that is advantageous is executed. In such a configuration, as a privilege game, a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling opening and closing of two entrances has been proposed. (For example, JP-A-2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, only the control for switching the entrance opening that is opened as a privilege game is performed, and further interest in the game has been demanded. Further, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine with an improved interest in gaming.

  According to the gaming machine E1, the privilege given to the player can be changed by the variable pattern of the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means, so that the player can be interested in the variable pattern. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E1, a launching means capable of launching a game ball based on an operation by a player, a first ball entering means into which the game ball emitted from the launching means can enter, and a first ball entering means thereof. A second ball entering means different from the above, a ball entering assisting means for allowing a game ball to enter the second ball entering means more easily than the first ball entering means, and the first ball entering means A first discriminating means for executing a first discrimination based on the fact that a game ball has entered, and a second discriminating means for executing a second discrimination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second entering means. And the first identification information indicating the first determination result of the first determination by the first determination means and the second identification information indicating the second determination result of the second determination by the second determination means are simultaneously dynamic. When the display means capable of being displayed and the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result or the second identification information indicating the specific second determination result are displayed, the privilege game is displayed. A privilege game execution means for executing the game, a first state set to allow a game ball to enter the second ball entering means and play a game, and a game ball to the second ball entering means. A game state setting means for setting one of a second state which is set so as not to allow a ball to play a game, a case where the first state is set by the game state setting means, and a second state And a ratio varying means for varying the proportion of the advantageous pattern set by the determining means when the specific second determination result is obtained. A gaming machine E2.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1, an advantageous pattern is set depending on whether the gaming state setting means sets the first state or the second state. Since the ratio is changed by the ratio changing means, if the second state is set, for example, if the ratio of the advantageous pattern is set low, the second entering means is allowed to enter the game in the second state. There is an effect that the damage can be reduced even if a fraudulent operation is performed.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the ratio varying means sets the ratio of the second probability to be lower in the second state than in the first state.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, there is an effect that damage can be reduced even when a fraud in the second state is performed.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, a first flow path through which a game ball can enter the first ball entering means more easily than the second ball entering means, and the first flow path more than the first ball entering means. A game machine E4, characterized in that it has a second flow path through which a game ball can easily enter the second ball entering means.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the flow rate of the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means is variable, so that the game ball flows down. There is an effect that the game can be changed depending on the flow path to be performed and the interest of the player can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, between the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means, the game ball that has not entered the first variable ball entering means is the second game ball. Guidance means for guiding the variable ball entrance means over a predetermined period of time is arranged, and the disadvantageous pattern is a period shorter than the predetermined time period after the first variable ball entrance means is changed to the closed state. A gaming machine E5, wherein the second variable ball entering means is changed to the open state and then to the closed state.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5, it is possible to perform the control with easy control so that it becomes difficult to enter the second variable ball entering means in the disadvantageous pattern. The effect is that the control load can be reduced.

<Characteristic F group> (Advantageous and unfavorable symbols are changed in the opening period)
First variable means that is variable between an open state in which the game ball can pass and a closed state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to pass than the open state, and the first variable means is arranged downstream of the first variable means, and the first variable means is provided. The second variable ball entering means that can enter the game ball that has passed through the 1 variable means, the specific area where the game ball that entered the second variable ball entering means can enter, and the specific area Based on the passing, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player, and a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a specific condition, as the first variable means and the second variable ball entry. And a determining unit that determines the variable pattern that is changed by the variable control unit from a plurality of different variable patterns, and is determined by the determining unit. In the variable pattern, when the first variable means is in the open state, an advantageous pattern in which the game ball entered in the first ball entering means can enter the specific area, and the advantageous pattern is more advantageous than the advantageous pattern. A gaming machine F1 characterized in that at least a disadvantage pattern that makes it difficult to enter a specific area is set.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result of the game is a win, There are those in which a privilege game that is advantageous is executed. In such a configuration, a gaming machine that offers a plurality of types of privilege games by opening and closing two entrances has been proposed as a privilege game. (For example, JP-A-2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, only the control for switching the entrance opening that is opened as a bonus game is performed, and further interest in the game has been demanded. Further, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine with an improved interest in gaming.

  According to the gaming machine F1, since the privilege given to the player can be changed by the variable pattern of the first variable means and the second variable ball entering means, the player can be interested in the variable pattern. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine F1, a launching means capable of launching a game ball based on a player's operation, a first ball entering means into which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter, and a first ball entering means thereof. Are different from the second ball entering means, and the first ball is inserted into the first ball entering means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entering means, and the game ball enters the second ball entering means. Second discriminating means for executing the second discriminating based on the sphere, first discriminating information indicating the first discriminating result of the first discriminating by the first discriminating means, and second for the second discriminating means. Display means capable of dynamically displaying simultaneously the second identification information indicating the second determination result of the determination, and the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result. When the second identification information indicating the second identification information is displayed on the display means, a privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game, and a privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means, A gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from a plurality of different gaming states based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a ratio of setting the advantageous pattern corresponding to the gaming state set by the gaming state setting means And a ratio setting means for variably setting a ratio at which the disadvantage pattern is set, a gaming machine F2.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, the ratio at which the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern are set corresponding to the gaming state set by the gaming state setting means is variable, so that depending on the gaming state. There is an effect that the interest degree of the player can be improved by changing the degree of expectation of the privilege given to the player.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the first probability and the first probability as the probability of being discriminated as the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result by the first determining means or the second determining means. The probability setting means for setting at least a high second probability and the privilege given by the privilege giving means are such that at least the second probability is set by the probability setting means. Playing machine F3.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the second probability is set by passing through the specific area, so that the game ball is in the specific area even while the privilege game is being executed. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the trouble of getting tired of the game by making the player interested in whether or not the game can be passed.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the advantageous pattern and the disadvantage pattern are set so that at least the period from the start of the privilege game to the opening of the first variable means is different. A gaming machine F4 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the start of the privilege game is discriminated by the player at the timing when the first variable means is opened, so that there is an advantageous pattern and a disadvantageous pattern. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify, and it is possible to expect the player to enter a specific area even with a disadvantageous pattern.

  In the gaming machine F4, there is a guiding means for guiding the game ball that has passed through the first variable means to the second variable ball entering means for a predetermined period or more, and the disadvantage pattern is that the first variable ball entering means has the A gaming machine F5, wherein at least the second variable ball entering means is set so as to be changed from the open state to the closed state within the predetermined period after the open state.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F4, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably suppress the game ball from passing through the specific area in a disadvantageous pattern.

<Feature G group> (Advantageous and unfavorable symbols can be changed in the interval period)
A first variable ball entering means which is variable between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the open state, and a downstream side of the first variable ball entering means. A second variable ball entering means arranged in the second variable ball entering means, a specific area in which the game ball entering the second variable ball entering means can enter, and a game ball passing through the specific area Based on the establishment of a specific condition, a privilege granting means that grants an advantageous benefit to the player, and the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means as a bonus game that is advantageous to the player, based on a predetermined variable pattern. The variable pattern that is changed by the variable control means, and the determining means that determines the variable pattern that is changed by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns. When the 1 variable ball entering means is in the closed state, the game ball that has not entered the first variable ball entering means can enter the specific area, and the specific pattern rather than the advantageous pattern A gaming machine G1 characterized in that at least a disadvantage pattern that makes it difficult to enter the area is set.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result of the game is a win, There are those in which a privilege game that is advantageous is executed. In such a configuration, as a privilege game, a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling opening and closing of two entrances has been proposed. (For example, JP-A-2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, only the control for switching the entrance opening that is opened as a privilege game is performed, and further interest in the game has been demanded. Further, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine with an improved interest in gaming.

  According to the gaming machine G1, the privilege given to the player can be changed by the variable pattern of the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means, so that the player can be interested in the variable pattern. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G1, the advantageous pattern and the unfavorable pattern are at least a period from when the first variable ball entering means is changed to the closed state until when the second variable ball entering means is changed to the open state. A gaming machine G2 characterized by being set differently.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1, there is an effect that an advantageous pattern and a disadvantageous pattern can be set by easy control.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, between the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means, a game ball that has not entered the first variable ball entering means is the second variable ball entering. Guide means for guiding to the means over a predetermined period of time is arranged, and the disadvantageous pattern is the second variable within a period shorter than the predetermined period after the first variable ball entering means is changed to the closed state. A gaming machine G3, characterized in that the ball entering means is changed to the open state and then changed to the closed state.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably make it difficult for the gaming ball to pass through the specific area in a disadvantageous pattern.

  In any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, a launching means capable of launching a game ball based on a player's operation, a first ball entering means into which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter, and its first A second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, a first judging means for executing a first judgment based on a game ball entering the first ball entering means, and a second ball entering means. Second discrimination means for executing a second discrimination based on a game ball entering the first discrimination information, first discrimination information indicating a first discrimination result of the first discrimination by the first discrimination means, and the second discrimination. Display means capable of simultaneously dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the second determination result of the second determination by the means, and the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result or the specific identification information. When the second identification information indicating the second determination result is displayed on the display means, a privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game, and a case where the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means , A gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from a plurality of different gaming states, and varying the ratio of the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern in correspondence with the gaming state set by the gaming state setting means A gaming machine G4 having a ratio variable setting means for setting.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the ratio between the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern is variably set in correspondence with the gaming state, so that the gaming state is set. As a result, there is an effect that the degree of expectation that the game ball enters the specific area can be varied and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machines G1 to G4, the first probability and the first probability higher than the first probability that the first determination means or the second determination means determines the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result. There is a probability setting means capable of setting either one of the two probabilities, and the privilege given by the privilege giving means is such that at least the second probability is set by the probability setting means. A gaming machine G5 characterized by the above.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the second probability is set by passing through the specific area, so that the specific area is executed while the privilege game is being executed. By making the player interested in whether or not the game ball can be passed, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem of getting tired of the game.

<Characteristic H group> (New zero attacker)
Based on the condition determining means for determining the satisfaction of the specific condition and the satisfaction of the specific condition determined by the condition determining means, the open state in which the game ball can enter from the closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter To the first variable ball entering means, the second variable ball entering means arranged in parallel with the first variable ball entering means, the first variable ball entering means or the second variable ball entering means Based on the fact that the ball has entered, the privilege giving means for giving a beneficial advantage to the player, and based on the determination of the satisfaction of the specific condition, the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means. A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game in which the ball entering means is varied in a predetermined order until the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first variable ball entering means, and the second variable ball entering means. Between the and, when the first variable ball entering means is in the closed state, there is a guiding means for setting the period until the game ball reaches the second variable ball entering means to a predetermined period or more. A gaming machine H1 characterized in that.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result of the game is a win, There are those in which a privilege game that is advantageous is executed. In such a configuration, as a privilege game, a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling opening and closing of two entrances has been proposed. (For example, JP-A-2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, only the control for switching the entrance opening that is opened as a privilege game is performed, and the downflow path of the gaming ball is not formed by using the two variable winning devices, and the further game is played. There was a need to improve the interests of. Further, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine with an improved interest in gaming.

  According to the gaming machine H1, even when the first variable ball entrance means is in the closed state, the period until reaching the second variable ball entrance means by the guide means is set to a predetermined period or more, so the second variable There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the game sphere flows down without entering the second variable ball entering means by the time the ball entering means is opened, and the interest of the game is reduced.

  In the gaming machine H1, the effect execution means, when the first variable ball entering means or the second variable ball entering means is in the open state, the open effect indicating the open state, and the first variable There is a performance executing means for executing at least a closing effect that indicates a closed state when the ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means are in a closed state, and the closing effect is within the predetermined period. A gaming machine H2 characterized by being executed by

  According to the gaming machine H2, in the closing effect, it is possible to notify that it is in the closed state by using a predetermined period, so that there is an effect that it is possible to perform an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, when the privilege game execution means executes one of the privilege games, the order in which the first variable ball entrance means and the second variable ball entrance means are respectively changed to the open state. And a release pattern determining means for determining the set release pattern from a plurality of release patterns.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H1 or H2, since it is determined by a plurality of opening patterns, the opening pattern can be randomized, and there is an effect that the game can be diversified.

  In the gaming machine H3, the opening pattern determined by the opening pattern determining means is preset with a timing for changing the first variable ball entering means or the second variable ball entering means from the closed state to the open state. A gaming machine H4 characterized in that the gaming machine H4.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H3, the timing for changing from the closed state to the open state is set in advance in the open pattern. There is an effect that the number of game balls entering the ball means can be stabilized and the profit given to the player can be set based on the design value.

<Characteristic I group> (Loop twice for only a predetermined period after the big hit)
A state setting means capable of setting at least a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state, and an advantageous privilege is given to the player based on establishment of a predetermined condition. In a gaming machine having a privilege game executing means for executing at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game, the state setting means sets the first advantageous state. When the first privilege game is executed in a state where the first privilege game is executed, the first advantageous state is set even after the first privilege game is executed, and when the second privilege game is executed, The second benefit state is set after the execution of the second benefit game, and the first benefit is executed when the first benefit game is executed in the state where the second benefit state is set. After the game is executed, the first advantageous state is set, and after the first advantageous state is set, the specific condition is satisfied without executing the first privilege game or the second privilege game by the privilege game executing means. A gaming machine I1 for setting the second advantageous state when established.

  Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, a jackpot lottery for special symbols is performed, and based on the result of the lottery, the probability of being a jackpot. There is one that gives a high-probability game with a high probability. In such a configuration, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a high-probability game is continued until the jackpot is won twice (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 10-57583). In such a gaming machine, once the high-probability game is started, it is promised to win the jackpot twice while continuing the high-probability game. Therefore, after the high-probability game is started, the player is However, there was a problem of getting tired of playing games. The gaming machine I1 has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can alleviate the player's tiredness.

  According to the gaming machine I1, at least the first advantageous state advantageous to the player and the second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state are set by the state setting means. Based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the privilege game executing means at least executes the first privilege game that gives the player an advantageous privilege and the second privilege game different from the first privilege game. When the first privilege game is executed in the state where the first advantageous state is set, the first advantageous state is set by the state setting means even after the first privilege game is executed, and the second bonus game is executed. When the game is executed, the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means after the execution of the second privilege game. When the first privilege game is executed while the second advantageous state is set, the state setting means sets the first advantageous state after the execution of the first privilege game. After the first advantageous state is set, if the specific condition is satisfied without executing the first privilege game or the second privilege game by the privilege game executing means, the first advantageous state is changed to the second advantageous state. Set. As a result, if the first privilege game is executed before the specific condition is satisfied in the first advantageous state, the second advantageous state is set thereafter, so that the state advantageous to the player is continuously set. be able to. Therefore, the advantageous state can be continued until a plurality of privilege games are executed, and there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine I1, the privilege game executing means is capable of executing a third privilege game different from the first privilege game and the second privilege game, and the state setting means sets the first advantageous state to the first advantageous state. It is possible to set a specific state that is more disadvantageous to the player than any one of the second advantageous states, and when the third privilege game is executed in the state where the second advantageous state is set. The gaming machine I2, which sets the specific state after the execution of the third privilege game.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the third privilege game different from the first privilege game and the second privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means. A specific state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means. When the third privilege game is executed in the state where the second advantageous state is set, the specific state is set by the state setting means after the execution of the third privilege game. As a result, in the second advantageous state, the specific game state that is disadvantageous to the player when the third game state is executed is set, so that the continuous state of the advantageous state can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the gambling performance of the game becomes too high.

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the gaming machine I1 or I2 has a discriminating means for performing discrimination based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, and the predetermined condition is satisfied when the discriminating result by the discriminating means is a specific discriminating result. A gaming machine I3 characterized by being present.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I1 or I2, the determination is performed by the determination means based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, and the determination result by the determination means is a predetermined determination result. Since the condition of is satisfied, the player can play the game while being interested in the discrimination result by the discriminating means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine I4 according to any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, wherein the specific condition is met when the determination condition is met a predetermined number of times.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I4, the specific condition is satisfied when the determination condition is satisfied a predetermined number of times. A game is played while expecting that a predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In either the gaming machine I3 or I4, probability setting means for setting at least one of a first probability of being judged as the specific judgment result by the judging means and a second probability of being higher than the first probability. And the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state are those in which the second probability is set by the probability setting means.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I3 or I4, the following effects are produced. That is, the probability setting means sets at least one of the first probability that the determination means determines the specific determination result and the second probability that is higher than the first probability. The second probability is set by the probability setting means in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state. Thereby, in both the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, it is possible to increase the possibility that the determination result by the determination means will be the specific determination result in a short period of time. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic J group> (Structure for distributing prizes to attackers)
Based on the condition determining means for determining the satisfaction of the specific condition and the satisfaction of the specific condition determined by the condition determining means, the open state in which the game ball can enter from the closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter To the first variable ball entering means, the second variable ball entering means arranged downstream of the first variable ball entering means, and the first variable ball entering means or the second variable ball entering means. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered, the privilege giving means for giving an advantageous privilege to the player, and based on the determination that the specific condition is established, the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means. A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game in which the variable ball entering means is made variable in a predetermined order until a predetermined condition is satisfied, the first variable ball entering means, and the first variable ball entering. First distribution means for distributing at least game balls to the downstream side of the ball means, and game balls distributed to the downstream side of the first variable ball insertion means by the first distribution means, with the second variable ball input means, A gaming machine J1 characterized by having at least a second distributing means for distributing to a downstream side of the second variable ball entering means.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, a special symbol jackpot lottery is conducted, and if the result of the lottery is a jackpot, the game is played. There is one that provides a big hit game in which a game ball is inserted into a special winning opening provided on a board surface. In such a configuration, a game machine in which two big winning holes are provided on the game board surface has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, there is a problem that the game balls that have not entered one of the special winning openings do not enter the other special winning openings, and the flow of the game balls on the game board surface is poor. .. The gaming machine J1 is made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing a ball flow of a gaming ball that makes a player expect.

  According to the gaming machine J1, the condition determining means determines whether the specific condition is satisfied, and based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied, the game ball can be opened from the closed state where it is difficult to enter. The first variable ball entering means is changed to the state. The second variable ball entrance means is arranged downstream of the first variable ball entrance means. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first variable ball entrance means or the second variable ball entrance means, the privilege granting means grants an advantageous privilege to the player. Based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied, the privilege game executing means opens the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means in a predetermined order until the predetermined conditions are satisfied. Execute variable privilege games. The first distribution means distributes at least the game balls to the first variable ball entering means and the downstream side of the first variable ball entering means, and the game balls distributed to the downstream side of the first variable ball entering means to the second side. The distribution means distributes at least the second variable ball entering means and the downstream side of the second variable ball entering means. As a result, it is possible to allow the game balls distributed to the downstream side of the first variable ball entering means to enter the second variable ball entering means. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing a ball flow of a gaming ball that makes a player expect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine J1, the first sorting means and the second sorting means are rotatable portions which are rotatable in a first direction and a second direction opposite to the first direction, and a rotating portion thereof. A gaming machine J2, characterized in that it has at least a restricting means for restricting the turning range of the device at a predetermined angle.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J1, the first sorting means and the second sorting means are arranged in the first direction and the second direction opposite to the first direction by the rotating portion. Since it is rotatable and the regulation means regulates the rotation range of the rotation portion at a predetermined angle, it is possible to execute an appropriate distribution operation, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. ..

  In the gaming machine J2, the first sorting means and the second sorting means are configured to be alternately rotated in the first direction and the second direction by a flowing down game ball. Game machine J3.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J2, the first distributing means and the second distributing means are configured so that the gaming ball flowing down alternately rotates in the first direction and the second direction. Therefore, it is possible to execute a more appropriate distribution operation.

  In the gaming machine J1 or J2, when the first variable ball entering means is in the closed state, a guide means for guiding the game ball to the second variable ball entering means, and the game ball by the guide means When the second variable ball entering means is guided to the second variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means is in a closed state, it has a guide path for guiding the guided game ball to the second distributing means. A gaming machine J4 characterized by being a thing.

  The gaming machine J4 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1 or the gaming machine J2. That is, when the first variable ball entering means is closed, the guiding means guides the game ball to the second variable ball entering means. When the game ball is guided to the second variable ball entering means by the guiding means and the second variable ball entering means is in the closed state, the guided game ball is guided to the second distributing means. And a taxiway. As a result, the rotation state of the second distribution means can be changed. Therefore, there is an effect that the distribution of the game balls by the distribution member can be complicated, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic K group> (Regarding the probability change rate of one symbol at normal times by a variation method other than simultaneous variation)
A first variable ball entering means which is variable between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the open state, and a downstream side of the first variable ball entering means. A second variable ball entering means arranged in the second variable ball entering means, a specific area in which the game ball entering the second variable ball entering means can enter, and a game ball passing through the specific area Based on the establishment of a specific condition, a privilege granting means that grants an advantageous benefit to the player, and the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means as a bonus game that is advantageous to the player, based on a predetermined variable pattern. The variable pattern that is changed by the variable control means, and the determining means that determines the variable pattern that is changed by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns. When the 1 variable ball entering means is in the closed state, the game ball that has not entered the first variable ball entering means can enter the specific area, and the specific pattern rather than the advantageous pattern A gaming machine K1 characterized in that at least a disadvantageous pattern that makes it difficult to enter the area is set.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result of the game is a win, There are those in which a privilege game that is advantageous is executed. In such a configuration, as a privilege game, a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling opening and closing of two entrances has been proposed. (For example, JP-A-2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, only the control for switching the entrance opening that is opened as a privilege game is performed, and further interest in the game has been demanded. Further, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine with an improved interest in gaming.

  According to the gaming machine K1, the privilege given to the player can be changed by the variable pattern of the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means, so that the player can be interested in the variable pattern. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine K1, based on the operation of the player, a launching means capable of launching a game ball, a first ball entering means into which the game ball emitted from the launching ball can enter, and a first ball entering means thereof. A second ball entering means different from the above, a ball entering assisting means that allows a game ball to enter the second ball entering means more easily than the first ball entering means, and the first ball entering means A first discriminating means for executing a first discrimination based on the fact that a game ball has entered, and a second discriminating means for executing a second discrimination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second entering means. And the first identification information indicating the first determination result of the first determination by the first determination means and the second identification information indicating the second determination result of the second determination by the second determination means, respectively. And a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying one of the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means based on a predetermined priority order. When the first identification information indicating the determination result or the second identification information indicating the specific second determination result is displayed, the privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game and the second ball entering means are provided. The first state is set to allow the game ball to enter and play the game, and the first state is set not to allow the game ball to enter the second ball entering means to play the game. According to the game state setting means for setting one of the two states, and the case where the first state is set and the second state is set by the game state setting means, the specific second determination A gaming machine K2, characterized in that it has ratio changing means for changing the ratio of the advantageous pattern set by the determining means when the result is obtained.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K1, an advantageous pattern is set depending on whether the gaming state setting means sets the first state or the second state. Since the ratio is changed by the ratio changing means, if the second state is set, for example, if the ratio of the advantageous pattern is set low, the second entering means is allowed to enter the game in the second state. There is an effect that the damage can be reduced even if a fraudulent operation is performed.

  In the gaming machine K1 or K2, the ratio varying means sets the ratio of the second probability to be lower in the second state than in the first state.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1 or K2, there is an effect that damage can be reduced even when an illegal act is performed in the second state.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, a first flow path through which a game ball can enter the first ball entering means more easily than the second ball entering means, and the first ball entering means rather than the first ball entering means. A game machine K4, characterized in that it has a second flow path through which a game ball can easily enter the second ball entering means.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the flow rate of the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means is variable, so that the game ball flows down. There is an effect that the game can be changed depending on the flow path to be performed and the interest of the player can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K4, between the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means, the game ball that has not entered the first variable ball entering means is the second game ball. Guidance means for guiding the variable ball entrance means over a predetermined period of time is arranged, and the disadvantageous pattern is a period shorter than the predetermined time period after the first variable ball entrance means is changed to the closed state. A game machine K5, wherein the second variable ball entering means is changed to the open state and then to the closed state.

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K5, it is possible to perform the control with easy control so that it becomes difficult to enter the second variable ball entering means in the disadvantageous pattern. The effect is that the control load can be reduced.

<Characteristic L group> (Opening with a configuration other than simultaneous fluctuation, and changing the probability change rate with intervals)
A first variable ball entering means which is variable between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the open state, and a downstream side of the first variable ball entering means. A second variable ball entering means arranged in the second variable ball entering means, a specific area in which the game ball entering the second variable ball entering means can enter, and a game ball passing through the specific area Based on the establishment of a specific condition, a privilege granting means that grants an advantageous benefit to the player, and the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means as a bonus game that is advantageous to the player, based on a predetermined variable pattern. The variable pattern that is changed by the variable control means, and the determining means that determines the variable pattern that is changed by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns. When the 1 variable ball entering means is in the closed state, the game ball that has not entered the first variable ball entering means can enter the specific area, and the specific pattern rather than the advantageous pattern A gaming machine L1 characterized in that at least a disadvantageous pattern that makes it difficult to enter the area is set.

  Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result of the game is a win, There are those in which a privilege game that is advantageous is executed. In such a configuration, as a privilege game, a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling opening and closing of two entrances has been proposed. (For example, JP-A-2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, only the control for switching the entrance opening that is opened as a privilege game is performed, and further interest in the game has been demanded. Further, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine with an improved interest in gaming.

  According to the gaming machine L1, the privilege provided to the player can be changed by the variable pattern of the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means, so that the player can be interested in the variable pattern. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine L1, a launching means capable of launching a game ball based on a player's operation, a first ball entering means into which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter, and a first ball entering means thereof. Are different from the second ball entering means, and the first ball is inserted into the first ball entering means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entering means, and the game ball enters the second ball entering means. Second discriminating means for executing the second discriminating based on the sphere, first discriminating information indicating the first discriminating result of the first discriminating by the first discriminating means, and second for the second discriminating means. The display means capable of displaying the second identification information indicating the second determination result of the determination, and either one of the first identification information and the second identification information in a predetermined priority order. Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying on the display means based on the display means, and the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result or the second identification information indicating the specific second determination result on the display means. When displayed, a privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game, and a game state setting for setting one game state from a plurality of different game states when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means. Means and a ratio variable setting means for changing and setting the ratio of the advantageous pattern and the disadvantage pattern in correspondence with the game state set by the game state setting means. Gaming machine L2.

  According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L1, the ratio between the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern is variably set according to the gaming state. There is an effect that the degree of expectation for the ball to enter can be varied and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine L1 or L2, a first probability that the first determination means or the second determination means determines the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result, and a first probability higher than the first probability. There is a probability setting means capable of setting either one of the two probabilities, and the privilege given by the privilege giving means is such that at least the second probability is set by the probability setting means. A gaming machine L3 characterized by the above.

  According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L1 or L2, the second probability is set by passing through the specific area, so that the game ball is in the specific area even while the privilege game is being executed. By making the player interested in whether or not the game can be passed, it is possible to suppress the problem of getting tired of the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L3, the advantageous pattern and the disadvantage pattern cause the first variable ball entrance means to change to the closed state, and then change the second variable ball entrance means to the open state. The gaming machine L4 is characterized in that the periods up to are set to be different at least.

  According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines L1 to L3, the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern can be set by easy control.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L4, between the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means, the game ball that has not entered the first variable ball entering means is the second game ball. Guidance means for guiding the variable ball entrance means over a predetermined period of time is arranged, and the disadvantageous pattern is a period shorter than the predetermined time period after the first variable ball entrance means is changed to the closed state. A gaming machine L5, wherein the second variable ball entering means is changed to the open state and then to the closed state.

  According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines L1 to L4, it is possible to more reliably make it difficult for the gaming ball to pass through the specific area in a disadvantageous pattern.

  Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B10, C1 to C4, D1 to D3, E1 to E5, F1 to F5, G1 to G5, H1 to H4, I1 to I5, J1 to J4, K1 to K5, L1 to L5 In any one of the above, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, the gaming machine Z1. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is moved to an operating port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

  Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B10, C1 to C4, D1 to D3, E1 to E5, F1 to F5, G1 to G5, H1 to H4, I1 to I5, J1 to J4, K1 to K5, L1 to L5 In any one of the above, the gaming machine Z2 is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence including a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B10, C1 to C4, D1 to D3, E1 to E5, F1 to F5, G1 to G5, H1 to H4, I1 to I5, J1 to J4, K1 to K5, L1 to L5 In any one of the above, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operating lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Other>
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, a special symbol hit lottery is conducted, and if the result of the lottery is a big hit, the game is played. There is one in which a game is executed in which a game ball is inserted into a special winning opening provided on the board surface. In such a configuration, a game machine in which two big winning holes are provided on the game board surface has been proposed (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-265765).
However, with the above-mentioned gaming machines, there has been a demand for further improvement in the enjoyment of the game.
An object of the present technical idea is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is further improved in the gaming machine described above.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is a game ball based on the condition determining means for determining the satisfaction of the specific condition and the satisfaction of the specific condition by the condition determining means. First variable ball entering means for changing from a closed state in which it is difficult to enter a ball to an open state in which a game ball can enter, and a second variable ball entering means arranged downstream of the first variable ball entering means, Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first variable ball entrance means or the second variable ball entrance means, it is determined whether or not the privilege granting means for granting an advantageous privilege to the player and the establishment of the specific condition. Based on this, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game in which the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means are varied in a predetermined order until the predetermined condition is satisfied in the open state, respectively. And, the first variable ball entering means, the first distribution means for distributing at least game balls to the downstream side of the first variable ball entering means, and the downstream side of the first variable ball entering means by the first distributing means. The game balls are distributed to at least the second variable ball entering means and a second distributing means for distributing at least the downstream side of the second variable ball entering means.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, wherein the first distribution means and the second distribution means are a first direction and a second direction opposite to the first direction. And at least a restricting unit that restricts a rotating range of the rotating unit at a predetermined angle.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, wherein the first distributing means and the second distributing means alternate in the first direction and the second direction by a flowing down game ball. It is configured to be rotated to.
The game machine according to the technical idea 4 is the game machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the game ball is guided to the second variable ball entering means when the first variable ball entering means is in a closed state. When the game ball is guided to the second variable ball entering means by the guiding means to do, and the second variable ball entering means is in the closed state, the guided game ball is the second ball. It is characterized by having a guide way for guiding to the distribution means.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, it is difficult to enter the game ball based on the condition determining means for determining the satisfaction of the specific condition and the satisfaction of the specific condition by the condition determining means. A first variable ball entering means that is variable from a closed state to an open state in which a game ball can enter, a second variable ball entering means arranged downstream of the first variable ball entering means, and the first variable Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entering means or the second variable ball entering means, the privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player, and the establishment of the specific condition are determined. A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game in which the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means are respectively changed in a predetermined order to the open state until a predetermined condition is satisfied; No. 1 variable entrance means, first distribution means for allocating at least game balls to the downstream side of the first variable entrance means, and the first allocation means distributes to the downstream side of the first variable entrance means. The game ball has a second variable ball entering means and a second distributing means for at least distributing the game ball to the downstream side of the second variable ball entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effect is achieved. That is, the privilege game executing means is capable of executing a third privilege game different from the first privilege game and the second privilege game, and the state setting means causes the first advantageous state and the second advantage game to be executed. It is possible to set a specific state that is more disadvantageous to the player than any of the advantageous states, and when the third privilege game is executed in the state where the second advantageous state is set, the specific state 3 The specific state is set after the execution of the privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first distribution means and the second distribution means are configured to be alternately rotated in the first direction and the second direction by the flowing down game ball. Therefore, there is an effect that a more appropriate distribution operation can be executed.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first variable ball entering means is in the closed state, the guiding means for guiding the game ball to the second variable ball entering means and the game ball by the guiding means are the second variable ball entering means. When the second variable ball entering means is in the closed state when being guided to, it has a guide path for guiding the guided game ball to the second distributing means. Characterize. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines )
65 First variable winning device (second variable ball means)
72- ball guide route (an example of guide means)
650 Second variable winning device (first variable ball means )
S1604 privilege game execution means

Claims (4)

Condition determining means for determining the satisfaction of a specific condition,
First variable ball entering means for changing from a closed state where the game ball is difficult to enter to an open state where the game ball can enter based on the condition determining means determining that the specific condition is satisfied,
Second variable ball entering means arranged on the downstream side of the first variable ball entering means,
Privilege granting means for granting an advantageous privilege to the player based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first variable ball entering means or the second variable ball entering means,
Based on the determination of the satisfaction of the specific condition, the first variable ball entrance means and the second variable ball entrance means are respectively changed in a predetermined order to the open state until a predetermined condition is satisfied. A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game,
At least a game ball is distributed to the first variable ball entrance means and a downstream side of the first variable ball entrance means,
The game ball distributed to the downstream side of the first variable ball entering means by the first distributing means is the second variable ball entering means,
A gaming machine having at least a second distributing means for distributing to a downstream side of the second variable ball entering means. The first allocating means and the second allocating means are rotatable parts that are rotatable in a first direction and a second direction opposite to the first direction,
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising at least a restricting unit that restricts a rotating range of the rotating unit at a predetermined angle.   The first distribution means and the second distribution means are configured to be alternately rotated in the first direction and the second direction by a flowing down game ball. The game machine described. When the first variable ball entering means is in a closed state, guide means for guiding the game ball to the second variable ball entering means,
When the game ball is guided to the second variable ball entering means by the guiding means and the second variable ball entering means is in the closed state, the guided game ball is guided to the second distributing means. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the gaming machine has a guide path.

Images